We might now try the experiment of treating this material as if it were a manifest dream, consisting of a childlike, innocent, and highly educational liaison under the name of analysis. The underlying wishes that have emerged contain erotic fantasies about the parents, combined usually with violent impulses to destroy them both. Behind the befittingly-behaved and rational person may be the image of a lustful, destroying angel, who would kill without mercy in a kind of oedipal rage. To allow these wishes to achieve any kind of expression, they must be made more acceptable for the patient by allowing her to assume such desires without a penalty whose weakness is such that she need not fear of destroying the beloved parents. Or they may be expressed more openly by an ironic stance, which allows them to be proclaimed, and to be disowned.
These memory traces may again be compared to how they are dealt within the dream work. The patient may recall; being a great favourite of many older people and always having a teacher’s pet at school, always loved: These generally seem accurate. They often recall at least one and perhaps more screen memories that include some early sexual experience’s h a parent, fantasies that may have been related to horseplay with siblings and even to a greater extent to medical procedures later in childhood. Most of the childhood memories reported in the analysis are generally quite plausible and subject to relatively little obvious distortion, except the inevitable effects of the passage of time. There is little of the bizarre and strange about them, reflecting both the powerful reality sense of these patients and the highly organized structure of their intelligent and well-disciplined families.
Whatever is observed in the analytic environment, the patient uses as a day residue, as material to carry fantasies. Yet the whole is likely to be so sensible, so rationalized, so free of manifest erotic or violent elements, that we must assume that a powerful synthesized ego function is at work, like a very effective secondary revision of an otherwise bizarre and disturbing dream, with few breakthroughs of incongruous ideation and affect.
This process, again by analogy, 'protects sleep.' That is, it helps the ego to maintain a comfortable regressive state of affairs in analysis, in which the patient is apparently a sensible, conscious, and sophisticated adult and an erotically excited, vengeful child. To ‘awaken’ her, that is, to interpret, would be to lead her to recognize her unconscious wishes for what they are, to help her deal with her repressive and ironic defences that have allowed the neurosis to continue and the analysis to go on without much real impact on the most important problem. To continue in a sleep-like state, on the other hand, permits her to act both roles and to continue to play out the surprising contradictions in her personality.
If we suppose that interpretation ‘removes’ the transference, as Freud suggested in 1912, we should be hesitant to bring it to consciousness before it has produced a resistance - assuming we are so prescient as to be able to detect the moment at which that latter event occurs. Still, we are not sure any more that transference is so easily ‘removed’ by interpretation. It seems certain that Freud no longer believed this when he wrote Analysis Terminable and Interminable.
How and when to interpret phenomena such as these make up a really reasonable dilemma. Kohut (1971), for example, approaching his patients with a theory that emphasizes a developmental view and puts’ aside conflictual considerations, would ‘accept’, possibly for a long period, even the most highly idealized expressions of admiration for himself. He warns against ‘premature interpretation’ of such positive expressions, especially in the cases he classifies as narcissistic character disorders.
Many years earlier, Phyllis Greenacre (1954), employing a different point of view, cautioned against early transference interpretations with narcissistic patients who are prone to acting out, since such interventions might result in at least temporary impairments of certain defensive controls and result in episodes of destructive behaviour. She made it clear that she was discussing a limited group of patients and her remarks were not confined to the ‘unobjectionable’ component. She was very much concerned with the development of a fix in a firm manner of over-idealizing attitudes toward the analyst and the problems engendered by these.
Without question interpreting the patient’s good-nature appears rarely advisable, cooperative attitude during the early part of analysis. Being inadvisable is not merely likely: It is worse than that, because during the first few weeks or months we could not possibly understand the unconscious components of this phenomenon. Early interpretations may remarkably be possible in a quickening notation that may prove sufficiently used for a vivid notable in characterizing its mark of notoriety, out of luck or intuition, but during the phase when we hardly know the patient venturing definite statements of meaning would be foolhardier.
We need not interpret early, therefore, and could not if we would. Nevertheless, there is a vast difference in accepting a phenomenon as reality-based, conflict-free, representing only itself, and, on the other hand, treating it more properly as a surface manifestation of a complex set of opposing forces, most of which operate outside conscious awareness, which require explanation eventually in analysis.
The questions we encounter are like those addressed to a particularly good manner of defending its dream, in that, taken on a superficially reasonable form. A good example would be Freud’s Dream of the Botanical Monograph. Repeating is brief enough: 'I had written a monograph ion a certain plant. The book lay before me and I was just over a folded coloured plate. Bound up in each copy there was a dried specimen of the plant, as though it had been taken from a herbarium' (1900). Jumping to the conclusion would have been easy, by no incorrect means, that the dream expressed the wish that the yet incomplete monograph intended to make his reputation was already published and on display. How reasonable and easy to understand. Freud was, fortunately, not so easily satisfied. He discovered, in his analysis of the dream. References to matters ranging from his experiments with cocaine back to infantile sexual investigations, to which he understandably only eluded.
Similarly, if the patient imagines that his analyst is a fine and helpful person, he is expressing a wish, which on the face of it is perfectly reasonable. He is, we hope, correct in his expectations. We are certainly not obliged to contradict him, any more than we contradict the statements of a manifest dream. However, we are obliged to ask ourselves questions, not only about the origins of this wish, which may make an impression on us both obvious and universal, but also about a complex of different wishes and defensive operations that may lie concealed beneath this understandable and benign phenomenon. To what extent is it seductive? To what degree masochistic and tricky? Is it possible that the patient harbours a deeply passive wish that says in effect, 'You are so great, my fate lies in your hand, do, your best and I shall yet defeat you?'
These probe need not be spoken aloud, but neither need they are entirely some secrets from the patient. The latter, when deeply engaged in the analytic process, are likely to be especially sensitive to nuances in the analyst’s state of mind, especially with respect to emotionally charged attitudes, a phenomenon commonly observed in children and present to a disconcerting degree in certain paranoid individuals. In the analysis of neurotic patients it varies with the state of regression encouraged by use of the couch and of free association.
Complex as it is, there is nothing necessarily mysterious about it. While the patient does not during the session itself see, the analyst’s facial expression, he is generally keenly aware of his minimal responses, his tone of voice, movements, and the like. Furthermore, he has the opportunity to pick up clues from the latter’s expression at the beginning and end of the session. That he may draw some quite inaccurate conclusions is to be expected, and these misinterpretations themselves become material for the analysis. Some patient sense quite quickly and often accurately, for example, whether the analyst responds to expressions of appreciation by a warm glow of satisfaction or by a questioning attitude, the latter signifying a willingness to wait until the phenomenon can be understood in depth.
Whether the analyst reacts by ‘acceptance’ or by questioning makes considerable difference in the future course of the treatment. What has often been taken for granted as an ‘empathic’ approach tends to reduce emphasis on the importance of questioning, treating the patient’s appreciation, for example, as if it were simply genuine, taking it at face value, justifying this by the need to establish the kind of transference situation that is believed essential for the progress of the treatment.
Such an approach has its own appeal: It seems humane, understanding, and protective, it is often regarded as a manifestation of a loving attitude by the analyst, which is perfectly appropriate - a counterpart, it would seem, of the unobjectionable component of the patient. Nevertheless, that we must raise questions whether its usefulness may not ultimately be outweighed by its cost.
The failure to maintain a questioning attitude, an active curiosity about the unconscious dynamics and meaning of this type of response, is likely to favour the persistence of troublesome misunderstanding as to the true nature of the transference. This may in turn lead to serious errors in attempts to place too great an emphasis on an introspective-empathic response at the expense of thoughtful questioning and evacuations of all types of detained by observation of the analytic situation. One of the risks of the former approach is that patient and analyst may find them existing in a state of mutual narcissistic regression, a kind of near-erotic mutual sleep. This can be a very gratifying experience for both: Its prototype was the sleep therapy employed by the Greeks at Epidaurus and Pergamum, which provided symptomatic relief. We need not decry it, if it is recognized.
Analysis, however, requires regular ‘arousal’ in Bertram Lewin’s sense, accomplished by the analyst’s activity, by questioning and interpretation, which may be explicit and verbalized or silent, expressed by a less intrusive means, e.g., by gesture, look and tone. Only in this way are we likely to achieve some understanding of the function and the origins of the ‘unobjectionable’ component and the other factors in the transference with which being joined is likely.
Establishing some hypotheses to account for the origins of this phenomenon of transference would seem important that at this point. This is not so easily accomplished, and must wait for further exploration. Up too now, our efforts have been partial at best, and for the most part has failed to take into account such factors as genetic endowment, at the one extreme, and late childhood, adolescent, and adult experiences at the other. Its genetic sources have been sought for largely in the experiences of early childhood, the neonatal and preverbial phases by choice, concentrating especially on mother-child exchanges. Denying the importance of early mothering in this regard would be rash, but being persuaded by those who would make it the one crucial determinant is difficult, as if good mothering were not only the earliest, but also the only essential genetic factor in the capacity to develop this aspect of transference.
It is too-simple if appealing explanation, and too dependent upon treating the manifest phenomenon as the whole article, as if the patient’s trust and cooperation were a direct reflection of the trust and cooperation he learned at his mother’s breast, and on the other hand, as if it reflected the need to replace a disappointing 'unemphatic' mother by a new and more reliable object - or, 'self-object,' to employ Kohut’s (1971) term.
Primordial explanations are understandably popular. Those historical events that are most deeply buried in the distant past are the most difficult to evaluate and thus the more apt for myth-making. Even the most meticulous hypotheses about the psychic developments of preverbial children require influences based on giant steps that become even larger when we attempt to extend them into explanations of behaviour and symptoms in adults. It is undeniable that very early experiences contribute significantly to the nature and severity of adult psychopathology, and the more we know about them the better. Still, to know them is not nearly enough. It is essential that we undertake the arduous task of tracing the effects of such experiences through later childhood, adolescence, and adult life, thus establishing the coherent chain of historical events that is indispensable for a soundly based sense of conviction. It is only by accomplishing this that we may be able to precent psychological explanations from deteriorating into a series of appealing fantasies, a kind of pseudo history based on presumed prehistoric events, which tends to operate as a defence against the discovery of something close to the genuine article.
Gill (1979) has described some of the difficulties in the tendency to interpret transference by a too-ready resorted to early genetic factors rather than by recognizing the immediate context of the analytic situation. We need to go all the way with him in his emphasis on the ‘here-and-now’ in the analysis of the transference, to recognize the relevance of its argument.
Here-and-now work with transference materials is an emotionally potent experience for both patient and therapist. Anxieties and misunderstandings in both patient and therapist may lead them to resist this focus. Transference can be a powerful therapeutic tool: being aware of impediments to effective intervention is important, Freud (1905) once commented that ‘transference, which seemed ordained to be the greatest obstacle to the psychoanalysis, becomes its most powerful ally, if its presence can be detected each time and explained to the patient’. Leading to conclude that ‘In psychoanalysis therapy, the phenomenon of projection of feelings, thoughts, and wishes onto the analyst, who has come to represent an object from the patient’s past’ also, that ‘the patient sees in the analyst the return - the reincarnation - of some important figure out of his childhood or past, and consequently transfers onto him feelings and reactions that undoubtedly applied to this model’. Analysis of transference in the here-and-now opens the way to new object relations through a step-by-step removal of implements to such relations as represented by the transference. As the patient can understand and work through distortions resulting from transference attitudes, he begins to see others starting with the therapist, in a new way. The goal of here-and-now is to establish more realistic object relations. First with the therapist, then with others: The therapist strives to help the patient develop more successful interaction within the therapy relationship than was experienced in the past. A focus on transference is intended to remove obstacles that interfere with the patient’s ability to deal with the therapist in a relatively mature, rational, and a non-conflictual manner. If transference is a preexisting perceptual and emotional bias, resolution of the transference helps the patient add flexibility and decrease constriction to the manner in which the therapeutic situation is viewed. Both the therapist and patient attempt to work out a relationship that is a realistic reflection of the present and without excess baggage from the past: The message to be conveyed is that relationships are not conflict-free, and that the therapist is willing to continue, with openness and purpose, toward resolution of conflict with others.
Yet, the analysis of the transference is generally acknowledged to be the central feature of analytic technique. Freud regarded transference and resistance as facts of observation, not as conceptual inventions. He wrote: ' . . . the theory of psychoanalysis is an attempt to account for two striking and unexpected facts of observation that emerge whenever an attempt is made to trace the symptoms of neurotic backs their sources in the past life, the facts of transference and of resistance . . . anyone who takes up other sides of the problem while avoiding these hypotheses will hardly escape a charge of misappropriation of property by attempted impersonation, if he persists in calling himself a psychotherapist.' Rapaport (1967) argued, in his posthumously published paper on the methodology of psychoanalysis, that transference and resistance inevitably follow from the fact that the analytic situation is interpersonal.
Despite this general agreement on the centrality of transference and resistance in technique, its impressions drawn from ones experience as to observe of the transference that is not to pursue as systematically and comprehensively compensable state of one how would imaginatively think of what really should be. The relative primacy in which psychoanalysts work makes it possible for one or one’s state to view as anything more than its own impression. On the assumptions that even if we were wrong, reviewing issues in the analysis of the transference will be useful and to state many reasons to posit of itself as an important aspect of the e analysis of the transference, namely, resistence to the awareness of the transference, is especially often slightly in analytic practice that one or one’s reasons to acknowledge these issues and of what really should be.
Seemingly, the first gaiting steps of which did not originate with a big-bang but forwarded forthright through a whimpering between two types of interpretations of the transference. The one is an interpretation of resistance to the awareness of transference. The other is an interpretation of resistances to the resolution of transference. The distinction, however, had been best explained in the literature by Greenson (1967) and Stone (1967). The first kind of resistance may be called defence transference. Although that terminology is mainly employed to refer to a phase of analysis characterized by a general resistance to the transference of wishes. The second whimpering overture of resistance is usually called transference resistance. With some oversimplification, one might say that in resistance to the awareness of transference, the transference is what is resisted, whereas in resistance to the resolution of transference, the transference is but the withstanding resistance.
Yet, another descriptive way of stating this distinction between resistance and the awareness of transference and resistance to the resolution of transference is between implicit and indirect reference to the transference and explicit or direct references to the transference, the interpretation of resistance to awareness of the transference in intended to make the implicit transference explicit, while the interpretation of resistance to the resolution of transference is intended to make the patient realize that the already explicit transference does include a determinant from the past.
It is also important to distinction between the general concept of an interpretation of resistance to the resolution of transference and a particular variety of such an interpretation, namely, a genetic transference interpretation - that is, in the interpretation of how an attitude in the present is an inappropriate carry-over from the past. While there is a tendency among analysts to deal with explicit references to the transference primarily by a generic transference interpretation, there are other ways of working toward a revolution of the transference. It will be argued that not only is it not enough of an emphasis being given to interpretation of the transference in the here-and-now, that is, to the interpretation of implicit manifestations of the transference, but also that interpretations intended to resolve the transference as manifested in explicit references to the transference should be primarily in the here-and-now, rather than genetics transference interpretation.
A patient’s statement that he feels the analyst is harsh, for example, is, at least to begin with, likely best dealt with not by interpreting that this is a displacement from the patient’s feeling that his father was harsh but by an elucidation of another aspect of his here-and-now attitude, such as what has gone on in the analytic situation that is the patient to justify his feedings or what as the anxiety that made it so difficult for him to express his feelings. How the patient experiences the actual situation is an example of the role of the actual situation in a manifestation of transference, which will be one point contributive to both the transference in the here-and-now and genetic transference interpretations valid and constitute a sequence. We presume that a resistance that transference ultimately rests on the displacement onto the analyst of altitudes from the past.
Transference interpretations in the here-and-now and genetic transference interpretations are of course, exemplified in Freud’s writings and are in the repertoire of every analyst, but they are not distinguished sharply enough.
Because Freud’s case histories focus much more on the yield of analysis than on the details of the process, they are readily but perhaps incorrectly construed as emphasizing work outside the transference much more than work with the transference, and, even within the transference, emphasizing genetic transference interpretations much more than work with the transference in the here-and-now (Muslin and Gill 1978). The example of Freud’s case reports may have played a role in what is to be considered as a common maldistribution of emphasis in these two respects - not enough on the transference and, within the transference, not enough on the here-and-now, least of mention, is a primary reason for a failure to deal adequately with the transference. It is that work with the transference is that aspect of analysis that involves both analyst and patient in the apprised affect-laden and potentially disturbing interactions that by participants in the analytic situation are motivated to avoid these interactions. Flight away from the transference and to the past can be a relief to both patient and analyst.
The importance of transference interpretations will surely be agreeing to by all analysts, the greater effectiveness of transference interpretations than interpretations outside the transference will be agreeing to by many, and that of the relative roles of interpretation of the transference and interpretation outside the transference?
Freud can be read either as saying that the analyst of the transference is auxiliary to the analysis of the neurosis or that the analyst of the transference is equivalent to the analysis of the neurosis. The first position is stated in his saying (1913) that the disturbance of the transference has to be overcome by the analysis of transference resistance to get on with the work of analysing the necrosis. It is also implied in his reiteration that the ultimate task of analyses is to remember the past, to fill the gaps in memory. The second position is stated in his saying that the victory must be won on the field of the transference (1912) and that the mastery of the transference neurosis ‘coincides with getting rid of the illness that was originally brought to the treatment’(1917). In this second view, he says that after the resistances are overcome, memories appear without difficulty (1914).
These two different positions also find expression in the two very different ways in which Freud speaks of the transference. In Dynamics of Transference, he refers to the transference, on the one hand, as ‘the most powerful resistances to the treatment’ (1912) but, on the other hand, as doing us ‘the inestimable service of masking the patient’s . . . impulses immediate and manifest. For when all is said and done, destroying anyone in an absentia or in effigies’ is impossible (1912).
One or one’s mindful purposes of incitation can draw from its demonstration that his principal emphasis falls on the second position. He wrote once, in summary: 'Thus our therapeutic work falls into two phases. In the first, all libidos are forced from the symptoms into the transference and concentrated there, in the second, the struggle is waged around this new object and the libido is liberated from it' (1917).
Yet, the detailed demonstration that he advocated that the transference should be encouraged to expand as much as possible within the analytic situation lies in clarifying that resistance is primarily expressed by repetition, that repetition takes place both within and outside the analytic situation, but that the analyst seeks to deal with it primarily within the analytic situation, that repetition cannot be only in the motor sphere (acting) but also in the physical sphere, and that the physical sphere is not confined to remembering but includes the present, too.
Freud’s emphasis that the purpose of resistance is to precent remembering can obscure his point that resistance shows itself primarily by repetition, whether inside or outside the analytic situation: 'The greater the resistance, the more extensive will acting out (repetition) replaces remembering' (1914). Similarly, in The Dynamics of Transference, Freud said, that the main reason that the transference is so well suited to serve the resistance is that the unconscious impulses 'do not want to be remembered . . . but, endeavour to reproduce themselves . . .' (1912). The transference is a resistance primarily insofar as it is a repetition.
The point can be restated as to the relations between transference and resistances. The resistance expresses itself in repetition, that is, in transference both inside and outside the analytic situation. To deal with the transference, therefore, is equivalent to dealing with the resistances. Freud emphasized transference within the analytic situation so strongly that it has come to mean only repetition within the analytic situation, even though, conceptually speaking, a repetition outsider the analytic situation is transference too, and Freud once used the term that way: 'We soon perceive that the transference is itself only a piece of repetition, and that the repetition is a transference of the forgotten past not only on the doctor but also on all other aspects of the current situation. We . . . find . . . the compulsion to repeat, which now replaces the impulsion to remember, not only in his personal attitude to his doctor but also in every other activity and relationships that may occupy his life at the time . . . ' (1914).
Realizing that the expansion of the repetition inside the analytic situation is important, whether or not in a reciprocal relationship to repetition outside the analytic situation, is the avenue to control the repetition: 'The main instrument . . . for curbing the patient’s compulsion to repeat and for turning it into a motive for remembering lies in the handling of the transference. We render the compulsion harmless, and really useful, by giving it the right to assert itself in a definite field' (1914).
Kanzer has discussed this issue well in his paper on The Motor Sphere of the Transference, (1966). He writes on a ‘double-pronged stick-and-carrot’ technique by which the transference is fostered within the analytic situation and discouraged outside the analytic situation. The ‘stick’ is the principle of abstinence as exemplified in the admonition against masking important decisions during treatment, and the ‘carrot’ is the opportunity afforded the transference to expand within the treatment 'in almost complete freedom' as in a ‘playground’ (Freud, 1914). Freud writes: 'Provided only that the patient shows compliance enough to respect the necessary conditions of the analysis, we regularly succeed in giving all the symptoms of the illness a new transference meaning and in replacing his ordinary neurosis by a ‘transference neurosis’ of which he can be cured by the therapeutic work' (1914).
The reason that being expressed within the treatment is desirable for the transference is that there, it 'is at every point accessible to our intervention' (1914). In a later statement he made the same point this way: 'We have followed this new edition [the transference-neurosis] of the old disorder from its start, we have observed its origin and growth, and we are especially well able to find our way about in it since, as its object, we are situated at it’s very centre' (1917). It is not that the transference is forced onto the treatment, but that it is spontaneously but implicitly present and is encouraged to expand there and become explicit.
Freud emphasized ‘acting’ in the transference so strongly that one can overlook the repetition in the transference providing it does not necessarily mean it is enacted. Repetition need not go as far as motor behaviours. It can also be expressed in attitudes, feelings, and intentions, and, the repetition often takes such form rather than motor action. Such repetition is in the physical rather than the motor sphere. The importance of making this clear is that Freud can be mistakenly read to mean that repetition in the physical sphere can only mean remembering the past, as when he writes that the analyst 'is prepared for a perpetual struggle with his patient to keep in the physical sphere all the impulses that the patient would like to direct into the motor sphere, and he celebrates it as a triumph for the treatment if he can bring it about that something the patient wishes to discharge in action are disposed of through the work of remembering' (1914),
Still, it is true that the analyst’s efforts are to convert acting in the motor sphere into an intuitive awareness upon the certainty of which the physical sphere of transference, however, transference may be in the physical sphere to begin with, even if disguised. The physical sphere includes those of an awakened spheres of awareness through which the transference is just as well as to remembering.
An objection one hears, from both analyst and patient, to a heavy emphasis on interpretation of associations about the patient’s real life primarily about the transference is that it means the analyst is disregarding the importance of what goes on in the patient’s real life. The criticism is not justified. To emphasize the transference meaning is not to deny or belittle other meanings, but to focus on the one of several meanings of the contentual representations set forth, that is most important for the analytic process.
Another way in which interpretations of resistance to the transference can be, or at least appear to the patient as to be belittling of the importance of the patient’s outside life is to make the interpretation as though the outside behaviour is primarily an acting out of the transference. The patient may undertake some actions in the outside world as an expression of and resistance to the transference, that is, acting out. Til now, the interpretation of associations about actions in the outside world as having implications for the transference needs mean only that the choice of outside action to figure in the associations in co-determined needs to express of the transference indirectly. It is because of the resistance to awareness of the transference that the transference has to be disguised. When the disguise is unmasked by interpretations, despite the inevitable differences between the outside situations and the transference situation, the content is clearly the same for the analytic work. Therefore, the analysis of the transference and the analysis of the neurosis coincide. Particularly because some critics of earlier versions of our agreement that in its advocating the analysis of the transference for its own sake rather than in overcoming the neurosis. Freud wrote, 'that the mastering of the transference neurosis ‘coincides with getting rid of the illness that was originally brought to the treatment' (1917).
The transference is encouraged to develop within the analytic situation, toward fostering this development of attitudes with primary determinants in the past, i.e., transferences. The analyst’s reserve gives the patient few and equivocal cues. The purpose of the analytic situation fosters the development of strong emotional responses, and the very fact that the patient has a neurosis means, as Freud said, that
' . . . It is a perfectly normal and intelligible thing that the libidinal cathexis [we would now add negative feelings] of someone who is partly unsatisfied, a cathexis held readily in anticipation, should be directed as well to the figure of the doctor' (1912).
There is important resistance for both patient and analyst to awareness of the transference. On the patient’s part, this is because of the difficulty in recognizing erotic and hostile impulses toward the very person to whom they have to be revealed. On the analyst’s part, this is because the patient is likely to attribute the very attitudes to himself, in that causing him discomfort is most likely. The attitudes the patient believes that the analyst has toward him are often the ones the patient is least likely to voice, in a general sense because of a feeling that it is impertinent for him to concern himself with the analyst’s feelings. In a more specific sense because the attitudes that the patient ascribes of the analyst are often attitudes the patient feels the analyst will not like and be uncomfortable about having ascribed to him. It is so that the analyst must be especially alert to the attitudes the patient believes he has, not only to the attitudes the patient does have toward him. If the analyst can see himself as a participant in an interaction, as he will become much more attuned to this important area of transference, which might otherwise escape him.
The investigation of the attitudes ascribed with the analyst makes easier the subsequent investigation of the intrinsic factors in the patient that played a role in such ascriptions. For example, the exposure of the fact that the patient ascribes sexually, an interest in him to the analyst, and genetically to the patient, easily makes the subsequent exploration of the patient’s sexual wish toward the analyst, and genetically the parent.
The resistance to the awareness of these attitudes is responsible for their appearing in various disguises in the patient’s manifest associations and for the analyst’s reluctance to unmask the disguise. The most commonly recognized disguise is by displacement, but identification is an equally important one. On displacement, the patient’s attitudes are narrated for being a third party. In identification, the patient attributes to himself attitudes he believes the analyst has toward him.
To encourage the expansion of the transference within the analytic situation, the disguises in which the transference appears have to be interpreted. In displacement the interpretation will be of allusions to the transference in association not manifestly about the transference. This is a kind of interpretation every analyst often makes. With identification, the analyst interprets the attitude the patient ascribes himself as an identification with which attitudes he attributes toward the analyst. Lipton (1977) has recently described this form of disguised allusion to the transference with illuminating illustrations.
Many analysts believe that transference manifestations are infrequent and sporadic at the beginning of an analysis and the patient’s associations are not dominated by the transference unless a transference neurosis has developed. Other analysts believe that the patient’s associations have transference meanings from the beginning and throughout. That is to say, if one is to think of those who believe otherwise are failing to recognize the persuasiveness of indirect allusions to the transference - that is, what is called the resistance to the awareness of the transference.
In his autobiography, Freud wrote: 'The patient remains under the influence of the analytic situation abounding in even if he is not directly his mental activity onto a particular subject. We will be justified in assuming that nothing will occur to him that has not some reference to that situation' (1925). Since associations are obviously often not directly about the analytic situation, the interpretation of Freud’s remark rests on what he meant by the 'analytic situation'.
Trusting of what, Freud’s meaning can be clarified by reference to a statement he made in The Interpretation of Dreams. He said that when the patient is told to say whatever comes into his mind, his associations become directed by the ‘purposive ideas inherent in the treatment’ and that there are two such inherent purposive themes, one relating to the illness and the other - concerning which, Freud said, the patient had ‘no suspicion’ - relating to the analyst (1900). If the patient has ‘no suspicion’ of the theme relating to the analyst, the clear implication is that the theme appears only in disguise in the patient’s association. Its following interpretation is that Freud’s remark not only specifies the themes inherent in the patient’s associations, but also means that the associations are simultaneously directed by these two purposive ideas, not sometimes by one and sometimes by the other.
One important reason that the early and continuing presence of the transference is not always recognized is that it is considering being absent in the patient who is talking freely and apparently without resistance. As Muslin and others have pointed out on the early interpretation of transference (Gill and Muslin, 1976), resistance to the transference is probably present from the onset, even if the patient is talking apparently freely. The patient might be talking about issues not manifestly about the transference that are nevertheless also allusions to the transference. Nevertheless, the analyst has to be alert to the percussiveness of such allusions to discern them.
The analyst should continue the working assumption, to assert that the patient’s associations have transference implications pervasively. This assumption is of course, not to be confused with denial or neglect of the current aspects of the analytic situation. Giving precedence to a transference interpretation is theoretically always possible if one can only discern it through its disguise by resistance. This is not to dispute the desirability of learning as much as one can about the patient, if only to be a position to make correct interpretations of the transference. It therefore does not interfere with an apparently free flow of associations, especially early, unless the transference threatens the analytic situation to the point where its interpretation is mandatory rather than optional.
With the recognitions that even the apparently freely associating patient may also be showing reluctance to awareness of the transference, in that, the formularisation of one should not interfere if useful information is being gathered should replace Freud’s dictum that the transference should not be interpreted until it becomes a resistance (1913).
It may be argued of all transference manifestations with something in the actual analytic situation has some connection to some aspect of the current analytic situation, in that, all the determinants of the transference are current in the sense that past can exert an influence only because it exists in the present. What, however, the distinguishing is, of its current reality of the analytic situation, that is, what goes on between patient and analyst in the present, from how the patient is currently formed as of his past.
All analysts would doubtless agree that there are both current and transferential determinants of the analytic situation, and probably no analyst would argue that a transference idea can be expressed without contamination, as it was, that is, without any connection to anything current in the patient-analyst relationship. Nevertheless, the applicable implication of this fact for techniques is often neglected in practice and is believed that it will be dealt among them as past-present point references.
After-all, several authors (e.g., Kohut 1959, Loewald 1060) have pointed out that Freud’s early use of the term transference in The Interpretation of Dreams, in a connection not immediately recognized as related to the present-day user of the term, reveals the fallacy of considering that transference can be expressed free of any connection to the present. That early use was to refer to the fact that an unconscious ideas cannot be expressed as such, but only as it becomes connected to a preconscious or conscious representation of content. Thus holding to contentual representations in the phenomenon with which Freud was then concerned, the dram, transference took place from an unconscious wish to a day residue. In the Interpretation of Dreams Freud used the term transference both for the general rule that an unconscious content is expressible only as it becomes transferred to a preconscious or conscious content and for the specific application of this rule to a transference to the analyst. Just as the day residue is the point of attachment of the dream wish, so must there be an analytic-situation residue, though Freud did not use that term, as the point of attachment of the transference.
Analysts have always limited their behaviour, both in variety and intensity, to increase the extent to which the patient’s behaviour is determined by his idiosyncratic interpretation of the analyst’s behaviour. In fact, analysts unfortunately sometimes limit their behaviour so much, as compared with Freud’s practice, that they even conceptualize the entire relationship with the patient a matter of technique, with no nontechnical personal relation, as Lipton (1977) has pointed out.
Nonetheless, no matter how far the analyst attempts to carry this limitation of his behaviour, the very existence of the analytic situation gives the patient innumerable cues that inevitably become his rationale for his transference response. In other words, the current situation cannot be made to appear - that is, the analytic situation is real. It is say to forget this truism in one’s zeal to diminish the role of the current situation in determining the patient’s responses. One can try to keep past and present determinants as a step-by-step perceptible form of one and another, but one cannot obtain either in ‘pure culture’. Freud wrote: 'Insist on this procedure [the couch], however, for its purpose and result are to prevent the transference from mingling with the patient’s associations imperceptibly, to isolate the transference and to allow it to come forwards in due courses sharply defined as a resistance.' Even ‘isolate’ is too strong a word in the light of the inevitable intertwining of the transference with the current situation.
If the analyst remains under the illusion that the current cues he provides to the patient can be reduced to the vanishing point, he may be led into a silent withdrawal, which is not too distant from the caricature of an analyst as someone who does indeed refuse to have any personal relationship with the patient. What happens then is that silence has become a technique rather than merely an indication that the analyst is listening. The patient’s responses under such conditions can be mistaken for uncontaminated transference when they are in fact transference adaption to the actuality of the silence.
The recognition that all transferences must have some relation to the actual analytic situation, from which it takes its point of departure, as it was, has a crucial implication for the technique of interpreting resistance to the awareness of transference, to which the analyst becomes persuaded of the certainty of transference and the importance of encouraging the transference to expand within the analytic situation, he has to find the presenting and plausible interpretations of resistance to the awareness of transference he should make. At this point, his most reliable asset is the cues offered by what will go on in the analytic situation: On the one hand, the events of the situation, such as change in time of session, or an interpretation made by the analyst, and, on the other, however, the patient is experiencing the situation as reflected in explicit remarks about it, however fleeting these may be. This is the primary yield for technique of the recognition that any transference must have a link to the actuality of the analytic situation. The cue points to the nature of the transference, just as the day residue for a dream may be a quick pointer to the latent dream thoughts. Attention to the current stimulus for a transference elaboration will keep the analyst from making mechanical transference interpretation, in which he interprets that there are allusions to the transference in associations not manifestly about the transference, but without offering any plausible basis for the interpretation. Attention to the current stimulus also offers some degree of protection against the analyst’s inevitable tendency to project his own views onto the patient, either because of countertransference or because of a preconceived theoretical bias about the content and hierarchical relationship in psychodynamics.
The analyst may be very surprised at what in his behaviour the patient finds important or unimportant, for the patient’s responses will be idiosyncratically determined by the transference. The patient’s response may be something the patient and the analyst considers trivially, because, as in displacement to a trivial aspect of the day residue of a dream, displacement can better serve resistance when it is to something trivial. Because it is connected to conflict-laden material, the stimulus to the transference may be difficult to find. It may be quickly disavowed, so that its presence in awareness s only transitory. With the discovery of the disavowed, the patient may also gain insight into how it repeats a disavowal earlier in his life. In his search for the present stimulus that the patient is responding to transferentially, the analyst must therefore remain alert to both fleeting and apparently trivial manifest calls himself well as the events of the analytic situation.
It is sometimes argued that the analyst’s attention to his own behaviour as a precipitant for the transference will increase the patient’s resistance to recognizing the transference. On the contrary, is that because of the inevitable interrelationship of the current and transferential determinants, it is only through interpretation that they can be disentangled - in that it is also argued that one must wait until the transference has reached optimal intensity before it can be advantageously interpreted. It is true that too hasty the interpretation of the transference can serve a defensive function for the analysts and deny him the information he needs to make a more appropriate transference interpretation. However, it is also true that delay in interpreting runs the risk of allowing an unmanageable transference to develop. It is also true that deliberate delay can be a manipulation in the service of an abreaction rather than analysis and, like silence, can lead to a response to the actual situation mistaken for uncontaminated transference. Obviously important issues of timing are involved as an important clue to when a transference interpretation is given that one to make lies in whether the interpretation can be made plausible concerning the determinant stresses, namely, something in the current analytic situation. Of course, with other aspects of the transference attitude in saying that when the analyst approaches the transference in the spirit of seeing how it appears plausibly realistic to the patient, it paves the way toward its further elucidation and expression.
Freud’s emphasis on remembering as the goal of the analytic work implied that remembering is the principal avenue to the resolution of the transference. Yet his delineation of the successive steps in the development of analytic technique makes clear that he saw this development as a change from an effort to reach memories directly to the use of the transference as the necessary intermediary to reaching the memories.
By contrast alone, a remembering as the way the transference is resolved, Freud also described resistance for being primarily overcomes in the transference, with remembering following easily thereafter: 'From the repetitive reactions exhibited in the transference we are led along the familiar paths to the awakening of the memories, which appear without difficulty, as it was, after the resistance has been overcome' (1914). 'This revision of the process of repression can be accomplished only in part concerning the memory traces of the process that led to repression. The decisive part of the work is achieved by creating in the patient’s relations to the doctor - in the 'transference' - new editions of the old conflicts . . . Thus, the transference becomes the battlefield on which all the mutually struggling forces should meet one-another' (1917). This is the primary insight Strachey (1934) clarified in his seminal paper on the therapeutic action of the psychoanalysis.
Accedingly, there are two main ways in which resolution of the transference can take place through work with the transference in the here-and-now. The first lies in the clarification of what are the cues in the current situation that are the patient’s point of departure for a transference elaboration. The exposure of the current point of departure at once raises the question of whether it is adequate to the conclusion drawn from it. The relating of the transference to a current stimulus is, after all, parts of the patient’s effort to make the transference attitude plausibly determined by the present. The reserve and ambiguity of the analyst’s behaviour are what increases the ranges of apparently plausible conclusions the patient may draw. If an examination of the basis for the conclusion makes clear that the actual situation to which the patient responds is subject to other meanings than the one the patient had reached, he will more readily consider his pre-existing bias - that is, his transference.
A decisive summation would include that, in speaking of the current relationship and the relation between the patient’s conclusions and the information on which they seem plausibly based, may as to imply of some absolute conception of what is real in the analytic situation, of which the analyst is the final arbiter. That is not the case. Seemingly, what the patient must come to see is that the information he has is subject to other possible interpretations implies the very contrary to an absolute conception of reality. In fact, analyst and patient engage in a dialogue in a spirit of attempting to arrive at a consensus about reality, not about some staged out-and-out reality.
The second way in which resolution of the transference can take place within the work with the transference in the here-and-now is that in the very interpretation of the transference the patient had a new experience. He is being treated differently from how he expected to be. Analysts seem reluctant to emphasis this new experience, ads though it endangers the role of insight and argues for interpersonal influence as the significant factor in change. Strachey’s emphasis on the new experience in the mutative transference interpretation has unfortunately been overshadowed by his views on introjection, which have been mistaken to advocate manipulating the transference. Strachey meant introjection of the more benign superego of the analyst only as a temporary step on the road toward insight. Not only is the new experience nit to be confused with the interpersonal influence of a transference gratification, but the new experience occurs with insight into both the patient's-based expectation and the new experience. As Strachey points out, what is unique about the transference interpretation is that insight and the new experience take place in relation to the very person who was expected to behave differently, and it is this that gives the work in the transference its immediacy and effectiveness. While Freud did stress the affective immediacy of the transference, he did not make the new experience explicit.
Recognizing that transference interpretation is not a matter of experience is important, in contrast to insight, but a joining of the two together. Both are needed to cause and maintain the desired changes in the patient. It is also important to recognize that no new techniques of intervention are required to provide the new experience. It is an inevitable accomplishment of interpretation of the transference in the here-and-now. It is often overlooked that, although Strachey said that only transference interpretations were mutative, he also said with approval that most interpretations were outside the transference.
In a further explication of Strachey’s paper and entirely consistent with Strachey’s position, Rosenfeld (1972) has pointed out that clarification of material outside the transference is often necessary to know what is the appropriate transference interpretation, and that both genetic transference interpretation and extratransference interpretations play an important role in working through. Strachey said relatively little about working through, but surely nothing against the need for it, yet made so explicitly to a recognized role for recovery of the past in the resolution of the transference.
The holding position is to emphasis the role of the analysis of the transference in the here-and-now, both in interpreting resistance to the awareness of transference and in working toward its resolution by relating it to the actuality of the situation. Believing that the interpretation of resistance to awareness of the transference should figure in most of sessions, and that if this is done by relating the transference to the actual analytic situation, the very same interpretation is a beginning of work to the resolution of the transference. To justify this view more persuasively would require detailed case material.
One might be taken in some specified state as siding with the Kleinians whom, many analysts feel, are in error in giving the analysis of the transference too great if not even an exclusive role in the analytic process. It is true that Kleinians emphasize the analysis of the transference more, in their writings at least, than do the overall run of analysts. Anna Freud’s (1968) complaint that the concept of transference has become overexpanded is directed against the Kleinians. One reason the Kleinians consider themselves the true followers of Freud in technique is precisely because of the emphasis they put on the analysis of the transference. Hanna Segal (1967), for example writes as follows: 'To say that all communications are seen as communications about the patient’s phantasy plus current external life is equivalent to saying that all communications contain something used for the transference situation. In Kleinian technique, the interpretation of the transference is often more central than in the classical technique.'
Yet, it is nonetheless, the insistence on exclusive attention to any particular aspect of the analytic process. Like the analysis of the transference in the here-and-now, can become a fetish. In that other kinds of interpretation should not be made, but the emphasis on transference interpretation within the analytic situation needs to be increased or at the least reaffirmed, and that we need more clarification and specification of just when other kinds of interpretations are in order.
Of course making a transference interpretation is sometimes tactless. Surely two reasons that would be included in a specification of the reasons for not making a particular transference interpretation, even if one seems apparent to the analyst, would be preoccupation with an important extratransference event and an inadequate degree of rapport, to use Freud’s term, to sustain the sense of criticism, humiliation, or other painful feelings the particular interpretation might engender, though the analyst had no intention of evoking such a response. The issue might be, however, not of whether or not an interpretation of resistance to the transference should be made, but whether the therapist can find that transference interpretation that in the light of the total situation, both transferential and current, the patient can hear and benefit from primarily as the analyst intends it.
Transference interpretations, like extratransference interpretations, indeed like any behaviour on the analyst’s part, can affect the transference, which in turn needs to be examined if the result of an analysis is to depend as little as possible on the unanalyzed transference. The result of any analysis depends on the analysis of the transference, persisting effects of unanalyzed transference, and the new experience that particularly have in emphasizing as the unique merit of a transference interpretation in the here-and-now. Remembering this less one’s zeal to ferret out the transference itself becomes is especially important an unrecognized and objectionable actual behaviour on the analyst’s part, with its own repercussions on the transference.
The emphasis that is of placing on the analysis of resistance to the transference could easily be misunderstood as implying that recognizing the transference is always easy as disguised by resistance or that analysis would go without a hitch if only such interpretations were made. If not only to imply of neither, but rather than the analytic process will have the best chance of success if correct interpretation of resistance to the transference and work with the transference in the here-and-now are the core of analytic work.
However it remains, that the significance of the transference phenomenon impressed Freud so profoundly that he continued through the years to develop his ideas about it. His classical observations on the patient Dora formed the basis for his first formulation of this concept. He says, 'What is the transference? They are the new edition or facsimiles of the tendencies and phantasies aroused and made consciously during the progress of the analysis. However, they have this peculiarity, which is characteristic for their species, that they replace some earlier person by the person of the physician. To put it another way: A whole series of psychological experiences is revived, not as belonging to the past, but as applying to the person of the physician currently.'
According to Freud’s view, the process of a psychoanalytic cure depends mainly upon the patient’s ability to remember that which is forgotten and repressed, and thus to gain conviction that the analytical conclusions arrived at being correct. However, 'the unconscious feelings derive to avoid the recognition that the cure demands,' they seek instead, emotional discharge, despite the reality of the situation.
Freud believed that these unconscious feelings that the patient strives to hide are made up of that part of the libidinal impulse that has turned away from consciousness and reality, due to the frustration of a desired gratification. Because the attraction of reality has wakened, the libidinal energy is still maintained in a state of regression attached to the original infantile sexual object, although the reasons for the recoil from reality have disappeared.
Freud states that in the analytic treatment, the analyst pursues this part of the libido to its hiding place, 'aiming always at unearthing it, making it accessible to consciousness at last serviceable to reality.' The patient tries to achieve an emotional discharge of this libidinal energy under the pressure of the compulsion to repeat experiences repeatedly again rather than to become conscious of their origin, but he uses the method of transferring to the person of the physician past psychological experiences and reacting to this, at times, with all the power of hallucination. The patient vehemently insists that his impression of the analyst be true for the immediate present, in this way avoiding the recognition of his own unconscious impulses.
Thus, Freud regarded the transference-manifestations as a major problem of the resistance. However, Freud says, 'It must not be forgotten that they (the transference-manifestations) and they only, render the invaluable service of making the patient’s buried and forgotten love-emotions and manifestations.'
Freud regards the transference-manifestations as having two general aspects
- positive and negative. The negative, was at first regarded as having no value in psychoanalytic cures and only something to be 'raised' into consciousness to avoid interference with the progress of the analysis. He later accorded it a place of importance in the therapeutic experience. The positive transference he concluded to be ultimately sexual in origin, since Freud says, 'To begin with, we knew none but sexual objects.' However, he divides the positive transference into two components - one, the repressed erotic component, which is used in the service of resistance, the other, the friendly and affectionate component, which, although originally sexual, is the 'unobjectionable' aspect of the positive transference, and is involved with that 'causation of a successful result on the psychoanalysis, as in all other remedial methods.' Freud refers here to the element of suggestion in psychoanalytic therapy.
Although not agreeing with the view of Freud that human behaviour depends ultimately on the biological sexual drives, and that it would be a mistake to deny the importance of his formulations regarding transference phenomena, I differ on certain points with Freud. However, I do not differ with the formulation that early impressions acquired during childhood is revived in the analytical situation, and are felt as immediate and real - that they form paternally the greatest obstacles to analysis, if unnoticed and, as Freud puts it, the greatest ally of the analysis when understood. Agreeing that the main work of the analysis consists in analysing the transference phenomena, although differing about how this results in a cure -that the transference is a strictly interpersonal experience. Freud gives the impression that under the stress of the repetition-compulsion the patient is bound to repeat the identical pattern, despite the other person. Thus and so, I believe that the personality of the analyst tends to decide the character of the transference illusion, and especially to figure out whether the attempt at analysis will result in a cure. Horney has shown that there is no valid reason for assuming that the tendency to repeat experiences repeatedly has an instinctual basis. The particular character of the person requires that he integrate with any given situation according to the necessities of his character structure - and the implications of in the psychoanalytic therapy.
Transference, and its use in therapy, has now become necessary to begin at the beginning, and to point out in a very schematic way how a person finds his particular orientation to himself and the world - which one might call his character structure.
The infant is born without a frame of reference, as far as interpersonal experience goes. He is already acquainted with the feelings of bodily movement - with sucking and swallowing - but, among other things, he has had no knowledge of the existence of another person in relationship of himself. Although I do not wish to draw any particular conclusions from this analogy, however, to mention a simple phenomenon, described by Sherif, connected with the problem of the frame of reference. If you have a completely dark room, with no possibility of any light being seen, and you then turn on a small-pin-point of light, which is kept stationary, this light will be moving about. It is certainty with which many of you have noticed that this phenomenon when gazing at a single star. The light seems to move, and it does so, apparently, because there is no reference point in relation to which one can establish it at a fixed place in space and time. It just wanders around. If, however, one can at the same time see some light as a fixed object in the room, the light immediately becomes stationary - its reference point becomes the centre of a fixed frame reference from which its orientation from a pin-of-light, soon becomes the reference point in which has been established, and there is no longer any uncertainty of wandering of the spot of light. It is fixed. The pinned-point of light wandering in the dark room is symbolic of the original attitude of the person to himself, undetermined, unstructured, with no reference points.
The new-born infant probably perceives everything in a vague and uncertain way, including himself. Gradually, reference points are established that a connection begins to occur between hunger and breast, between a relief of bladder tension and a wet diaper, between plating with his genitals and a smack on the hand. The physical boundaries and potentialities of the self are explored. One can observe the baby investigating the extent, shape and potentialities of his body. He finds that the realm of him and his other will come, or will not come, in that he will in spite hold his breath. Everything will get excited that he can smile and speak lovingly? People will be enchanted, or just the opposite? The nature of the emotional reference points that the determiner depends upon the environment. By that still unknown quality called 'empathy,' he discovers the reference points that help to figure out his emotional attitude toward himself. If his mother did not want him, is disgusted with him, treats him with utter disregard, he comes to look upon himself as a thing-to-be-disregarded. With the profound human drive to make this rationally, he gradually builds up a system of 'reasons why.' Underneath all these 'reasons' is a basic sense of worthlessness, undetermined and undefined, related directly to the origin reference frame. Another child discovers that the state of being regarded is dependent upon specific factors - all is well if one does not act spontaneously, since one is not a separate person, since one is good, as the state of being good is continuously defined by the parents. Under these conditions, and these only, this child can feel a sense of self-regard.
Other people are encountered with the original reference frame in mind. The child tends to carry over into later situations the patterns he first learned to know. The rigidity with which these original patterns are retained depends upon the nature of the child’s experience. If this had been a traumatic character so that spontaneity has been blocked and further emotional development has been inhibited, the original orientation will tend to persist. Discrepancies may be rationalized or repressed. Thus, the original impression of the hostile mother may be retained, while the contact with the new person is rationalized to fit the original reference frame. The new person encountered acts differently, but probably that is just a pose. She is just being pleasant because she does not know me. If she really knew me, she would act differently. Or, the original impressions are so out of line with the present actuality, that they remain unconscious, but make themselves apparently inappropriate in behaviour or attitudes, which remain outside the awakening awareness of the person concerned.
The incongruity of the behaviour, or of the attitude, may be a souse of astonishment to the other person involved. Sullivan provides insight into the process by the elucidation of what he calls the 'parataxic distortions.' He points out that in the development of the personality, certain integrative patterns are organized in response to the important persons in the child’s past. There is a 'self-in-relation-to-A' pattern, or 'self-in-relation-to -B' pattern. These patterns of response become familiar and useful. The person learns to get along as a 'self-in-relation-to A' or B, C, D and E, depending on the number of important people to whom he had to adjust during his early development. For example, a young woman, who had a severely dominating mother and a weak, kindly father, learned a pattern of adjustment to her mother that could be briefly described as submissive, mildly rebellious in a secret way, but mostly lacking in spontaneity. Toward the father she developed loving, but contemptuous attitude. When she encountered other people, whatever sex, she oriented herself to them partly as the real people they were, and partly as she had learned to respond to her mother and father in the past. She thus was feeling toward the real person involved as if she were dealing with two people at once. However, since it is very necessary for people to behave as rational persons, she suppressed the knowledge that some of her reactions were inappropriate to the immediate situation, and wove an intricate mesh of rationalizations, which permitted her to believe that the person with whom she was dealing really was someone either to be feared and submitted to, as her mother, or to be contemptuous of, as her father. To a greater extent, the real person fitted the original picture of the mother and father, the easier it was for her to maintain that the original 'self-in-reflation-to-A-or-B' was the real and valid expression of herself.
It happened, however, that this woman had, had a kindly nurse who was not a weak person, although occupying an inferior position in the household. During the many hours when she was with this nurse, she can experience a great deal of undeserved warmth, and of freedom for self-realization, no demands for emotional conformity were made on her or his relationship. Her own capacities for love and spontaneous activity could flourish. Unfortunately, the contact with this nurse was all too brief. Still, they’re remained, despite the necessity for the rigid development of the patterns toward the mother and father, a deeply repressed, but still vital experience of self, which most closely approximated the fullest realization of her potentialities. This, which one might call her 'real self,' although 'snowed under' and impeded by all the distortions incurred by her relationship to the parents, was finally able to emerge and become again active in analysis. In this treatment, she learned how much her reactions to people were 'transference' reactions, or as Sullivan would say, 'parataxic distortions.'
Of course, a deliberate schematization was made to illustrate the earliest frames of reference and then, least of mention, the parents are not overlooked as to other possible reference frames. Also, one has to realize that one pattern connects with another - the whole making a tangled mass that only years of analysis may buoyantly unscramble. Also, an attemptive glimpse into what has not taken of its time to outline the compensative drives that the neurotic person has to develop to handle his life situation. Each compensatory manoeuver causes some change in his frame of reference, since the development of a defensive trait in his personality sets off a new set of relationships to those around him. The little child who grows ever more negativistic, because of injuries and frustrations, evokes more hostility in his environment. However, and this is important, the basic reactions of hostility by the parents, which originally induced his negativism, are still there. Thus, the pattern does not change much in character, and it just gets worse in the same direction. Those persons whose later life experiences perpetuate the original; frames of reference are more severely injured. A young child, who has a hostile mother, may then have a hostile teacher. If, by good luck, she got a kind teacher and if his own attitude was not already badly warped, so that he did not induce hostility in this kind teacher, he would be introduced into a startlingly new and pleasant frame of reference. His personality might not suffer too greatly, especially if a kindly aunt or uncle happened to be around. Surely, that if the details of the life histories of healthy people were studied, it would be found that they had some very satisfactory experiences early enough to establish in them a feeling of validity as persons. The profoundly sick people have been so early injured, in such a rigid and limited frame of reference, that they are not able to use kindliness, decency or regard when it does come their ways. They meet the world as if it were potentially menacing. They have already developed defensive traits entirely appropriate to their original experience, and then carry them out in completely inappropriate situations, rationalizing the discrepancies, but never daring to believe that people are different to the ones they early learned to distrust and hate. Because of bitter early experience, they learn to let their guards down, never to permit intimacy, lest at that moment the death blow would be dealt to their already partly destroyed sense of self-regard. Despairing of real joy in living, they develop secondary neurotic goals that a pseudo-satisfaction. The secondary gains at first glance might be what the person was really striving for - revenge, powerfulness and exclusive possession. Actually, these are but the expressions of the deep injuries sustained by the person. They cannot be fundamentally cured until those interpersonal relationships that caused the original injury are brought back to consciousness in the analytic situation. In stages, each phase of the long period of emotional development is exposed, by no means chronologically, the interconnectivity in overlapping reference frames is made conscious, those points at which a distortion of reality, or a repression of part of the self had to occur, are uncovered. The reality gradually becomes 'undistorted', the self, refound, in the personal relationship between the analyst ant the patient. This personal relationship with the analyst is the situation in which the transference distortions can be analysed.
In Freud’s view, the transference was either positive or negative, and was related in an isolated way to a particular person in the past. Perhaps, the transference is the experiencing in the analytic situation the entire pattern of the original reference frames, which include at every moment the relationship of the patient to himself, to the important persons, and to others, as he experienced them at the time, in the light of his interrelationships with the important people.
The therapeutic aim in this process is not to uncover childhood memories that will then lend themselves to analytic interpretation - the important difference to Freud’s view. Fromm has pointed this out in a recent lecture. Psychoanalytic cure is not the amassing of data, either from childhood, or from the study of the present situation. Nor does cure resolve itself from a repetition of the original injuries’ experience in the analytic relationship. What is curative in the process is that in tending to reconstruct with the analyst the atmosphere that obtained in childhood, the patient achieves something new. He discovers that part of himself that had to be repressed at the time of the original experience. He can only do this is an interpersonal relationship with the analyst, which is suitable to such a rediscovery. To illustrate this point, If a patient had a hostile parent toward whom he was required to show deference, he would have to repress certain of his own spontaneous feelings. In the analytical situation, he tends to carry over his original frame of reference and again tends to feel himself to be in a similar situation. If the analyst’s personality in addition contains elements of a need for deference that need will be the unconscious implication as imparted to the patient, who will, therefore ease the repressive magnitude of his spontaneity as previously he was the same benevolence. True enough, he may act or try to act as if analysed, since by definition, that is what the analyst is attempting to accomplish. Nevertheless, he will never have found his repressed self, because the analytical relationship contains for him elements actually identical with his original situation. Only if the analyst provides a genuinely new frame of reference - that is, if he is truly non-hostile, and truly not in need of deference - can this patient discover, and it is a real discovery, the repressed elements of his own personality. Thus, the transference phenomenon is used so that the patient will completely re-experience the original frames of reference, and himself within those frames, in a truly different relationship with the analyst, to the end that can discover the invalidity of his conclusions about himself and others.
That is not to mean that this is to deny the correctness of Freud’s view of the transference, yet acting as a resistance is a matter of fact, in that the tendency of the patient to reestablish the original reference frame is precisely because he is afraid to experience the other person in a direct and unreserved way. He has organized his whole system of getting along in the world. Bad as that system might be, based on the original distortions of his personality and his subsequent vicissitudes. His capacity for spontaneous feeling and a ting has gone into hiding. Now it has to be sought. If some such phrases as the 'capacity for self-realizations' are substituted in place of Freud’s concept of the repressed libidinal impulse, much the same conclusions can be reached about the way in which the transference-manifestations appear in the analysis as resistance. It is just in the safest situation, where the spontaneous feeling might come out of hiding, that the patient develops intense feelings, sometimes of a hallucination character, that relate to the most dreaded experiences of the past. It is at this point that the nature and the use by the patient of the transference distortions have to be understood and correctly interpreted by the analyst. It is also here that the personality of the analyst modifies the transference reaction. A patient cannot feel close to a detached or hostile analyst and will therefore never display the full intensity of his transference illusions. The complexity of this process, by which the transference can be used as the therapeutic instrument and, while, as a resistance may be illustrated by an example through which a patient having had developed intense feelings of attachment to a father surrogate in his everyday life. The transference feelings toward this man were of great value in explaining his original problem with his real father. As the patient became more aware of his personal validity, he found his masochistic attachment to be weakening. This occasional acute feeling of anxiety, since his sense of independence was not yet fully established. At that point, he developed very disturbing feelings regarding the analyst, believing that she was untrustworthy and hostile, although before this, he has successes in establishing a realistically positive relationship to her. The feelings of untrustworthiness precisely reproduced an ancient pattern with his mother. He experienced them at this point in the analysis to retain and to justify his attachment to the father figure, the weakening of which attachment had threatened him so profoundly. The entire pattern was explained when it was seen that he was re-experiencing an ancient triangle, in which he was continuously driven to a submissive attachment to a dominating father, due to the utter untrustworthiness of his weak mother. If the transference character of his sudden feeling of untrustworthiness of the analyst had not been clarified, he would have turned again submissively to his father surrogate, which would have further postponed his development of independence? Nonetheless, the development of his transference to the analyst brought to light a new insight.
To the fundamental direction upon which Freud’s view of the so-called narcissistic neurosis, was that Freud felt that personality disorders called schizophrenia or paranoia cannot ne analysed because the patient is unable to develop a transference to the analyst. Yet nonetheless, it is viewed as that of a real difficulty in treating such disorders that the relationship is essentially nothing but transference illusions of reality. Nowhere in the realm of psychoanalysis can one find complete proof of the effect of early mention experience on the person that in attempting to treat these patients. Frieda Fromm-Reichmann has shown in her work with schizophrenics the necessity to realize the intensity of the transference reaction, which have become almost completely real to the patient. Yet, if one knows the correct interpretations, by actually feeling the patient’s needs, one can over years of time do the identical thing accomplished more quickly than is less dramatical with patients suffering some less severe disturbances within their own interpersonal relationships.
Just for this, yet a peculiar moment is to say of what reasons was that Freud took of his position that all subsequent experiences in normal life are merely a repetition of the original one. This love is experienced for someone today about the love felt for someone in the past that it is, nonetheless, to believe this to be exactly true. The child who had to repress certain aspects of his personality enters a new situation dynamically, not just as a repetition of it. Therefore there are constitutional differences with respect to the total capacity for emotional experience, just as they are with respect to the total capacity for intellectual experiences. Given this constitutional substrate, the child engages in personal relationships, not passively as a lump of clay waiting to be moulded, but most dynamically, bringing into play all his emotional potentialities. He might find someone later whose capacity for response is deeper than his mother’s. If he is capable of that greater depth, he experiences an expansion of himself. Many later in life met a 'great' person and have felt a sense of newness in the relationship with certain described to others as 'wonderful' which is regarded with a certain amount of awe. This is not a 'transference' experience but represents a dynamic extension of the self to a new horizon.
Ours is to discuss hypnosis a little further in detail and to make by some attributive affordance as drawn upon a few remarks about its correlation with the transference phenomenon in psychoanalytic therapy.
According to White, the subject under hypnosis is a person striving to act like a hypnotized person as that state is continuously defined by the hypnotist. He also says that the state of being hypnotized is an 'altered state of consciousness.' However, as Maslow points out, it is not an abnormal state. In everyday life transient manifestations of all the phenomena that occur in hypnosis can be seen. Such examples are cited as the trance-like state a person experiences when completely occupied with an absorbing book. Among the phenomena of the hypnotic state is the amnesia for the enchantment of a trance. The development of certain anaesthetics, such as insensitivity to pain, deafness to sounds other than the hypnotist’s voice, greater ability to recall forgotten events, loss of capacity to initiate activities spontaneously, and has the greater suggestibility. This heightened suggestibility in the trance state is the most important phenomenon of hypnosis. Changes in behaviour and feeling can be induced, such as painful or pleasant experiences, headaches, nausea, or feelings of well-being. Post-hypnotic behaviour can be influenced by suggestion, this being one of the most important aspects of experimental hypnosis for the clarifying of psychopathological problems.
The hypnotic state is induced by a combination of methods that may include relaxation, visual concentration and verbal suggestion. The methods vary with the personality of the experimenter and the subject.
Maslow has pointed the interpersonal character of hypnosis, which accounts for some different conclusions by different experimenters. Roughly, the types of experimenters may be divided into three groups - the dominant type, the friendly or brotherly type, and the cold, detached, scientific type. According to the inner needs of the subject, he can probably be hypnotized more readily by one type or the other. The brotherly hypnotizer cannot, for instance, hypnotize a subject whose inner need is to be dominated.
Freud believed that the relationship of the psychological subject to the hypnotist was that of an emotional, erotic attachment. He comments on the 'uncanny' character of hypnosis and says that, 'the hypnotist awakens in the subject part of his archaic inheritance that had also made him compliant to his parents.' What is thus awakened is the concept of 'the dreaded primal father,' 'toward whom, only a passive-masochistic attitude is possible. Toward whom one’s will has to be surrendered.'
Ferenczi considered the hypnotic state to be one in which the patient transferred onto the hypnotist his early infantile erotic attachment to the parents with the same tendency to blind belief and to uncritical obedience as obtained then. He calls attention to the paternal or frightening type of hypnosis and the maternal or gentle, stroking type. In both instances the situation tends to favour the 'conscious and unconscious imaginary return to childhood.'
The only point of disagreement with these views is that one does not need to postulate an erotic attachment to the hypnotist or 'transference' of infantile sexual wishes. The sole necessity is a willingness to surrender oneself. The child whose parent wished to control it, by one way or another, is forced to do this. To be loved, or to at least be taken consideration of it. The patient transfers this willingness to surrender to the hypnotist. He will also transfer it to the analyst or the leader of a group. In any one of these situations the authoritative person, is the hypnotist, analyst or leader, promises because of great power or knowledge the assurance of safety, a cure or happiness, as the case may be. The patient, or the isolated person, regresses emotionally to a state of helplessness and lack of initiative similar to the child who has been dominated.
If it is asked how in the first place, the child is brought into a state of submissiveness, it may be discovered that the original situation of the child had certain aspects that already resemble a hypnotic situation. This depends upon the parents. If they are destructive or authoritarian they can achieve long-lasting results. The child is continuously subjected to being told how and what he is. Day in and day out, in the limited frame of reference of his home, he is subjected to the repetition, often again: 'You are a naughty boy.' 'You are a bad girl.' 'You are just a nuisance and are always giving me trouble. 'You are dumb,' 'you are stupid,' 'you are a little fool.' 'You always make mistakes.' 'You can never do anything right,' or 'that’s right, I love you when you are a good boy.' 'That’s the kind of boy I like.' 'Mother lovers a good boy who does what she tells him.' 'Mother knows best. Mother always knows best.' 'If you would listen to mother, you would get along all right. Just listen to her.' 'Don’t pay attention to those naughty children. Just listen to your mother.'
Over and again, with exhortations to say attention, to listen, to be good, the child is brought under the spell. 'When you get older, never forget what I told you. Always remember what mother says, then you will never get into trouble.' These are like Post-hypnotic suggestions. 'You will never come to a good end. You will always be in trouble.' 'If you are not good, you will always be unhappy.' 'If you don’t do what I say, you will regret it.' 'If you do not live up to the right things - again, 'right' as continuously defined by the mother - you will be sorry.'
Hypnotic experiments, according to Hull, for many reasons, including that of learning the uses and misuses of language, there is a marked rise of verbal suggestibility up to five years, with a sharp dropping off at around the eighth year. Ferenczi refers to the subsequent effects of threats or orders given in childhood as 'having much in common with the Post-hypnotic command-automatisms.' Pointing out how the neurotic patient follows out, without being able to explain the motive, a command repressed long ago, just as in hypnosis a Post-hypnotic suggestion is carried out for which amnesia has been produced.
Unfortunately, having had no personal experience with hypnosis, I refer only to hypnosis in discussing the transference is to further a better understanding of the analytic relationship. The child may be regarded for being in a state of 'chronic hypnosis,' as described, but with all sorts of Post-hypnotic suggestions thrown in during this period. This entire pattern - this entire early frame of reference - may be 'transferred' to the analyst. When this has happened, the patient is in a highly suggestible stye. Due to many intrinsic and extrinsic factors, the analyst is now in the position of a sort of 'chronic hypnotist.' First, due to his position of a doctor he has a certain prestige. Second, the patient comes to him, even if expressedly unwillingly, still if there were not something in the patient that was co-operative he would not come at all, or at least he would not stay. The office is relatively quietly, external stimuli relatively reduced. The frame of reference is limited. Many analysts maintain an anonymity about themselves. The attention is focussed on the interpersonal relationship. In this relatively undefined and unstructured field the patient can discover his 'transference' feelings, since he has few reference points in the analytical situation by which to go. This is greatly enhanced by having the patient assume a physical position in the room under which he does not see the analyst. Thus, the ordinary reference points of facial expression and gestures are lacking. True enough, he can look around or get up and walk about. Nevertheless, for considerable periods he lies down - itself a symbolically submissive position. He does what is called 'free association.' This is again, giving up - willingly, to be sure - the conscious control of his thoughts, that is, the willingness and cooperativeness of all these acts. That is precisely the necessary condition for hypnosis. The lack of immediate reference points permits the eruption into consciousness of the old patterns of feeling. The original frame of reference becomes more clearly outlined and felt. The power that the parent originally has to cast the spell is transferred to the analytical situation. Now it is the analyst who can do the same thing - placed there partly by the nature of the external situation, partly by the patient who comes to be freed from his suffering.
There is no such thing as an important analyst, nor is the idea of the analyst’s acting as a mirror anything more than the 'neatest trick of the week.' Whether intentionally or not, whether conscious of it or not, the analyst does express, day in and day out, subtle or overt evidences of his own personality in relationship to the patient.
The analyst may express explicitly his wish not to be coercive, but if he has an unconscious wish to control the patient, analysing and to resolve the transference distortions is impossible for him correctly. The patient is thus not able to become free from his original difficulties and for lack of something better adopts the analyst as a new and less dangerous authority. Then the situation occurs in which it is not 'my mother says' or 'my father says,' but now 'my analyst says.' The so-called chronic patients who need lifelong support and may benefit by such a relationship, however, that frequently the long-continued unconscious attachment - by which is not meant of any genuine affection or regard - is maintained because of a failure on the analyst’s part to recognize and resolve the sense of being uttered of a sort of hypnotic spell that originated in childhood.
To develop an adequate therapeutic interpersonal relationship, the analyst must be without those personal traits that tend to perpetuate the originally destructive or authoritative situation unconsciously. Besides this, he must be able, because of his training, to be aware of every evidence of the transference phenomena, and lastly, he must understand the significance of the hypnotic-like situation that analysis helps to reproduce. If, with the best of intentions, he unwittingly uses the enormous power with which he is endowed by the patient, he may certainly achieve something that looks like change. His suggestions, exhortations and pronouncements based on the patient’s revelation of himself, may be certainly makers an impression. The analyst may say, 'You must not do this just because I say so.' That is a sort of Post-hypnotic command. The patient then strives to be 'an analysed person acting on his own account' - because he was told to do so. He is still not really acting on his own.
It is to my firm conviction that the analysis is terminable. A person can continue to grow and expand all his life. The process of analysis, however, as an interpersonal experience, has a definite end. That an end is achieved when the patient has rediscovered his own self as an activity and independently functioning entity.
Transference problems concerning to most psychoanalytic authors maintain that schizophrenic patient cannot be treated psychoanalytically because they are too narcissistic to develop with the psychotherapist an interpersonal relationship that is sufficiently reliable and consistent for psychoanalytic work. Freud, Fenichel and other authors have recognized that a new technique of approaching patients psychoanalytically must be found if analysts are to work with psychotics. Among those who have worked successfully in recent years with schizophrenics, Sullivan, Hill, and Karl Menninger and his staff has made various modifications of their analytic approach.
We think of a schizophrenic as a person who has had serious traumatic experience in early infancy at a time when his ego and its ability to examine reality were not yet developed. These early traumatic experiences seem to furnish the psychological basis for the pathogenic influence of the frustrations of later years. Earlier the infant lives grandiosely in a narcissistic world of his own. His needs and desires may be taken care of by something vague and indefinite which he does not yet differentiate. As Ferenczi noted they are expressed by gestures and movements since speech is yet undeveloped. Frequently the child’s desires are fulfilled without any expression of them, a result that seems to him a product of his magical thinking.
Traumatic experiences in this early period of life will damage a personality more seriously than those occurring in later childhood such as are found in the history of psychoneurotic. The infant’s mind is more vulnerable the younger and less used it ha been, furthered, the trauma is a blow to the infant’s egocentricity. In addition early traumatic experience shortens the only period in life in which an individual ordinarily enjoys the moist security, thus endangering the ability to store up as it was a reasonable supply of assurance and self-reliance for the individual’s late struggle through life. Thus is such a child sensitized considerably more toward the frustrations of later life than by later traumatic experience. So many experiences in later life that would mean little to a ‘healthy’ person and not much to a psychoneurotic, mean a great deal of pain and suffering to the schizophrenic. His resistance against frustration is easily exhausted.
Once he reaches his limit of endurance, he escapes the unbearable reality of present life by attempting to reestablish the autistic, delusional world of the infant, but this is impossible because the content of his delusions and hallucinations are naturally coloured by the experiences of his whole lifetime.
How do these developments influence the patient’s attitude toward the analyst? The analyst’s approach to him?
Due to the very early damage and the succeeding chain of frustrations that the schizophrenic undergoes before finally giving in to illness, he feels extremely suspicious and distrustful of everyone, particularly of the psychotherapist who approaches him with the intention of intruding into his isolated world and personal life. To him the physician’s approach means the threat of being compelled to return to the frustrations of real life and to reveal his inadequacy to meet them, or - still worse - a repetition of the aggressive interference with his initial symptoms and peculiarities that he has encountered in his previous environment.
In spite of his narcissistic retreat, every schizophrenic has some dim notion of the unreality and loneliness of his substitute delusionary world. He longs for human contact and understanding, yet is afraid to admit it to himself or to his therapist for fear of further frustration.
That is why the patient may take weeks and months to test the therapist before being willing to accept him.
However, once he has accepted him, his dependence on the therapist is greater and he is more sensitive about it than is the psychoneurotic because of the schizophrenic’s deeply rooted insecurity; the narcissistic seemingly self-righteous attitude is but a defence.
Whenever the analyst fails the patient from reasons to be of mention - one severe disappointment and a repetition of the chain of frustrations the schizophrenic has previously endured.
To the primitive part of the schizophrenic’s mind that does not discriminate between himself and the environment, it may mean the withdrawal of the impersonal supporting forces of his infancy. Severe anxiety will follow this vital deprivation.
In the light of his personal relationship with the analyst it means that the therapist seduced the patient to use him as a bridge over which he might be led from the utter loneliness of his own world to reality and human warmth, only to have him discover that this bridge is not reliable. If so, he will respond helplessly with an outburst of hostility or with renewed withdrawal as may be seen most impressively in a catatonic stupor.
Through reasons of change, this withdrawal during treatment is a way the schizophrenic has of showing resistance and is dynamically comparable to the various devices the psychoneurotic uses to show resistance. The schizophrenic responds to alterations in the analyst’s defections and understanding by corresponding stormy and dramatic changes from love to hatred, from willingness to leave his delusional world to resistance and renewed withdrawal.
As understandable as these changes are, they nevertheless may come quite as a surprise to the analyst who frequently has not observed their source. This is quite in contrast to his experience with psychoneurotic whose emotional reactions during an interview he usually predicts. These unpredictable changes seem to be the reason for the conception of the unreliability of the schizophrenic’s transference reactions, yet they follow the same dynamic rules as the psychoneurotic’s oscillations between positive and negative transference and resistance. If the schizophrenic’s reactions are more stormy and seemingly more unpredictable than those of the psychoneurotic, perhaps this may be due to the inevitable errors in the analyst’s approach to the schizophrenic, of which he himself may be aware, than to him unreliability of the patient’s emotional response.
Why is it inevitable that the psychoanalyst disappoints his schizophrenic patients time and again?
The schizophrenic withdraws from painful reality and retires to what resembles the early speechless phase of development where consciousness is yet crystallized. As the expression of his feelings is not hindered by the conventions, he has eliminated, so his thinking, feeling, behaviour and speech - when present - obey the working rules of the archaic unconscious. His thinking is magical and does not follow logical rules. It does not admit any, and likewise no yes: There is no recognition of space and time, as ‘I’, ‘you’ and ‘they’ are interchangeable. Expression is by symbols, often by movements and gestures rather than by words.
As the schizophrenic is suspicious, he will distrust the words of his analyst. He will interpret them and incidental gestures and attitudes of the analyst according to his own delusional experience? The analyst may not even be aware of these involuntary manifestations of his attitudes, yet they proficiently mean much of the hypersensitive schizophrenic who uses them to orient himself to the therapist’s personality and intentions toward him.
In other words, the schizophrenic patient and the therapists are people living in different worlds and on different levels of personal development with different means of expressing and of orienting themselves. We know little about the language of the unconscious of the schizophrenic, and our access to it is blocked by the very process of our own adjustment to a world the schizophrenic has relinquished. So we should not be surprised that errors and misunderstandings occur when we undertake to communicate and strive for a rapport with him.
Another source of the schizophrenic’s disappointment arises from the following: Since the analyst accepts and does not interfere with the behaviour of the schizophrenics, his attitude may lead the patient to expect that the analyst will assist in carrying out all the patients’ wishes, though they might not be his interest, or to the analyst’s and the hospital’s in their relationship to society. This attitude of acceptance so different from the patient’s experiences readily fosters the anticipation that the analyst will try to carry out the patient’s suggestions and take his part, even against conventional society should give occasion to arise. Frequently, agreeing with the patient's wish to remain unbathed and untidy will be wise for the analyst until he is ready to talk about the reasons for his behaviour or to change spontaneously. At other times, he will unfortunately be unable to take the patient’s part without being able to make the patient understands and accept the reasons for the analyst’s position.
If, however, the analyst is not able to accept the possibility of misunderstanding the reactions of his schizophrenic patient and in turn of being misunderstood by him, it may shake his security with his patient. The schizophrenic, once accepted the analyst and wants to rely upon him, will sense the analyst’s insecurity. Being helpless and insecure himself - in spite of his pretended grandiose isolation - he will feel utterly defeated by the insecurity of his would-be helper. Such disappointment may furnish reasons for outbursts of hatred and rage that are comparable to the negative transference reactions of psychoneurotic, yet more intense than these since they are not limited by the restrictions of the actual world.
These outbursts are accompanied by anxiety, feelings of guilt, and fear of retaliation that in turn lead to increased hostility. Thus, is established a vicious circle: We disappoint the patient: He hates us, is afraid we hate him for his hatred and therefore continues to hate us. If in addition he senses that the analyst is afraid of his aggressiveness, it confirms his fear that he is actually considered dangerous and unacceptable, and this augments his hatred.
This establishes that the schizophrenic can develop strong relationships of love and hatred toward his analyst. After all, one could not be so hostile if it were not for the background of a very close relationship, once to emerge from an acutely disturbed and combative episode. In addition, the schizophrenic develops transference reaction in the narrower sense that he can differentiate from the actual interpersonal relationship.
What is the analyst’s further function in therapeutic interviews with the schizophrenic? As Sullivan has stated, he should observe and evaluate all of the patient’s words, gestures, changes of attitude and countenance, ad he does the associations of psychoneurotics. Every production - whether understood by the analyst or not - is important and makes sense to the patient. Therefore the analyst should try to understand, and let the patient feel that he tries. He should as a rule not attempt to prove his understanding by giving interpretations because the schizophrenic himself understands the unconscious meaning of his productions better than anyone else. Nor should the analyst ask questions when he does not understand, for he cannot know what trend of thought, far off dream or hallucination he may be interpreting. He gives evidence of understanding, whenever he does, by responding cautiously with gestures or actions appropriate to the patient’s communication, for example, by lighting his cigarette from the patient’s cigarette instead of using a match when the patient seems to show a wish for closeness and friendship.
What has been said against intruding into the schizophrenic’s inner world with superfluous interpretations also holds true for untimely suggestions? Most of them do not mean the same thing to the schizophrenic that they do to the analyst. The schizophrenic who feels comfortable with his analyst will ask for suggestions when he is ready to receive them. While he does not, the analyst does better to listen. Least of, the schizophrenic’s emotional reactions toward the analyst have to be met with extreme care and caution. The love that the sensitive schizophrenic feels as he first emerged, and his cautious acceptances of the analyst’s warmth of interest are really most delicate and tender things. If the analyst deals unadroitly with the transference reactions of a psychoneurotic, it is bad enough, though as a rule reparable, but if he fails with a schizophrenic in meeting positive feelings by pointing it out for instance before the patient suggests that he be ready to discuss it, he may easily freeze to death what had just begun to grow and so destroy any further possibility of therapy.
Sometimes the therapist’s frank statement that he wants to be the patient’s friend but that he is going to protect himself should he be assaulted may help in coping with the patient’s combativeness and relieve the patient’s fear of his own aggression. As, too, some analysts may feel that the atmosphere of complete acceptance and strict avoidance of any arbitrary denials that we recommend as a basic rule for the treatment of schizophrenics may not accord with our wish to guide them toward reacceptance of reality. This may not be as apparently so. Certain groups of psychoneurotics have to learn by the immediate experience of analytic treatment how to accept the denials life has in store for each of us. The schizophrenic has above all to be cured of the wounds and frustrations of his life before we can expect him to recover.
Other analysts may feel that treatment as we have outlined it is not psychoanalysis. The patient is not instructed to lie on a couch, he is not asked to give free associations (although frequently he does), and his productions are seldom interpreted other than by understanding acceptance. Freud says that every science and therapy that accept his teachings about the unconscious, about transference and resistance and about infantile sexuality, may be called psychoanalysis. According to this definition we believe we are practising psychoanalysis with our schizophrenic patients.’
Whether we call it analysis or not, successful treatment clearly does not depend on technical rules of any special psychiatric school but on the basic attitude of the individual therapist toward psychotic persons. If he meets them as strange creatures of another world whose productions are non-understandable to ‘normal’ beings, he cannot treat them. If he realizes, however, that the difference between himself and the psychotic is only one of degree and not to kind, he will know better how to meet him. He can probably identify himself sufficiently with the patient to understand and accept his emotional reactions without becoming involved in them.
Countertransference was once considered a hindrance to analytic work. Now, though controversies still exist about, what constitutes its optimal use, and though there are real dangers of misuse, countertransference is recognized by most of analysts not only as integral to the analytic relationship, whether or not it is in awareness, but as a potentially powerful and often crucial analytic tool. In some instances’ sensitivity to Countertransference nay be the only basis for tuning into the patient to be able to achieve an analytic possibility.
It seems, but not fully understood to why the belief that the problem of countertransference resistance itself not only precludes using countertransference data in facilitating ways in the analysis, but also increases the likelihood that countertransference will affect the work in less than optimal ways. It can constitute one of the gravest threats to analytic work.
Countertransference resistance often arises when awareness of countertransference requires us to face aspects of ourselves and our feelings that may be threatening. In this regard it is interesting that positive emotions can be as threatening as negative ones. Every bit as justly evident as in as early as of 1895 in Breuer’s treatment of patient Anna O.
Countertransference resistance includes, of course, resistance to awareness of collusive involvements. It can involve identification and reaction formation, or defences such as a detachment, resistance to awareness of one’s own affective reactions, or resistance to awareness of particular nuances of the transference-countertransference interaction. Occasionally, however, countertransference resistance may involve resistance not simply to awareness of one’s own reactions, but also to allowing any kind of emotional engagement with the patient. It might be that in such instances thinking of this kind of analyst is more accurate 'detachments' as a form of countertransference itself.
Alternatively, Countertransference resistance may reflect the analyst’s basic assumptions about the analytic task - the principle of neutrality is understood as requiring no, or minimal, emotional responsiveness by the analyst, for others neutrality is defined in term s of how the analyst uses his or her reactions, the assumption being that these are inevitable. From the former perspective an analyst’s emotional response can be viewed as evidence of a failure to maintain the proper analytic stance. As for the latter, the taboo on affective experience is seen as preventing the analyst from using himself as a sensitive analytic instrument, and as precluding the kind of affective engagement that may be essential. The latter view draws upon Heimann’s (1950) observation that: The emotions roused in [the analyst] are much nearer to the central issue than his reasoning, or to put it in other words, his unconscious perception of the patient’s unconscious is more acute and before his conscious conception of the situation . . . the analyst’s emotional response to his patient within the analytic situation represents one of the most important tools for his work.
It seems that the analyst’s ability to respect and use his or her awareness of whatever is begun internally while the work becomes a source of power and strength. From this perspective, even when we know our own issues are involved, we still can gain important information if we consider why with this patient and not others, and why now with this patient and not this patient at other times.
A common example of this kind of countertransference resistance involves those moments when the analyst may be overcome with sleepiness and him or she never relates it to being with the patient. Sometimes we become alert to this the session following when we find to our great surprise that we are suddenly wide awake. Only then does the sleepy response in the prior session was apparently very specific to the earlier interaction. This, of course, allows us to see this awareness as a basis for structuring an analytic exploration.
We learn from these experiences that even when it may seem to us that our reactions are independent of the immediate context, which we are tired or distracted because of our own preoccupations, or that we are at the mercy of our own pathology, it is usually prudent to consider how our experience may be responsible to the interactive subtleties of the immediate moment.
Failure to consider that our feeling tired or distracted might be to some subtle development in the interaction may actually reflect a wish to avoid dealing with the anxieties of the moment or possible anxiety about being vulnerable to the patient’s impact. If this is the case then the real issue in such instances may actually be the countertransference resistance. In such instances tracking the interactive subtitles as they evolve between analyst and patient requires a collaborative engagement as it touches on aspects of the interaction that neither patient nor analyst could illuminate on his or her own - because patients tune into the analyst and the analyst into them, how the analyst deals with his own Countertransference obviously reveals a great deal about the analyst’s relation to his own experience and about his trustworthiness and authenticity, which also has impact. As early as 1915, Freud wrote: ' . . . Since we demand strict trustfulness from our patients, we jeopardize our whole authority if we let ourselves be caught out by them in a departure from the truth.' (1915)
In this regard, Ferenczi (1933) emphasized that patients: 'show a remarkable, almost clairvoyant knowledge about the thoughts and emotions that go on in their analyst’s mind. To deceive a patient it seems hardly possible and if one tries to do so, it leads only to bad consequences.'
Lacan’s (1958) view is that 'the inability to sustain a praxis in an authentic manner result as often happens with humans, in the exercise of power':
Little (1951) approached the same issue from yet another angle, she wrote': It is [the] question of a paranoid or phobic attitude toward the analyst’s own feelings that lay the groundwork for the greater danger and difficulty in countertransference. The very real; fear of being flooded with feelings of any kind, rage, anxiety, love, etc., in relation to the patient and of being passive to it and at its mercy leads to an unconscious avoidance or denial, honest recognition of such feeling is. Essential to the analytic process, and the analysand is naturally sensitive to any insincerity in his analyst and will inevitably respond to it with hostility. He will, identify with the analyst in it (by introjection ) for denying his own feelings and will exploit it generally in every way possible, to the detriment of his analyst.
The recognition that the patient tunes into what the analyst feels, whether the analyst is open about this or not, and therefore is sensitive to any kind of inauthenticity, and has been emphasized by analysts as diverse as Rank, 1929; Fromm, 1941; Rioch, 1943; Winnicott, 1949; Fromm-Reichmann, 1950, 1952; Gitelson, 1952, 1962; Fairbairn, 1958; Tauber, 1954, 1979; Nacht, 1957, 1962; Wolstein, 1959; Loewald, 1960; Searles, 1965, 1979; Guntrip, 1969; Feiner, 1970; Singer, 1971, 1977; Levenson, 1972, 1983; Ehrenberg, 1974, 1982, 1984, 1985a, 1990. From such a perspective the position of Alexander (1956), as well as of some contemporary analysts, that there is benefit in assuming a deliberately predetermined attitude toward the patient would be considered untenable and to undermine the treatment process. It would preclude an opportunity to use the immediate experience as analytic data, and as a means to clarify very subtle interactive patterns that would otherwise elude awareness.
Nevertheless, the issue is not simply as one for being 'authentic', there are ways of being authentic that can burden the patients unnecessarily and that can derail rather than advance the analytic process.
If we accept the idea that denial or resistances to awareness of countertransference reactions can be detrimental to the process, and that awareness presents us with options we do not otherwise have, we are still faced with the question of how best to users this awareness. Use of countertransference data in any direct way with the patient is clearly a delicate matter, unless handled judiciously, it can be counterproductive, even traumatizing. Any use of countertransference requires sensitivity, tact, and skill. This applies to active use and to decisions to remain silent, since there are times when silence can be as destructive, insensitive, or inappropriate as verbal intervention (Tauber, 1954, 1979).
It is critical, therefore, that we recognize that believing in the theoretical value - even necessarily - of using countertransference is different from having the ability to do so constructively. In this vein, knowing one’s own limits can be the better part of wisdom. Nonetheless, the alternative of suppressing our feelings out of fear of mishandling a situation or of being seduced out of an analytic role may prevent analytic engagement. This kind of countertransference resistance may be a countertransference enactment reflecting our fears. Often countertransference resistance reflects the analyst’s sensitivity to the dangers of misuse of countertransference with a particular patient. What is required is learning how to refine our ability to use this resistance itself as valuable data.
An example of how our theoretical assumptions influence our relation to our own countertransference experience involves identification. The analyst who believes identification contributes to an ability to be empathic may not see identification as a possible countertransference issue, since it might be viewed as in keeping with an alleged desirable analytic attitude. Nonetheless, just as identification of the patient can be defensive, the same may be true of the analyst. Identification by either may be an expression of unconscious fantasies of fusion, merger, or wishes for sexual union. It may reflect desires to control, dominate, appropriate for oneself, devour, cannibalize, destroy, rape, violate, or desires to protect oneself of others from these dangers (Widlocher, 1985). Identification can be a means to flatter, idealize, seduce, or impress, as it can be a way to avoid the analysis or experiences or fantasies of love, tenderness, hate, anger or any other emotion that night be aroused. In some instances’ identification may actually serve to avoid a real engagement, or to avoid provoking the anger of the other, or to avoid awareness of other aspects of reactions of oneself or of others that might be different, even traumatic, to acknowledge. It can also serve to avoid exposing the full extent and depth of the patient’s actual pathology. What becomes apparent is that we can fail its patient though our 'empathic' identification, the very response often equated with the caring analyst (Levenson, 1972, Beres and Arlow, 1974).
Still, and all, being alert to the possibility that any effort to attend to one set of transference-countertransference issues is important, however valid, can be an extremely subtle form of countertransference resistance regarding other issues, and a form of enactment of other aspects of countertransference. Similarly, any decision about how countertransference is to be used can be motivated by genuine analytic concerns or by countertransference impulses, such as impulses to retaliate, gratify, withhold, impress, protect or to avoid other issues.
Yet, there are aspects of our reaction that can be quite elusive, such as feelings of great satisfaction or of defensiveness, or intruding thoughts or fantasies, or experiences of destructibility or inattentiveness. In such instances it is not only the countertransference that is at issue, but also the countertransference resistance itself.
In those instances in which the patient evokes the very reactions that are being attributed to the analyst, countertransference resistance precludes the possibility of clarifying these interactive subtleties and their symbolic meaning, and does relate in this way on the part of the patient reveal wishes to control and dominate the other? Is there an erotic aspect to this kind of interaction? Is it a kind of symbolic rape and violation? What fears might the patient is defending against by relating in this way? To what extent might it be in the service of an effort on the patient’s part to cure himself or herself, or even the analyst?
Since countertransference resistance precludes understanding, we must gradually turn our attention to ways of becoming aware of it whatever its form. One way is to increase our sensitivity to shifts in our own sense of identity as we work (Grinberg, 1962, 1979 and Searle, 1965, 1979). Another is to attend to the patient’s experience and interpretations of the countertransference (Little, 1951, 1957, Langs, 1976 and Hoffman, 1983). In that if we were to consider that the development of the transference is always to some extent shaped by the participation of the analyst, then it follows that the transference itself can also be a clue to aspects of our own countertransference of which we ourselves might be unaware.
One could ask, would awareness of these possibilities to accelerate the analytic work, or to what extent is it possibilities that a mutual effort to address all the complexities of what was to go on between patient and analyst have happened if any proceeding difficulties were to be involved as could prove critical to the work. So, is my belief that reason-sensitivities to the dangers of countertransference resistance can help in the use of countertransference to greater analytic advance.
Despite increasing agreement about the importance of countertransference as a vital source of analytic data, there is much controversy about whether countertransference should be used in direct ways with the patient, and if so what constitutes optimal use. There are no questions that there are real dangers of misuse, Heimann’s (1950) warning against the analyst’s undisciplined discharge of feelings to avoid the evident dangers of acting out, wild analysis, manipulation, and the intrusive imposition of the analyst’s residual pathology are as valid now as it was then. She emphasized that the analyst must be able to 'sustain the feelings stirred in him, as opposed to discharging them (as does the patient) to subordinate them to the analytic task.' Now, we also know that remaining silent about our experience can be as much a countertransference enactment as any other kind of analytic response. There is no way to avoid countertransference, and attempting to deny its power can be dangerous. The question at this point is not whether to use countertransference but how.
In considering how best to use countertransference, distinguishing it between the reactive dimension of countertransference is useful, which relates to what we find ourselves feeling in response to the patient that is often a surprise rather than a choice, and the kind of active response that takes into account this reactive response as data to be used toward informing a considered and deliberate clinical intervention. Silence, or any other reaction, can fall into either category.
The point is that active use of countertransference requires a thoughtful decision process about how to use awareness of one’s 'reactive' countertransference response to inform that will then become a considered response.
Sometimes the analyst might actively decide to express the countertransference impulse in some direct way. In other instances an active decision may be made to remain silent. At times acknowledgement and discussion of a countertransference impulse, or of one’s own difficulties managing or understanding one’s reaction, or of the thought process involved in one’s deliberations about how to use countertransference data, are potentially constructive options.
The point here, is that the amount of overt activity that takes place is not indicative of whether the analyst is actively or passively responding to his or her impulse. In fact, the same overt response can reflect either kind of internal process.
That is, not to imply that every response must be a considered one. There are times when our inability to stay on top of our reactions - even our losing it with a patient - may be useful. As Winnicott (1949, 1969) notes. The unflappable analyst may be useless when knowing that he can make an impact is essential for the patient. He cautions that there are times when an implacable analyst may actually provoke destructive forms of acting out, including suicide.
Nor is it to imply that the analyst must 'understand' his countertransference reactions to use them constructively. In some instances’ willingness to let the patient know what the analyst is experiencing, even if the analyst may not at the time understand his own reaction, can facilitate the analytic work, simply because of the kind of collaborative possibilities it structures. Even when the analyst feels at a loss, and when caution is appropriate, acknowledging that one feels at a loss can be an active use of countertransference. It emphasizes the necessity for a collaborative relationship and establishes a level of honesty and openness that can be significant in and of it. It also leaves the door open for a creative gesture from the patient and allows the patient to help clarify what the issues may be when the analyst may not have a clue. In some instances this is the only way to reach certain dimensions of experience and to realize the unique possibilities of the analytic moment.
This kind of process provides an opportunity to realize that expressing it is possible and experience feelings one may not understand and to get 'close' without fear of losing control. As it adds a new dimension to the analytic interaction, it can lead to new levels of intimacy and to unexpected kinds of interactive developments. In addition, it establishes that understanding the significance of the experience of each may at times require the collaboration of the other.
The question here, is how to decide at any given moment what use of countertransference will best advance the work. At times the question also may be how to remain analytically effective and alive when we are in the grip of the kind of countertransference that seems to threaten our ability to do so, such as when the patient may have deadening impact on us, or when we may find ourselves involved in enactments without understanding how or why.
The analyst’s ability to use countertransference constructively, particularly in the face of more severe kinds of pathology, is often the factor that determines whether an analysis will have a chance of succeeding.
Using countertransference is in many ways as having inevitable structures as more than a personal kind of engagement than might occur otherwise. The impact of this cannot be overlooked. The patient is confronted with the analyst as a human being, with sensitivities, vulnerabilities and limitations. This allows the patient to recognize the necessity for his own active collaboration. The unique kind of intimacy that is so structured has effects beyond the content of what is exchanged, as these effects must be explored in what becomes an endless progression that continues to open on itself, often in very exciting and lively ways.
The emphasis is on process and experience, not on contentual representation, as instead of feeling limited by our subjectivity and trying to defend against it we begin to use it as a powerful source of data and as a basis for opening a unique analytic exploration that can lead to places neither patient nor analyst could have predicted beforehand which neither could possibly have reached alone.
Freud described transference as both the greatest danger and the best tool for analytic work. He refers to the work of making the repressed past conscious. Besides, these two implied meanings of transference, Freud gives it a third meaning: It is in the transference that the analysand may relive the past under better conditions and in this way rectify pathological decisions and destinies. Likewise three meanings of countertransference may be differentiated. It too may be the greatest danger and precisely when an important tool for understanding, an assistance to the analyst in his functions as interpreter. Moreover, it affects the analyst’s behaviour, it interferes with his action as object of the patient’s re-experience in that new fragment of life that is the analytic situation, in which the patient should meet with greater understanding and objectivity than he found in the reality or fantasy of his childhood. What have present-day writers to say about the problem of countertransference? Lorand writes mainly about the dangers of countertransference for analytic work. He also points out the importance of allowing for countertransference reactions, for they may indicate some important subject to be worked through with the patient. He emphasizes the necessity to the analyst’s being always aware of his countertransference, and discusses specific problems such as the conscious desire to heal, the relief analysis may afford the analyst from his own problems, and narcissism and the interference of personal motives in clinical purposes. He also emphasizes that fact that these problems of countertransference concern not only the candidate but also the experienced analyst.
Winnicott is specifically concerned with 'objective and justified hatred' in countertransference, particularly in the treatment of psychotics. He considers how the analyst should manage this emotion: Should he, for example, bear his hatred in silence or communicate it to the analysand? Thus, Winnicott is concerned with a particular countertransference reaction insofar as it affects the behaviour of the analyst, who is the analysand’s object in his re-experience of childhood.
Little discusses countertransference as a disturbance to understanding and interpretation and as it influences the analyst’s behaviour with decisive effect upon the patient’s re-experience of his childhood. She stresses the analyst’s tendency to repeat the behaviour of the patient’s parents and to satisfy certain needs of his own, not those of the analysand. Once, again, Little emphasizes that one must admit one’s countertransference to the analysand and interpret it, and must do so not only in regarding to 'objective' countertransference reaction (Winnicott) but also to 'subjective' ones.
Annie Reich is chiefly interested in countertransference as a source of disturbances in analysis. She clarifies the concept of countertransference and differentiates ‘two types’ of 'countertransference in the proper sense' and 'the analyst’s using the analysis for acting-out purposes.' She investigates the cause of these phenomena, and seeks to understand the conditions’ that lead to good, excellent, or poor results in analytic activity.
Gitelson distinguishes between the analyst’s ‘reaction to the patient as a whole’ (the analyst’s ‘transference’) and the analyst’s ‘reaction to partial aspects of the patient’ (the analyst’s ‘countertransference’). He is concerned also with the problems of intrusion, when such intrusion occurs the countertransference should be dealt with by analyst and patient working together, thus agreeing with Little.
Weigert favours analysis of countertransference as far as it intrudes into the analytic situation, and she advises, in advanced stages of treatment, less reserve I the analyst’s behaviour and more spontaneous display of countertransference.
Noticeable proceeding will have their intent be to amplify specific remarks on countertransference as a tool for understanding the mental processes of the patient (including especially his transference reaction) - their content, their mechanisms, and their intensities. Awareness of countertransference helps one to understand what should be interpreted and when. Also, we are to consider the influence of countertransference upon the analyst’s behaviour toward the analysand - behaviour that affects decisively the position of the analyst as object of the re-experience of childhood, and affecting its process of a cure. First, the consideration based briefly countertransference in the history of psychoanalysis. We meet with a strange fact and a striking contrast. The discovery by Freud to countertransference and its great importance in therapeutic work produces the institution of didactic analysis that became the basis and centre of psychoanalytic training. The, countertransference received little scientific consideration over the next forty years. Only during the last few years has the situation changed, rather suddenly, and countertransference becomes a subject examined frequently and with thoroughness. How is one to explain this initial recognition, this neglect, and this recent change? Is there not reason to question the success of didactic analysis in fulfilling its function if this very problem, the discovery of which led to the creation of didactic analysis, has had so little scientific elaboration?
These questions are clearly important, and those who have personally witnessed a great part of the development of psychoanalysis in the last forty years have the best right to answer them. One suggestion would be to explain the lack of scientific investigation of countertransference must be due to rejections by analyst of their own countertransference - a rejection that represents unresolved struggles with their own primitive anxiety and quilt. These struggles are closely connected with those infantile ideals that survive because of deficiencies in the didactic analysis of just those transference problems that latter effect the analyst’s countertransference. These deficiencies in the didactic analysis are reciprocally in part due to countertransference problems insufficiently solved in the didactic analyst. Thus, we are in a vicious circle, but we can see where a breach must be made. In that, we must begin by revision of our feelings about our own countertransference and try to overcome our own infantile ideals more thoroughly, accepting more fully the fact that we are still children and neurotics even when we are adults and analysts. Only in this way by better overcoming our rejection of countertransference - can we achieve the same result in candidates.
The insufficient dissolution of these idealization and underlying anxieties and quilt feelings’ leads to special difficulties when the child becomes an adult and the analysand and analyst, for the analyst unconsciously requires of himself that he be fully identified with these ideals. Thus, and so that is at least partly so that the oedipus complex of the child toward its parents, and of the patient toward his analyst, has been so much more fully considered than that of the parents toward their children and of the analyst toward the analysand. For the same basic reason transference has been dealt with much more than countertransference.
The fact that countertransference conflicts determine the deficiencies in the analysis of transference becomes clear if we recall that transference is the expression of the internal object relations; for understanding of transference will depend on the analyst’s capacity to identify himself both with the analysand’s impulses and defences, and with his internal objects, and to be conscious of these identifications. This ability in the analyst will in turn depend upon the degree to which he accepts his countertransference, for his countertransference is also based on identification with the patient’s id and ego and his internal object. One might also say that transference is the expression of the patient’s relations with the fantasied and real countertransference of the analyst. For just as Countertransference is the psychological response to the analysand’s real and imaginary transferences, and in addition the transference response to the analyst’s imaginary and real countertransference. Analysis of the patient’s fantasies about countertransference, which in the widest sense constitute the cause and consequence of the transference, is an essential part of the analysis of the transference. Perception on the patient’s fantasies regarding countertransference will depend in turn upon the degree to which the analyst himself perceives his countertransference processes - on the continuity and depth of his conscious contact with himself.
Before any illumination is drawn upon these, statements, a brief's mention will appreciatively be to consider one of those ideals in its specifically psychoanalytic expression: The ideal of the analyst’s objectivity. No one, of course, denies the existence of subjective factors in the analyst and of countertransference, however, there seems to exist of an important difference between what is generally acknowledged in practice and the real state of affairs. The first distortion of truth in ‘the myth of the analytic situation; is that analysis, is an interaction between a sick person and an apparently healthy one? The truth is that it is an interaction between two personalities, in both of which the ego is under pressure from the id, the superego and the external world, each personality has its internal and external dependancies, anxieties, and pantological defences, each is also a child with its internal parents and each of these whole personalities - that of the analysand and that of the analyst - responds to every event of the analytic situation. Besides these similarities between the personalities of analyst and analysand, there also exist differences, and one of these are in 'objectivity.' The analyst’s objectivity consists mainly in a certain attitude toward his own subjectivity and countertransference. The neurotic (obsessive) ideal of objectivity leads to repression and blocking of subjectivity and so the apparent fulfilment leads the myth of the ‘analyst without anxiety or anger’. The other neurotic extreme is that of ‘drowning’ in the countertransference. True objectivity is based upon a form of internal division that enables the analyst to make himself (his own countertransference and subjectivity) the object of his continuous observation and analysis. This position also enables him to be ‘objective’ toward the analysand.
The term countransference has been given various meanings. They may be summarized by the statement that for some authors’ countertransference includes everything that arises in the analyst as psychological response to the analysand, whereas for others not all this should be called countertransference. Some, for example, prefer to reserve the term for what is infantile in the relationship of the analyst with his analysand, while others make different limitations (Annie Reich and Gitelson). Therefore efforts to differentiate away from each other certain of the complex phenomena of Countertransference lead to confusion or to unproductive discussions of terminology. Freud invented the term countertransference in evident analogy to transference, which he defined as reimprisons or re-editions of childhood experiences, including greater or lesser modifications of the original experience. Therefore, one frequently uses the term transference for the entirety of the psychological attitude of the analysand toward the analyst. We know, to be sure, that really external qualities of the analytic situation in general and of the analyst in particular have important influence on the relationship of the analysand with the analyst, but we also know that all these present factors are experienced according to the past and fantasy, - according, that is to say, to a transference predisposition. As determinants of the transference neurosis and, overall, of the psychological situation of the analysand toward the analyst, we have both the transference predisposition and the present real and especially analytic experiences, the transference in its diverse expressions being the resultant of these two factors.
Analogously, in the analyst there is the countertransference predisposition and the present real, and especially analytic, experiences. The countertransference is the resultant. It is precisely this fusion of present and past, the continuo as an initiate connection of reality and fantasy, of external and internal, conscious and unconscious, that demands a concept embracing all the analysts' psychological responses, and renders it advisable, also, to keep for this totality of response the accustomed term countertransference. Where it is necessary for greater clarity one, might speak of ‘totality countertransference. Then differentiate the separate within it one aspect or another. One of its aspects consists precisely of what is transferred in countertransference; this is the part that originates in an earlier time and that is especially the infantile and primitive part within total countertransference. Another of these aspects - closely connected with the previous one - is what is neurotic in countertransference; its main characteristics are the unreal anxiety and the pathological defences. Under certain circumstances’ one may also speak of a countertransference neurosis.
To clarify better the concept of countertransference, one might start from the question of what happen, in general terms, in the analyst in his relationship with the patient. The first answer might be; Everything happens that can happen in one personality faced with another, but this says so much that it says hardly anything. We take a step forward by bearing in mind that in the analyst there is a tendency that normally predominates in his relationship with the patient; it is the tendency on his function to being an analyst that of understanding what is happening in the patient. With this tendency there exist toward the patient nearly all the other possible tendencies, fears, and other feelings that one person may have toward another. The intention to understand creates a certain predisposition, a predisposition to identify with the analysand, which is the basis of comprehension. The analyst may achieve this aim by identifying his ego with the patient’s ego or, to put it more clearly, although with a certain terminological inexactitude, by identifying each part of his personality with the corresponding psychological part in the patient - his id with the patient’s id, his ego with the ego, his superego with the superego, accepting these identifications in his consciousness. However, this does not always happen, nor is it all that happens. Apart from these identifications, which might be called concordant (or homologous) identifications, there exist also highly important identifications of the analyst’s ego with the patient’s internal objects, for example, with the superego. Adapting an expression from Helene Deutsch, they might be called complementary identifications. Here, in addition we may add the following notes.
1. The concordant identification is based on introjection and projection, or, in other words, on the resonance of the exterior in the interior, on recognition of what belongs to another as one’s own (‘this part of you is me’) and on the equation of what is one’s own with what belongs to another (‘this part of me is you’). The processes inherent in the complementary identifications are the same, but they refer to the patient’s objects. The greater the conflicts between the parts of the analyst’s personality, the greater are his difficulties in carrying out the concordant identifications in their entirety.
2. The complementary identifications are produced by the fact that the patient treats the analysts as an internal (projected) object, and in consequence the analyst feels treated as such; that is, he identifies himself with the destiny of the concordant identification; it seems that to the degree to which the analyst fails in the concordant identification and rejects them, certain complementary identifications become intensified. Clearly, rejection of a part or tendency in the analyst himself, - his aggressiveness, for instance, - may lead to a rejection of the patent’s aggressiveness (by which this concordant identification fails) and that such a situation leads to a greater complementary identification with the patient’s rejecting object, toward which this aggressive impulse is directed.
3. Current usage applies the term ‘countertransference’ to the complementary identifications only; that is to say, to those psychological processes in the analysis by which, because he feels treated as and partially identifies himself with an internal object of the patient, the patient becomes an internal (projected) object of the analyst. Usually excluded from the concept countertransference are the concordant identifications, - those psychological contents that arise in the analysts because of the empathy achieved with the patient and that really reflects and reproduce the latter’s psychological contents. Perhaps following this usage would be best, but there are some circumstances that make it unwise to do so. In the first place, some authors include the concordant identifications in the concept of countertransference. One is thus faced with the choice of entering upon a terminological discussion or of accepting the term in this wider sense. That these various reasons, the wider sense is to be referred. If one considers that their analyst’s concordant identifications (his ‘understanding’) are a sort of reproduction of his own oast processes, especially of his own infancy, and that this reproduction or re-experience is carried out as response to stimuli from the patient, one will be more ready to include the concordant identifications in the concept of countertransference. Moreover, the concordant identifications are closely connected with the complementary ones (and thus with ‘countertransference’ in the popular sense), and this fact renders advisably a differentiation but not a total separation of the terms. Finally, it should be borne in mind that the disposition of empathy, - that is, to concordant identification - springs largely from the sublimated positive countertransference, which love-wise relates empathy with countertransference in the wider sense. All this suggests, then, the acceptance of countertransference as the totality of the analyst’s psychological response to the patient. If we accept this broad definition of countertransference, the difference between its two aspects mentioned that it must still be defined. On the one hand we have the analyst as subject and the patient as object of knowledge, which in a certain sense annuls the 'object relationship'. Properly speaking, and that arises in its stead the approximate union or identity between the subject’s and the object’s parts (experiences, impulses, defences). The aggregate of the processes concerning that union might be designated, where necessary, ‘concordant Countertransference’. On the other hand we have an object relationship much like many others, a real ‘transference’; in which the analyst ‘repeats’ experiences, the patient representing internal objects of the analyst. The aggregate of these experiences, which also exist always ad continually, might be termed Complementary Countertransference.
A brief example may be opportune here. Consider a patient who threatens the analyst with suicide. In such situations there sometimes occurs rejection on the concordant identifications by the analyst and an intensification of his identification with the threatened object. The anxiety that such a threat can cause the analyst may lead to various reactions or defence mechanisms within him - for instance, annoyance with the patient. This - his anxiety and annoyance - would be content of the ‘complementary countertransference’. The perception of his annoyance may, in turn, originate quilt feelings in the analyst. These lead to desires for reparation and to intensifications of the ‘concordant’ identifications and ‘concordant countertransference.
Moreover, these two aspects of ‘total countertransference’ have their analogy in transference. Sublimated positive transference is the main and indispensable motive force for the patient’s work; it does not a technical problem. Transference becomes a ‘subject’, according to Freud’s words, mainly when 'it becomes resistance,' when, because of resistance, it has become sexual or negative. Analogously, sublimated positive countertransference is the main and indispensable motive force in the analyst’s work (disposing him to the continued concordant identification), and countertransference becomes a technical problem or ‘subject’ mainly when it becomes sexual or negative. This occurs (to an intense degree) principally as a resistance - here, the analyst that is to say, as countertransference.
This leads to the problem of the dynamics of countertransference. We may already discern that the tree factors designated by Freud and determinant in the dynamics of transference (the impulse to repeat infantile clichés of experience, the libidinal needs, and resistance) are also decisive for the dynamics of Countertransference, however.
Every transference situation provokes a countertransference situation, which arises out of the analyst’s identification of himself with the analysand’s (internal) objects (this is the ‘complementary countertransference’). These countertransference situations may be repressed or emotionally blocked but probably they cannot be avoided; certainly they should not be avoided if full understanding is to be achieved. These countertransference reactions are governed by the laws of the general and individual unconscious. Among these the laws of talion is especially important. Thus, for example, every positive transference situation is answered by a positive countertransference; to every negative transference there responds, in one part of the analyst, a negative countertransference. It is important that the analyst is conscious of this law, for awareness of it is fundamental to avoid ‘drowning’ in the countertransference. If he is not aware of it he can avoid entering the vicious circle of the analysand’s neurosis, which will hinder or even prevent the work of therapy.
A simplified example: If the patient’s neurosis centres round a conflict with his introjected father, he will project the latter upon the analyst and treat him as his father; the analyst will feel treated as such - he will feel badly treated - and he will react internally, in a part of his personality, according to the treatment he receives. If he fails to be aware of this reaction, his behaviour will inevitably be affected by it, and he will renew the situation that, to a greater or lesser degree, helped to establish the analysand’s neurosis. Therefore, it is very important that the analyst develops within himself an ego observer of his countertransference reactions, which is, naturally, continuous. Perception of these countertransference reactions will help to become conscious of the continuous transference situations of the patient and interpret them rather than be unconsciously ruled by these reactions, as not as seldom to happen. A well-known example is the ‘revengeful silence’ of the analyst. If the analyst is unaware of these reactions there is danger that the patient will repeat, in his transference experience, the vicious circle brought about by the projection and introjection of ‘bad objects’ (in reality neurotic ones) and the consequent pathological anxieties and defences, but transference interpretation made possibly by the analyst’s awareness of his countertransference experience make it possible to open important breaches in this vicious circle.
To return to the previous example: If the analyst is conscious of what the projection of the father-imago upon him provokes in his own countertransference, he can more easily make the patient conscious of this projection and the consequent mechanisms. Interpretation of these mechanisms will show the patient that the present reality is not identical with his inner perceptions (for, it was, the analyst would not interpret and otherwise act as an analyst); the patient then introjects a reality better than his inner world. This sort of rectification does not take place when the analyst is under the sway of his unconscious countertransference.
Let us, least of mention, consider some application to these principles. To return to the question of what the analyst does during the session and what happens within him, one might reply, at first thought, that the analyst listens. Still, this is not completely true: He listens most of the time, or wishes to listen, but is variably doing so, Ferenczi refers to this fact and expresses the opinion that the analyst’s distractibility is unimportant, for the patient at such moments must intuitively be certainly in resistance. Ferenczi’s remark (which dates from the year 1918) sounds like an echo from the era wheen the analyst was mainly interested in the repressed impulses. Because now that we attempt to analyse resistance, the patient’s manifestations of resistance are as significant as any other of his productions. At any rate, Ferenczi here refers to a countertransference response and deduces from it the analysand’s psychological situation. He says '. . . we have unconsciously reacted to the emptiness and futility of the associations given now the withdrawal of the conscious charge.' The situation might be described as one of mutual withdrawal. The analyst’s withdrawal is a response to the analysand’s withdrawal - which, however, is a response to an imagined or really psychological position of the analyst. If we have withdrawn - if we are not listening but are thinking of something else - we may use this event in the service of the analysis like any other information we find. The quilt we may feel over such a withdrawal is just as utilizable analytically as any other countertransference reaction. Ferenczi’s next words, 'the danger of the doctor’s falling asleep, . . . need not be regarded as grave because we awake at the first occurrence important for the treatment,' are clearly intended to appease this quilt. Nevertheless, to better than an allay than the analyst’s quilt would be to use it to promote the analysis - and so as to use the quilt would be the best way of alleviating it. In fact, we encounter here a cardinal problem of the relation between transference and countertransference, and of the therapeutic process in general. For the analyst’s withdrawal is only an example of how the unconscious of one person responds to the unconscious of another. This response seems in part to be governed, as far as we identify ourselves with unconscious objects of the analysand, siding the law of talion; and, as far as this; law unconsciously influences the analyst, there is danger of a vicious circle of actions between them, for the analysand as responds 'talionically' in his turn, and so on without end.
Looking more closely, we see that the 'talionic response' or 'identification with the aggressor' (the frustrating patient) is a complex process. Such a psychological process in the analyst usually starts with a feeling of displeasure or of some anxiety as a response to this aggression (frustration) and, because of this feeling, the analyst identifies himself with the 'aggressor'. By the term 'aggressor' we must designate not only the patient but also some internal object of the analyst (especially his own superego or the internal persecutor) now projected on the patient. This identification with the aggressor, or persecutor, causes a feeling of quilt; probably it always does so, although awareness of the quilt may be repressed. For what happens is, on a small scale, a process of melancholia, just as Freud described it: The object has partially abandoned us; we identify ourselves with the lost object, and then we accuse the introjected 'bad objects - in other words, we have quilt feedings. This may be sensed in Ferenczi’s remark quoted above, in which mechanisms are at work designed to protect the analyst against these quilt feelings: Denial of quilt (‘the danger is not grave’) and a certain accusation against the analysand for the 'emptiness' and 'futility' of his associations. Onto which this way becomes a vicious circle - a kind of paranoid ping-pong, has entered. The analytic situation.
Two situations will illustrate the frequent occurrence in both the complementary and the concordant identifications and the vicious circle that these simulations may cause.
(1). One transference situation of regular occurrences consists in the patient’s seeing in the analyst his own superego. The analyst identifies himself with the id and ego of the patient and with the patient’s dependence upon his superego. He also identifies himself with the same superego situation in which the patient places him - and experiences in this way the domination of the superego over the patient’s ego. The relation of the ego to the superego is, at bottom, as depressive and paranoid situations, the relation of the superego to the ego is, on the same plane, a manic one as far as this term may be used to designate the dominating, controlling, and accusing attitude of the superego toward the ego. In this sense we may broadly speak, that to a 'depressive-paranoid' transference in the analysand there corresponds - as for the complementary identification - a 'manic' countertransference in the analyst. This, in turn, may entail various fears and quilt feelings.
(2). When the patient, in defence against this situation, identifies himself with the superego, he may place the analyst in the situation of the dependent and incriminated ego. The analyst will not only identify himself with this position of the patient; he will experience the situation with the content the patient gives it; he will feel subjugated and accused, and may react to some degree with anxiety and quilt. To a 'manic' transference situation (of the type called mania for reproaching) there corresponds, then - regarding the complementary identification - a 'depressive-paranoid' countertransference situation.
The analyst will normally experience these situations with only a part of his being. Leaving another part free to take note of them in a way suitable for the treatment. Perception of such a countertransference situation by the analyst and his understanding of it as a psychological response to a certain transference situation will enable him the better to grasp the transference when it is active. It is precisely these situations and the analyst’s behaviour regarding them, and in particular his interpretations of them, that are important for the process of therapy, for they are the moments when the vicious circle within which the necrotic habitually move - by projecting his inner world outside and reintrojecting this world - is or is not interrupted. Moreover, at these decisive points the vicious circle may be re-enforced by the analyst, if he is unaware of having entered it.
A brief example: an analysand repeats with the analyst his 'neurosis of failure,' closing himself up to every interpretation or repressing it at once, reproaching the analyst for the uselessness of the analysis, foreseeing nothing better in the future, continually declaring his complete indifference to everything. The analyst interprets the patient’s position toward him, and its origin, in its various aspects. He shows the patient his defence against the danger of becoming overly dependent, of being abandoned, or being tricked, or of suffering counter-aggression by the analyst, if he abandons his armour and indifference toward the analyst. He interprets to the patient his projection of bad internal objects and his subsequent sado-masochistic behaviour ion the transference; his need of punishment; his triumph and 'masochistic revenge' against the transferred patients; his defence against the 'depressive position' by means of schizoid, paranoid, and manic defences (Melanie Klein): And he interprets the patient’s rejection of a bond that in the unconscious has homosexual significance. Nevertheless, it may happen that all these interpretations, in spite of being directed to the central resistances and connected with the transference situation, suffer the same fate for the same reasons; they fall into the 'whirl in a void' of the 'neurosis of failure'. Now the decisive moments arrive. The analyst, subdued by the patient’s resistance, may begin to feel anxious over the possibility of failure and feel angry with the patient. When this occurs in the analyst, the patient feels it coming, for his own 'aggressiveness' and other reactions have provoked it; consequently he fears the analyst’s anger. If the analyst, threatened by failure, or to put in more precisively threatened by his own super-ego or by his owe archaic objects that have found an agent provocateur in the patient, acts under the influence of these internal objects and of his paranoid and depressive anxieties, the patient again finds himself confronting a reality like that of his real or fantasized childhood experiences and like that of his inner world. So the vicious circle continues and may even be re-enforced. Yet if the analyst grasps the importance of this situation, if, through his own anxiety or anger, he comprehends what is happening in the analysand, and if he overcomes, thanks to the new insight, his negative feelings and interprets what has happened in the analysand, being now in this new positive counter-transference situation, then he may have made a breach - be it large or small - in the vicious circle.
All the same, it continues to be considered that the phenomena of countertransference experiences are divided into two classes. One might be designed 'countertransference thought', the other 'transference positions' for example just cited may serve as illustration of this latter class: The essence of these example lies in the fact that the analyst feels anxiety and is angry with the analysand - that is to say, he is in a certain countertransference 'position'.
Further to explicate upon countertransference relations is that a potential patient is started of a session and wishes to pay his fees upfront. He gives the analyst a thousand-peso note and asks for change. The analyst happens to have his money in another room and goes out to fetch it, leaving the thousand pesos upon his desk. While between leaving and returning, the fantasy occurs to him that the analysand will take back the money and say that the analyst took it away with him. On his return he finds the thousand pesos where he left it. When the account has been settled, the analysand lies down and tells the analyst that when he was left alone he had fantasies of keeping the money, of kissing the note goodbye, and so on. The analyst’s fantasy was based upon what he already knew of the patient, who in previous sessions had expressed a strong distinction to pay up front. The identity of the analyst’s fantasy and the patient’s fantasy of keeping the money may be explained as springing from a connection between the two unconsciousness, a connection that might be regarded as a 'psychological symbiosis' between the two personalities. To the analysand’s wish to take money from him (already expressed often), the analyst reacts by identifying himself both with this desire and with the object toward which the desire is directed. Hence appears his fantasy of being robbed. For these identifications to come about there must evidently exist a potential identity. One may presume that every possible psychological constellation in the patient also exists in the analyst, and the constellation that correspond to the patient’s is brought into play in the analyst. A symbiosis result, and now in the analyst spontaneously occur thoughts corresponding to the psychological constellation in the patient.
In fantasies of this type just described and in the example of the analyst angry with his patient, we are dealing with identifications with the id, with the ego, and with the object of the analysand: In both cases, then, it is a matter of Countertransference reactions. However, there is an important difference between one situation and the other, and this difference does not seem to lie only in the emotional intensity. Before elucidating this difference, it should be marked and noted that the Countertransference reaction that appears in the last example (the fantasy about the thousand pesos) should also be used as a means to further the analysis. It is, moreover, a typical example of those 'spontaneous thoughts' to which Freud and others refer in advising the analyst to keep his attention 'floating' and in stressing the importance of these thoughts for understanding the patient. The countertransference reactions exemplified by the story of the thousand pesos are characterized by the fact that they threaten no danger to the analyst’s objective attitude of an observer. That, the danger is rather than the analyst will not pay sufficient attention to these thoughts or will fail to use them for understanding and interpretation. The patient’s corresponding ideas are not always conscious, from his own Countertransference 'thoughts' and feelings the analyst may guess what is repressed or rejected. Recalling again our usage of the term is important 'Countertransference', for many writers, perhaps the majority, means by not these thoughts of the analyst but rather than other class of reactions, the 'Countertransference positions.' This is one reason that differentiating these two kinds of reaction is useful.
The outstanding difference between the two lies in the degree to which the ego is involved in the experience. In one case, the reactions are experienced as thoughts, free association, or fantasies, with no great emotional intensity and frequently as if they were moderately foreign to the ego. In the other case, the analyst’s ego is involved in the Countertransference experience. The experience is felt by him with greater intensity and as reality, and here danger of his 'drowning' in this experience. In the former example of the analyst who gets angry because of the analysand’s resistances, the analysand is felt as really based by one part of the analyst (‘countertransference position’), although the latter does not express his anger. Now these two kinds of Countertransference reactions differ, because they have different origins. The reaction experienced by the analyst as thought or fantasy arises from the existence of an analogous situation in the analysand - that is, from his readiness in perceiving and communicating his inner situation (as happens with the thousand pesos) - whereas, the reaction experienced with great intensity, even as reality, by the analyst arises from acting out by the analysand (as with the ‘neurosis of failure’). Undoubtedly there are also the same analysts, he is a factor that helps to decide this difference. The analyst has, it seems, two ways of responding. He may respond to some situation by perceiving his reaction, while to others he responds by acting out (alloplastically or autoplastically). Which type of response occurs in the analyst depends partly on his own neurosis, on his inclination to anxiety, on his defence mechanisms, and especially on his tendencies to repeat (act out) instead of making conscious. It is here that we encounter a factor that determines the dynamics of countertransference. It is the one Freud emphasized as determining the special intensity of transference in analysis, and it is also responsible for the special intensity of countertransference.
The great intensity of certain countertransference reactions is to be explained by the existence in the analyst of pathological defences against the increase of archaic anxieties and unresolved inner conflicts. Transference, becomes intense not only because it serves as a resistance to remembering, as Freud says, but also because it serves as a defence against a danger within the transference experience itself. In other words, the 'transference resistance' is frequently a repetition of defences that must be intensified lest a catastrophe is repeated in transference. The same is true of countertransference. Clearly, these catastrophes are related to becoming aware of certain aspects of one’s own instincts. Take, for instance, the analyst who becomes anxious and inwardly angry over the intense masochism of the analysand within the analytic situation. Such masochism frequently rouses old paranoid and depressive anxieties and guilt feelings in the analyst, who, faced with the aggression directed by the patient against his own ego, and faced with the effects of this aggression, finds himself in his unconscious confronted anew with his early crimes. It is often just this childhood conflict of the analyst, with their aggression, that led him into this profession in which he tries to repair the objects of the aggression and to overcome or deny his guilt. Because of the patient’s strong masochism, this defence, which consists of the analyst’s therapeutic action, fails and the analyst is threatened with the return of the catastrophe, the encounter with the destroyed object. In this way the intensity of the 'negative countertransference' (the anger with the patient) usually increases because of the failure of the countertransference defence (the therapeutic action) and the analyst’s subsequent increase of anxiety over a catastrophe in the countertransference experience (the destruction of the object).
The 'abolition of rejection' in analysis determines the dynamics of transference and, in particular, the intensity of the transference of the 'rejecting' internal objects (in the first place, of the superego). The 'abolition of rejection' begins with the communication to the analysand, and here we have an important difference between his situation and that of the analysand and between the dynamics of transference and those of countertransference. However, this difference is not so great as might be at first supposed, for two reasons: First, because it is not necessary that the free associations be expressed for projections and transferences to take place, and secondly, because the analyst expresses of certain associations of a personal nature even when he does not seem to do so. These communications begin, one might say, with the plate on the front door that says Psychoanalysis or Doctor. What motive (about the unconscious) would the analyst have for wanting to cure if it were not he that made the patient ill? In this way the patient is already, simply by being a patient, the creditor, the accuser, the
'Superego' of the analyst, and the analyst is his debtor.
To what transference situation does the analyst usually react with a particular countertransference? Study of this question would enable one, in practice, to deduce the transference situations from the countertransference reactions. Next we might ask, to what imago or conduct of the object - to what imagined or real countertransference situation - does the patient respond with a particular transference? Many aspects of these problems have been amply studied by psychoanalysis, but the specific problem of the relation of transference and countertransference in analysis has received little attention.
The subject is so broad that we can discuss only a few situations and those incompletely, restricting ourselves to certain aspects. Therefore, we must choose for discussion only the most important countertransference situations, those that most disturb the analyst’s task and that clarify important points in the double neurosis, that arise in the analytic situation - a neurosis usually of very different intensity in the two participants.
1. What is the significance of countertransference anxiety?
Countertransference anxiety may be described in general and simplified terms as of depressive or paranoid character. In depressive anxiety the inherent danger consisted in having destroyed the analysand or made him ill. This anxiety may arise to a greater degree when the analyst faces the danger that the patient may commit suicide, and to a lesser degree when there is deterioration or danger of deterioration in the patient’s state of health. Yet the patient’s simple failure to improve and his suffering and depression may also provoke depressive anxieties in the analyst. These anxieties usually increase the desire to heal the patient.
In referring to paranoid anxieties differentiating it between is important 'direct' and 'indirect' countertransference. In direct countertransference the anxieties are caused by danger of an intensification of aggression from the patient himself. Indirect Countertransference the anxieties are caused by danger of aggression from third parties onto whom the analyst has made his chief transference - for instance, the members of the analytic society, for the future of the analyst’s object relationship with the society is part determined by his professional performance. The feared aggression may take several forms, such as criticism, reproach, hatred, mockery, contempt, or bodily assault. In the unconscious it may be the danger of being killed or castrated or otherwise menaced in an archaic way.
The transference situations of the patient to whom the depressive anxieties of the analyst are a response are, above all, those in which the patient, through an increase in frustration (or danger of frustration) and in the aggression that it evokes, turns the aggression against himself. We are dealing, on one plane, with situations in which the patient defends himself against a paranoid fear of retaliation by anticipating this danger, by carrying out himself and against himself part of the aggression feared from the object transferred onto the analyst, and threatening to carry it out still further. In this psychological sense it is really the analyst who attacks and destroys the patient, and the analyst’s depressive anxiety corresponds to this psychological reality. In other words, the countertransference depressive anxiety arises, above all, as a response to the patient’s 'masochistic defence' - which also represents a revenge (‘masochistic revenge’) - and as a response to the danger of its continuing. On another plane this turning of the aggression against himself is carried out by the patient because of his own depressive anxieties; he turns it against himself to protect himself against re-experiencing the destruction of the objects and to protect these from his own aggression.
The paranoid anxiety in 'direct' countertransference is a reaction to the danger arising from various aggressive attitudes of the patient himself. The analysis of these attitudes shows that they are themselves defences against, or reactions to, certain aggressive imagos. These reactions and defences are governed by the law of talion or else, analogously to this, by identification with the persecutor. The reproach, contempt, abandonment, bodily assaults - all these attitudes of menace or aggression in the patient that causes countertransference paranoid anxieties - are responses to (or anticipation of) equivalent attitudes of the transferred object.
The paranoid anxieties in 'indirect' countertransference are of a more complex nature since the danger for the analyst originates in a third party. The patient’s transference situations that provoke the aggression of this 'third party' against the analyst may be of various sorts. Commonly, we are dealing with transference situations (masochistic or aggressive) similar to those that provoke the 'direct' countertransference anxieties previously mentioned.
The common denominator of all the various attitudes of patients that provoke anxiety in the analyst is to be found, in the mechanism of 'identification with the persecutor', the experience of being liberated from the persecutor and of triumphing over him, implied in this identification, suggested our designating this mechanism as a manic one. This mechanism may also exist where the manifest picture in the patient is the opposite, namely in certain depressive states; for the manic conduct may be directed either toward a projected object or toward an introjected object, it may be carried out alloplastically or autoplastically. The 'identification with the persecutor' may even exist' in suicide, since this is a ‘mockery’ of the fantasized or real persecutors, by anticipating the intentions of the persecutors and by one’s own in what they wanted to do, as this ‘mockery’ is the manic aspect of suicide. The 'identification with the persecutor' in the patient is, then, a defence against an object felt as sadistic that tends to make the patient the victim of a manic feast. This defence is carried out either through the introjection of the persecutor in the ego, turning the analyst into the object of the 'manic tendencies', or through the introjection of the persecutor in the superego, taking the ego as the object of its manic trend. Still, what does this mean?
An analysand decides to take a pleasure trip to Europe. He experiences this as a victory over the analyst both because he will free himself from the analyst for two months and because he can afford this trip whereas the analyst cannot. He then begins to be anxious lest the analyst seeks revenge for the patient’s triumph. The patient anticipates this aggression by becoming unwill, developing fever and the first symptoms of influenza. The analyst feels slight anxiety because of this illness and fears, recalling certain experiences, a deterioration in the state of health of the patient, who still however continues to come to the sessions. Up to this point, the situation in the transference and countertransference is as follows. The patient is in a manic relation to the analyst, and his anxieties of preponderantly paranoid type. The analyst senses some irritation over the abandonment and some envy of the patient’s great wealth (feeling ascribed by the patient in his paranoid anxieties to the analyst), but while, the analyst feels satisfaction at the analysand’s real progress, which finds expression in the very fact that the trip is possible and that the patient has decided to make it. The analyst perceives a wish in part of his personality to bind the patient to himself and use the patient for his own needs. In having this wish he resembles the patient’s mother, and he is aware that he is in reality identified with the domineering and vindictive object with which the patient identifies him. Therefore, the patient’s illness seems, to the analyst’s unconscious, a result of the analyst’s own wish, and the analyst therefore experiences depressive (and paranoid) anxieties.
What object imago leads the patient to this manic situation? It is precisely this imago of a tyrannical and sadistic mother, to whom the patient’s frustrations constitute a manic feast. It is against these 'manic tendencies' in the object that the patient defends himself, first by identification (introjection of the persecutor in the ego, which manifests itself in the manic experience in his decision to take a trip) and then by using a masochistic defence to escape vengeance.
In brief, the analyst’s depressive (and paranoid) anxiety is his emotional response to the patient’s illness, and the patient’s illness is itself a masochistic defence against the object’s vindictive persecution. This masochistic defence also contains a manic mechanism in that it derides, controls, and dominates the analyst’s aggression. In the stratum underlying this, we find the patient in a paranoid situation in face of the vindictive persecution by the analyst - a fantasy that coincides with the analyst’s secret irritation. Beneath this paranoid situation, and causing it, is an inverse situation: The patient is enjoying a manic triumph (his liberation from the analyst by going on a trip), but the analyst is in a paranoid situation (he is in danger of being defeated and abandoned). Finally, beneath this we find a situation in which the patient is subjected to an object imago that wants to make of him the victim of its aggressive tendencies, but this time not to take revenge for intentions or attitudes in the patient, but merely to satisfy its own sadism of an imago that originates directly from the original suffering of the subject.
In this way, the analyst can deduce from each of his Countertransference sensations a certain transference situation, the analyst’s fear to deterioration in the patient’s health enabled him to perceive the patient’s need to satisfy the avenger and to control and restrain him, partially inverting (through the illness) the roles of victimizer and victim, thus alleviating his guilt feeling and causing the analyst to feel some of the guilt. The analyst’s irritation over the patient’s trip enabled him to see the patient’s need to free himself from a dominating and sadistic object, to see the patient’s guilt feelings caused by these tendencies, and to see his fear of the analyst’s revenge. By his feeling of triumph the analyst could detect the anxiety and depression caused in the patient by his dependence upon this frustrating, yet indispensable, object. Each of these transference situations suggested to the analyst the patient’s object imagoes - the fantasized or real Countertransference situation that determined the transference situations.
2. What is the meaning of countertransference aggression?
To what was previous, we have seen that the analyst may experience, besides countertransference anxiety, annoyances, recollection, desire for vengeance, hatred, and other emotions. What are the origin and meaning of these emotions?
Countertransference aggression usually arises in the face of frustration (or danger of frustration) of desires that may superficially be differentiated into 'direct' and 'indirect.' Both direct and indirect desires are principally wishes to get libido or affection. The patient is the chief object of direct desires in the analyst, who wishes to be accepted and loved by him. The object of the indirect desires of the analyst may be, for example, other analysts from whom he wishes to get recognition or admiration through his successful work with his patients, using the latter as means to this end. This aim to get love has, in general terms, two origins: An instinctual origin (the primitive needs of union with the object) and an origin of a defensive nature (the need of neutralizing, overcoming, or denying the rejections and other dangers originating from the internal objects, in particular from the superego). The frustrations may be differentiated, descriptively, into those of active type and those of passive type. Among the active frustrations is direct aggression by the patient, his mockery, deceit, and active rejection. To the analyst, active frustration means exposure to a predominantly 'bad' object, the patient may become, for example, the analyst’s superego, which says to him 'you are bad.' Examples of flustration of passive type are passive rejection, withdrawal, partial abandonment, and other defences against the bond with and dependence on the analyst. These signify flustrations of the analyst’s need of union with the object.
We may say then, that Countertransference aggression usually arises when there is frustration of the analyst’s desire that springs from Eros, both that arising from his 'original' instinctive and affective drives and that arising from his need of neutralizing or annulling his own Thanatos (or the action in his internal ‘bad objects’) directed against the ego or against the external world. Owing partly to the analyst’s own neurosis (and to certain characteristics of analysis itself) these desires of Eros sometimes change the unconscious aim of bringing the patient to a state of dependence. Therefore countertransference aggression may be provoked by the rejection of this dependence by the patient who rejects any bond with the analyst and refuses to surrender to him, showing this refusal by silence, denial, secretiveness, repression, blocking, or mockery.
Taken to place next, we must establish what it is that induces the patient to behave in this way, to frustrate the analyst, to withdraw from him, to attack him. If we know this we might as perhaps know what we have to interpret when countertransference aggression arises in us, being able to deduce from the countertransference the transition of the transference situation and its cause. This cause is a fantasized countertransference situation or, more precisely, some actual or feared bad conduct from the projected object. Experience shows that, in meaningly general terms, this bad or threatening conduct of the object is usually an equivalent of the conduct of the patient (to which the analyst has reacted internally with aggression). We also understand why this is so: The patient’s conduct springs from that most primitive of reactions, the talion reaction, or from the defect by means of identification with the persecutor or aggressor. Sometimes, it is quite simple: The analysand withdraws from us, rejects us, abandons us, or derides us when he fears or suffers the same or an equivalent treatment from us. In other cases, it is more complex, the immediate identification with the aggression being replaced by another identification that is less direct. To exemplify: Some woman patients, upon learning that the analyst is going on holiday, remain silent a long while, she withdraws, through her silence, as a talion response to the analyst’s withdrawal. Deeper analysis shows that the analyst’s holiday is, to the patient, equivalent to the primal scene, and this is equivalent to destruction of her as a woman, and her immediate response must be a similar attack against the analyst. This aggressive (castrating) impulse is rejected and the result, her silence, is a compromise between her hostility and its rejection, it is a transformed identification with the persecutor.
The composite distribution accounted by ours, is the vertical mosaic: (a) The countertransference reactions of aggression (or, of its equivalent) occur in response to transference situations in which the patient frustrates certain desires of the analyst’s. These frustrations are equivalent to abandonment or aggression, which the patient carries out or with which he threatens the analyst, and they place the analyst, at first, in a depressive or paranoid situation. The patient’s defence is in one aspect equivalent to a manic situation, for he is freeing himself from a persecutor. (b) This transference situation is the defence against certain object imagoes. Existent associative objects persecute the subject sadistically, vindictively, or morally, or an object that the patient defends from his destructiveness by an attack against his own ego: In these, the patient attacks - as Freud and Abraham have shown in the analysis of melancholia and suicide - just when, the internal object and the external object (the analyst). The analyst who is placed by the alloplastic or autoplastic attacks of the patient in a paranoid or a depressive situation sometimes defends himself against these attacks by using the same identification with the aggressor or persecutor as the patient used. Then the analyst virtually becomes the persecutor, and to this the patient (insofar as he presupposes such a reaction from his internal and projected object) responds with anxiety. This anxiety and its origin are nearest to consciousness, and are therefore the first thing to interpret.
3. Countertransference guilt feelings are an important source of countertransference anxiety: The analyst fears his 'moral conscience.' Thus, for instance, a serious deterioration in the condition of the patient may cause the analyst to suffer reproach by his own superego, and cause him to fear punishment. When such guilt feelings occur, but the superego of the analyst is usually projected upon the patient or upon a third person, the analyst being the guilty ego. The accuser is the one who is attacked, the victim of the analyst. The analyst is the accused, he is charged with being the victimizer. It is therefore the analyst who must suffer anxiety over his object, and dependence upon it.
As in other countertransference situations, the analyst’s guilt feeling may have either real causes or fantasized causes, or a mixture of the two. A real cause exists in the analyst who has neurotic negative feelings that exercise some influence over his behaviour, leading him, for example, to interpret with aggressiveness or to behave in a submissive, seductive, or unnecessarily frustrating way. Yet guilt feelings may also arise in the analyst over, for instance, intense submissiveness in the patient though the analyst had not driven the patient into such conduct by his procedure. Or he may feel guilty when the analysand becomes depressed or ill, although his therapeutic procedure was right and proper according to his own conscience. In such cases, the countertransference guilt feelings are evoked not by what procedure he actualizes by its use but by his awareness of what he might have done in view of his latent disposition. In other words, the analyst identifies himself in fantasy with a bad internal object of the patient’s and he feels guilty for what he has provoked in this role - illness, depression, masochism, suffering, failure. The imago of the patient then becomes fused with the analyst’s internal objects, which the analyst had, in the past, wanted (and perhaps managed) to frustrate, makes suffer, dominate, or destroy. Now he wishes to repair them. When this reparation fails, he reacts as if he had hurt them. The true cause of the guilt feelings is the neurotic, predominantly sado-masochistic tendencies that may reappear in countertransference: The analyst therefore quite rightly entertains certain doubts and uncertainties about his ability to control them completely and to keep them entirely removed from his procedure.
The transference situation to which the analyst is likely to react with guilt feelings is then, in the first place, a masochistic trend in the patient, which may be either of some 'defensives' (secondary) or of a 'basic' (primary) nature. If it is defensive, we know it to be a rejection of sadism by means of its 'turning against the ego', the principal object imago that imposes this masochistic defence is a retaliatory imago. If it is basic (‘primary masochism’) the object imago is ‘simply’ sadistic, a reflex of the pains (‘frustration’) originally suffered by the patient. The analyst’s guilt feelings refer to his own sadistic tendencies. He may feel as if he himself had provoked the patient’s masochism. The patient is subjugated by a ‘bad’ object so that it seems as if the analyst had satisfied his aggressiveness; now the analyst is exposed in his turn to the accusations of his superego. In short, the superficial situation is that the patient is now the superego, and the analyst the ego who must suffer the accusation, the analyst is in a depressive-paranoid situation, whereas the patient is, from one point of view, in a ‘manic’ situation (showing, for example, ‘mania for reproaching’). Nevertheless, on a deeper plane the situation is the reverse: The analyst is in a ‘manic’ situation (acting as vindictive, dominating, or ‘simply’ a sadistic imago), and the patient is in a depressive-paranoid situation.
4. Besides the anxiety, hatred, and quilt feelings in countertransference, most other countertransference situations may also be decisive points during analytic treatment, both because they may influence the analyst’s work and because the analysis of the transference situations that provoke such countertransference situations may represent the central problem of treatment, clarification of which may be indispensable if the analyst is to exert any therapeutic influence upon the patient.
Before closing, let us consider briefly two doubtful points. How much confidence should we place in countertransference as a guide to understanding the patient? As to the first question, I intuitively think by means of its existing certainty, by which is founded the mistake initiated of the countertransference reactions as an oracle, with blind faith to expect of them the pure truth about the psychological situations of the analysand. It is plain that our unconscious is a very personal ‘receiver’ and ‘transmitter’ and we must reckon with frequent distortions of objective reality. Still, it is also true that our unconscious is nevertheless 'the best we have of its kind.' His own analysis and some analytic experience enable the analyst, as a rule, to be conscious of this personal factor and know his ‘personal equation.’ According to experience, the danger of exaggerated faith in the message of one’s own unconscious is, even when they refer to very ‘personal’ reactions. Less than the danger of repressing them and denying them any objective value.
It seems necessary that one must critically examine the deductions one makes from perception of one’s own countertransference. For example, the fact that the analyst feels angry does not simply mean (as is sometimes said) that the patient wishes to make him angry. It may mean rather than the patient has a transference feeling of guilt. What has been said concerning Countertransference aggression is relevant here.
The second question - whether the analyst should or should not ‘communicate’ or ‘interpret’ aspects of his countertransference to the analysand - cannot be considered fully at present. Much depends, of course, upon what, when, how, to whom, for what purpose, and in what conditions the analyst speaks about his countertransference. Probably, the purposes sought by communicating the countertransference might often (but not always) be better attained by other means. The principal other means is analysis of the patient’s fantasies about the analyst’s countertransference (and of the related transference) sufficient to show the patient the truth (the reality of the countertransference of his inner and outer objects): and with this must also be analysed the doubts, negations, and other defences against the truth, intuitively perceived, until they have been overcome. Nevertheless, the situations in which communication of the countertransference is of value for the subsequent course of the treatment. Without doubt, this aspect of the use of countertransference is of great interest: We need an extensive and detailed study of the inherent problems of communication of countertransference. Much more experience and study of countertransference need to be recorded.
Some discussion of a working definition of the term countertransference is necessary, since it is by no means agreed upon by analysts that it can be correctly considered the converse of transference. D. W. Winnicott, for instance, has recently written about the importance of attitudes of hate from an analyst too patient, particularly in dealing with psychotic and antisocial patients. He speaks mainly of ‘objective countertransference’. Meaning ‘the analyst’s love and hate in reaction to the actual personality and behaviour of the patient based on objective observation. However, he also mentions countertransference feelings that are under repression in the analyst and need countertransference feelings that are under repression in the analyst and need more analysis. His concept of ‘objective Countertransference’ will not be included under the term Countertransference if the latter are used as the converse of transference. Frieda Fromm-Reichmann has separated the reconverse of the psychoanalyst to the patient into those of a private and those responses of the psychoanalyst to the patient into those of a private and those of a professional person and recognizes the possibility of countertransference distortions occurring in both aspects. Franz Alexander has used the term to mean all of the attitudes of the doctor toward the patient, while Sandor Ferenczi has used it to cover the positive, affectionate, loving, or sexual attitudes of the doctor toward the patient. Michael Balint, looking at a different aspect, calls attention ti the fact that every human relation is libidinous, not only the patient’s relation to his analyst, but also the analyst’s relation to the patient. He says that no human being can in the end tolerate any relation that brings only frustration and that it is as true for the one as for the other. 'The question is, therefore, . . . how much. What kind of satisfaction is needed by the patient on the one hand and by the analyst on the other, to keep the tension in the psycho-analytical situation as or near the optimal level.'
In developing his theory of interpersonal relations, Harry Stack Sullivan has defined the psychotherapeutic effort of the analyst as carried on by the method of participant observation. He says, 'The expertness of the psychiatrist refers to his skill in participant observation of the unfortunate patterns of his own and the patient’s living, in contrast too merely participating in such unfortunate patterns with the patient.' In the use of the term unfortunate patterns Sullivan includes the concept of countertransference, or in his words 'parataxic distortions'.
In several important recent papers, Leo Berman, Paula Heimann, Annie Reich, Margaret Little, and Maxwell Gitelson have made a beginning in the attempt to clarify the concept and to formulate some dynamic principles regarding the phenomena included in this category. Berman is mainly concerned with defining the optimal attitude of the analyst to the patient, an attitude that he characterizes as 'dedicated.' This description is based on the assumption that the analyst’s emotional responses to the patient will be quantitatively less than those of the average person and of shorter duration, as the result of being quickly worked through by self-analysis. This, then, would represent an ideal goal of minimizing and an easily handled countertransference response.
Heimann takes a step forward when she states that the analyst’s emotional response to his patient within the analytic situation represents one of the most important tools for his work, and that the analyst’s countertransference is an instrument of research into the patient’s unconscious. This important formulation is the basis upon which the study of the analyst’s part of the interaction with the patient should be built. Previously, the statement has frequently been made that the analyst’s unconscious understands the patient’s unconscious. However, it is presumed that much is already unconscious material as becoming available to awareness after a successful analysis, so that the understanding should theoretically not be only on an unconscious level but should be errorless in words.
Reich has classified most of countertransference attitudes of the analyst’s. She separates them into two main types: Those where the analyst acts out some unconscious need with the patient, and those where the analyst defends against some unconscious need. On the whole, countertransference responses are reflections of permanent neurotic difficulties of the analyst, in which the patient is often not a real object but is rather used as a tool by means of which some need of the analyst is gratified. In some instances, there may be sudden, acute countertransference responses that do not necessarily arises from neurotic character difficulties of the analyst. However, Reich points out that the interest in becoming an analyst is itself partially determined by unconscious motivation, such as curiosity about other people’s secrets, which is evidence that countertransference attitudes are some prerequisites for an analyst. The contrast between the healthy and neurotic analyst is that in the one the curiosity is desexualized and sublimated in character, while in the other it remains a method of acting out unconscious fantasies.
Margaret Little continues the search for an adequate definition of countertransference, concluding that it should be used primarily to refer to 'repressed elements', inasmuch as far as the unanalysed well-situated analyst, he attaches himself to the patient in the same way as the patient ‘transfers’ to the analyst effects, etc., belonging to his parents or to the object of his childhood: i.e., the analyst regards the patient (temporarily and varyingly) as he regarded his own parents. Even so, it is, Little who thinks that other aspects of the analyst’s attitudes toward the patient, such as some specific attitude or mechanism with which he meets the patient’s transference, or some of his conscious attitudes, should be considered Countertransference responses. She confirms Heimann’s statement that the use of countertransference may become an extremely valuable tool in psychoanalysis, comparing it in importance with the advances made when transference interpretations began to be used therapeutically. She sees transference and Countertransference as inseparable phenomena; both should become increasingly clear to both doctor and patient as the analysis progresses. To that end, she advocates judicious use of Countertransference interpretation by the analyst. 'Both are essential to Psychoanalysis, and countertransference is no more to be feared or avoided than is transference: In fact it cannot be avoided it can only be looked out for, controlled to some extent, and perhaps ill-used.
Gitelson, in a comprehensive paper, continues to clarify the phenomena, he goes back to the original definition of countertransference used by Freud - the analyst’s reaction to the patient’s transference - and separates this set of responses from another set that he calls the transference attitudes of the analyst. These transference attitudes, which are the result of ‘’surviving neurotic transference potential’ in the analyst. Involve ‘total’ reactions to the patient -that is, overall feelings about and toward the patient - while the countertransference attitudes are ‘partial’ reactions to the patient - that is, emergency defence reactions elicited when the analysis touches upon unresolved problems in the analyst.
This classification, while valid enough, does not seem to forward investigation to any great extent. For example, Gitelson feels in general that the existence of ‘total’ or transference attitudes toward a patient is a contradiction for the analyst to work with that patient, whereas the partial responses are more amendable to working through the continuity of inertial momentum whereby the processes of a self-analysis. Yet, it seems extremely sceptical whether avoiding is possible for one ‘total’ reaction to a patient - that is, general feelings of liking for, dislike of, and responsiveness toward the patient, and so on, is present from the time of the first interview. These do vary in intensity; when extreme, they may indicate that a non-therapeutic relationship would result should be the two persons attempt working together. On the other hand, their presence in awareness may permit the successful scrutiny and resolution of whatever problem is involved, whereas their presence outside awareness would render this impossibly. In other words, it is not so much a question whether ‘total’ responses are present or not, but rather a question as to their amenability to recognition and resolution. Therefore, another type of classification would, in any case, be more useful for investigative purposes.
Least of mention, this by no mean a harbouring dispute over the validity of Gitelson’s criticism of the rationalization of much Countertransference acting-out under the heading of ‘corrective emotional experience’. He emphasizes that motherly or fatherly attitudes in the analyst are often character defences unrecognized as such by him. Although the analyst, according to Gitelson, to facilitate . . . can deny neither his personality nor its operation in the analytic situation as a significant factor, this does, however, mean that his personality is the chief instrument of the therapy. He also reports the observation that when the analyst appears as himself in the patient’s dreams, it is often the herald of the development of an unmanageably intenser transference neurosis, the unmanageability being the difficulty of the analyst’s situation. Similarly, when the patient appears as himself in the analyst’s dream, but it is often a signal of unconscious countertransference processes going on.
So then, we have seen that in recent studies on countertransference have included in their concepts attitudes of the therapist that are both conscious and unconscious; attitudes that are responses both too real and to fantasied attitudes of the patient; attitudes stimulated by unconscious needs of the analyst and attitudes stimulated by sudden outbursts of effect for the patient; attitudes that arise from responding to the patient as though he were some previously important person in the analyst’s life; and attitudes that do not use the patient as a real object but as a tool for the gratification of some unconscious requisite. This group of responses covers a tremendously wide territory, yet it does not include, of course, all of the analyst’s responses to the patient. On what common ground is the above attitudes singled out to be called countertransference?
It seems, nonetheless, that the common factor in the above responses is the presence of anxiety in the therapist - whether recognized in awareness or defended against and kept of our awareness. The contrast between the dedicated attitude described as the ideal attitude of the analyst - or the analyst as an expert on problems of living, as Sullivan puts it-and the so-called countertransference responses, is the presence of anxiety, arising from the variety of sources in the whole field of patient-therapist interrelationships.
If countertransference attitudes and behaviour were to be thought of as determined by the presence of anxiety in the therapist, we might have an operational definition that would be more useful than the more descriptive one based on identifying patterns in the analyst derived from importantly past relationships. The definition would, of course, have to include situations both or felt discomfort and those where the anxiety was out of awareness and replaced by a defensive operation? Such a viewpoint of countertransference would be useful in that it would include all situations where the analyst was unable to be useful to the patient because of difficulties with his own responses.
The definition might be precisely stated as follows: When, in the patient-analyst relationship, anxiety is aroused in the analyst with the effect that communication between him and is interfered with by some alternation in the analyst’s behaviour (verbal or otherwise), then Countertransference is present.
The question might be asked, if countertransference were defined in this way, would the definition hold well for transference responses also? It seems that on a very generalized level this might be so, but on the level of practical therapeutic understanding such a statement would not be enlightening. While it could safely be said of every patient that he appearance of his anxiety or defensive behaviour in the treatment situation was due to an impairment of communication with the analysts that in turn was due to his attributing to the analyst some critical or otherwise disturbing attitude that in its turn was originally derived from his experience with his parents - still this would disregard the fact that the patient’s whole life pattern and his relation to all of the important authority figures in it would show a similar stereotyped defensive response. So that the early stages of treatment and to a lesser extent in later stages, the anxiety responses of the patient are for the most part generalized and stereotyped than explained with special reference to his relationship with the analyst.
This, however, is not true of the analyst. Having been analysed himself, most of such anxiety-laden responses as he has experienced with others have entered awareness and many of them have been worked through and abandoned in favour of more mature and integrated responses. What remains, then, not automatically represent sibling rivals? While it is possible that a particular, unusually competitive patient may still represent a younger sibling to an analyst who had some difficulties in his own life with being the elder child.
To speak of the same thing from another point of view, the analyst is not working on his problems in the analysis; he is working on the patient’s. Therefore, while the patient brings his anxiety responses to the analysis as his primary concern, the fact that the analyst’s problems are not under scrutiny permits him a greater degree of detachments and objectivity. This is, to be sure, only a relative truth, since the analyst at times and under certain circumstances is bringing his problems into the relationship, and at times, at least in some analyses, the attention of both the patient and the analyst are directed to the analysts' problems. However, it is on the whole valid to describe the analytic situation as one designed to focus attention on the anxieties of the patient and to leave in the background the anxieties of the therapist, so that when these do appear they are of particular significance as for the relationship itself.
The associative set classifications of countertransference responses are to classify the situation in analysis when anxiety-tinged processes are operating in the analyst. This is to the set classification as not as clear-cut separation of situational anxieties, nor are any of the responses to be thought of as entirely free of necrotic attitudes of the therapist. Even in the most extremer examples of situational stress (where ordinarily the analyst’s response is thought of as an objective response to th stress rather than a neurotic response), personal, characterological factors will colour his response, as will also the nature of his relationship with the patient. Take, for instances, the situation where the analyst comes to his office in a state of acute tension as the result of a quarrel with his wife. With one patient he may remain preoccupied with his personal troubles throughout the hour, while with another he may be able shortly to bring hid attention to the analytic situation. Something in each patient’s personality and method of production, and in the analyst’s response to each, has affected the analyst’s behaviour.
Anxiety-arousing situations in the patient-analyst interaction have been classified as follows: (1) situational factors - that is, reality factors such as intercurrent events in the analyst’s life, and, social factors such as need for success and recognition as a competent therapist (2) unresolved neurotic problems of the therapist, and (3) communication of the patient’s anxiety to the therapist.
The response to situational factors is, of course, very much influenced by the character make-up of the doctor. How much has the quality of being necessitated for conformity to convention he retains will influence his response to the patient who shouts loudly during an analytic session? Nevertheless, the response will always be affected by the degree of which his office is soundproof, whether there is another patient in the waiting room, whether a colleague in an adjoining office can overhear, and so on. So that, even leaving out the private characterological aspect of the situation for the therapist, there remains a sizable set of reality needs that, if threatened, will lead to unanalytic behaviour on his part.
The greatest number of these relates to the physician’s role in our culture. There is a high value attached to the role of a successful physician. This is not, of course, confined to the vague group of people known as the public, it is also actively present in the professional colleagues. There is a reality need for recognition of his competence by his colleagues, which has a dollars and cents value and an emotional one. While it is true that his reputation will not be made or broken by one success or failure, it does not follow that a suicide or psychotic breakdown in the patient does not represent a reality threat to him. Consequently, he cannot be expected to handle such threatening crises with complete equanimity. Besides, some realities need to be known as competent by his colleagues and the public, there is potent and valid need on the doctor’s part for creative accomplishment. This appears in the therapeutic situation as an expectation of and a need to see favourable change in the patient. It is entirely impossible for a therapist to participate in a treatment situation where the goal is improvement or cure without suffering frustration, disappointment, and at times anxiety when his efforts result in no apparent progress. Such situations are at times handled by therapists with the attitude: 'Let him stew in his own juices until he sees that he should change,' or by the belief that he, the doctor, must be making an error that he dies not understand and should redouble his efforts. Frequently, the resolution of such a difficulty can be achieved by the realization by the therapist that his reality fear of failure is keeping him from recognizing an important aspect of the patient’s neurosis having done with making the responsibility for his welfare on another’s shoulders. The reality fear of failure can . . . neither be ignored nor put up with, so to speak, since an attempt by the therapist to remove it by ‘making’ the patient gets well is bound to increase the chances of failure.
Further difficulties are introduced by the traditional cultural definition of the healer’s role - that is, according to the Hippocratic oath. The physician-healer is expected to play a fatherly or even god-like role with his patient, in which he both sees through him - knows mysteriously what is wrong with his insides - and takes responsibility for him. This magic-healer role has heavy reinforcement from many personal motivations of the analyst for becoming a physician and a psychotherapist. These range from need to know other people’s secrets, as mentioned by Reich, to needs to cure oneself vicariously by curing others, needs for magical power to cover up one’s own feedings of weakness and inadequacy, needs to do better than one’s own analyst. Unfortunately, some aspects of psychoanalytical educating have a tendency to reinforce the interpretation of the therapist as a magically powerful person. The admonition, for instance, to become a ‘mature character’, while excellent advice, still carries with it a connotation of perfect adjustment and perhaps bring pressure to bear on the trainee not to recognize his immaturites or deficiencies. Even such precepts as ti is a ‘mirror’ or a ‘surgeon’ or ‘dedicated’ emphasize the analyst’s moral power in relation to the patient and, still worse, makes it as good technique. Since the analyst’s power, it is regrettably easy for both persons to participate in a mutually gratifying relationship that satisfies the patient’s dependency and the doctor’s need for power.
The main situation in the patient-doctor relationship that undermines the therapeutic role and therefore may result in anxiety in the therapist can be listed as follows: (1) when the doctor is helpless to affect the patient’s neurosis, (2) when the doctor is treated consistently as an object of fear, hatred, criticism, or contempt, (3) when the patient calls on the doctor for advice or reassurance as evidence of his professional competence or interest in the patient, (4) when the patient attempts to establish a relationship of romantic love with the doctor, and (5) when the patient calls on the doctor for other intimacy.
Unresolved neurotic problems of the therapist are a subject on which it is very difficult to generalize since such problems will be different in every therapist. To be sure, there are large general categories into which most therapists can be classified, and so certain overall attitudes may be held in common, as for instance the categories of the obsessional therapists who retain remnants of a compulsive need to be in control, or the masochistically overcompensated therapist who compulsively makes reparation to the patient, as described by Little.
One may scrutinize all analysts, from the top of the ladder to the bottom, and, as is obvious, will find characteristic types of patients chosen and characteristic courses of analytic treatment in each case. Gitelson seems to undervalue this factor when he says that the analyst 'can no longer . . . grow to worsen of neither his personality nor its operation in the analytic situation as a significant factor . . . This is far from saying, however, that his personality is the chief instrument of the therapy that we call psychoanalysis. There is a great difference between the selection and playing of a role and the awareness of the fact that ones' own person has found himself cast for a part. Conducting himself is important for the analyst so that the analytic process proceeds by what the patient brings to it.'
It is not the selection. Playing of a role that creates the Countertransference problem of the average, and healthy analyst, but the fact that one habitually and incessantly plays a role determined by one’s character structure, so that one is at times hindered from seeing and dealing with the role in which one is cast by the patient.
It does, however, seem apparent that, to deal with the distortions introduced by the patient, the doctor needs to be aware of the following things: (1) that he has an unambiguous expression on his face when the patient arrives five minutes late for the first hour of therapy, and (2) that he annoyed (made anxious) by the patient’s imputation of malice to him. If he were aware of (1), he would. Perhaps, can interpret the fearful apologies of the patient with a question about why the patent thinks he is angry. If he were unaware of (1) or did not think it wise to interpret, still if he were aware of his anxiety reaction (2), he can probably recognize that his annoyance at being apologized to was leading to a sulky silence on his part. Once this was within awareness, the annoyance could be expected to lift and the therapeutic needs of the situation could be handled on their own merits.
Communication of the patient’s anxiety to the therapist proves most interesting and some mysterious phenomenons exhibited on occasion - and perhaps more frequently than we realize - by both analyst and patient. It seems to have some relationship to the process described as empathy. It is a well-known fact that certain types of persons are literally barometers for the tension level of other persons with whom they are in contact. Apparently cues are picked up from small shifts in muscular tension plus changes in voice tone. Tonal changes are more widely recognized to provide such cues, as evidenced by the common expression, 'It wasn’t what he said but the way he said it.' Yet there are numbers of instances where the posture of a patient while walking into the consulting room gave the cue to the analyst that anxiety was present, although there was no gross abnormality but merely a slight stiffness or jerkiness to be observed. A similar observation can be made in supervised analyses, where the supervised communicate to the supervisor that he is in an anxiety-arousing situation with the patient, not by the material he related, but by some appearance of increased tension in his manner of reporting.
It is a mood point whether anxiety responses of therapists in situations where the anxiety is ‘caught’ from the patient can be considered entirely free of personal conflict by the analyst. Probably, habitual alertness to the tension level of others, however desirable a trait in the analyst, must have had its origins in tension-laden atmospheres of the past, and therefore must have specific personal meaning to the analyst.
The contagious aspects of the patient’s anxiety have been most often mentioned concerning the treatment of psychotics. In dealing with a patient whose defences are those of violent counter-aggression, not of an analyst experience of both fear and/or anxiety. The fear is on a relatively rational basis - the danger of suffering physically hurt. The anxiety derives from (1) retaliatory impulses toward the attacker,
(2) wounded self-esteem that one’s helpful intent is so misinterpreted by the patient, and (3) a sort of primitive envy of or identification with the uncontrolled venting of violent feelings. It has been found by experience in attempting to treat such patients that the therapist can function at a more effective level if he is encouraged to be aware of and handle consciously his irrational responses to the patient’s violence.
A milder variant of this response can frequently be found in office practice. It can be marked and noted that when the affect of more than usual intensity enters a treatment situation the analyst tends to interpret the patient. This interpretation may take any one of a variety of forms, such as a relevant question, an interpretative remark, a reassuring remark, a change of subject. Whatever its content, it dilutes the intensity of feeling being expressed and/or shifting the trend of the associations. This, of course, is technically desirable in some instances, but when it occurs automatically, without awareness and therefore without consideration of whether it is desirable or not, its occurrence must be attributed to uneasiness in the analyst. Ruesch and Prestwood have studied the phenomenon of communication of patients’ anxiety to the therapist, in which they proved that the communication is much more positively correlated with the tonal and expressive qualities of speech than with the verbal content. Such factors as rate of speech, frequently of use of personal pronouns, frequently of expressions of feeling. So on, showed significant variations in the anxious parent as contrasted with either the relaxed or the angry patient. In this study, the subjective responses of most psychiatrists while listening to sections of recorded interviews varied significantly according to the emotional tone of the material. A relaxed interview elicited a relaxed response in the listening psychiatrist; the anxious interviews were responded to with a variety of subjective feelings, from being ill-at-ease to being disturbed or angry.
These uncomfortable responses, coupled with many types of avoidance behaviours by the analyst, such as those mentioned in another place, appear to occur much more frequently than has been previously realized. Detecting it is difficult then by an ‘ear witness’, since the therapist himself will usually be unable to report them following through its intermittence of time. They were noticed to occur frequently in a study of intensive psychotherapy by experienced analysts carried out by means of recorded interviews.
If one accepts the hypothesis that even successfully analysed therapists are still continually involved in countertransference attitudes toward their patients, the question arises: What can be done with such reactions in the therapeutic situation? Experience suggests that the less intense anxiety responses, where the discomfort is within awareness, can be quickly handled by an experienced but not to of a neurotic analyst. These are probably chiefly the situational or reality stimuli to anxiety. Nevertheless, where awareness is interfered with by the occurrence of a variety of defensive operations, is there anything to be done? Is the analyst capable of identifying such anxiety-laden attitudes in himself and proceeding to work them out? Certainly there are such extreme situations that the unaided analyst cannot handle them and must seek discussion with a colleague or further analytic help for himself. However, there is a wide intermediate ground where alertness to clues or signals that all is not well may be sufficient to start the analyst on a process of self-resolution of the difficulty.
The following is a tentative and necessarily incomplete list of situations that may provide a clue to the analyst that he is involved anxiously or defensively with the patient. It includes signals that have been found useful in a basic supervision that it probably could be added to by others according to their particular experience, as (1) The analyst has a reasoning dislike for the patient, (2) The analyst cannot identify with the patient, who seems unreal or mechanical. When the patient reports that he is upset, the analyst feels no emotional response. (3) The analyst becomes overemotional as for the patient’s troubles. (4) The analyst likes the patient excessively, feels that he is his best patient. (5) The analyst dreads the hours with a particular patient or is uncomfortable during them. (6) The analyst is preoccupied with the patient to an unusual degree in intervals between hours and may find himself fantasying questions or remarks to be made to the patient. (7) The analyst finds it difficult to pay attention to the patient. He goes to sleep during hours, becomes very drowsy, or is preoccupied with personal affairs. (8) The analyst is habitually late with a particular patient or shows other disturbance in the time arrangement, such as always running over the end of the hour. (9) The analyst gets into arguments with the patient. (10) The analyst becomes defensive with the patient or exhibits unusual vulnerability to the patient’s criticism. (11) The patient seems to misunderstand the analyst’s interpretations consistently or never agrees with them. This is, of course, quite correctly interpreted as resistance of the patient, but it may also be the result of a countertransference distortion by the analyst such that his interpretations are wrong. (12) The analyst tries to elicit effect from the patient - for instance, by provocative or dramatic statements. (14) The analyst is angrily sympathetic with the patient regarding his mistreatment by some authority figure. (15) The analyst feels impelled to do something active, and (16) The analyst appears in the patient’s dreams as himself, or the patient appears in the analyst’s dreams. No sooner that apparently to broaden the scope of psychoanalytic therapy, to expedite and make more efficiently the analytic process, and to increase our knowledge of the dynamics of interaction, methods of studying the transference-countertransference aspects of treatment need to be developed. In that this can best be accomplished by setting up the hypothesis that countertransference phenomena are present in every analysis. This agrees with the position of Heimann and Little. These phenomena are probably frequently either ignored or repressed, partly because of a lack of knowledge of what to do with them, partly because analysts are accustomed to dealing with them in various nonverbal ways, and partly because they are sufficiently provocative of anxiety in the therapist to produce one or another kind of defence reaction. However, since the successfully analysed psychotherapists have tools at his command for recognizing and resolving defensive behaviour via the development of greater insight. The necessity for suppressing or repressing countertransference responses is not urgent. Where the analyst deliberately searches for recognition and understanding of his own difficulties in the interrelationship, his first observation is likely to be that he has an attitude similar to one of those aforementioned. With this as a signal, he may then, by further noticing in the analytic situation what particular aspects of the patient’s behaviour stimulate such responses in him, eventually find a way of bringing such behaviour out into the open for scrutiny, communication, and eventual resolution. For instance, sleepiness in the analyst is very frequently an unconscious expression of resentment at the emotional bareness of the patient’s communication, perhaps springing from a feeling of helplessness by the analyst. When the analyst recognizes that he is sleepy as a retaliation for his patient’s uncommunicativeness, and that he is making this response because, up too now, he has been unable to find a more effective way of handling it, the precipitating factor - the uncommunicativeness - can be investigated as a problem.
Beyond this use of his responses as a clue to the meaning of the behaviour of the patient, the analyst is also constantly in need of using his observations of himself as a means to further resolution of his own difficulties. For instance, an analyst who had doubts of his intellectual ability habitually overvalued and competed with his more intelligent patients. This would become particularly accentuated when he was trying to treat patients whom they used intellectual achievement as protection against fears of being overpowered. Thus the analyst, as the result of these overestimations of such a patient’s capacity, would fail to make ordinary, garden-variety interpretations, believing that there must be obvious to such a bright person. Instead, he would exert himself to point out the subtle manifestations of the patient’s neurosis, so that there would be much interesting talk but little change in the patients.
This type of error can go unnoticed while the analyst learns eventually that he is unable to treat successfully certain types of patients. However, it can also be slowly and gradually rectified as the result of further experience. In such a case, the analyst is learning on a nonverbal level. Even so, some such signal as finding himself fantasying questions or remarks to put to the patient in the next session is noted by the analyst, he then has the means of expediting and bringing into full awareness the self-scrutiny that can lead to resolution.
It will be noted that the focus of attention of these remarks is on the analyst’s own self-scrutiny, both of his responses to the patient’s behaviour and of his defensive attitudes and actions. Much has been said by others (Heimann, Little, and Gitelson) regarding the pros and cons of introducing discussion of countertransference material into the analytic situation itself. That, however, is a question that is not possible to answer in the present state of our knowledge. Its intentional means are to improving the analyst’s awareness of his own participation in the patient-analyst interaction and of improving his ability to formulate this to himself (or to an observer) clearly. Devising techniques for using such material in the therapeutic situation seems more feasible after the area has been more precisely explored and studied - or, concurrently with further study and explanation.
One further point might be added regarding the contrast between the subjective experience of the analyst when anxiety is not present and when it is. When anxiety is not present, he may experience a feeling of being at ease, of accomplishing something, of grasping what the patient is trying to communicate. Certainly in periods when progress is being made, something of the same feeling is shared by the patient, although he may at the same time be working through troubled areas. Perhaps the loss of the feeling that communication is going in the most commonly used signal that starts the analyst on a search for what is going wrong.
In daily life and the early phases of the analysis, the transference is usually integrated with the actual total personality relationship. However, in the sense of something complex, thinking of it separately is better, unless specifically qualified, whether as a latent potentiality, or as an actual emergent ego-dystonic, or objectively inappropriate phenomena (Anna Freud, 1954). For, as far as the phenomenon is true transference, it retains unmistakeably its infantile character. However, much of the given early relationship may have contributed to the genuine adult pattern of relationship (via identification, imitation, acceptance of teaching for example), its transference derivative differs from the latter, approximately in the sense that Breuer and Freud (1895) assigned to the sequella of the pathogenic traumatic experience, which was abreacted neither as such nor associatively absorbed in the personality. Given an object who has a special transference valence, in a situation that provides a unique mixture of deprivation, intimacy and deprivation, with (obligatory!) unilateral communicative freedom, minimization of actual observation, and with certain elements of form and mechanics reminisce of the infantile state, the tendency to pristine re-emergence of talent transference drives, until now incorporated in everyday strivings, in symptoms, or in character structure, is enormously heightening. That the transference is treated in a unique way in the analytic process are assuredly true, and remains of prime significance. However, at one time, this ment of the analytic situation on the transference, as if its emergent integrated form in relation to any other physician would be essentially the same phenomenon. Considered as an actual functional phenomenon, as different from a latent potentiality (in a sense, Metapsychological concept), this is rarely the case. The unique emotional vicissitudes of the psychoanalytic situation plus the de-integrated effect of free association and the interpretative method restore an infantile quality and intensity to the psychoanalytic transference, which lead to the development of the transference neurosis. Thus, to turn Freud’s original reservations and admonitions in an affirmative direction: The question of what is the optimum transference neurosis, or whether and how nearly is much more as the optimal type of transference neurosis can be caused, has always been, and remains, an important and general problem of psychoanalytic technique. This is, to be sure, no simple matter. The modest hope implicit of our topic, in that it may offer a rationale and some suggestions toward the avoidance of spurious and unduly tenacious intensities. The transference neurosis, like other (simpler) elements in the psychoanalytic situation, has an intrinsically dialectical character and position (Free association, for example, facilitates both exposure and concealment, can occasion either gratification or suffering.) This dialectical quality can (in part) be explained by the concept of two separate, although potentially confluent streams of transference origin. In relation to the equivocal factor of intensity in the transference neurosis, in that there is a certain deductibility to reasonableness in the conception that the elements of abstinence augmenting transference intensity should derive preponderantly from the formal, i.e., explicitly technical factors (which include non-response to primitive transference wishes) rather than from excessively rigorous deficits in human response, which the patient may reasonably except or require, and where the technical valence of such deprivation may be minimal or altogether dubious as to demonstrability.
It is now all but axiomatic that the transference is the indispensable power of the analytic process, and the phenomenon on whose evolution the potentiality for ultimate therapeutic change rests in analysis. As distinguished from other psychotherapies, and resolution of the transference neurosis, and the dissolution or minimization of the transference(s) as such, is one of the distinctive final goals of the interpretative method, it's of the essence because it might be said that insights into dynamic and genetic elements in the unconscious, or the functional extension of the ego’s hegemony in relationship to the id and superego, or other germane concepts, are ultimately more important. Still, these are all, certainly in an operational sense, largely if not exclusively, contingent on the thorough analysis of the transference neurosis.
The term ‘minimization of the transference(s) is used here because of the amounting scepticism regarding the likelihood of complete dissolution or extinction of the transference. The specific personal misidentifications and the specific personally directed wishes and attitudes that usually occupy us in the analytic process (i.e., ‘the transference’) can, in a practical clinical sense, usually be brought to adequate resolution. However, at this point, it should be made to emphasize that pathogenic component of the transference complex that underlies and is anterior to these clinical phenomena. The ‘adequate resolution’ of the clinically significant aspect or fraction of the transference frees the basic practically universal element, if it is not itself severely distorted, for integration in socially acceptable enthusiasms held in common with most other human beings and thus, in a sense, a part of the individual’s environmental reality. The particularity of mind is the general latent craving for an omnipotent parent, renewed and specifically coloured with, indeed given form, by, the conflicts and vicissitudes of each phase of development and developmental separation, a craving of such primitive power that it can produce the profound physiologic alterations of hypnosis, or bring into abeyance an individual’s own perceptual capacities or capacities for rational inference, even based on fewer spectacular vehicles for suggestion. For clarity of a statement, as in the ‘primary transference’ presupposes the accomplished shift to an object, as opposed to Freud’s other [germane] use of the term, frequently elaborated by Loewald ([1960]). This phenomenon is already dramatically evident in the young (three to six-month) infants' reaction to any moving bearer of a face as mother
(‘ . . . the representative of that infant’s security’ [Spitz. 1956]). It permeates our whole social organization, is obvious in religious attitudes, in charismatic ideologists of any type. In its narrowest stronghold, in the intellectual avant-garde, it invests questions of scientific validity and rational or empirical demonstration, facilitating irrational and inappropriate attitudes of loyalty or antagonism toward scientific leaders. Human infallibility is attributed to others than the Popes, and the Anti-Christ have parallels in the world of science. Our own field has often been a conspicuous example of this tendency. In the end, scientific perceptual striving, whose autonomy is always relative at best, becomes secondarily burdened, and inevitably suffers, because of this type of ambivalent group euphoria.
If it is the entanglement with early objects that elicits the infantile neurosis and lays the ground for its later representation in the transference neurosis, it is the clinical neurosis, the usual motivation for treatment, that lies between them, and is related to both, in a sense a ‘resistance’ both to genetic reconstruction of the former, or to current involvement on the latter. This is, a variation of Freud’s statement regarding the transference neurosis as an accessible ‘artificial illness’. Perhaps suggesting that unconscious recognition of the unique transference potentiality of the psychoanalytic situation is intimately connected both with the violent irrational struggle against is not extravagant, and the sometimes fanatical acceptance of, analysis as therapy (i.e., the general and intrinsic fascination of a relationship to ‘the doctor who gives no medicine’) by the patient to whom it is recommended (and by many, before the fact). What is always fundamentally wanted, in the sense of a primal transferee, with rare (relative) exceptions, is the original physician, who most closely resembles the parent of earliest infancy. The ‘doctor who gives no medicine’ is in unconscious deductibility may be that the parent of the repetitive phases of separation. To what extent this unconscious constellation participated in the discovery or creation of psychoanalysis as such would be pure speculation. However, Freud’s capacity for transference in the attachments of daily life was abundantly evident (Freud 1887-1902, Jones 1953-1957), and the importance of the relationship with Fliess in his self-analysis was explicitly stated (Freud, 1887-1902) That it plays an important part in the emotional life of many contemporary working analysts is very likely, since all (at this time) have experienced the role of analysand (or analytic patient): The vast majority are physicians, all have been physicians’ patients in a traditional sense, and, certainly, all have been dependent and helpless children. Ferenczi (1919) described the evolution of the general psychoanalytic countertransference as for initial excessive sympathy, through reactive coldness (‘the phase of resistance against the counter-transference’), to mature balance. Lewin (1946) in referring to this formulation (to contrast it with the sequence of traditional medical training) attributes the first phase to the first of the analyst’s having only recently been a patient himself. While Lewin carefully separates the cadaver (the student’s first ‘patient’) as an ‘object’ (psychoanalytic sense) from its qualities, we may speculate that a species of retaliatory mastery of the parental object (perhaps in contrast with the role of a helpless child) is sometimes involved in this gratification, and that something of this quality was carried into the dialectic genesis of the psychoanalytic situation. When referring to the ‘dialectic genesis’ of the psychoanalytic situation, it is to infer to its genesis largely in the genius of a physician who experienced the training to which Lewin refers. The dialectic is epitomized exquisitely in the role of speech, the bridge for personal separation, rejected or distorted by children in their desperate clinging to more gratifying or more violent object drives, or, on the other hand, sought eagerly as the indispensable vehicle for alterative ego-syntonic development aspirations (Nunberg [1951], regarding the ‘Janus’ quality of transference.)
The transference neurosis, as distinguished from the initial transference, usually supervenes after the treatment has lasted for a varying length of time. Its emergence depends on the combined stress of the situational dynamics, and the pressure of the interpretative method. The latter tend to close off habitual repetitive avenues of expression, such as new symptom formation, acting out, flight from treatment, etc. the neurosis differs from the initial transference, in the sense that it tends to reproduce in the analytic and germane extra-analytic setting an infantile dramatis personae, a complex of transference, with the various conflicts and anxieties attendant on the restoration of attitudes and wishes parallelling their infantile prototypes. The initial transference (akin to the ‘floating’ transference of Glover [1955]?) is a relatively integrated phenomenon, allied to character traits, an amalgam or compromise of conflicting forces, that has become established as a habitual attitude, the best resultant of ‘multiple function’ of which the personality is capable, in the general type of relationship that now confronts it? It differs from its everyday counterpart only in its relative separation from its usual or substantiation, and - eventually - in the failure of elicitation of the gratifications or adaptive goals to which it is devoted. As time goes on, varying as to intervals before, and character of, emergence, with the nuances of the patient’s personality organization and the analyst’s technical and personal approach, the unconscious specific transference attitude will press free expression against the defences with which they have been previously integrated, in varying mixtures of associational derivatives, symptomatic acts, dreams, often ‘acting out’, and manifest feelings. At this point (or better, in this zone of a continuum), conflict involving the psychoanalytic situation becomes quasi-manifest, and the transference neurosis as this is incipient. If there be but a brief and over simply outline illustration it is only because there are various interpretations of these terms.
A male patient may adopt a characteristically obsequious although subtly sarcastic attitude toward his older male analyst, quite inappropriate to the situation, but thoroughly habitual in all relations with older men. As time goes on, his wife and business partner becomes connected in his dreams with the analytic situation, his wife in the role of mother, the analyst as father, his business partner as older brother, with corresponding and related anxieties and frustrations of functionally dynamic contributions, in his business and sexual life. Violently hostile or sexually submissive or guilty attitudes may appear in direct or indirect relation to the analyst, in the patient’s manifest activities, or in the analytic material, in dynamic and economic connection with changes in the patient’s other relationships. The entire development is not equally particular to be announced in diffuse resistance phenomena in the analytic situation and processes (Glover, 1955). The transference neurosis as such can, of course, is endlessly elaborated; when extended beyond the point of effectively demonstrable relevance to the central transference, its resistance function may be in the foreground. It must be remembered that the whole array of strongly cathected persons in the individual’s development, and the related variety of attitudes, is all distributed, so to speak, from a single original relationship, the relationship with a mother in earliest infancy. In all of them, there are elements of ‘transference’ from this relationship, most conspicuously and decisively, of course, the shifting of hostile or erotic drives from the mother to the father. In a sense, then, the entire complex of the transference neurosis is a direct, although paradoxically opposed derivative of the basic attachment and unrenounced craving, which arises in relation to the primal object, the more complicated drama having a relation to the original object attachment like that which Lewin (1946) assigns to the elements of the manifest drama in relation to the dream screen. (This is, of course, related to Lewin’s interpretation [1955] of the analytic situation in terms of dream psychology.) Because in the analytic situation, the patient is again confronted with a unique relationship, on which, via the instrumentality of communication by speech, all other relationships and experiences tend to converge, emotionally and intellectually. In this convergence, however, there is a conspicuous differential, due to the intellectual or cognitive lag. In the latter sphere, the analyst’s autonomous ego functions play a decisive operational role, via his interpretations. In the genesis of this lag, an important role must be assigned to the original (reverse) differentially. Which may establish itself between the centrifugal distribution of primal object libido and aggression and the relatively autonomous energies of perception (the ego’s ‘activity?’). The detachment of libido and aggression from the primal object will have the course be contingent not only on their original intensities but on the special vicissitudes of early gratifications. If we consider the limitless panpsychic scope and potentiality of free association, we must assume that some shaping tendency gives the associations a form or pattern reasonably accessible to our perceptive and interpretative skill. It seems likely that this is the latent inner preoccupation with the elements of the transference neurosis, the original transference of which it is self composed, and finally the derivative vicissitudes of the primal object relationship itself, the primal transference.
Insofar as an individual has achieved more than a physical-perceptual linguistic separation from the primal object, the latter elements (i.e., the actual manifestations of primal transference) may play little or no important role in the empirical realities of a given analysis. Except in certain ‘borderline’ (and allied) problems, they are of Metapsychological importance. The problems of the derivative phase and structural conflicts largely occupy us in the analysis of the neurosis. In an individual of unusually fortunate neurosis (!), the transference neurosis (thus the analysis) may not require deeper penetration than the relatively integrated conflict phenomena of the Oedipus complex. In speech, of course, there is at one time a powerful and versatile vehicle of direct object relationship, and at the same time the marvellously elaborated communicative-referential instrumentality that can convey from one individual to another the subjectively experienced parts or whole of an inner and outer world of endlessly multiplied things, persons, qualities, and relationships, in intelligible code. This code, furthermore, is one whose mastery was originally of profound importance (in conjunction with other crucial maturational phenomena, such as an independent locomotion) in enabling the physical separation from the first object (in continuing relationship), and the gradual physical and mental mastery of the rest of the environment.
With regard to the countertransference, is that it has the same important and narrowing distinction from the other aspects of the current relationship and should be made as in the case of the patient’s transference: For here, too, an individual is involved in a complicated relationship with another human being in which a triplet of separate but constantly interacting and sometimes integrated modalities can be discerned. In a sense, since the patient has at least a considerable freedom of verbal and emotional expression, the analyst’s emotional burden is a heavier one. This, however, is like saying that the patient’s responsibility is greater than the child’s, or (to turn back to an earlier page!) That the surgeon carries a greater burden than his comfortably anaesthetized patiently. The analyst is, or should be, better prepared for this burden than his patient. Still, if we remove this entire question from the realm of professional moralism, self-debasement, or self-pity, we can all the more genuinely appreciate the essential message of the frequently contributions on the countertransference in recent years, i.e., the reminder that no one is ‘completely; (or, as Freud [1937] preferred, ‘perfectly’) analysed, that even those who may have approximately this as closely as may reasonably be expected, have specific vulnerabilities to certain individuals or situations, that these may appear in milder form or ephemerally, but nonetheless importantly with others; that, in fact, a self-analysis for the specific ‘counter-transference neurosis’ (Tower, 1956) with each case is, to varying degrees, as silent counterpoint, an integral part of all good analytic work. This would be true whether the counter-transference played its traditional impeding role or its more subtle favourable (i.e., ‘catalytic’) role (Tower, 1956) in a given analysis. One never knows where the usefulness of an unanalyzed reaction may end, and difficulties begin. Another important contribution, not separate, except in terms of emphasis, is the growing appreciation of the countertransference as an affirmative instrument facilitating perception, whereby a sensitive awareness of one’s incipient reactions to the patient, fully controlled and appropriately analysed in an immediate sense, leads to a richer and more subtle understanding of the patient’s transference strivings (Racker 1957, Weigert 1954). This would be opposite yet cognate to the understanding by transitory empathic identification (Reich, 1960). There is also the important attention (Money-Kyrle, 1956) to the specific vicissitudes of the analyst’s peculiarly constricted and emotionally inhibited therapeutic effort, and the mutual projective and introjective identification that may occur between analyst and patient in crises of technical frustration, i.e., frustration of the analyst’s understanding. The operational primacy of the latter function must be stressed. That is, that this function and the germane emotional attitude constitute central and essential ‘gratification’ for the patient’s ‘mature transference’ strivings, enabling his toleration, even positive unitization of the principle of abstinence, in relation to primitive transference demands. Loewald’s views (1960) are importantly related to these, perhaps, in a sense, complementary to them. An important connotation of these countertransference studies is the diminution of the rigid status barrier between analyst and analysand. They point to the patient in the physician, the child in the parent (a sort of latent or potential ‘seesaw’, to modify Phyllis Greenacre’s [1854] ‘titled relationship’!). This intellectual tendency can be, and is often, overdone, just as the magical power of the countertransference to determine the course of treatment has become an almost euphoric overwrought mystical belief among certain younger therapists, and, as a concept, a formidable source of resistance in the technically informed patient. Such exaggerated views, when not of specific and immediate emotional geneses, or due to ignorance, may be connected with a general lack of conviction regarding the efficacy of the therapist’s own analysis, or os the effectiveness of the interpretative method. There may be of a general lack of awareness or acceptance of the power that the original ‘tilt’ lens to the patient’s transference. Finally it is this ‘tilt’ in the situation, and (very importantly) the actuality of its representation in the respective emotional and intellectual states of the participants, on which we must rely. If temperately considered, a view of the relationship that gives great weight to the countertransference, is productively important. It places the operational attitude and technique of the analysis in better perspective, as an integration of several important factors that always include the Countertransference, and it permits an examination of nuances of technical decision on a much more illuminating and genuinely dependable basis than pure precedent, or rule-of-thumb, or pseudo-mathematical certainty. Thus, too foreign a patient in pain some aspirin or not, to inspect his eye for a foreign body or not, to tell him promptly where one ids going on vacation or not, may be right or wrong in either alterative, depending on the analyst’s own specific motivation or anxiety, compared with the patient’s actual need, or their objective clinical indications of the moment, weighted against the continuing and rationally interpreted convenience of technique. It is less likely that any manoeuver, assuming the adherence to basic broad technical principles, will create significant analytic distortion, if executed with genuine and exclusively therapeutic intentions’ appropriate to the need, than a manoeuver or default of manoeuver, based entirely or largely on exhibitionistic or seductive or anxious or compulsive reasons, however respectable the latter may seem. These principles, of course, assume the general analytic framework, and the maintenance of the principle of abstinence, insofar as it does not conflict with overriding human requirements, or does not reach beyond the subtle limits that have been sought to earlier discussion (Scheunert’s, 1961). The issue of the increment of unanswered innocuous questions, of injudiciously withheld expressions of reasonable human interest, where the human relationship requires them. Still it is related to the emotional opposition of the analyst, for a ‘rule’ obviously has a different meaning to an anxious or sadistic or compulsive person than to an individual not thus burdened. The general problem is germane to the perennial interest in why (beyond the usual verities or clichés) an individual becomes a physician, and specifically why he then chooses this physically and emotionally inhibited specialty, which depends do largely on benignly purposive frustration of the patient, on occasional informed talking, and possibly even more on extended and perceptive listening. Assuming that is reasonable, with the myriad individual factors, some general or common countertransference element enters the over determination both of choice of the medical profession and of the specialty that holds a unique position in the minds of medical men and patients alike. The uniqueness of this position is perhaps best suggested by the remarkably frequent query of the naive patient: 'Are you really an MD.?' or 'Are you a medical doctor too?' This is in a different intellectual realm, but surely related to the more informed discussion as to whether analysis is a brach of medicine, or a special development in psychology, or an entirely independent discipline. It is to suggest that, apart from more usual considerations the fascination and strain of analytics works are related to the same phenomenon that evokes the deductibility of which the patient reaction to it. Having to a mindful purpose in that the state of separation and of infantile deprivations that are integral in the situation, and the effort to utilize these toward solutions more favourable than those originally evolved. Setting aside the specific phase problems and other quantitative aspects of individual Countertransference, there will still be quantitative individual variations, tending toward excessive deprivation or overindulgence (for example), revolving about the central and necessary principle of abstinence in the psychoanalytic situation, whose skilful administration is a part of the basic occupational commitment. Insofar as ‘weaning’ is the great focal prototype of abstinence or deprivation, bringing to our attention to the historical vicissitudes of the word wean (Oxford English Dictionary, Vol. 12 [1933]) in which even a secondary (non-etymologic) developments of the alternative meaning ‘deprivingly of one's sanctity' has become obsolete. This is no doubt intertwined with cultural consideration far beyond out present scope of interest. However, it is also symbolically related to the (obsolescent?) Technical moods, which are felt to be restored to analytic work, with advantage.
In addition, on the interface of the analyst-patient interaction is not yet as to have become as focussing on the patient or the analyst. It is the nature of the integration, the quality of contact, what goes on between, including what is enacted. What is communicated effectively and/or unconsciously, that is addressed.
The apparent edge-horizon that is to form a resolution about that which ideally becomes the point of maximum and acknowledged contact at any given moment in a relationship without fusion, without violation of the separateness and integrity of each participant. Attempting to relate at this point requires ceaseless sensitivity to inner changes in oneself and in the other, as well as to changes at the interface of the interaction as these occur in the context of the spiral of reciprocal impact. This kind of effort has a reflexive impact on both participants, and this in turn influences what goes on between them in a dialectical way.
The interchanging edge thus is never static but becomes the trace of a constantly moving locus. Each time this is identified it is also changed, and as it is re-identified it changes again. The analytic expanse is enlarged significantly as aspects of the relationship that are generally not explicitly acknowledged or addressed, as well as their vicissitudes over time, are identified and explored in an analytic way. The emphasis is on process, on engaging live experience, and on generating a new kind of live experience by so doing, in an ever expanding way.
In some ways the focus is on what Winnicott (1971) refers to as the 'continuity-contiguity moment' in relatedness. What distinguishes the conceptualized necessity for acknowledgement and explicitness seems the process of acknowledgement for increases the moment’s dimensional change to natures experiential obtainability. What is? , However, achieved is not simply greater insight into what or was, but what should be, as but a new kind of evidential experience.
Working at the circumferential horizon soon creates a unique contest of safety and allows for maximum closeness precisely because it protects against the threat of intrusion or violation. Attending to the most elusive interactive subtleties and ‘opening the moment’ and thus actualizes upon a natural way to detoxify and subjectively field, every bit as dangers of mystification, seduction. Coercion, manipulation, or collusion is minimized (Levenson 1972, 1983; Ehrenberg 1974, 1982; Feiner 1979, 1983; Gill 1982, 1983; Hoffman 1983). In some instances this makes it possible for both participants to engage aspects of experience and pathology that otherwise might be threatening, even dangerous.
The protection of the kind of analytic rigour that attending to interactive subtleties provides allows for more intense levels of effective engagement without the kind of risk this might otherwise entail.
In its gross effect, the apparent circumferential horizon is not simply art the boundary between self and other, but the given directions developing interpersonal closeness in the relationship, it is also at the boundary of self-awareness. It is a particular point as occupying a positional state in space and time of self-discovery, at which one can become more ‘intimate’ with one’s own experience through the evolving relationship with the other, and then more intimates with the other as one becomes more attuned to self. Because of this kind of dialectical interplay, the apparent favourable boundary becomes the undergoing maturation of the relationship.
As moment-by-moment change over in quality, that the relatedness and experience between analyst and patient are studied, individual patterns of reaction and reason-sensitivities can be identified and explored. This allows for the sparking awareness of choice, as existential decisions to become increasingly involved, or to withdraw, as well as the persuasive influences may be responsively ado, in that they can be studied in process, and the feelings surrounding these can be closely scrutinized. The patient’s spontaneous associations to the immediate experience often not only become an avenue to effectively charged memories of past experiential encounters that might not have been previously accessible but also allow for the metaphoric articulation of unconscious hopes, fears, and expectations, least of mention, few than there are less, have to no expectation whatsoever, or as even not to expect from expectation itself.
Even when the circumferential edge horizon is missed and there is some kind of intrusion or some failure to meet due to overcautiousness, the process of aiming for it, the marginal but mutual focuses on the difficulties involved, can facilitate its obtainable achievement. The effort to study the qualities of mutually spatial experiences in a relationship, the interlocking of both participants, including an interchangeable focus on the failure to connect or inauthenticate, or perhaps into a collusion, can thus become the bridge to a more approximative encounter.
The circumferential edge horizon is, therefore. Not a given, but an interactive creation. It is always unique to the moment and for reason-sensitivities to posit of themselves the specific participants in relation to each other and reflects the participant’s subjective sense of what is most crucial or compelling about their interaction at that present of moments.
Focussing on the interactive nuances in this way often requires a shift in perspective as to what is a figure and what is ground. For example, where a patient drifts into a fantasy that figuratively takes him or her out of the room, perhaps the affirmation to what is in Latin projectio, yet the interactive meaning is as important as the actual content (if not more so). Exploring what triggered the fantasy, and what its immediate interactive function might be, may help the patient grasp some of the subtler patterns of his or her own experiential flame, inasmuch as to grasp to its thought. While the content of the fantasy can provide useful clues to its distributive contribution of its dynamical function, staying with content may be a way for both patient and analyst to collude in avoiding engaging the anxieties of the moment.
Where some form of collusion does occur, as at times it inevitably will, demystifying the collusion has internal repercussions as well. The clarification of patterns of self-mystification (Laing 1965) that this makes it a possibly that being often liberating. It can facilitate a shift on the part of the patient from feeling victimized or helpless, stuck without any options, too freshly experiencing his or her own power and responsibility in relation to multiple choices.
For example, one patient who had difficulty defining where she ended and the other began was invariable in a constant state of anger with others for what she perceived as their not allowing her feelings, as how this operated between us, she realized that no one could control her feelings and that it was her inordinate need for the approval of others that were controlling her. It was her need to control the other, to control the other’s reaction to her, that was defining her experience. The result was that she began to feel less threatened and paranoid. She also was able to begin to deal analytically with the unconscious dynamics of her needs for approval and for control, and to focus on her anxieties in a way not possibly earlier.
We must then, ask of ourselves, are the afforded efforts to control the given as the ‘chance’ to ‘change’, or the given ‘change’ to ‘chance’? As a neutral type of the therapist participation proves to be essential to the resolution of the schizophrenic patient’s basic ambivalence concerning individuation - his intense conflict, that is, between clinging and a hallucinatory, symbiotic mode of existence, in which he is his whole perceived world, or on the other hand relinquishing this mode of experience and committing himself to object-relatedness and individuality - too becoming, that is, a separate person in a world of other persons. Will (1961) points out that just as ‘In the moves toward closeness the person finds the needed relatedness and identification with another, in the withdrawal (often marked by negativism) he finds the separateness that favours his feelings of being distinct and self-identified, and Burton (1961) says that 'In the treatment, the patient’s desire for privacy is respected and no encroachment is made. The two conflicting needs war with each other and it is a serious mistake for the therapist to take sides too early.' The schizophrenic patient has not as to the experience that commitment too object-relatedness still allows for separateness and privacy, and where Séchehaye (1956) recommends that one 'make oneself a substitute for the autistic universe that helped to offer as of a given choice that must rest in the patient’s hands.' This regarded primeval area of applicability of a general comment by Burton (1961) that 'In the psychotherapy of every schizophrenic a point is reached where the patient must be confronted with his choice. . . .' Of Shlien’s (1961) comment that 'Freedom means the widest scope of choice and openness to experience . . . .'
Only in a therapeutic setting where he finds the freedom to experience both these modes of relatedness with one and the same person can the patient become able to choose between psychosis and emotional maturity. He can settle for this later only in proportion as he realizes that both object-relatedness and symbiosis are essential ingredients of healthy human relatedness - that the choice between these modes amounts not to a once-for-all commitment, but that, to enjoy the gratification of human relatedness he must commit himself to either object-relatedness or symbiotic relatedness, as the chancing needs and possibilities that the basic therapeutics requires and permit.
Such, as to say, the problem is to reconcile our everyday consciousness of us as agents, with the best view of what science tells us that we are. Determinism is one part of the problem. It may be defined as the doctrine that every event has a cause. More precisely, for any event as ‘e’, there will be some antecedent state of nature ‘N’, and a law of nature. ‘L’, such that given to ‘L’, ‘N’, will be followed by 'e'. Yet if this is true of every event, it is true of events such as my doing something or choosing to do something. So my choosing or doing something is fixed by some antecedent state ‘N’ and the laws. Since determinism is universal these in turn are fixed, and so backwards to events, for which I am clearly not responsible (events before my birth, for example). So no events can be voluntary or free, where that means that they come about purely because of free willing them, as when I could have done otherwise. If determinism is true, then there will be antecedent states and laws already determining such events? : How then can I truly be said to be their author, or be responsible for them? Reactions to this problem are commonly classified as: (1) hard determinism. This accepts the conflict and denies that you have real freedom or responsibility. (2) Soft determinism or compatibility. Reactions in this family assert that everything you should want from a notion of freedom is quite compatible with determinism. In particular, even if your action is caused, it can often be true of you that you could have done otherwise if you had chosen, and this may be enough to render you liable to be held responsible or to be blamed if what you did was unacceptable (the fact that previous events will have caused you to choose as doing so and deemed irrelevant on this option). (3) Libertarianism. This is the view that, while compatibilism is inly an evasion, there is a more substantive, real notion of freedom that can yet be preserved in the face of determinism (or of in determinism). While the empirical or phenomenal self is determined and not free, the noumenal or rational self is capable of rational, free action. Nevertheless, since the noumenal self exists outside the categories of space and time, this freedom seems to be of doubtful value. Other libertarian avenues include suggesting that the problem is badly framed, for instance because the definition of determinism breaks down, or postulating a special category of uncaused acts of volition, or suggesting that there are two independent but consistent ways of looking at an agent, the scientific and humanistic. It is only through confusing them that the problem seems urgent. None of these avenues accede to exist by a greater than is less to quantities that seem as not regainfully to employ to any inclusion nontechnical ties. It is an error to confuse determinism and fatalism. Such that, the crux is whether choice, is a process in which different desires, pressures, and attitudes fight it out and eventually result in one decision and action, or whether in attitudinal assertions that there is a ‘self’ controlling the conflict, in the name of higher desires, reasons, or mortality? The attempt to add such a extra to the more passive picture (often attributed to Hume), and is a particular target not only of Humean, but also of much feminist and postmodernist writing.
Thus and so, the doctrine that every event has a cause infers to determinism. The usual explanation of this is that for every event, there is some antecedent state, related in such a way that it would break a law of nature for this antecedent state to exist, and as yet the event not to happen. This is a purely metaphysical claim, and carries no implications for whether we can in a principal product the event. The main interest in determinism has been in asserting its implications for ‘free will’. However, quantum physics is essentially indeterministic, yet the view that our actions are subject to quantum indeterminacies hardly encourages a sense of our own responsibility for them.
As such, these reflections are simulated by what might be regarded as naive surprise at the impact of the renewed emphasis on the ‘here-and-now’ in our technical work during the last few years, including the early interpretations of the transference. This emphasis has been argued most vigorously by Gill and Muslin (1976) and Gill (1979). It has at times been reacting to, as if it were a technical innovation, and, of course, making it clear, all the same, from the persistence and reiteration that characterize Gill’s contributions, that he believes the 'resistance to the awareness of transference' to be a critically important and neglected area in psychoanalytic work, this may deserve further emphasis. In Gill’s latest contribution of which as before, he concedes that the recall or reconstruction of the past remains useful but that the working out of conflict in the current transference is the more important, i.e., should have priority of attention. In view of the centrality of issues and its interesting place in the development of psychoanalysis, the contributory works of Gill and Muslin (1976). Gill (1979) presents a subtle and searching review and analysis of Freud’s evolving views on the interrelationship between the conjoint problems of transference and resistance and the indications for interpretation. Repeating this painstaking work would therefore be superfluous. Our’s is for a final purpose to state for reason to posit of itself upon the transference and non-transference interpretation and beyond this, to sketch a tentative certainty to the implications and potentialities of the ‘here-and-now’.
In a sense, the current emphasis may be the historical ‘peaking’ of a long and gradual, if fluctuating, development in the history of psychoanalysis. We know that Freud’s first re-counted with the transference, the ‘false connection’, was its role as a resistance (Breuer and Freud 1893-1895). While Freud’s view of this complex phenomenon soon came to include its powerfully affirmative role in the psychoanalytic process, the basis importance of the ‘transference resistance’ remained. In the Dynamics of Transference (1912) stated in dramatic figurative terms the indispensable current functions of the transference: 'For when all is said and done, destroying anyone in absentia or in effigies is impossible.' In fact, to some of us, the two manifestly opposing forces are two sides of the same coin. As, perhaps, the relationship is eve n more intimate, in the sense that the resistance is mobilized in the first place b the existence of (manifest or - often - latent) transference. It is spontaneous protective reaction against loss of love, or punishment, or narcissistic suffering in the unconscious infantile context of the process.
Historically, the effective reinstatement of his personal past into the patient’s mental life was thought to be the essential therapeutic vehicle of analysis and thus its operational goal. This was, of course, modified with time, explicitly or in widespread general understanding. The recollection or reconstruction of an experience, however critical its importance, evidently did not (except in relatively few instances) immediately dissolve the imposing edifice of structuralized reaction patterns to which it may have importantly y contributed, this (dissolution) might indeed occur - dramatically - in the case of relatively isolated, encapsulated, and traumatic experiences, but only rarely y in the chronic psychoneuroses whose genesis was usually different and far more complex. Freud’s (1914) discovery of the process of ‘working through’, along with the emphasis on its importance, was one manifestation of a major process of recognition of the complexity, persuasiveness, and tenacity of the current dynamics of personality, in relation to both genetic and dynamic factors of early or origin. Perhaps Freud’s (1937) most vivid figurative recognition of the pseudoparadoxical role of early genetic factors, If not understood as part of a complex continuum, was in his 'lamp-fire' critique of the technical implications of Rank’s (1924) Trauma of Birth. The term pseudoparadoxical is used because the recovery of the past by recollection or reconstruction - if no longer the sole operational vehicle and goal of psychoanalysis - retains a unique intimate and individual explanatory value, essential to genuine insight into the fundamental issues of personality development and distortion.
When Ferenczi and Rank wrote The Development of Psychoanalysis in 1924, they proposed an enormous emphasis on emotional experience in the analytic process, as opposed to what was thought to be the effectively sterile intellectual investigation the n in vogue. Instead of the speedy reduction of disturbing transference experience by interpretation, these authors, in a sense, advised the elucidation and cultivation of emotional intensities. (As Alexander pointed out in 1925, however, the method was not clear.) These alone could lend a vivid sense of reality and meaningfulness to the basic dynamism of personality incorporated in the transference. Now it is to be masted and marked that in this work, too, there is no ‘repudiation’ of the past. Ultimately genetic interpretations were to be made. The intense transference experience, as mentioned, was intended to give body, reality, to the living past. Yet, the ultimate significance of construction was invoked, in the sense of ‘supplying’ those memories that might not be spontaneously available. It was felt that the crucial experiences of childhood had usually been promptly repressed and thus not experiences in consciousness in any significant degree. Therapeutic effectiveness of the process was attributed largely to the intensity of emotional experience, than to the depth and ramifications of detained cognitive insight. The fostering in of transference intensity, as, we can infer, was rather by withholding or scantiness of interpretations (as opposed to making facilitating interpretations) and, at times (as specifically stared), by mild confirming responses or attitudes in the affective sphere: These would tend to support the patient’s transference affects in interpersonal reality (Ferenczi and Rank 1024).
This is, of course, different from the recent emphasis on ‘early interpretation of the transference (Gill and Muslin 1976), which in a process in the cognitive sphere designed to overcome resistance to awareness of transference and thuds to mobilize the latter as an active participant in the analysis as soon as possible. What they have in common is an undeniable emphasis on current experience, explicitly in the transference. Also, in both tendencies there is an implicit minimization of the vast and rich territories of mind and feeling, which may become available and at times uniquely informative if fewer tendentious attitudes govern the analyst’s initial approach. Correspondingly, in both there is the hazard of stimulating resistance of a stubborn, well-rationalized maturity by the sheer tendentious of approachment, and similarly transference tendency pursued assiduously by the analyst.
The question of the moments entering a sense of conviction in the patient (a dynamically indispensable state) is, of course, a complex matter. However, if one is to think that few would doubt that immediate or closely proximal experience (‘today’ or ‘yesterday’) occasions grater vividness and sense of certainty than isolated recollection or reconstruction of the remote past. Thus the 'here-and-now' in analytic work, the immediate cognitive exchange and the important current emotional experiences, and, under favourable conditions, contributes to other elements in the process, i.e., recovery or reconstruction of the past, a quality of vividness deriving from their own immediacy, which can infuse the past with life. Obviously, it is the experience of transference affect that largely engages our attention in this reference. However, we must not ignore the contrapuntal role of the actual adult relationship between patient and analyst. Corresponding is indeed the actual biological constellation that bings the transference itself into being. At the very least, a minimal element of ‘resemblance’ to primary figures of the past is a sine quo non for its emergence (Stone 1954).
Nonetheless, this contribution up to and including Gill’s, Muslin’s (1976) and Gill’s (1979) are highly-developed. However, did not introduce alternations in the fundamental conceptions of psychopathology and its essential responses to analytic techniques and process. Yet, there are, of course, varying emphases - namely quantitative - and corresponding positions as to their respective effectiveness. As Strachey states, 'there is an approach to actual substantive modification in the keystone position assigned to introjective super-ego change as the essential phenomenons of analytic process - and possibly in the exclusive role assigned to transference interpretations as ‘mutative’.
A related or complementary tendency may be discerned in Gill’s (1979) proposal that 'analytic situation residues' from the patient’s ongoing personal life, insofar as they are judged transferentially significant in free association, is brought into relation with the transference as soon as possible, even if the patient feels no prior awareness of such a relationship. It is as if all significant emotional experience, including extra-analytic experiences, could be viewed as displacement or mechanisms of concealed expression of his transference. That this is very frequently true of even the most trivial-seeming actual allusions to the analytic would, in that, the thoroughly extra-analytic references constitute a more subtle and different problems, ranging from dubiously interpretably minor issues to massive forms of destructive acting out connected with extreme narcissistic resistances and utterly without discernible 'analytic situation residues'. The massive forms are, of course, analytic emergencies, requiring interpretation. Still, such interpretation would usually depend on the awareness of the larger ‘strategic situations (Stone 1973), rather than on a detail of the free association communication (granting the latter’s usefulness, if present - and recognizable). However, the fact of the past or the historical as never entirely abandoned or nullified, becoming more even, the role assigned to it may be pale or secondary. That the preponderant emphasis on concealed transference may ultimately, constitute an 'actually existing' change in technique and process, with its own intrinsic momentum.
The Ferenczi and Rank technique included, in effect, a deliberate exploitation of the transference resistance, especially in the sense of intense emotional display and discharged. While the polemical emphases of these authors are on (affective) experiences as the sine non of true analytic process - the living through of what was never fully experienced in consciousness in the past (with ultimate translation into ‘memories’, i.e., constructions) - the actual techniques (with a few exceptions) are not clearly specified in their book. For a detailed exposition of the techniques learned from Ferenczi, with wholehearted acceptance, as in the paper of De Forest (1942), which includes the deliberate building up of dramatic transference intensities by interpretative withholding and the active participation of the analyst as a reactive individual. Also included is the active directing of all extra-therapeutic experience into the immediate experiential stream if the analysis. The extreme emphasis on affective transference experience became at one time a sort of vogue, appearing almost as an end and measured by the vehemence of the patient’s emotional displays. In Gill’s own revival of and emphasis on a sound precept of classical techniques (preceded by the 1976 paper of Gill and Muslin), fundamentally different from that of Ferenczi and Rank in its emphasis, one discerns an increment of enthusiasm between the studied, temperate, and well-argued paper of (1979) and the later paper of the same year (1979), which includes similar ideas greatly broadened and extended ti a degree that is, in it's difficultly to accept.
Now, what is it that may actually be worked out in the present - (1) as a prelude to genetic clarification and reduction of the transference neurosis or (2) as a theoretical possibility in its own right without reliance on the explanatory power or specific reductive impact of insight into the past? First some general considerations of whether or not one is an enthusiastic proponent of ‘object relations theory’ in any of its elaborate forms, seems self-evident that all major developmental vicissitudes and conflicts have occurred in the context of important relations with important objects and that they or their effects continue to be reflected in current relationships with persons of similar or parallel importance. That we assume that the psychoanalytic situation (and its adjacent ‘ extended family’) provides a setting in which such problems may be reproduced in their essentials, both effectively and cognitively.
There is something deductively engaging in the idea that an individual must confront and solve his basic conflicts in their immediate setting in which they arise, regardless of their historical background. Certainly this is true in the patient’s (or anyone else’s) actual life situation. Some possible and sometimes state corollaries of this view would be that the preponderant resort to the past, whether by recollection or reconstruction, would be largely in the service of resistance, in the sense of a devaluation of the present and a diversion from its ineluctable requirements. It would be as if the United Kingdom and Ireland would undertake to solve the current problems in Ulster essentially by detailed discussion of Cromwell’s behaviour a few centuries ago. Granted that the latter might indeed illuminate the historical contribution of some aspects of the current sociopolitical dilemma, there are immediate problems of great complexity and intensity from which the Cromwell discussion might indeed by a diversion, if it were magnified beyond it's clear but very limited contribution, displacing in importance the problematical social-political-economic altercation of the present and the recent clearly accessible and still relevant past. As with so many other issues, Freud himself was the first to note that resort to the past may be involved by the patient to evade pressing and immediate current problems. In conservative technique, it has long been noted that some judicious alternations of focus between past and present, according to the confronting resistances trend, may be necessary (for example, Fenichel 1945). However, it was Horney (1939) who placed the greatest stress on the conflict and the greatest emphasis on the recollection trend as supporting resistance.
Now, from the classical point of view, the emphasis is quite different. The original conflict situation is intrapsychic, within the patient, though obviously engaging his environment and ultimately - most poignantly and productively - his analyst. This culminates in a transference neurosis that reproduces the essential problems of the object relationships and conflicts of his development. Thus, in principle, the vicissitudes of love or hate or fear, etc., do not require, or even admit of, ultimate solution in the immediate reality, perceived and construed as such. The problem is to make the patient aware of the distortions that he has carried into the present and of the defensive modes and mechanisms that have supported them. Obviously, the process (‘tactical’) resistances present themselves first for understanding; later there are the ‘strategic’ resistances (i.e., those not expressed in manifest disturbances of free association) (Stoner 1973). Insofar as the mobilization of the transference and the transference neurosis is accorded a uniquely central holistic role in all analyses, the ‘resistance to the awareness of transference’, becomes a crucial issue, the problem of interpretive timing on which a controversial matter from early. Ultimately the bedrock resistance, the true ‘transference resistance’, must be confronted and dissolved or reduced to the greatest possible degree. Such a reduction is construed as largely dependent on the effective reinstatement of the psychological prototype of current transference illusions, with an ensuing sense of the inappropriateness of emotional attitudes in the present and the resultant tendency toward their relinquishment. In a sense, the neurosis is viewed as an anachronistic but compelling investitures of the current scene within unresolved conflict of the past. When successfully reduced, this does appear to have been the accessibly demonstrable phenomenology.
What then may be carried into the analytic situation from the ‘hard-nosed’ paradigm of the struggle with every day, current reality, with advantage to the process? We have already made mention, in that the sense of conviction, or ‘sense of reality’ - affective and cognitive - which originates in th immediacy of process experience. It is our purpose and expectation that, with appropriate skill and timing, this quality of conviction may become linked too other, fewer immediate phenomena, at least in the sense of more securely felt perceptions, including first the fact of transference and ultimately its accessible genetic origins. What furthers? Insofar as the transference neurosis tends toward organic wholeness, a sort of conflict ‘summary’ by condensation, under observation in the immediate present, one may seek and find access in it, not only to the basic conflict mentioned, but to uniquely personal mode of defence and resistance, revealed in dreams, habits of free association, symptomatic acts, parapraxes, and the more direct modes of personal address and interaction that are evident in every analysis. Further, in this view, although not always as transparent as one would wish, this remarkable condensation of effect, impulse, defence, and temporary conflict solution adumbrates more dependably than any other analytic element (or grouping of elements) the essential outlines of the field of obligatory analytic work of a given period of the patient’s life. In it is the tightly knotted tangle deprived from the patient’s early or prehistoric life enmeshed in him actualities of the analytic situation and his germane and contiguous ongoing life situations.
Also, in the sphere of the 'here-and-now,' and of extensive importance, is the role of actualities in the analytic situation. Whether in the patent’s everyday life or in the analytic relationship, the even-handed, open-minded attention to the patient’s emotional experience (especially his suffering or resentment) as to what may be actual, as opposed too ‘neurotic’ (i.e., illusory or unwittingly provoked) or specifically transferential, is not only epistemologically deductive for reason that is also a contribution to the affective soundness of the basic analytic relationship and thus of inestimable importance. At the risk of slight - very slight - exaggeration, in that with excepting instances of pathological neurotic submissiveness, as a patient who wholeheartedly accepted the significance his neurotic or transference-motivated attitudes or behaviour if he felt that ‘his reality’ was not given just due. Furthermore, even the exploration and evaluation of complicated neurotic behaviour must be exhaustive to the point where a spontaneous urge to look for irrational motivations is practically on the threshold of the patient ‘s awareness. Once, again, one must stress the impact of such a tendency on the total analytic relationship. For, not only are the quality and mood of utilization of interpretations, but ultimately the subtleties of transition from a transference relationship to their realities of the actual relationship depend, on a greater degree than has been made explicit, on the cognitive and emotional aspects of the ongoing experience in the actual sphere. Greenson (1971, 1972. Wexler 1969) devoted several of his last papers to this important subject. The subject, of course, includes the vast spheres of the analyst’s character structure and his countertransference. However, more than may be at first apparency, can reside in the sphere of conscious consideration of technique e and attitude in relation to a basic rationale.
However, apart from the immediate function of painstaking discrimination of realities and the impact of this attitude on the total situation, there remains the important question of whether important elements of true analytic process may not be immanent in such trends of inquiry. The vigorous exploration and exposure of distortions in object relations, via the transference or in the affective and behavioural patterns of everyday life, including defence functions, can conceivably catalyse important spontaneous changes in their own right. To further this end, the traditional techniques of psychoanalysis will, of course, be utilized. As an interim phenomenon, however, the patient struggle to deal with distortions, as one might with other error subject to conscious control or pedagogical correction. It is to reasons of conviction that such a tendency may be productive (both as such, and in its intrinsic c capacity to highlight neurotic or conflictive fractions) and has been insufficiently exploited. Nonetheless, there is no reason that the specific dynamic impact of th past is lost or neglected in its ultimate importance, in giving attention to a territory that is, in itself, of a great technical potentiality.
Practitioners and theorists such as Horney (1939) or Sullivan (1953) did not reject the significance of the past, even though its role and proportionate position, both in process and theoretical psychodynamics, was viewed differently. The persisting common features in these views would be a large emphasis on sociological and cultural forces and the focussing of technical emphasis on immediate interpretation transactions.
Granted that various technical recommendations of both dissident and ‘classical’ origin, including those on the nature and reduction of the transference, sometimes appear to devaluate the operational importance of the genetic factor, this devaluation is not supported by the clinical experience of most of those that were indeed of closely scrutinizing it as part of the confessio fidei of major deviationists. Certainly, both in theoretical principle and in empirical observation, this essential direction of traditional analytic process remains of fundamental importance. Conceding the power and challenge of cumulative developmental and experiential personality change and the undeniable impact of current factors, it remains true that the uniquely personal, decisive elements in neurosis, apart from constitution, originate in early individual experience. How to mobilize elements into an effectively mutual function is largely a technical problem and - in seeming paradox - relies to a considerable degree on the skilful handling of the 'here-and-now.' The purposive technical pursuit of the past has not been clinically rewarding. That the ultimate effort to recover an integrated early material in dynamic understanding may not always be successful, especially in severe cases of early pathogenesis is, of course, evident (for example, Jacobson 1971). In such instances, while our preference would be otherwise, we may have to remain largely content with painstaking work in the 'here-and-now,' illuminated to whatever degree possible by reasonable and sound, if necessarily broad, constructions dealing largely with ego mechanisms than primitive anatomical fantasies. In other events, sometimes after years of painstaking work, even large and challenging characterological behavioural trends that have been viewed, clarified, and interpreted in a variety of current transference, situational (even cultural) references will show striking rottenness in earl y experience, conflict, and conflict solution whose explanatory value then achieves a mutative force that remains uniquely among interpretative manoeuvres or spontaneous insights. To this end, the broader aspects of ‘strategic’ resistance (Stone 1973) must be kept in mind, a much subtle element of countertransference and counterresistance.
It would seem proper that at this point of giving to a summation of the current ferment regarding the 'here-and-now' of which any number of valuable critique and theoretical and technical suggestions that may help us to improve the analytic effectiveness, it would seem that the emphasis on the 'here-and-now' interpreting not only consistently with but also ultimately indispensable for genuine access to the critical dynamism deriving from the individual’s early development. Nor is this reflexive, assuming the technical sophistication - inconsistent with the understanding and analysis of continuing developmental problems, character crystallization and the influence of current stresses as such. Adequate attention to the character as a complex interpretational group permits the clear and useful emergence in or the analytic field of significant early material, as defined by the transference neurosis between the technical approaches and that of Gill (1979, 1979), apart from certain larger issues. Whereas Gill would apparently recommend searching out ‘day residues’ of probable transference in the patient’s responses to the analysis or analyst and in his account of his daily life and offer possible alternative explanations to the patient’s direct and simple responses to them as self-evident realities, first relying on the acceptance and exploration of the patient’s ‘reality’, with the possibility that this will incidently favour the relatively spontaneous precipitation of more readily available transference materials, this general Principle does not, of course, obviate or exclude the other alternatives as something preferable?
Consideration of the interaction between the two adult personalties in the analytic situation requires a mixture of common sense and interest in self-evident (although often ignored) elements, on the one hand, and abstrusely psychological and Metapsychological considerations, on the other.
Thus, if we set aside from immediate consideration questions regarding the ‘real relationship’ and accept as a given self-evident fact that the entire psychoanalytic drama occurs (without our question or permission) between two adults in the 'here-and-now' the residual is due becomes the management of the transference, which has been a challenging problem since the phenomenon was first described. Let us assume, for purposes of brevity, that few would now adhere to the principle that the transference is to be interpreted only when it becomes a manifest resistance (Freud 1912). It is in fact always a resistance and at the same time a propulsive force (Stone 1962, 1967, 1073). It has long since been recognized that an undue delay of well-founded transference interpretations (regardless of the state of the patient’s free association) can seriously hinder progress in analysis, and further, it cas augment the dangers of acting out or neurotic flight from the analysis by the patient. The awareness of such danger has been clearly etched in psychoanalytic consciousness since e Freud’s (1905) insight into the end of the Dora case.
Apart from the hazzards inherent in technical default, nonetheless, there has developed over the years with increasing momentum, perhaps in some relations of the increasing stress on the transference neurosis as a nuclear phenomenon of process. The affirmative active address to the transference, i.e., to the analysis - or some by time is the active interpretative bypassing - of the ‘resistances to the awareness of transference
. . . operational emphasis on the countertransference, the tendency - in rational for a proportion - must be regarded as an important integral component of a progressively evolving psychoanalytic method. That individuals vary in their acceptance of technical devotion to this tendency is to be note (as indicated earlier), but its widespread practice by thoughtful analysts cannot be ignored, by the importance of its disregarded note of countransference among analysts, which would tend to restore n earlier emphasis digestedly approach to historical material and avoidance of early or excessive; transference historical material and the avoidance of earlier excessive’ transference interpretation.
A few words about our view on th relatively a circumscribed problem of transference interpretation. It is of the belief of longstanding conviction that the economic aspects of transference distribution are critically important, although largely ignored the seeking utilization of this consideration, a broad directional sense, by distinguishing between the potential transference of the analytic situation and those of the typical psychotherapeutic situation (as beyond that, the transference of everyday life. These varying their degree of emergence and their special investment of transference objects with the intensiveness of contact, with the structural emends of deprivation, and with the degree of regressive attention the operation of the rule of abstinence, which is, of course, most highly developed and consistently maintained in the traditional psychoanalytic situation (Stone 1961). Thus although subject to constant infirmed monitoring, the transference can be as medical, at least latently directed ultimately toward the analyst (compared with the cooperated persons in their environment).
Now, under what conditions and with what provisions should the awareness of such transference potentialities be actively mobilized? Obviously, the original precept regarding its emergence as resistance still trued in its implied affirmative aspect but is no longer exclusive. Further, there are, without question, early transference ‘emergences’ that must be dealt with by an active interpretive approach: For example, the early rapid and severe transference regression of borderline patients or the less common some timely seriously impeding erotic transference fulminations in neuronic patients. These are special instances in which the indications seem clear and obligatory.
The central situation, nonetheless, is the ‘average’ analysis (with apologies!), where the latent transferences tend to remain ego-dystopia, warded off, deploring slowly over periods, and manifesting themselves by a variety of derivative phenomena of variable intensity. Surely, dreams, parapraxes, and trends of free association will reveal basic transference directions very early. However, when should these be interrelated to the patient if he is effectively unaware of them? Again, ‘all things' being equal’, an old principle of Freud’s suggested for all interpretative interventions (as opposed, for example, to clarification), is applicable: That unconscious elements are interpreted only when the patient evidences a secure positive attachment the analyst. Yet, this would not obtain in the fact of the ‘emergencies’ of growing erotic or aggressive intensities, certainly of ‘acting out’ is incipient. The disturbing compilations (even in the ‘erotic’ sphere) occur most often when basic transferences are ambivalent (largely hostile) or coloured by intense narcissism. Therefore, in relation to Freud’s valuable precept, it may be understood that in certain cases, the interpretation of ambivalent hostile transferences may be obligatory prerequisite to the establishment o f the genuinely positive climate that required. In such instances of obligatory intervention, the manifestations that require them are usually quite explicit,
Again, then, what about the relatively uncomplicated case, the chronic neurotic, potentially capable of relatively mature relations to objects? Still, the coping with complications do not seem as in question. There are, a few essential conditions and one cardinal rule. First the patient’s sense of reality and his common sense must not be abruptly or excessively tax, lest, in untoward reaction, his constructive imaginative capacities become unavailable. Preliminary explanations and tentative preparatory ‘trail’ interventions should be freely employed to accustom him to a new view of the world. The traditional optimum for interpretation (when the patient is on the verge of perceiving its content himself [Freud 1940] is indeed best, although it must sometimes be neglected in favour of an active interpretative approach. Second, the patient’s sense that the vicissitudes and exigencies of his actual situation are understood and respected must be maintained
Beyond these considerations, the essential principle is quite simple. If it is assumed that - in the intensive, abstinent, traditional psychoanalytic situation (as differentiated from most psychotherapeutic situations) - the transference (ultimately the transference neurosis) is ‘pointing’ toward the unconscious trend is heavily weighted in this direction, there is still a manifest element of movement toward other currently significant objects. Thus, a latent economic problem assumes clinical form: Essentially, the growing magnitude of transference cathexes of the analyst’s person, as withdrawn to varying degree from important persons in the environment with whom most of the patient’s associations usually deal. There is a point, or a phase, in the evolution of transference in which analytic material (often priori to significant subjective awareness) indicates the rapidly evolving shift from extraanalytic objects to the analyst. In this interval (early in some, later in others) the analyst’s interventions, whether in direct substantive form or aimed at resistances to awareness of transference, often become obligatory and certainly most often successful in mobilizing affective emphasis into the 'here-and-now' of the analytic situation. The vigorous anticipatory interpretations suggested by some may be helpful in many instances (at least as preparatory manoeuvres) if (1) the analyst is certain of his views, in terms of not only the substance but the quantitative (i.e., economic) situation (2) the patient’s state soundly receptive (according to well-established criteria) (3) neither the patient’s realities nor his sense of their realities are put to unjustified questions or implicit neglect (4)a sense of proportion regarding the centrality of issues, largely as indicated by the outline of the transference neurosis (of their adumbration), are maintained in a real consideration. This will avoid the superfluous multiplication of transference references that like the massing of scatted genetic interpretations (familiar in the past), can lead to a ‘chaotic situation’ resembling that against which Wilhelm Reich (1933) inveighed. This will be more striking with a compliant patient who can as readily become bemused with his transference as with his ‘Oedipus’ or his ‘anality.’
Once the affective importance of the transference is established in the analysis, a further (hardly new) question arises, with which some of us have sought to deal in a therapist. Even if some agrees that transference interpretations have a uniquely mutative impact, how exclusively must we concentrate on them? Moreover, to what degree and when are extraanalytic occurrences and relationships of everyday life to be brought into the scope of transference interpretation? With regard to the concentration of transference interpretation alone: a large, complex, and richly informative worlds of psychological experience are obviously attention if the patient ‘s extra therapeutic life is ignored. Further, if the transference situation is unique in an affirmative sense, it is also unique by deficit. To revile at the analyst, for example, is a different experience from reviling at an employer who might ‘fire’ the patient or from being snide to a co-worker who might punch him (Stone 1067 and Rangell 1979). Such experiences are also components if the 'here-and-now' (granted that the 'here'aspect is significantly vitiated), and they do merit attention and understanding in their own right, specially in the sphere of characterology. Certain complex reaction pasterns cannot become accessible in the transference context alone.
At the time of speaking it is true that many spectacular extraanalytic behaviours can, and should be seen as displacements (or ‘acting out’) of the analytic transference or in juxtaposed ‘extended family’ relation to it, especially where they involve consistent members of an intimate dramatis personae? While such ‘extra-therapeutic’ transference interpretations (often clearly Germaine to the conflicts of the transference neurosis) can be indispensable, the confronting vigour and definiteness with which they are advanced (as opposed to tentativeness) must always depend on the security of knowledge of preceding and current unconscious elements that invest the persons involved.
Finally, there are incidents, attitudes, and relationships to persons in the patient’s life experience who are not demonstrably involved in the transference neurosis, yet evoke importantly and characteristic responses whose clarification and interpretation may contribute importantly to the patient’s self-knowledge of defences, character structure, and allied matters. Nonetheless, such data may occasionally show a vitalizing direct relationship to historical materials. It would not seem necessary or desirable that such material be forced into the analytic transference if the patient does not respond to a tactful tentative trail in this connection, for example, the ‘alternative’ suggestion proposed by Gill (1979). For the economic considerations that often obtain, and it may be that certain concurrent transference cluster, not readily related to the mainstream of transference neurosis, retain their own original extra-therapeutic transference investment. In some instances, a closer, more available e relationship to the transference mainstream may appear later and lend itself to such interpretative integration. In so doing, happening is likely if obstinate resistances have not been simulated by unnecessary assault on the patients' sense of immediate reality, or his sense of his actual problems. As for metapsychology, one may recall also that all relationships, following varying degrees of development and conflict vicissitudes, are derived greatly from the original relationship to the primal object (Stone 1967), even if their representations are relatively free of the unique ‘unneutralized’ cathexes that characterize active transference (‘transfer’ verus ‘transference’: Stern 1957).
Caring for a better understanding, to what the concerning change, as seen in the psychotherapy of schizophrenic patient, and particularly in reference to the sense of personal identity, may to this place be clearly vitiated in material that relates to extra-therapeutic experience, whether this is seen ‘in its own right’ or as displaced transference. The direct transference experience occurs in relations an individual who knows his own position, i.e., knows ‘both sides’ as in no other situation. (Even where there are interposing countertransference. There are at least susceptible to a self-analysis). This can never be true in the analysis of an extra-therapeutic situation, as there is no inevitable cognitive deficit. For this we must try to compensate by exercising maximal judgement, by exploiting what is revealed about the patient himself in sometimes unique situations, and by being sensitive to the growing accuracy of his reporting as the analyst progresses. Epistemologic deficits' are intrinsic in the very nature of analytic work. This is but one important example.
We need to be alert to the respects in which the concepts and technique of our particular science may lend themselves to the repression, in us and our patients, of anxiety concerning change.
Our necessary delineation of the repetitive patterns between the transference and countertransference tends to become so preoccupying as to obscure the circumstance that, as Janet M. Rioch phrases it, 'What is curative in the [analytic] process is that in tending to reconstruct in which the analyst that an atmospheric state that obtained in childhood, the patient effectively achieves something new' (Rioch 1943).
Our necessarily high degree of reliance upon verbal communication requires us to be aware of the extent to which grammatical patterns having a tendency to segment and otherwise render static our ever-flowing experience; this has been pointed out by Benjamin (1944); Bertrand Russell (1900), Whorf (1956) and others. The tendency among us to regard prolonged silence for being given to disruptiveness in the analytic process, or evidence per se of the patient’s resistance to it, may be due in part to our unconscious realization that profound personalty-change is often best simplified by silent interaction with the patient; therefore, we have an inclination to press forward toward the crystallization of change-inhibiting words.
What is more, our topographical views of the personality a being divisible into the area’s id, ego, and superego, are so inclined to shield us from the anxiety-fostering realization that, in a psychoanalytic cure, change is not merely quantitative and partial
as of 'Where id was, there shall Ego be,' in Freud’s dictum, but qualitative and all-pervasive. Apparently such data system in a passage is to provide accompaniment for Freud, as he gives a picture of personality-structure, and of maturation, which leaves the inaccurate but comforting impression that at least a part of us - namely, a part of the id - is free from change. In his paper entitled Thought for the Times on War and Death. In 1915, he said, 'the evolution of the mind shows a peculiarity that is present in no other process of development.' When a village grows into a town, a child into a man, the village, and the child become submerged in the town and the man. . . . It is in other considerable levels that the accompaniment with the development of the mind . . . the primitive stage [of mental development] can always be re-established; the primitive mind is, in the fullest meaning of the word, imperishable (Freud 1915).
In Introductory Lectures on Psycho-Analysis, he says that 'in psychoanalytic treatment. . . . By means of the work of interpretation, which transform what is unconscious into what is conscious, the ego is enlarged at the expense of this unconscious.' In the Ego and the Id, he said that, ' . . . the ego is that part of the id modified by the direct influence of the external world . . . the pleasure-principle . . . reigns unrestricted by the id. . . . The ego represents what may be called reason and common sense, in contrast to the id, which contains the passions' (Freud 1923).
Glover, in his book on Technique published in 1955, states similarly that, . . .' A successful analysis may have uncovered a good deal of the repressed . . . [and] have mitigated the archaic censoring functions of the superego, but it can scarcely be expected to abolish the id' (Glover 1955).
Favorably to have done something to provide by some measure, conviction, feeling, mind, persuasion, sentiment used to form or be expressed of some modesty about the state of development of our science, and about our own individual therapeutic skills, should not cause us to undertake the all-embracing extent of human personality growth in normal maturation and in a successful psychoanalysis. Presumably we have all encountered a few fortunate instances that have made us wonder whether maturation really leaves any area of the untouched personality, leaves any steel-bound core within which the pleasure principle reigns immutably, or whether, instead, we have a genuine metamorphosis, from a former hateful and self-seeking orientation to a loving and giving orientation, quite as wonderful and thoroughgoing as the metamorphosis of the tadpole into the frog or that of the caterpillar into the butterfly.
Freud himself, in his emphasis upon the ‘negative therapeutic reaction’ (1923), the repetition compulsion, and the resistance to analytic insight that he discovered in his work with neurotic patients, has shown the importance, in the neurotic individual, of anxiety concerning change, and he agrees with Jung’s statement that ‘a peculiar psychic inertia, hostile to change and progress, is the fundamental condition of neurosis’ (Freud 1915). This is, even more true of the psychosis - so much so that only in very recent decades have psychotic patients achieved full recovery through modified psychoanalytic therapy. Also, it has instructively to explore and deal the psychodynamics of schizophrenia as for the anxiety concerning change which one encounters, in a particular intense degree, at work in these patients, and of ones own, inasmuch as for treating them. What the therapy of schizophrenia can teach us of the human being’s anxiety concerning change, can broaden and deepen our understanding of the non-psychotic individual also.
Further, we see that during his development years he lacks adequate models, in his parents or other parent-figures, with whom to identify about the acceptance of outer changes and the integration of inner change as personality-maturation throughout adulthood. Alternatively, these are relatively rigid persons who, over the years, either/or tenaciously resist change, if anything becomes progressively constricted, fostering him in the conviction that the change from a child into adult is more loss than gain - that, as one matures, fewer feelings and thoughts are acceptable, until finally one is to attain, or be confined to, the thoroughgoing sterility of adulthood. The sudden, unpredictable changes that puncture his parent’s rigidity, due to the eruption of masses of customarily-repressed material in themselves, make them appear to him, for the time being, like totally different persons from their usual selves, and this adds to his experience that personality-change is something that is not to be striving for, but avoided as frighteningly destructive and overwhelming.
We find evidence that he is reacting to, by his parents during his upbringing, predominantly concerning transference and projection, for being the reincarnation of some figure or figures from their own childhood, and the personification of repressed and projected personality-traits in themselves. Thus he is called upon by them, in an often unpredictably changing fashion, to fill various rigid roles in the family, leaving him little opportunity to experience change as something that can occur within himself, as a unique human individual, in a manner beneficial to himself.
When the parents are not relating to him in such a transference fashion they are, it appears, all too often narcissistically absorbed in them. In either instance, the child is left largely in a psychological vacuum, in that he has to cope essentially alone with his own maturing individuality, including the intensely negative emotions produced by the struggle for individuality in such a setting. Because his parents are afraid of the developing individual in him, he too fears this inner self, and his fear of what is heightening parenthetical parents within investing him with powers, based upon the mechanisms of transference and projection that by it's very nature does not understand, powers that he experiences as somehow flowing from himself and yet not an integral part of himself nor within his power to control. As the years bring tragedies to his family, he develops the conviction that he somehow possesses all ill-understood malevolence that is totally responsible for these destructive changes.
In as far as he does discover healthy maturational changes at work in his body and personality, changes that he realizes to be wonderful and priceless, he experiences the poignant accompanying realization that there is no one there to welcome these changes and to share his joy. The parents, if sufficiently free from anxiety to recognize such changes at all, have a tendency to accept them as evidence that their child is rejecting then by growing functionally. Also to be noted, in this connexion, is their lack of trust in him, their lack of assurance that he is elementally good and can be trusted to maturational bases of a good healthy adult. Instead they are alert to find, and warn him against, manifestations in him that can be construed as evidence that he is on a predestined, downward path into an adulthood of criminality, insanity, more at best ineptitude for living.
Moreover, he emergences change not as something within his own power to wield, for the benefit of himself and others but as something imposed from without. This is due not only to structures that the parents place upon his autonomy, but also to the process of increasing repression of his emotions and life as, such that when this latter manifest themselves, they do so in a projected expressive style, for being uncontrollable changed, inflicted upon him from the surrounding world? We see extreme examples of this mechanism later on. In the full-blown schizophrenic person who experiences sexual feelings not as such but as electric shocks sent into him from the outside world, and who experiences anger not as an emerging emotion directorially fittingly as in a way up from within, but a massive and sudden blow coming somehow from the outer world. In fewer extreme instances, in the life of the yet-to-become-schizophrenic youth, he finds repeatedly that when he reaches out to another person, the other suddenly undergoes a change in demeanour, from friendliness to antagonism, in reaction to an unwitting manifestation of the youths’ unconscious hostility. The youth himself, if unable to recognize his own hostility, can only be left feeling increased helplessness in face of an unpredictably changeable world of people.
The final incident that occurs before his admission to the hospital, giving him still further reason for anxiety as for change, is his experience of the psychotic symptoms as an overwhelming anxiety-laden and mysterious change. His own anxiety about this frightened away by the seismic disturbance and horror of the members of his family who finds hi ‘changed’ by what they see as an unmitigated catastrophe, a nervous or mental ‘breakdown’. Although the therapist can come to see, in retrospect, a potential positive element via this occurrence - namely, the emergence of onetime-repressed insights concerning the true state of affairs involving the patient and his family, none of those participants can integrate so radically changed a picture at that time. Over the preceding years the family members could not tolerate their child’s seeing himself and them with the eyes of a normally maturing offspring, and when repressed percepts emerge from repression in him, neither they nor he possesses the requisite ego-strength to accept them as badly needed changes in his picture of himself and of them. Instead, the tumult of depressed percepts foes into the formation of such psychotic phenomena as misidentifications, hallucinations, and delusions in which neither he nor the member of his family can discern the links to reality that we, upon investigation in individual psychotherapy with him, can find in these psychotic phenomena - links, that is, to the state of affairs that has really held sway in the family. Paretically, it should be marked and noted that the psychotic episode often occurs in such ac way as to leave the patient especially fearful of sudden change, for in many instances the de-repressed material emerges suddenly and leads him to damage, in the short space of a few hours or even moments, his life situation so grievously that repair can be affected only very slowly and painfully, over many subsequent months of treatment in the confines of a hospital.
It should be conveyed, in that the regression of the thought-processes, which occurs as one of the features of the developing schizophrenia, results in an experience of the world so kaleidoscopic as to make up still another reason for the individual’s anxiety concerning change. That is, as much as he has lost thee capacity to grasp the essentials of a given whole - to the extent that he has regressed to what Goldstein (1946) terms the ‘concrete attitude’ - he experiences any change, even if it is only in an insignificant (by mature standards) detail of that which he perceives, as a metamorphosis that leaves him with no sense of continuity between the present perception and that immediately preceding. This thought disorder, various aspects of which have been described also by Angyal (1946), Kasanin (1946), Zucker (1958), and others, is compared by Werner with the modes of thought that are found in members of so-called primitive cultures (and in healthy children of our own culture): . . . in the primitive mentality, particulars often as self-subsisting things that do not necessarily become synthized into larger entities. . . . The natives of the Kilimanjaro region do not have a word for the whole mountain range that they inhabit, only words for its peaks. . . . The same is reported of the aborigines of East Australia. From each twist and turn of a river has a name, but the language does not permit of a single all-embracing differentiation for the whole river. . . . [He] quotes Radin (1927) as saying that for the primitive man: 'A mountain is not thought of as a unified whole. It is a continually changing entity’ . . . [and, Radin continues, such a man lives in a world that is] ‘dynamic and ever-changing . . . Since he sees the same objects changing in their appearance from day to day, the primitive man regards this phenomenon as definitely depriving them of immutability and self-subsistence’ (Werner 1957).
Langer (1942) has called the symbolic-making function ‘one of man’s primary activities, like eating, looking, or moving about. It is the fundamental process of his mind’, she says, as she terms the need of symbolization ‘a primary need in man, which other creatures probably do not have’. Kubie (1953) terms the symbolizing capacity ‘the unique hallmark of man . . . capacities’, and he states that it is in impairment of this capacity to symbolize that all adult psychopathology essentially consists.
As for schizophrenia, we find that since 1911 this disease was described by Bleuler (1911) as involving an impairment of the thinking capacities, and in the thirty years many psychologists and psychiatrists, including Vigotsky (1934) Hanfmann and Kasanin (1942) Goldstein (1946) Norman Cameron (1946) Benjamin (1946) Beck (1946) von Domarus (1946) and Angtal (1946) - to mention but a few - has described various aspects of this thinking disorder. These writers, agreeing that one aspect of the disorder consists in over -concreteness or literalness of thought, have variously described the schizophrenic as unable to think in figurative (including metaphorical) terms, or in abstractions, or in consensually validated concepts and symbols, mor in categorical generalizations. Bateson (1956) described the schizophrenic as using metaphor, but unlabelled metaphor.
Werner (1940) has understood this most accurately matter of regression to a primitive level of thinking, comparable with the found in children and in members of so-called primitive cultures, a level of thinking in which there is a lack of differentiation between the concrete and the metaphorical. Thus we might say that just as the schizophrenic is unable to think in effective, consensually validated metaphor, as too as he is unable to think in terms that are genuinely concrete, free from an animistic forbear of a so-called metaphorical overlay.
The defensive function of the dedifferentiation that in so characterized of schizophrenic experience, and one find that this fragmentation o experience, justly lends itself to the repression of various motions that are too intense, and in particular too complex, for the weak ego to endure, which must be faced as one becomes aware of change as involving continuity rather than total discontinuity.
That is, the deeply schizophrenic patient who, when her beloved therapist makes a unkind or stupid remark, experiences him now for being a different person from the one who was there a moment ago - who experiences that a Bad Therapist has replaced the Good Therapist - is by that spared the complex feeling of disillusionment and hurt, the complex mixture of love and anger and contempt that a healthier patient would feel then. Similarly, if she experiences it in tomorrow’s session - or even later in the same session - that another good therapist has now come on the scene. The bad therapist is now totally gone, she will feel none of the guilt and self-reproach that a healthier patient would feel at finding that this therapist, whom she has just now been hated or despising, is after all a person capable of genuine kindness. Likewise, when she experiences a therapist’s departure on vacation for being a total deletion of him from her awareness, this bit of discontinuity, or fragmentation, in her subjective experience spars her from feeling the complex mixture of longing, grief, separation-anxiety, rejection, rage and so on, which a less ill patient feels toward a therapist who is absent but of whose existence he continues to be only too keenly aware.
Finally, such repressed emotions as hostility and lust may readily be seen, as these feelings not easy to hear expressed, as, for instance, the woman, who, at the beginning of her therapy, had been encased for years I flint lock paranoid defenses, become able to express her despair by saying that 'If I had something to get well for, it would make a difference,' her grief, by saying, 'The reason I am afraid to be close to people is because I feel so much like crying': Her loneliness, by expressing a wish that she would turn an insect into a person, so then she would have a friend. Her helplessness in face of her ambivalence by saying, to her efforts to communicate with other persons, 'I feel just like a little child, at the edge of the Atlantic or Pacific Ocean, trying to build a castle - right next to the water. Something just starts to be gasped [by the other person], and then bang! It has gone - another wave. As joining the mainstream of fellow human beings.
In the compliant charge of bringing forward three hypotheses are to be shown, they're errelated or portray in words as their interconnectivity, are as (1) in the course of a successful psychoanalysis, the analyst goes through a phase of reacting to, and eventually relinquishing, the patient as his oedipal love-object, (2) in normal personality development, the parent reciprocates the child's oedipal love with greater intensity than we have recognized before, and (3) in such normal developments, the passing of the Oedipus complex is at least important a phase in ego-development as in superego-development.
While doing psycho-analysis, time and again patients who have progressed to, or very far toward, a thorough going analysis to cure, become aware of experiential romantic and erotic desires and fantasies. Such fantasizing and emotions have appeared in a usual but of late in the course of treatment, have been preset not briefly but usually for several months, and have subsided only after having experienced a variety of feelings - frustration, separation anxiety, grief and so forth - entirely akin to those that attended as the resolution of an Oedipus complex late in the personal analysis.
Psycho-analysis literature is, in the main. Such as to make one feel more, rather than less, troubled at finding in oneself such feelings toward one's patient. As Lucia Tower (1956) has recently noted, . . . Virtually every writer on the subject of countertransference . . . states unequivocally that no form of erotic reaction to a patient is to be tolerated . . .
Still, in recent years, many writers, such as P. Heimann (1950), M. B. Cohen (1952) and E. Weigert (1952, 1954), have emphasized how much the analyst can learn about the patient from noticing his own feelings, of whatever sort, in the analytic relationship. Weigert (1952), defining countertransference as emphatic identification with the analysand, has stated that . . . 'In terminal phases of analyses the resolution of countertransference goes hand in hand with the resolution of transference.'
Respectfully, these additional passages are shown in view of countertransference, in the special sense in which defines the analyst for being innate, inevitable ingredients in the psycho-analytic relationship, in particular, the feelings of loss that the analyst experiences with the termination of the analysis. However, case in point, that the particular variety of countertransference with which are under approach is concerned that of the analyst's reacting as a loving and protective parent to the analysand, reacted too as an infant: There are plausible reasons why in the last phase it is especially difficult to achieve and maintain analytic frankness. The end of analysis is an experience of loss that mobilizes all the resistances in the transference (and in the counter-transference too), for a final struggle. . . . Recently, Adelaide Johnson (1951) described the terminal conflict of analysis as fully reliving the Oedipus conflict in which the quest for the genitally gratifying parent is poignantly expressed and the intense grief, anxiety and wrath of its definitive loss are fully reactivated. . . . Unless the patient dares to be exposed to such an ultimate frustration he may cling to the tacit permission that his relation to the analyst will remain his refuge from the hardships of his libidinal cravings to an aim-inhibited, tender attachment to the analyst as an idealized parent, he can get past the conflicts of genital temptation and frustration.
. . . . The resolution of the counter-transference permits the analyst to be emotionally freer and spontaneous with the patient, and this is an additional indication of the approaching end of an analysis.
. . . . When the analyst observes that he can be unrestrained with the patient, when he no longer weighs his words to maintain as cautious objectivity, this empathic countertransference and the transference of the patient are in a process of resolution. The analyst can treat the analysand on terms of equality; he is no longer needed as an auxiliary superego, an unrealistic deity in the clouds of detached neutrality. These are signs that the patient's labour of mourning for infantile attachments nears completion.
In stressing the point, which before an analysis can properly bring to an end, the analyst must have experienced a resolution of his countertransference to the patient for being a deep beloved, and desired, figure not only on this infantile level that Weigert has emphasized valuably, but also on an oedipal-genital level. Weigeret's paper, which helped to formulate the views that are set down, that is, as expressing the total point that a successful psycho-analysis involves the analyst's deeply felt relinquishment of the patient both as a cherished infant, and for being a fellow adult who is responded to at the level of genital love?
The paper by L. E. Tower (1956) comes similarly close to the view that, unlike Weigert, limits the term counter-transference to those phenomena that are transferences of the analyst to the patient. It is much more striking, therefore, that she finds even this classification defined countertransference to be innate to the analytic process: . . . . That there is inevitably, naturally, and often desirable, many countertransference developments in every analysis (some evanescent - some sustained), which is a counterpart of the transference phenomena. Interactions (or transactions) between the transference of the patient and the countertransference of the analyst, going on at unconscious levels, may be - or perhaps are always - of vital significance for the outcome of the treatment. . . .
. . . . Virtually every writer on the subject of countertransference. States unequivocally that no form of erotic reaction to a patient is to be tolerated. This would suggest that temptations in this area are great, and perhaps ubiquitous. This is the one subject about which almost every author is very certain to state his position. Other 'counter-transference' manifestations are not routinely condemned. Therefore, it must be to assume that erotic responses to some extent trouble nearly every analyst. This is an interesting phenomenon and one that call for investigation; nearly all physicians, when they gain enough confidence in their analysts, report erotic feelings and imply toward their patients, but usually do so with a good deal of fear and conflict. . . .
Of our tending purposes, we are to pay close attention to the libidinal resources that are of our applicative theory, in that large amounts of resulting available libido are necessary to tolerate the heavy task of many intensive analyses. While, we deride almost every detectable libidinal investment made by an analyst in a patient . . . various forms of erotic fantasy and erotic countertransference phenomena of a fantasy and of an affective character are in some experiential ubiquitous and presumably normal. Which lead to suspect that in many - perhaps every - intensive analytic treatment there develops something like countertransference structures (perhaps even a 'neurosis') which are essential and inevitable counterparts of the transference neurosis. These countertransference structures may be large or small in their quantitative aspects, but in the total picture they may be of considerable significance for the outcome of the treatment. They function in the manner of a catalytic agent in the treatment process. Their understanding by the analyst may be as important to the final working through of the transference neurosis as is the analyst's intellectual understanding of the transference neurosis itself, perhaps because they are, so to speak, the vehicle for the analyst's emotional understanding of the transference neurosis. Both transference neurosis and countertransference structure seem intimately bound together in a living process and both must be considered continually in the work that is the psychoanalysis. . . .
. . . . Seemingly questionable, is any thorough working through a deep transference neurosis, in the strictest sense, which does not involve some form of emotional upheaval in which both patient and analysts are involved. In other words, there are both a transference neurosis and a corresponding Countertransference 'neurosis' (no matter how small and temporary) which are both analyzed in the treatment situation, with eventual feelings of a new orientation by both one another toward any other but themselves.
Freud, in his description of the Oedipus complex (1900, 1921, 1923), tended largely to give us a picture of the child as having an innate, self-determined tendency to experience, under the conditions of a normal home, feelings of passionate love toward the parent of the opposite sex; we get little hints, from his writings, that in this regard the child enters a mutual relatedness of passionate love with that parent, a relatedness in which the parent's feelings may be of much the same quality and intensity as those in the child (although this relatedness must be very important in the life of the developing child than it is in the life of the mature adult, with his much stronger, more highly differentiated ego and with his having behind him the experience of a successfully resolved oedipal experience during his own maturation).
Nevertheless, in the earliest of his publications concerning the Oedipus complex, namely The Interpretation of Dreams (1900), Freud makes a fuller acknowledgements of the parent's participation in the oedipal phase of the child's life than does in any of his later writings on the subject'. . . a child's sexual wishes - if in their embryonic stage they deserve to be so described - awaken very early. . . . A girl's first affection is for her father and boy's first childish desires are for his mother. Accordingly, the father becomes a disturbing rival to the boy and the mother to the girl. The parents too give evidence as a rule of sexual partiality: A natural predilection usually sees to it that a man tends to spoil his little daughters, while his wife takes her sons' part; though both of them, where their judgement is not disturbed by the magic of sex, keep a strict eye upon their children's education. The child is very well aware of this patriality and turns against that one of his parents who is opposed to showing it. Being loved by an adult does not merely bring a child the satisfaction of a special need; it also means that he will get what he wants in every other respect as well. Thus, he will be following his own sexual instinct and while giving fresh strength to the inclination shown by his parents if his choice between them falls in with theirs (1900).
Theodor Reik, in his accounts of his coming to sense something of the depths of possessiveness, jealousy, fury at rivals, and anxiety in the face of impending loss, in himself regarding his two daughters, conveys a much more adequate picture of the emotions that genuinely grip the parent in the oedipal relationship than is conveyed by Freud's sketchy account, as Reik's deeply moving descriptions occupy a chapter in his Listening with the Third Ear (1949), written at the time when his daughters were twelve and six years of age; and a chapter in his The Secret Self (1952), when the oldest daughter was now seventeen.
Returning to a further consideration of the therapist's oedipal-love responses to the patient, it seems that these response flows from four different sources. In actual practice the responses from these four tributaries are probably so commingled in the therapists that it is difficult of impossible fully to distinguish one kind from another; the important thing is that he is maximally open to the recognition of these feelings in himself, no matter what their origin, for he can probably discern, in as far as is possible, from where they flow they signify, therefore, concerning the patient's analysis.
First among these four sources may be mentioned the analyst's feeling-responses to the patient's transference. This, when, as the analysis progresses and the patient enter an experiencing of oedipal love, ongoing, jealousy y, frustration and loss as for the analyst as a parent in the transference, the analyst will experience to at least some degree, response's reciprocally th those of the patient-responses, that is, such for being present within the parent in questions, during the patient's childhood and adolescence, which the parent presumably was not ably to recognize freely and accept within himself. Some writers apply the term 'counter-transference' to such analyst-responese to the patient's transference, unlike others some do not do so.
The second source consists in the countertransference in the classical sense in which this term is most often used: The analyst's responding to the patient about transference-feelings carried over from a figure out of the analyst 's own earlier years, without awareness that his response springs predominantly from this early-life, rather than being based mainly upon the reality of the patient analyst-patient relationship. It is this source, of course, which we wish to reduce to a minimum, by means of thoroughgoing personal analysis and ever-continuing subsequent alertness for indications that our work with a patient has come up against, in us, unanalyzed emotional residues from our past. This source is so very important, in fact, as to make the writing of such a paper as a somewhat precarious venture. Must expect that some readers will charge him with trying to portray, as natural and necessary to the annalistic process generally, certain analyst-responese that in actuality is purely the result of an unworked-through? Oedipus' complex in himself, which are dangerously out of place in his own work with patients that have no place in the well-analysed analyst's experience with his patient.
It can only be surmised that although this source may play an insignificant role in the responses of a well-analysed analyst who has conducted many analyses through to completion - to an intensified inclusion as a thoroughgoing resolution of the patient's Oedipus complex - it is probably to be found, in some measure, in every analyst. This is, it seems that the nature and conflictual feeling-experience in this regard - a fostering of his deepest love toward the fellow human being with whom she participates in such prolonged and deeply personal work, and a simultaneous, unceasing, and rigorous taboo against his behavioural expression of any of the romantic or erotic components of his love - as to require almost any analyst's tending to relegate the deepest intensities of these conflictual feelings to his own unconscious mind, much as were the deepest intensities of his oedipal strivings toward a similar beloved, and similarly unobtainable and rigorously tabooed, parent in particular, and in the hope of the remaining in the analyst's unconscious. That is hoping that this will help analysts - in particular, to a lesser extent-experienced analyst - whereas to some readers awareness, and by that diminution, of this countertransference feeling, as justly dealing with other kinds of countertransference feelings, by such as those wrote by P. Heumann (1950, M. B., Cohen (19520 and E. Weigert (1952?)
A third source is to be found in the appeal that the gratifyingly improving patient makes to the narcissistic residue in the analyst's personality, the Pygmalion in him. He tends to fall in love with this beautifully developing patient, regarded at this narcissistic level as his own creation, just as Pygmalion fell in love with the beautiful statu e of Galatea that he had sculptured. This source, like the second one that we can expect to holds little sways in the well-analysed practitioner of long experience, but it, too, is probably never absent of great experience and professional standing, than we may like to think. Particularly in articles and books that describe the author's new technique or theoretical concept as an outgrowth of the work with a particular patient, or a very few patients, do we see this source very prominently present in many instances.
The fourth source, based on the genuine reality of the analyst-patient situation, consists in the circumstance that nearly becomes, per se, a likeable, admirable and insightfully speaking lovable, human being from whom the analyst will soon become separated. If he is not himself a psychiatrist, the analyst may very likely never see him again. Even if he is a professional colleague, the relationship with him will become in many respects far more superficial, far less intimate, than it has been. This real and unavoidable circumstance of the closing analytic work tends powerfully to arouse within the analyst feelings of painfully frustrated love that deserve to be compared with the feelings of ungratifiable love that both child and parent experience in the oedipal phase of the child's development. Feelings from this source cannot properly be called countertransference. They may flow from the reality of the present circumstances but they may be difficult or impossible e to distinguish fully from countertransference.
There are, then four essentially powerful sources having to promote of the tendency toward the feelings of deep love with romantic and erotic overtones, and with accompanying feelings of jealousy, anxiety, frustration-rage, separation-anxiety, and grief, in the analyst about the patient. These feelings come to him, like all feelings, without tags showing from where they have come, and only if he is open and accepting to their emergence into his awareness does he have a chance to set about finding out their origin and thus their significance in his work with the patient.
Finally, with which the considerations have been presented so far, a few remarks concerning the passing of the Oedipus complex in normal development and in a successful psycho-analysis.
In the Ego and the Id (1923) we find italicized a passage in which Freud stresses that the oedipus phase results in the formation of the superego; we find that he stresses the patient's opposition to ther child's oedipal swosh, and lastly, we see this resultant suprerego to be predominantly a severe and forbidding one: The broad general outcome of the sexual phase dominated by the Oedipus complex may, therefore, be taken to be the forming of a precipitating in the ego . . . This modification of the ego
. . . comforts the other contents of the ego as an ego ideal or super-ego.
. . . . The child's parents, and especially his father, were perceived as the obstacle to verbalizations of his Oedipus wishes, so his infantile ego fortified itself for the carrying out of the repression by building this obstacle within itself. It borrowed the strength to do this, so to seek, from the father, and this loan was an extraordinarily nonentous act. The super-ego retains the character of the father, while the more powerful the Oedipus complex was and the more rapid succumbed to repression (under the influence of authority, religious teachings, schooling and reading), this strictly will be the domination of the super-ego over the ego later on - as conscience or perhaps of an unconscious sense of guilt. . . .
The subject dealt within the subjective matter through which generative pre-oedipal origins are to be found of the superego, on which has been dealt by M. Klein (1955). E. Jacobson (1954) and others, also apart from that subject, a regard for Freud's above-quoted description as more applicable to the child who later becomes neurotic or psychotic, than to the 'normal'; child. Since we can assume that there is virtually a wholly complimentary neurotic difficulty, we may then have in assuming that Freud's formation holds true to some degree in every instance. Still, to the extent that a child's relationships with his parents are healthy, he finds the strength to accept the unrealizibilityy of his oedipal strivings, not mainly through the identification with the forbidding rival-parent, but mainly, as an alternative, the ego-strengthening experiences of finding the beloved parent reciprocate his love - responds to him, that is, for being a worthwhile and loveable individual, for being, a conceivably desirable love-partner - and renounces him only with an accompanying sense of loss on the parent's own part. The renunciation, again, something that is mutual experience for the chid and parent, and is made in deference to a recognizedly greater limiting realty, a reality that includes not only the taboo maintained by the rival-parent, but also the love of the oedipal desired parent toward his or her spouse - a love that undeterred the child's birth and a love to which, in a sense, he owes his very existence?
Out of such an oedipal situation the child emerges, with no matter how deep and painful sense of loss at the recognition that he can never displace the rival-parent and posses the beloved on e in a romantic-and-erotic relationship, in a state differently from the ego-diminished, superego-domination state that Freud described. This child that his love, however unrealized, is reciprocated. Strengthened, too, out of the realization, which his relationship with the beloved parent has helped him to achieve, that he lives in a wold in which any individual's strivings are encompassed by a reality much larger than he: Freud, when he stressed that the oedipal phase normally results mainly in the formations of a forbidding superego, and if it is resulting mainly in enchantments of the ego's ability to test both inner and outer reality.
All experiences with both neurotic and psychotic patients had shown that, in every individual instance, in as far as the oedipal phase was entered the course of their past elements, it led to ego impairment rather than ego functioning as primarily because the beloved parent had to repress his or her reciprocal desire for the child, chiefly through the mechanism of unconscious denial of the child's importance to the parent. More often than not, in these instancies, that suggested that the parent would unwittingly act out his or her repressed desires in the unduly seductive behaviour toward the child; yet whenever the parents come close to the recognition of such desires within him, he would unpredictably start reacting to the child as unlovable - undesirable.
With many of these parents, appears that, primarily because of the parent's own unresolved Oedipus complex, his marriage proved too unsatisfying, and his emotional relationship to his own culture too tenuous, for him to dare to recognize the strength of his reciprocal feelings toward his child during the latter's oedipal phase of development. The child is reacting too as a little mother or father transference-figure to the parent, a transference-figure toward whom the parent's repressed oedipal love feelings are directed. If the parent had achieved the inner reassurance of a deep and enduring love toward his wife, and a deeply felt relatedness with his culture including the incest taboos to which his culture adheres, he would have been able to participate in as deeply felt, but minimally acted out, relationship with the chid in a way that fostered the healthy resolutions of the child's Oedipus complex. Instead, what usually happens in such instances, in that the child's Oedipus complex remains unresolved because the child stubbornly - and naturally - refuses to accept defeat within these particular family circumstances, whereas the acceptance of oedipal defeat is tantamount to the acceptance of irrevocable personal worthlessness and unlovability.
It seems much clearer, then this former child, now neurotic or psychotic adult, requires from us for the successful resolution to his unresolved Oedipus complex: Not such a repression of desire, acted-out seductiveness, and denial of his own worth as he met in the relationship with his parent, but a maximal awareness on our part of the reciprocal feelings while we develop in response to his oedipal strivings. Our main job remains always, of course, to further the analysis of his transference, but what might be described seems to be the optimal feeling background in the analyst for such analytic work.
Formidably, when applied not to a moderate degree found in the background of the neurotic person but invested with all the weight of actual biological attributes, have much ado with the person's unconscious refusal to relinquish, in adolescence and young adulthood, his or her fantasied infantile omnipotence in exchange for a sexual identity of - in these-described terms - a 'man' or a 'woman'. It would be like having to accept only certain dispensations as well as salvageable sights, if ony to see the whole fabric ruined into the bargin. A person cannot deeply accept an adult sexual identity until he has been able to find that this identity can express all the feeling-potentialities of his comparatively boundless infancy. This implies that he has become able to blend, for example, his infantile - dependent needs into his more adult erotic strivings, than regard these as mutually exclusive in the way that the mother of the future patient or the persons infant frighteningly feels that her lust has been placed in her mothering. Another difficult facet of this situation resides in a patient's youngful conviction, based on his intrafamiliar experiences, which he can win parental love only if he can become or, perhaps, at an unconscious level remain - a girl; accepting her sexuality as a woman is equated with the abandonment of the hope of being loved.
Concerning the warped experiences their persons have and with the oedipal phase of development, calls to our attention of two features. First, the child whose parents are more narcissistic than truly object-related in faced with the basically hopeless challenge of trying to compete with the mother's own narcissistic love for herself, and with the father's similar love for himself, than being presented with a competitive challenge involving separate, flesh-and-blood human beings. Secondly, concerning warped oedipal experiences, in, as far as the parents succeeded in achieving object-relatedness, this has often become only weakly established as a genital level, so that it remains much more prominently at the mother-infant level of ego-development. Thus, the mother, for example, is much more able to love her infant son than her adult husband, and the oedipal competition between husband and son are in terms of who can better become, or remain, the infant whom the mother is capable of loving. When the infant becomes chronologically a young man, having learned that one wins a woman not through genial assertiveness but through regression, he is apt to shy away from entering into true adult genitality, and is tempted to settle for what amounts to 'regressive victory' in the oedipal struggle
We write much about the analyst’s or therapist’s being able to identify or empathize with the patient for helping in the resolution of the neurotic or psychotic difficulties. Such writings always portray a merely transitory identification, an empathic sensing of the patient’s conflicts, an identification that is of essentially communicative value only. However, it should be seen that we inevitably identify with the patient another fashion also, we identify with the healthy elements in him, in a way that entails enduing, constructive additions to our own personality. Patients - above all schizophrenic patients - need and welcome our acknowledgement, simply and undemonstratively, that they have contributed, and are contributing, in some such significant way, to our existence.
Increasing maturity involves increasing ability not merely to embrace change in the world around one, but to realize that one is oneself in a constant state of change. By contrast, the recovering, maturing patiently becomes less and less dependent upon any such sharply delineated, static self-image or even a constellation of such images, the answer to the question, 'Who are you?' is almost as small, solid, and well defined as a stone, but is a larger, fluid, richly-laden, and sniffingly outlined as an ocean? As the individual becomes well, he comes to realize that, as Henri Bergson (1944) puts it, 'reality is a perpetual growth, a creation pursued without end. . . . A perpetual becoming,' and to the extent that he can actively welcome change and let it become part of him, he comes to know that - again in Bergson’s phrase - 'to exist is to change, to change is too mature, to mature is to go on creating oneself endlessly.'
Philosophical issues about ‘perception’ tend to be issues specifically about ‘sense-perception’. In England (and the same is true of comparable terms in many other languages) the term ‘perception’ has a wider connotation than anything that has to do with the senses and sense-organs, though it generally involves the idea of what may imply, if only in a metaphorical sense, a point of view. Thus it is now increasingly common for news-commentators, for example, to speak of events, even though those people have not been witnesses of them. In one sense, however, there is nothing new about this, in seventeenth-and-eighteenth-century philosophical usage, words for perception were used with a much wider coverage than sense-perception alone. It is, however, sense-perception that has typically raised the largest and most obvious philosophical problems.
Such problems may be said to fall into two categories. These are, for the epistemological problems about the role of sense-perception in connection with the acquisition and possession of knowledge of the world around us. These problems - does perception give us knowledge of the so-called ‘external world’, and to what extent? - have become dominant in epistemology since Descartes because of his invocation of the method of doubt, although they undoubtedly existed in philosophers’ minds in one way or another before that. In early and middle twentieth-century Anglo-Saxon philosophy such problems centred on the question whether there are firm data provided by the senses - so-called sense-data - and if so what is the relation of such sense-data to so-called material objects. Such problems are not essentially problems for the philosophy of mind, although certain answers to questions about perception which undoubtedly belong to the philosophy of mind can certainly add to epistemological differences. If perception is assimilated, for example, to sensation, there is an obvious temptation to think that in perception we are restricted, at any rate initially, to the contents of our own minds.
The second category of problems about perception - those that fall directly under the heading of the philosophy of mind - are thus in a sense prior to the problems that exercised many empiricist in the first half of this century. They are problems about how perception is to be construed and how it relates to a number of other aspects of the mind’s functioning - sensations, concepts and other things involved in our understanding of things, beliefs and judgements, and the imagination, our action in relation to the world around us, and the causal processes involved in the physics, biology and psychology of perception. Some of the last were central to the considerations that Aristotle raised about perception in his ‘De Anima’.
It is obvious enough that sense-perception involves some kind of stimulation of sense organs by stimuli that are themselves the product of physical processes which are biological in character are then initiated. Moreover, only if the organism in which this takes place is adapted to such excitation, for which the stimulation can perception ensue. Aristotle had something to say about such matters, but it was evident to him that such an account was insufficient to explain what perception itself is. It might be thought that the most obvious thing is missing in such an account is some reference to consciousness. But while it may be the case that perception can take place only in creatures that have consciousness in some sense, it is not clear that every case of perception directly involves consciousness. There is such a thing as unconscious perception and psychologists have recently drawn attention to the phenomenon which is described as ‘blind-sight’ - an ability, generally manifested in patients with certain kinds of brain-damage, to discriminate sources of light, even when the people concerned have no consciousness of the lights and think that they are guessing about them. It is important, then, not to confuse the plausible claim that perception can take place only in conscious beings with the less plausible claim that perception always involves consciousness of objects. A similar point may apply to the relation of perception to some of the other items exposed to concept-possession.
Consciousness may possibly be the most challenging and persuasive source of problems in the whole of philosophy. Our own consciousness seems to be the most basic fact confronting us, yet it is almost impossible to say what consciousness is. Is mine like yours? Is ours like that of animals? Might machines come to have consciousness? Is it possible for there to be disembodied consciousness? Whatever complex biological and neural processes go on back-stage, it is my consciousness that provides the theatre where my experiences and thoughts have their existence, where my desires are felt and where my intentions are formed. But then how am I to conceive that ‘I’, or ‘self’ that is the spectator, or at any rate the owner of this theatre? There problems together make up what is sometimes called ‘the hard problem’ of consciousness. One of the difficulties in thinking about consciousness is that the problems seem not to be scientific ones. Gottfried Wilhelm Leibniz (1646-1716) remarked that if we could construct a field or machine, per se, and find to its expansive area, we still would not be able to find consciousness, so that consciousness resides in simple subjects, not complex ones. Even if we are convinced that consciousness somehow emerges from the complexity of brain functioning, we may still feel baffled about the way the emergence takes place, or why it takes place in just the way it does.
The nature of conscious experience has been the largest single obstacle to physicalism, behaviourism and functionalism in the philosophy of mind: These are all views that according to their opponents, can only be believed by feigning permanent anaesthesia. But many philosophers are convinced that we can divide and conquer: We may make progress not by thinking of one ‘hard’ problem, but by breaking the subject up into different skills and recognizing that rather than a single self or observer we would do better to think of a relatively undirected whirl of cerebral activity, with no inner theatre, no inner lights, and above all no inner spectator.
Til most recently it has been thought that in the study of how nerve cells, or neurons, receives and transmits information. Two types of phenomena are involved in processing nerve signals: Electrical and chemical. Electrical events propagate a signal within a neuron, and chemical processes transmit the signal from one neuron to another neuron or to a muscle cell.
A neuron is a long cell that has a thick central area containing the nucleus, it also has one long process called an axon and one or more short, bushy processes called dendrites. Dendrites receive impulses from other neurons. (The exceptions are sensory neurons, such as those that transmit information about temperature or touch, in which the signal is generated by specialized receptors in the skin.) These impulses are propagated electrically along the cell membrane to the end of the axon. At the tip of the axon the signal is chemically transmitted to an adjacent neuron or muscle cell.
Like all other cells, neurons contain charged ions: Potassium and sodium (positively charged) and chlorine (negatively charged). Neurons differ from other cells in that they can produce a nerve impulse. A neuron is polarized - that is, it has an overall negative charge inside the cell membrane because of the high concentration of chlorine ions and low concentration of potassium and sodium ions. The concentration of these same ions is exactly reversed outside the cell. This charge differential represents stored electrical energy, sometimes called membrane potential or resting potential. The negative charge inside the cell is maintained by two features. The first is the selective permeability of the cell membrane, which is more permeable to potassium than sodium. The second feature is sodium pumps within the cell membrane that actively pump sodium out of the cell. When depolarization occurs, this charge differential across the membrane is reversed, and a nerve impulse is produced.
Depolarization is a rapid change in the permeability of the cell membrane. When sensory information or any other kind of stimulating current is received by the neuron, the membrane permeability is changed, allowing a sudden influx of sodium ions into the cell. The high concentration of sodium, or action potential, changes the overall charges within the cell from negative too positively. The local changes in ion concentration triggers similar reactions along the membrane, propagating the nerve impulse. After a brief period called the refractory period, during which the ionic concentration returned to resting potential, the neuron can repeat this process. Nerve impulses travel at different speeds, depending on the cellular composition of a neuron. Where speed of impulse is important, as in the nervous system, axons are insulated with a membranous substance called myelin. The insulation provided by myelin maintains the ionic charge over long distances. Nerve impulses are propagated at specific points along the myelin sheath; These points are called the nodes of Ranvier. Examples of myelinated axons are those in sensory nerve fibers and nerves connected to skeletal muscles. In non-myelinated cells, the nerve impulse is propagated more diffusely.
When the electrical signal reaches the tip of an axon, it stimulates small presynaptic vesicles in the cell. These vesicles contain chemicals called neurotransmitters, which are released into the microscopic space between neurons (the synaptic cleft). The neurotransmitter attaches on the surface of the adjacent neuron. This stimulus causes the adjacent cell to depolarize and propagate an action potential of its own. The duration of a stimulus from a neurotransmitter is limited by the breakdown of the chemicals in the synaptic cleft and the reuptake by the neuron that produced them. Formerly, each neuron was thought to make only one transmitter, but recent studies have shown that some cells make two or more.
During the early 1900s, in examining the workings of the nervous system, physiologists were beginning to explore the idea that the transmission of nerve impulses takes place, in part, via chemical means. Loewi decided to explore this idea. During a stay in London in 1903, he met Sir Dale, who was also interested in the chemical transmission of nerve impulses. However, for Loewi, Dale, and all the other researchers pursuing a chemical transmitter of nerve impulses, years of effort produced no solid evidence. In 1921 Loewi suspended two frogs' hearts in solution, one with a major nerve removed. Removing fluid from the heart that still contained the nerve, and injecting the fluid into the nerveless heart, Loewi observed that the second heart behaved as if the missing nerve were present. The nerves, he concluded, do not act directly on the heart - it is the action of chemicals, freed by the stimulation of nerves, that causes increases in heart rate and other functional changes. In 1926 Loewi and his colleagues identified one of the chemicals in his experiment as acetylcholine. This was indisputably a neurotransmitter - a chemical that serves to transmit nerve impulses in the involuntary nervous system.
We acknowledge the neurotransmitters are inherently made by chemically induced neurons, or nerve cells. Neurons send out neurotransmitters as chemical signals to activate or inhibit the function of neighboring cells.
Within the central nervous system, which consists of the brain and the spinal cord, neurotransmitters pass from neuron to neuron. In the peripheral nervous system, which is made up of the nerves that run from the central nervous system to the rest of the body, the chemical signals pass between a neuron and an adjacent muscle or gland cells.
Chemical compounds - belonging to three chemical families - are widely recognized as neurotransmitters. In addition, certain other body chemicals, including adenosine, histamine, enkephalins, endorphins, and epinephrine, have neurotransmitterlike properties. Experts believe that there are many more neurotransmitters yet undiscovered.
The first of the three families is composed of amines, a group of compounds containing molecules of carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen. Among the amine neurotransmitters are acetylcholine, norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin. Acetylcholine is the most widely used neurotransmitter in the body, and neurons that leave the central nervous system (for example, those running to skeletal muscle) use acetylcholine as their neurotransmitter; neurons that run to the heart, blood vessels, and other organs may use acetylcholine or norepinephrine. Dopamine is involved in the movement of muscles, and it controls the secretion of the pituitary hormone prolactin, which triggers milk production in nursing mothers.
The second neurotransmitter family is composed of amino acids, organic compounds containing both an amino group (NH2) and a carboxylic acid group (COOH). Amino acids that serve as neurotransmitters include glycine, glutamic and aspartic acids, and gamma-amino butyric acid (GABA). Glutamic acid and GABA are the most abundant neurotransmitters within the central nervous system, and especially in the cerebral cortex, which is largely responsible for such higher brain functions as thought and interpreting sensations.
The third neurotransmitter family is composed of peptides, which are compounds that contain at least two, and sometimes as many as 100 amino acids. Peptide neurotransmitters are poorly understood, but scientists know that the peptide neurotransmitter called substance P influences the sensation of pain.
Overall, each neuron uses only a single compound as its neurotransmitter. However, some neurons outside the central nervous system can release both an amine and a peptide neurotransmitter.
Neurotransmitters are manufactured from precursor compounds like amino acids, glucose, and the dietary amine-called choline. Neurons modify the structure of these precursor compounds in a series of reactions with enzymes. Neurotransmitters that comes from amino acids include serotonin, for which it is derived from tryptophan. Dopamine and norepinephrine, under which are derived from tyrosine, and glycine, which is derived from threonine. Among the neurotransmitters made from glucose are glutamate, aspartate, and GABA. The choline serves as the precursor for acetylcholine
Neurotransmitters are released into a microscopic gap, called a synapse, that separates the transmitting neuron from the cell receiving the chemical signal. The cell that generates the signal is called the presynaptic cell, while the receiving cell is termed the postsynaptic cell.
After their release into the synapse, neurotransmitters combine chemically with highly specific protein molecules, termed receptors, embedded in the surface membranes of the postsynaptic cell. When this combination occurs, the voltage, or electrical force, of the postsynaptic cell is either increased (excited) or decreased (inhibited).
When a neuron is in its resting state, its voltage is about -70 millivolts. An excitatory neurotransmitter alters the membrane of the postsynaptic neuron, making it possible for ions (electrically charged molecules) to move back and forth across the neuron’s membranes. This flow of ions makes the neuron’s voltage rise toward zero. If enough excitatory receptors have been activated, the postsynaptic neuron responds by firing, generating a nerve impulse that causes its own neurotransmitter to be released into the next synapse. An inhibitory neurotransmitter causes different ions to pass back and forth across the postsynaptic neuron’s membrane, lowering the nerve cell’s voltage to -80 or -90 millivolts. The drop in voltage makes it less likely that the postsynaptic cell will fire.
If the postsynaptic cell is a muscle cell rather than a neuron, an excitatory neurotransmitter will cause the muscle to contract. If the postsynaptic cell is a gland cell, an excitatory neurotransmitter will cause the cell to secrete its contents.
While most neurotransmitters interact with their receptors to create new electrical nerve impulses that energize or inhibit the adjoining cell, some neurotransmitter interactions do not generate or suppress nerve impulses. Instead, they interact with a second type of receptor that changes the internal chemistry of the postsynaptic cell by either causing or blocking the formation of chemicals called second messenger molecules. These second messengers regulate the postsynaptic cell’s biochemical processes and enable it to conduct the maintenance necessary to continue synthesizing neurotransmitters and conducting nerve impulses. Examples of second messengers, which are formed and entirely contained within the postsynaptic cell, include cyclic adenosine monophosphate, diacylglycerol, and inositol phosphates.
Once neurotransmitters have been secreted into synapses and have passed on their chemical signals, the presynaptic neuron clears the synapse of neurotransmitter molecules. For example, acetylcholine is broken down by the enzyme acetylcholinesterase into choline and acetate. Neurotransmitters like dopamine, serotonin, and GABA is removed by a physical process called reuptake. In reuptake, a protein in the presynaptic membrane acts as a sort of sponge, causing the neurotransmitters to reenter the presynaptic neuron, where they can be broken down by enzymes or repackaged for reuse.
Neurotransmitters are known to be involved in many disorders, including Alzheimer’s disease. Victims of Alzheimer’s disease suffer from loss of intellectual capacity, disintegration of personality, mental confusion, hallucinations, and aggressive - even violent - behavior. These symptoms are the result of progressive degeneration in many types of neurons in the brain. Forgetfulness, one of the earliest symptoms of Alzheimer’s disease, is partly caused by the destruction of neurons that normally release the neurotransmitter acetylcholine. Medications that increase brain levels of acetylcholine have helped restore short-term memory and reduce mood swings in some Alzheimer’s patients.
Neurotransmitters also play a role in Parkinson disease, which slowly attacks the nervous system, causing symptoms that worsen over time. Fatigue, mental confusion, a masklike facial expression, stooping posture, shuffling gait, and problems with eating and speaking are among the difficulties suffered by Parkinson victims. These symptoms have been partly linked to the deterioration and eventual death of neurons that run from the base of the brain to the basal ganglia, a collection of nerve cells that manufacture the neurotransmitter dopamine. The reasons why such neurons die are yet to be understood, but the related symptoms can be alleviated. L-dopa, or levodopa, widely used to treat Parkinson disease, acts as a supplementary precursor for dopamine. It causes the surviving neurons in the basal ganglia to increase their production of dopamine, by that compensating to some extent for the disabled neurons.
Many other effective drugs have been shown to act by influencing neurotransmitter behavior. Some drugs work by interfering with the interactions between neurotransmitters and intestinal receptors. For example, belladonna decreases intestinal cramps in such disorders as irritable bowel syndrome by blocking acetylcholine from combining with receptors. This process reduces nerve signals to the bowel wall, which prevents painful spasms.
Other drugs block the reuptake process. One well-known example is the drug fluoxetine (Prozac), which blocks the reuptake of serotonin. Serotonin then remains in the synapse for a longer time, and its ability to act as a signal is prolonged, which contributes to the relief of depression and the control of obsessive-compulsive behaviors.
Dopamine, chemical known as a neurotransmitter essential to the functioning of the central nervous system. During neurotransmission, dopamine is transferred from one nerve cell, or neuron, to another, playing a key role in brain function and human behavior.
Dopamine forms from a precursor molecule called dopa, which is manufactured in the liver from the amino acid tyrosine. Dopa is then transported by the circulatory system to neurons in the brain, where the conversion to dopamine takes place.
Dopamine is a versatile neurotransmitter. Among its many functions, it plays a major role in two activities of the central nervous system: one that helps control movement, and a second that are strongly associated with emotion-based behaviors.
The pathway involved in movement control is called the nigrostriatal pathway. Dopamine is released by neurons that originate from an area of the brain called the substantia nigra and connect to the part of the brain known as the corpora striata, an area known to be important in controlling the musculoskeletal system.
The second brain pathway in which dopamine plays a major role is called the mesocorticolimbic pathway. Neurons in an area of the brain called the ventral tegmentalarea transmits dopamine to other neurons connected to various parts of the limbic system, which is responsible for regulating emotion, motivation, behavior, the sense of smell, and variously autonomic, or involuntary, functions like heartbeat and breathing. A growing body of evidence suggests that dopamine be involved in several major brain disorders. Narcolepsy, a disorder characterized by brief, recurring episodes of sudden, deep sleep, is associated with abnormally high levels of both dopamine and a second neurotransmitter, acetylcholine. Huntington’s chorea, an inherited, fatal illness in which neurons in the base of the brain are progressively destroyed, is also linked to an excess of dopamine.
Commonly known as shaking palsy, Parkinson disease is another brain disorder in which dopamine is involved. Besides tremors of the limbs, Parkinson patients suffer from muscular rigidity, which leads to difficulties in walking, writing, and speaking. This disorder results from the degeneration and death of neurons in the nigrostriatal pathway, resulting in low levels of dopamine. The symptoms of Parkinson disease can be reduced by treatment with a drug called levodopa, or L-dopa, which converts to dopamine in the brain.
Schizophrenia is a psychiatric disorder characterized by loss of contact with reality and major changes in personality. Schizophrenics have normal levels of dopamine in the brain, but because they are highly sensitive to this neurotransmitter, these normal levels of dopamine triggers unusual behaviors. Drugs such as thorazine that blocks the action of dopamine have been found to decrease the symptoms of schizophrenia.
Studies suggest that people who are addicted to alcohol and other drugs like, cocaine and nicotine have less dopamine in the mesocorticolimbic pathway. These drugs appear to increase dopamine levels, resulting in the pleasurable feelings associated with the drugs.
Serotonin, neurotransmitter, or chemical that transmits messages across the synapses, or gaps, between adjacent cells. Among its many functions, serotonin is released from blood cells called platelets to activate blood vessel constriction and blood clotting. In the gastrointestinal tract, serotonin inhibits gastric acid production and stimulates muscle contraction in the intestinal wall. Its functions in the central nervous system and effects on human behavior - including mood, memory, and appetite control - have been the subject of a great deal of research. This intensive study of serotonin has revealed important knowledge about the serotonin-related cause and treatment of many illnesses.
Serotonin is produced in the brain from the amino acid tryptophan, which is derived from foods high in protein, such as meat and dairy products. Tryptophan is transported to the brain, where it is broken down by enzymes to produce serotonin. During neurotransmission, serotonin is transferred from one nerve cell, or neuron, to another, triggering an electrical impulse that stimulates or inhibits cell activity as needed. Serotonin is then reabsorbed by the first neuron, in a process known as reuptake, where it is recycled and used again or converted into an inactive chemical form and excreted.
While the complete picture of serotonin’s function in the body is still being investigated, many disorders are known to be associated with an imbalance of serotonin in the brain. Drugs that manipulate serotonin levels have been used to alleviate the symptoms of serotonin imbalances. Some of these drugs, known as selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), block or inhibit the reuptake of serotonin into neurons, enabling serotonin to remain active in the synapses for a longer period. These medications are used to treat such psychiatric disorders as depression; Obsessive-compulsive disorder, in which repetitive and disturbing thoughts trigger bizarre, ritualistic behaviors, and impulsive aggressive behaviors. Fluoxetine (more commonly known by the brand name Prozac), is a widely prescribed SSRI used to treat depression, and more recently, obsessive-compulsive disorder.
Drugs that affect serotonin levels may prove beneficial in the treatment of nonpsychiatric disorders as well, including diabetic neuropathy (degeneration of nerves outside the central nervous system in diabetics) and premenstrual syndrome. Recently the serotonin-releasing agent dexfenfluramine has been approved for patients who are 30 percent or more over their ideal body weight. By preventing serotonin reuptake, dexfenfluramine promotes satiety, or fullness, after eating less food.
Other drugs serve as agonists that react with neurons to produce effects similar to those of serotonin. Serotonin agonists have been used to treat migraine headaches, in which low levels of serotonin cause arteries in the brain to swell, resulting in a headache. Sumatriptan is an agonist drug that mimics the effects of serotonin in the brain, constricting blood vessels and alleviating pain.
Drugs known as antagonists bind with neurons to prevent serotonin neurotransmission. Some antagonists have been found effective in treating the nausea that typically accompanies radiation and chemotherapy in cancer treatment. Antagonists are also being tested to treat high blood pressure and other cardiovascular disorders by blocking serotonin’s ability to constrict blood vessels. Other antagonists may produce an effect on learning and memory in age-associated memory impairment.
The Synapse is the signal conveying everything that human beings sense and think, and every motion they make, follows nerve pathways in the human body as waves of ions (atoms or groups of atoms that carries electric charges). Australian physiologist Sir John Eccles discovered many intricacies of this electrochemical signaling process, particularly the pivotal step in which a signal is conveyed from one nerve cell to another. He shared the 1963 Nobel Prize in physiology or medicine for this work, which he described in a 1965 Scientific American article.
How does one nerve cell transmit the nerve impulse to another cell? Electron microscopy and other methods show that it does so by means of special extensions that deliver a squirt of transmitter substance
The human brain is the most highly organized form of matter known, and in complexity the brains of the other higher animals are not greatly inferior. For certain purposes regarding the brain for being analogous to a machine is expedient. Even if it is so regarded, however, it is a machine of a totally different kind from those made by man. In trying to understand the workings of his own brain man meets his highest challenge. Nothing is given; There are no operating diagrams, no maker's instructions.
The first step in trying to understand the brain is to examine its structure to discover the components from which it is built and how they are related to each another. After that one can attempt to understand the mode of operation of the simplest components. These two modes of investigation - the morphological and the physiological - have now become complementary. In studying the nervous system with today's sensitive electrical device, however, finding physiological events that cannot be correlated with any known anatomical structure is all too easy. Conversely, the electron microscope reveals many structural details whose physiological significance is obscure or unknown.
At the close of the past century the Spanish anatomist Santiago Ramón Cajal showed how all parts of the nervous system are built up of individual nerve cells of many different shapes and sizes. Like other cells, each nerve cell has a nucleus and the surrounding cytoplasm. Its outer surface consists of many fine branches - the dendrites - that receive nerve impulses from other nerve cells, and one relatively long branch - the axon - that transmits nerve impulses. Near its end the axon divides into branches that end at the dendrites or bodies of other nerve cells. The axon can be as short as a fraction of a millimeter or if a meter, depending on its place and function. It has many properties of an electric cable and is uniquely specialized to conduct the brief electrical waves called nerve impulses. In very thin axons these impulses travel at less than one meter per second; In others, for example in the large axons of the nerve cells that activate muscles, they travel as fast as 100 meters per second.
The electrical impulse that travels along the axon ceases abruptly when it comes to the point where the axon's terminal fibers contact another nerve cell. These junction points were given the name ‘synapses’ by Sir Charles Sherrington, who laid the foundations of what is sometimes called synaptology. If the nerve impulse is to continue beyond the synapse, it must be regenerated afresh on the other side. As recently as 15 years ago some physiologists held that transmission at the synapse was predominantly, if not exclusively, an electrical phenomenon. Now, however, there is abundant evidence that transmission is made by the release of specific chemical substances that trigger a regeneration of the impulse. In fact, the first strong evidence showing that some transmitter substance act across the synapse was provided more than 40 years ago by Sir Henry Dale and Otto Loewi.
It has been estimated that the human central nervous system, which of course includes the spinal cord and the brain itself, consists of about 10 billion (1010) nerve cells. With rare exceptions each nerve cell receives information directly as impulses from many other nerve cells - often hundreds - and transmits information to a like number. Depending on its threshold of response, a given nerve cell may fire an impulse when stimulated by only a few incoming fibers or it may not fire until stimulated by many incoming fibers. It has long been known that this threshold can be raised or lowered by various factors. Moreover, it was supposed some 60 years ago that some incoming fibers must inhibit the firing of the receiving cell rather than excite it. The conjecture was subsequently confirmed, and the mechanism of the inhibitory effect has now been clarified. This mechanism and its equally fundamental counterpart - nerve-cell excitation - are of its topic.
In the levels of anatomy there are some clues to show how the fine axon terminals impinging on a nerve cell can make the cell regenerate a nerve impulse of its own nerve cell and its dendrites are covered by fine branches of nerve fibers that end in knob-like structures. These structures are the synapses.
The electron microscope has revealed structural details of synapses that fit in nicely with the view that a chemical transmitter is involved in nerve transmission. Enclosed in the synaptic knob are many vesicles, or tiny sacs, which appear to contain the transmitter substances that induce synaptic transmission. Between the synaptic knob and the synaptic membrane of the adjoining nerve cell is a remarkably uniform space of about 20 millimicrons that is termed the synaptic cleft. Many of the synaptic vesicles are concentrated adjacent to this cleft; It seems plausible that the transmitter substance is discharged from the nearest vesicles into the cleft, where it can act on the adjacent cell membrane. This hypothesis is supported by the discovery that the transmitter is released in packets of a few thousand molecules.
The study of synaptic transmission was revolutionized in 1951 by the introduction of delicate techniques for recording electrically from the interior of single nerve cells. This is done by inserting into the nerve cell an extremely fine glass pipette with a diameter of .5 microns - about a fifty-thousandth of an inch. The pipette is filled with an electrically conducting salt solution such as concentrated potassium chloride. If the pipette is carefully inserted and held rigidly in place, the cell membrane appears to seal quickly around the glass, thus preventing the flow of a short-circuiting current through the puncture in the cell membrane. Impaled in this fashion, nerve cells can function normally for hours. Although there is no way of observing the cells during the insertion of the pipette, the insertion can be guided by using as clues the electric signals that the pipette picks up when close to active nerve cells.
At the John Curtin School of Medical Research in Canberra first employed this technique, choosing to study the large nerve cells called motoneurons, which lie in the spinal cord whose function is to activate muscles. This was a fortunate choice: Intracellular investigations with motoneurons are easier and more rewarding than those with any other kind of mammalian nerve cell.
Finding that when the nerve cell responds to the chemical synaptic transmitter, the response depends in part on characteristic features of ionic composition that are also concerned with the transmission of impulses in the cell and along its axon. When the nerve cell is at rest, its physiological makeup resembles that of most other cells in that the water solution inside the cell is quite different in composition from the solution in which the cell is bathed. The nerve cell can exploit this difference between external and internal composition and use it in quite different ways for generating an electrical impulse and for synaptic transmission.
The composition of the external solution is well established because the solution is essentially the same as blood from which cells and proteins have been removed. The composition of the internal solution is known only approximately. Indirect evidence suggests that the concentrations of sodium and chloride ions outside the cell are respectively some 10 and 14 times higher than the concentrations inside the cell. In contrast, the concentration of potassium ions inside the cell is about 30 times higher than the concentration outside.
How can one account for this remarkable state of affairs? Part of the explanation is that inside the cell is negatively charged with the respect of the cell about 70 millivolts. Since like charges repel each other, this internal negative charge tends to drive chloride ions (Cl-) outward through the cell membrane and, at the same time, to impede their inward movement. In fact, a potential difference of 70 millivolts is just sufficient to maintain the observed disparity in the concentration of chloride ions inside the cell and outside it; Chloride ions diffuse inward and outward at equal rates. A drop of 70 millivolts across the membrane therefore defines the ‘equilibrium potential’ for chloride ions.
To obtain a concentration of potassium ions (K) that is 30 times higher inside the cell than outside would require that the interior of the cell membrane be about 90 millivolts negative with respect to the exterior. Since the actual interior is only 70 millivolts negative, it falls short of the equilibrium potential for potassium ions by 20 millivolts. Evidently the thirtyfold concentration can be achieved and maintained only if there is some auxiliary mechanism for ‘pumping’ potassium ions into the cell at a rate equal to their spontaneous net outward diffusion.
The pumping mechanisms have fewer, but more difficult tasks of pumping sodium ions (Na) out of the cell against a potential gradient of 130 millivolts. This figure is obtained by adding the 70 millivolts of internal negative charge to the equilibrium potential for sodium ions, which is 60 millivolts of internal positive charge. If it were not for this postulated pump, the concentration of sodium ions inside and outside the cell would be almost the reverse of what is observed.
In their classic studies of nerve-impulse transmission in the giant axon of the squid, A. L. Hodgkin, A. F. Huxley and Bernhard Katz of Britain proved that the propagation of the impulse coincides with abrupt changes in the permeability of the axon membrane. When a nerve impulse has been triggered in some way, what can be described as a gate opens and lets sodium ions pour into the axon during the advance of the impulse, making the interior of the axon locally positive. The process is self-reinforcing in that the flow of some sodium ions through the membrane opens the gate further and makes it easier for others to follow. The sharp reversal of the internal polarity of the membrane makes up the nerve impulse, which moves like a wave until it has traveled the length of the axon. In the wake of the impulse the sodium gate closes and a potassium gate opens, by that restoring the normal polarity of the membrane within a millisecond or less.
With this understanding of the nerve impulse in hand, one is ready to follow the electrical events at the excitatory synapse. One might guess that if the nerve impulse results from an abrupt inflow of sodium ions and a rapid change in the electrical polarity of the axon's interior, something similar must happen at the body and dendrites of the nerve cell in order to generate the impulse in the first place. Indeed, the function of the excitatory synaptic terminals on the cell body and its dendrites is to depolarize the interior of the cell membrane essentially by permitting an inflow of sodium ions. When the depolarization reaches a threshold value, a nerve impulse is triggered.
As a simple instance of this phenomenon we have recorded the depolarization that occurs in a single motoneuron activated directly by the large nerve fibers that enter the spinal cord from special stretch-receptors known as annulospiral endings. These receptors in turn are found in the same muscle that is activated by the motoneuron under study. Thus the whole system forms a typical reflex arc, such as the arc responsible for the patellar reflex, or ‘knee jerk.’
To conduct the experiment we anesthetize an animal (most often a cat) and free by dissection a muscle nerves that contains these large nerve fibers. By applying a mild electric shock to the exposed nerve one can produce a single impulse in each of the fibers; Since the impulses travel to the spinal cord almost synchronously, they are referred to collectively as a volley. The number of impulses contained in the volley can be reduced by reducing the stimulation applied to the nerve. The volley strength is measured at a point just outside the spinal cord and is displayed on an oscilloscope. About half a millisecond after detection of a volley there is a wavelike change in the voltage inside the motoneuron that has received the volley. The change is detected by a microelectrode inserted in the motoneuron and is displayed on another oscilloscope.
What we find is that the negative voltage inside the cell becomes progressively fewer negative as more of the fibers impinging on the cell are stimulated to fire. This observed depolarization is in fact a simple summation of the depolarizations produced by each individual synapse. When the depolarization of the interior of the motoneuron reaches a critical point, a ‘spike’ suddenly appears on the second oscilloscope, showing that a nerve impulse has been generated. During the spike the voltage inside the cell changes from about 70 millivolts negative to as much as 30 millivolts positive. The spike regularly appears when the depolarization, or reduction of membrane potential, reaches a critical level, which is usually between 10 and 18 millivolts. The only effect of a further strengthening of the synaptic stimulus is to shorten the time needed for the motoneuron to reach the firing threshold. The depolarizing potentials produced in the cell membrane by excitatory synapses are called excitatory postsynaptic potentials, or EPSP's.
Through one barrel of a double-barreled microelectrode one can apply a background current to change the resting potential of the interior of the cell membrane, either increasing it or decreasing it. When the potential is made more negative, the EPSP rises more steeply to an earlier peak. When the potential is made less negative, the EPSP rises more slowly to a lower peak. Finally, when the charge inside the cell is reversed so as to be positive with respect to the exterior, the excitatory synapses give rise to an EPSP that is actually the reverse of the normal one.
These observations support the hypothesis that excitatory synapses produce what amounts virtually to a short circuit in the synaptic membrane potential. When this occurs, the membrane no longer acts as a barrier to the passage of ions but lets them flow through in response to the differing electric potential on the two sides of the membrane. In other words, the ions are momentarily allowed to travel freely down their electrochemical gradients, which means that the sodium ions flow into the cell and, to a lesser degree, potassium ions flow out. It is this net flow of positive ions that creates the excitatory postsynaptic potential. The flow of negative ions, such as the chloride ion, is apparently not involved. By artificially altering the potential inside the cell one can establish that there is no flow of ions, and therefore no EPSP, when the voltage drop across the membrane is zero.
How is the synaptic membrane converted from a strong ionic barrier into an ion-permeable state? It is currently accepted that the agency of conversion is the chemical transmitter substance contained in the vesicles inside the synaptic knob. When a nerve impulse reaches the synaptic knob, some of the vesicles are caused to eject the transmitter substance into the synaptic cleft. The molecules of the substance would take only a few microseconds to diffuse across the cleft and become attached to specific receptor sites on the surface membrane of the adjacent nerve cell.
Presumably the receptor sites are associated with fine channels in the membrane that are opened in some way by the attachment of the transmitter-substance molecules to the receptor sites. With the channels thus opened, sodium and potassium ions flow through the membrane thousands of times more readily than they normally do, by that producing the intense ionic flux that depolarizes the cell membrane and produces the EPSP. In many synapses the current flows strongly for only about a millisecond before the transmitter substance is eliminated from the synaptic cleft, either by diffusion into the surrounding regions or as a result of being destroyed by enzymes. The latter process is known to occur when the transmitter substance is acetylcholine, which is destroyed by the enzyme acetylcholinesterase.
The substantiation of this general picture of synaptic transmission requires the solution of many fundamental problems. Since we do not know the specific transmitter substance for the vast majority of synapses in the nervous system, we do not know whether there are many different substances or only a few. The only one identified with reasonable certainty in the mammalian central nervous system is acetylcholine. We know practically nothing about the mechanism by which a presynaptic nerve impulse causes the transmitter substance to be injected into the synaptic cleft. Nor do we know how the synaptic vesicles not immediately next to the synaptic cleft follow to moved up to the firing line to replace the emptied vesicles. It is supposed that the vesicles contain the enzyme systems needed to recharge themselves. The entire process must be swift and efficient: The total amount of transmitter substance in synaptic terminals is enough for only a few minutes of synaptic activity at normal operating rates. There are also knotty problems to be solved on the other side of the synaptic cleft. What, for example, is the nature of the receptor sites? How are the ionic channels in the membrane opened?
The second type of synapse that has been identified in the nervous system. These are the synapses that can inhibit the firing of a nerve cell even though it may be receiving a volley of excitatory impulses. When inhibitory synapses are examined in the electron microscope, they look very much like excitatory synapses. (There are probably some subtle differences, but they need not concern us here.) Microelectrode recordings of the activity of single motoneurons and other nerve cells have now shown that the inhibitory postsynaptic potential (IPSP) is virtually a mirror image of the EPSP. Moreover, individual inhibitory synapses, like excitatory synapses, have a cumulative effect. The chief difference is simply that the IPSP makes the cell's internal voltage more negative than it is normally, which is in a direction opposite to that needed for generating a spike discharge.
By driving the internal voltage of a nerve cell in the negative direction inhibitory synapses oppose the action of excitatory synapses, which of course drive it in the positive direction. So if the potential inside a resting cell is 70 millivolts negative, a strong volley of inhibitory impulses can drive the potential to 75 or 80 millivolts depreciating count. One can easily see that if the potential is made more negative in this way the excitatory synapses find it more difficult to raise the internal voltage to the threshold point for the generation of a spike. Thus, the nerve cell responds to the algebraic sum of the internal voltage changes produced by excitatory and inhibitory synapses.
If, as in the experiment described earlier, the internal membrane potential is altered by the flow of an electric current through one barrel of a double-barreled microelectrode, one can observe the effect of such changes on the inhibitory postsynaptic potential. When the internal potential is made less negative, the inhibitory postsynaptic potential is deepened. Conversely, when the potential is made more negative, the IPSP diminishes; it finally reverses when the internal potential is driven below minus 80 millivolts.
One can therefore assume that inhibitory synapse’s share with excitatory synapses the ability to change the ionic permeability of the synaptic membrane. The difference is that inhibitory synapses enable ions to flow freely down an electrochemical gradient that has an equilibrium point at minus 80 millivolts rather than at zero, as is the case for excitatory synapses. This effect could be achieved by the outward flow of positively charged ions such as potassium or the inward flow of negatively charged ions such as chloride, or by a combination of negative and positive ionic flows such that the interior reaches equilibrium at minus 80 millivolts.
If the concentration of chloride ions within the cell is increased as much as three times, the inhibitory postsynaptic potential reverses and acts as a depolarizing current; that is, it resembles an excitatory potential. On the other hand, if the cell is heavily injected with sulfate ions, which are also negatively charged, there is no such reversal. This simple test shows that under the influence of the inhibitory transmitter substance, which is still unidentified, the subsynaptic membrane becomes permeable momentarily to chloride ions but not to sulfate ions. During the generation of the IPSP the outflow of chloride ions is so rapid that it more than outweighs the flow of other ions that generate the normal inhibitory potential.
The effect of injecting motoneurons with more than 30 kinds of negatively lunged ions. With one exception the hydrated ions (ions bound to water) to which the cell membrane is permeable under the influence of the inhibitory transmitter substance are smaller than the hydrated ions to which the membrane is impermeable. The exception is the formate ion (HCO2-), which may have an ellipsoidal shape and so be able to pass through membrane pores that block smaller spherical ions.
Apart from the formate ion all the ions to which the membrane is permeable have a diameter not greater than 1.14 times the diameter of the potassium ion; That is, they are less than 2.9 angstrom units in diameter. Comparable investigations in other laboratories have found the same permeability effects, including the exceptional behavior of the formate ion, in fishes, toads and snails. It might be that the ionic mechanism responsible for synaptic inhibition is the same throughout the animal kingdom.
The significance of these and other studies is that they strongly suggest that the inhibitory transmitter substance open the membrane to the flow of potassium ions but not to sodium ions. It is known that the sodium ion is somewhat larger than any of the negatively charged ions, including the formate ion, that are able to pass through the membrane during synaptic inhibition. Testing the effectiveness of potassium ions by injecting excess amounts into the cell is not possible, however, because the excess is immediately diluted by an osmotic flow of water into the cell.
The concentration of potassium ions inside the nerve cell is about 30 times greater than the concentration outside, and to maintain this large difference in concentration without the help of some metabolic pumps inside of the membrane would have to be charged 90 millivolts negative with respect to the exterior. This implies that if the membrane were suddenly made porous to potassium ions, the resulting outflow of ions would make the inside potential of the membrane even more negative than it is in the resting state, and that is just what happens during synaptic inhibition. The membrane must not simultaneously become porous to sodium ions, because they exist in much higher concentration outside the cell than inside and their rapid inflow would more than compensate for the potassium outflow. In fact, the fundamental difference between synaptic excitation and synaptic inhibition is that the membrane freely passes sodium ions in response to the former and largely excludes the passage of sodium ions in response to the latter.
This fine discrimination between ions that are not very different in size must be explained by any hypothesis of synaptic action. It is most unlikely that the channels through the membrane are created afresh and accurately maintained for a thousandth of a second every time a burst of transmitter substance is released into the synaptic cleft. It is more likely that channels of at least two different sizes are built directly into the membrane structure. In some way the excitatory transmitter substance would selectively unplug the larger channels and permit the free inflow of sodium ions. Potassium ions would simultaneously flow out and thus would tend to counteract the large potential change that would be produced by the massive sodium inflow. The inhibitory transmitter substance would selectively unplug the smaller channels that are large enough to pass potassium and chloride ions but not sodium ions.
To explain certain types of inhibition other features must be added to this hypothesis of synaptic transmission. In the simple hypothesis chloride and potassium ions can flow freely through pores of all inhibitory synapses. It has been shown, however, that the inhibition of the contraction of heart muscle by the vagus nerve is due almost exclusively to potassium-ion flow. On the other hand, in the muscles of crustaceans and in nerve cells in the snail's brain synaptic inhibition is due largely to the flow of chloride ions. This selective permeability could be explained if there were fixed charges along the walls of the channels. If such charges were negative, they would repel negatively charged ions and prevent their passage; if they were positive, they would similarly prevent the passage of positively charged ions. One can now suggest that the channels opened by the excitatory transmitter are negatively charged and so do not permit the passage of the negatively charged chloride ion, even though it is small enough to move through the channel freely.
One might wonder if a given nerve cell can have excitatory synaptic action at some of its axon terminals and inhibitory action at others. The answer is no. Two different kinds of nerve cells are needed, one for each type of transmission and synaptic transmitter substance. This can readily be shown by the effect of strychnine and tetanus toxins in the spinal cord; They specifically prevent inhibitory synaptic action and leave excitatory action unaltered. As a result the synaptic excitation of nerve cells is uncontrolled and convulsions result. The special types of cells responsible for inhibitory synaptic action are now being recognized in many parts of the central nervous system.
This account of communication between nerve cells is necessarily oversimplified, yet it shows that some significant advances are being made at the level of individual components of the nervous system. By selecting the most favorable situations we have been able to throw light on some details of nerve-cell behavior. We can be encouraged by these limited successes. Nevertheless, the task of understanding in a comprehensive way how the human brain operates staggers its own imagination.
Our brain begins with its portion of the central nervous system contained within the skull. The brain is the control center for movement, sleep, hunger, thirst, and virtually every other vital activity necessary to survival. All human emotions - including love, hate, fear, anger, elation, and sadness - are controlled by the brain. It also receives and interprets the countless signals that are sent to it from other parts of the body and from the external environment. The brain makes us conscious, emotional, and intelligent.
The human brain has three major structural components: the large dome-shaped cerebrum, the smaller somewhat spherical cerebellum, and the brainstem. Prominent in the brainstem are the medulla oblongata and the thalamus - between the medulla and the cerebrum. The cerebrum is responsible for intelligence and reasoning. The cerebellum helps to maintain balance and posture. The medulla is involved in maintaining involuntary functions such as respiration, and the thalamus act as a relay center for electrical impulses traveling to and from the cerebral cortex.
The adult human brain is a 1.3-kg. (3-lb.) Mass of pinkish-gray jellylike tissue made up of approximately 100 billion nerve cells or neurons: The Neuroglia (supporting-tissue) cells, and vascular (blood-carrying) and other tissues.
Between the brain and the cranium - the part of the skull that directly covers the brain - are three protective membranes, or meninges. The outermost membrane, the dura mater, is the toughest and thickest. Below the dura mater is a middle membrane, called the arachnoid layer. The innermost membrane, the pia mater, consists mainly of small blood vessels and follows the contours of the surface of the brain.
A clear liquid, the cerebrospinal fluid, bathes the entire brain and fills a series of four cavities, called ventricles, near the center of the brain. The cerebrospinal fluid protects the internal portion of the brain from varying pressures and transports chemical substances within the nervous system.
From the outside, the brain appears as three associatively distinct but connected parts, the cerebrum (the Latin word for brain) - two large, almost symmetrical hemispheres; the cerebellum ('little brain') - two smaller hemispheres located at the back of the cerebrum; and the brain stem - a central core that gradually becomes the spinal cord, exiting the skull through an opening at its base called the foramen magnum. Two other major parts of the brain, the thalamus and the hypothalamus, lie in the midline above the brain stem underneath the cerebellum.
The brain and the spinal cord together make up the central nervous system, which communicates with the rest of the body through the peripheral nervous system. The peripheral nervous system consists of 12 pairs of cranial nerves extending from the cerebrum and brain stem; a system of other nerves branching throughout the body from the spinal cord, and the autonomic nervous system, which regulates vital functions is not very consciously of its own control, such as the activity of the heart muscle, smooth muscle (involuntary muscle found in the skin, blood vessels, and internal organs), and glands.
Many motor and sensory functions have been ‘mapped’ to specific areas of the cerebral cortex, some of which are indicated here. In general, these areas exist in both hemispheres of the cerebrum, each serving the opposite side of the body. Fewer defined are the areas of association, located mainly in the frontal cortex, operatives in functions of thought and emotion and responsible for linking input from different senses. The areas of language are an exception: Both Wernicke’s area, concerned with the comprehension of spoken language, and Broca’s area, governing the production of speech, have been pinpointed on the cortex.
Most high-level brain functions take place in the cerebrum. Its two large hemispheres make up approximately 85 percent of the brain's weight. The exterior surface of the cerebrum, the cerebral cortex, is a convoluted, or folded, grayish layer of cell bodies known as the gray matter. The gray matter covers an underlying mass of fibers called the white matter. The convolutions are made up of ridgelike bulges, known as gyri, separated by small grooves called sulci and larger grooves called fissures. Approximately two-thirds of the cortical surface is hidden in the folds of the sulci. The extensive convolutions enable a very large surface area of brain cortices - roughly, 1.5 m2 (16 ft2) in an adult - to fit within the cranium. The pattern of these convolutions is similar, although not identical, in all humans.
The two cerebral hemispheres are partially separated from each other by a deep fold known as the longitudinal fissure. Communication between the two hemispheres is through several concentrated bundles of axons, called commissures, the largest of which is the corpus callosum.
Several major sulci divides the cortex into distinguishable regions. The central sulcus, or Rolandic fissure, runs from the middle of the top of each hemisphere downward, forwards, and toward another major sulcus, the lateral (side), or Sylvian, sulcus. These and other sulci and gyri divide the cerebrum into five lobes: The frontal, parietal, temporal, and occipital lobes and the insula.
Although the cerebrum is symmetrical in structure, with two lobes emerging from the brain stem and matching motor and sensory areas in each, certain intellectual functions are restricted to one hemisphere. A person’s dominant hemisphere is usually occupied with language and logical operations, while the other hemisphere controls emotion and artistic and spatial skills. In nearly all right-handed and many left-handed people, the left hemisphere is dominant.
The frontal lobe is the largest of the five and consists of all the cortices in front of the central sulcus. Broca's area, a part of the cortex related to speech, is located in the frontal lobe. The parietal lobe consists of the cortex behind the central sulcus to some sulcus near the back of the cerebrum known as the parieto-occipital sulcus. The parieto-occipital sulcus, in turn, forms the front border of the occipital lobe, which are the rearmost part of the cerebrum. The temporal lobe is to the side of and below the lateral sulcus. Wernicke's area, a part of the cortex related to the understanding of language, is located in the temporal lobe. The insula lies deep within the folds of the lateral sulcus.
The cerebrum receives information from all the sense organs and sends motor commands (signals that results in activity in the muscles or glands) to other parts of the brain and the rest of the body. Motor commands are transmitted by the motor cortex, a strip of cerebral cortex extending from side to side across the top of the cerebrum just in front of the central sulcus. The sensory cortex, parallel strips of cerebral cortex just in back of the central sulcus, receives input from the sense organs.
Many other areas of the cerebral cortex have also been mapped according to their specific functions, such as vision, hearing, speech, emotions, language, and other aspects of perceiving, thinking, and remembering. Cortical regions known as associative cortices are responsible for integrating multiple inputs, processing the information, and carrying out complex responses.
The cerebellum coordinates body movements. Located at the lower back of the brain beneath the occipital lobes, the cerebellum is divided into two lateral (side-by-side) lobes connected by a fingerlike bundle of white fibers called the vermis. The outer layer, or cortex, of the cerebellum consists of fine folds called folia. As in the cerebrum, the outer layer of cortical gray matter surrounds a deeper layer of white matter and nuclei (groups of nerve cells). Three fiber bundles called cerebellar peduncles connect the cerebellum to the three parts of the brain stem - the midbrain, the pons, and the medulla oblongata.
The cerebellum coordinates voluntary movements by fine-tuning commands from the motor cortex in the cerebrum. The cerebellum also maintains posture and balance by controlling muscle tone and sensing the position of the limbs. All motor activity, from hitting a baseball to fingering a violin, depends on the cerebellum.
The limbic system is a group of brain structures that play a role in emotion, memory, and motivation. For example, electrical stimulation of the amygdala in laboratory animals can provoke fear, anger, and aggression. The hypothalamus regulates hunger, thirst, sleep, body temperature, sexual drive, and other functions.
The thalamus and the hypothalamus lie underneath the cerebrum and connect it to the brain stem. The thalamus consist of two rounded masses of gray tissue lying within the middle of the brain, between the two cerebral hemispheres. The thalamus are the main relay station for incoming sensory signals to the cerebral cortex and for outgoing motor signals from it. All sensory input to the brain, except that of the sense of smell, connects to individual nuclei of the thalamus.
The hypothalamus lies beneath the thalamus on the midline at the base of the brain. It regulates or is involved directly in the control of many of the body's vital drives and activities, such as eating, drinking, temperature regulation, sleep, emotional behavior, and sexual activity. It also controls the function of internal body organs by means of the autonomic nervous system, interacts closely with the pituitary gland, and helps coordinate activities of the brain stem.
The brain stem, shown here in colored cross section, is the lowest part of the brain. It serves as the path for messages traveling between the upper brain and spinal cord but is also the seat of basic and vital functions such as breathing, blood pressure, and heart rates, as well as reflexes like eye movement and vomiting. The brain stem has three main parts: the medulla, pons, and midbrain. A canal runs longitudinally through these structures carrying cerebrospinal fluid. Also distributed along its length is a network of cells, referred to as the reticular formation, that governs the state of alertness.
The brain stem is revolutionarily the most primitive part of the brain and is responsible for sustaining the basic functions of life, such as breathing and blood pressure. It includes three main structures lying between and below the two cerebral hemispheres - the midbrain, pons, and medulla oblongata.
The topmost structure of the brain stem is the midbrain. It contains major relay stations for neurons transmitting signals to the cerebral cortex, as well as many reflex centers - pathways carrying sensory (input) information and motor (output) command. Relays and reflex centers for visual and auditory (hearing) functions are located in the top portion of the midbrain. A pair of nuclei called the superior colliculus control reflex actions of the eye, such as blinking, opening and closing the pupil, and focusing the lens. A second pair of nuclei, called the inferior colliculus, controls auditory reflexes, such as adjusting the ear to the volume of sound. At the bottom of the midbrain are reflex and relay centers relating to pain, temperature, and touch, as well as several regions associated with the control of movement, such as the red nucleus and the substantia nigra.
Continuous with and below the midbrain and directly in front of the cerebellum is a prominent bulge in the brain stem called the pons. The pons consists of large bundles of nerve fibers that connect the two halves of the cerebellum and also connect each side of the cerebellum with the opposite-side cerebral hemisphere. The pons serves mainly as a relay station linking the cerebral cortex and the medulla oblongata.
The long, stalklike lowermost portion of the brain stem is called the medulla oblongata. At the top, it is continuous with the pons and the midbrain; at the bottom, it makes a gradual transition into the spinal cord at the foramen magnum. Sensory and motor nerve fibers connecting the brain and the rest of the body cross over to the opposite side as they pass through the medulla. Thus, the left half of the brain communicates with the right half of the body, and the right half of the brain with the left half of the body.
Running up the brain stem from the medulla oblongata through the pons and the midbrain is a netlike formation of nuclei known as the reticular formation. The reticular formation controls respiration, cardiovascular function, digestion, levels of alertness, and patterns of sleep. It also determines which parts of the constant flow of sensory information into the body are received by the cerebrum.
There are two main types of brain cells, neurons and neuroglia. Neurons are responsible for the transmission and analysis of all electrochemical communication within the brain and other parts of the nervous system. Each neuron is composed of a cell body called a soma, and a major fiber called an axon, and a system of branches called dendrites. Axons, also called nerve fibers, convey electrical signals away from the soma and can be up to 1 m. (3.3 ft.) in length. Most axons are covered with a protective sheath of myelin, a substance made of fats and protein, which insulates the axon. Myelinated axons conduct neuronal signals faster than do unmyelinated axons. Dendrites convey electrical signals toward the soma, are shorter than axons, and are usually multiple and branching.
Neuroglial cells are twice as numerous as neurons and account for half of the brain's weight. Neuroglia (from glia, Greek for 'glue') provides structural support to the neurons. Neuroglial cells also form myelin, guide developing neurons, take up chemicals involved in cell-to-cell communication, and contribute to the maintenance of the environment around neurons.
Twelve pairs of cranial nerves arise symmetrically from the base of the brain and are numbered, from front to back, in the order in which they arise. They connect mainly with structures of the head and neck, such as the eyes, ears, nose, mouth, tongue, and throat. Some are motor nerves, controlling muscle movement; some are sensory nerves, conveying information from the sense organs; and others contain fibers for both sensory and motor impulses. The first and second pairs of cranial nerves - the olfactory (smell) nerves and the optic (vision) nerve - carry sensory information from the nose and eyes, respectively, to the undersurface of the cerebral hemispheres. The other ten pairs of cranial nerves originate in or end in the brain stem.
The brain functions by complex neuronal, or nerve cell, circuits. Communication between neurons is both electrical and chemical and always travels from the dendrites of a neuron, through its soma, and out its axon to the dendrites of another neuron.
Dendrites of one neuron receive signals from the axons of other neurons through chemicals known as neurotransmitters. The neurotransmitters set off electrical charges in the dendrites, which then carry the signals electrochemically to the soma. The soma integrates the information, which is then transmitted electrochemically down the axon to its tip.
At the tip of the axon, small, bubble-like structures called vesicles’ release neurotransmitters that carries the signal across the synapse, or gap, between two neurons. There are many types of neurotransmitters, including norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin. Neurotransmitters can be excitatory (that is, they excite an electrochemical response in the dendrite receptors) or inhibitory (they block the response of the dendrite receptors).
One neuron may communicate with thousands of other neurons, and many thousands of neurons are involved with even the simplest behavior. It is believed that these connections and their efficiency can be modified, or altered, by experience.
Scientists have used two primary approaches to studying how the brain works. One approach is to study brain function after parts of the brain have been damaged. Functions that disappear or that is no longer normal after injury to specific regions of the brain can often be associated with the damaged areas. The second approach is to study the response of the brain to direct stimulation or to stimulation of various sense organs.
Neurons are grouped by function into collections of cells called nuclei. These nuclei are connected to form sensory, motor, and other systems. Scientists can study the function of somatosensory (pain and touch), motor, olfactory, visual, auditory, language, and other systems by measuring the physiological (physical and chemical) change that occur in the brain when these senses are activated. For example, electroencephalography (EEG) measures the electrical activity of specific groups of neurons through electrodes attached to the surface of the skull. Electrodes incorporate directly into the brain can give readings of individual neurons. Changes in blood flow, glucose (sugar), or oxygen consumption in groups of active cells can also be mapped.
Although the brain appears symmetrical, how it functions is not. Each hemisphere is specializing and dominates the other in certain functions. Research has shown that hemispheric dominance is related to whether a person is predominantly right-handed or left-handed. In most right-handed people, the left hemisphere processes arithmetic, language, and speech. The right hemisphere interprets music, complex imagery, and spatial relationships and recognizes and expresses emotion. In left-handed people, the pattern of brain organization is more variable.
Hemispheric specialization has traditionally been studied in people who have sustained damage to the connections between the two hemispheres, as may occur with a stroke, an interruption of blood flow to an area of the brain that causes the death of nerve cells in that area. The division of functions between the two hemispheres has also been studied in people who have had to have the connection between the two hemispheres surgically cut in order to control severe epilepsy, a neurological disease characterized by convulsions and loss of consciousness.
The visual system of humans is one of the most advanced sensory systems in the body. More information is conveyed visually than by any other means. In addition to the structures of the eye itself, several cortical regions - collectively called a primary visual and visual associative cortex - as well as the midbrain are involved in the visual system. Conscious processing of visual input occurs in the primary visual cortex, but reflexive - that is, immediate and unconscious - responses occur at the superior colliculus in the midbrain. Associative cortical regions - specialized regions that can associate, or integrate, multiple inputs - in the parietal and frontal lobes along with parts of the temporal lobe are also involved in the processing of visual information and the establishment of visual memories.
Language involves specialized cortical regions in a complex interaction that allows the brain to comprehend and communicate abstract ideas. The motor cortex initiates impulses that travel through the brain stem to produce audible sounds. Neighboring regions of motor cortices, called the supplemental motor cortex, are involved in sequencing and coordinating sounds. Broca's area of the frontal lobe is responsible for the sequencing of language elements for output. The comprehension of language is dependent upon Wernicke's area of the temporal lobe. Other cortical circuits connect these areas.
Memory is usually considered a diffusely stored associative process - that is, it puts together information from many different sources. Although research has failed to identify specific sites in the brain as locations of individual memories, certain brain areas are critical for memory to function. Immediate recall - the ability to repeat short series of words or numbers immediately after hearing them - is thought to be located in the auditory associative cortex. Short-term memory - the ability to retain a limited amount of information for up to an hour - is located in the deep temporal lobe. Long-term memory probably involves exchanges between the medial temporal lobe, various cortical regions, and the midbrain.
The autonomic nervous system regulates the life support systems of the body reflexively - that is, without conscious direction. It automatically controls the muscles of the heart, digestive system, and lungs; Certain glands, and homeostasis - that is, the equilibrium of the internal environment of the body. The autonomic nervous system itself is controlled by nerve centers in the spinal cord and brain stem and is fine-tuned by regions higher in the brain, such as the midbrain and cortex. Reactions such as blushing indicate that cognitive, or thinking, centers of the brain are also involved in autonomic responses.
The brain is guarded by several highly developed protective mechanisms. The bony cranium, the surrounding meninges, and the cerebrospinal fluid all contribute to the mechanical protection of the brain. In addition, a filtration system called the blood-brain barrier protects the brain from exposure to potentially harmful substances carried in the bloodstream.
Brain disorders have a wide range of causes, including head injury, stroke, bacterial diseases, complex chemical imbalances, and changes associated with aging.
Head injury can initiate a cascade of damaging events. After a blow to the head, a person may be stunned or may become unconscious for a moment. This injury, called - concussion, - usually leaves no permanent damage. If the blow is more severe and hemorrhage (excessive bleeding) and swelling occurs, however, severe headache, dizziness, paralysis, a convulsion, or temporary blindness may result, depending on the area of the brain affected. Damage to the cerebrum can also result in profound personality changes.
Damage to Broca's area in the frontal lobe causes difficulty in speaking and writing, a problem known as Broca's aphasia. Injury to Wernicke's area in the left temporal lobe results in an inability to comprehend spoken language, called Wernicke's aphasia.
An injury or disturbance to a part of the hypothalamus may cause a variety of different symptoms, such as loss of appetite with an extreme drop in body weight, increase in appetite leading to obesity; Extraordinary thirst with excessive urination (diabetes insipidus), failure in body-temperature control, resulting in either low temperature (hypothermia) or high temperature (fever), excessive emotionality, and uncontrolled anger or aggression. If the relationship between the hypothalamus and the pituitary gland is damaged, other vital bodily functions may be disturbed, such as sexual function, metabolism, and cardiovascular activity.
Injury to the brain stem is even more serious because it houses the nerve centers that control breathing and heart action. Damage to the medulla oblongata usually results in immediate death.
A stroke is damage to the brain due to an interruption in blood flow. The interruption may be caused by a blood clot, constriction of a blood vessel, or rupture of a vessel accompanied by bleeding. A pouchlike expansion of the wall of a blood vessel, called an aneurysm, may weaken and burst, for example, because of high blood pressure.
Sufficient quantities of glucose and oxygen, transported through the bloodstream, are needed to keep nerve cells alive. When the blood supply to a small part of the brain is interrupted, the cells in that area die and the function of the area is lost. A massive stroke can cause a one-sided paralysis (hemiplegia) and sensory loss on the side of the body opposite the hemisphere damaged by the stroke.
Some brain diseases, such as multiple sclerosis and Parkinson disease, are progressive, becoming worse over time. Multiple sclerosis damages the myelin sheath around axons in the brain and spinal cord. As a result, the affected axons cannot transmit nerve impulses properly. Parkinson disease destroys the cells of the substantia nigra in the midbrain, resulting in a deficiency in the neurotransmitter dopamine that affects motor functions.
Cerebral palsy is a broad term for brain damage sustained close to birth that permanently affects motor function. The damage may take place either in the developing fetus, during birth, or just after birth and is the result of the faulty development or breaking down of motor pathways. Cerebral palsy is nonprogressive - that is, it does not worsen with time.
A bacterial infection in the cerebrum or in the coverings of the brain, swelling of the brain, or an abnormal growth of healthy brain tissue can all cause an increase in intracranial pressure and result in serious damage to the brain.
Scientists are finding that certain brain chemical imbalances are associated with mental disorders such as schizophrenia and depression. Such findings have changed scientific understanding of mental health and have resulted in new treatments that chemically correct these imbalances.
During childhood development, the brain is particularly susceptible to damage because of the rapid growth and reorganization of nerve connections. Problems that originate in the immature brain can appear as epilepsy or other brain-function problems in adulthood.
Several neurological problems are common in aging. Alzheimer's disease damages many areas of the brain, including the frontal, temporal, and parietal lobes. The brain tissue of people with Alzheimer's disease shows characteristic patterns of damaged neurons, known as plaques and tangles. Alzheimer's disease produces progressive dementia, characterized by symptoms such as failing attention and memory, loss of mathematical ability, irritability, and poor orientation in space and time.
A magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) scan of the human brain reveals the contours of one of the brain’s hemispheres. The gyri, or ridges, appear in red, while the sulci, or valleys, are shown in blue. Each person has slightly different patterns of gyri and sulci, which reflect individual differences in brain development.
Several commonly used diagnostic methods give images of the brain without invading the skull. Some portray anatomy - that is, the structure of the brain - whereas others measure brain function. Two or more methods may be used to complement each other, together providing a more complete picture than would be possible by one method alone.
Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), introduced in the early 1980s, beams high-frequency radio waves into the brain in a highly magnetized field that causes the protons that form the nuclei of hydrogen atoms in the brain to reemit the radio waves. The reemitted radio waves are analyzed by computer to create thin cross-sectional images of the brain. MRI provides the most detailed images of the brain and is safer than imaging methods that use X-rays. However, MRI is a lengthy process and also cannot be used with people who have pacemakers or metal implants, both of which are adversely affected by the magnetic field.
Computed tomography (CT), also known as CT scans, developed in the early 1970s. This imaging method X-rays the brain from many different angles, feeding the information into a computer that produces a series of cross-sectional images. CT is particularly useful for diagnosing blood clots and brain tumors. It is a much quicker process than magnetic resonance imaging and is therefore advantageous in certain situations - for example, with people who are extremely ill.
This positron emission tomography (PET) scans of the brain shows the activity of brain cells in the resting state and during three types of auditory stimulation. PET uses radioactive substances introduced within the brain to measure such brain functions as cerebral metabolism, blood flow and volume, oxygen use, and the formation of neurotransmitters. This imaging method collects data from many different angles, feeding the information into a computer that produces a series of cross-sectional images.
Changes in brain function due to brain disorders can be visualized in several ways. Magnetic resonance spectroscopy measures the concentration of specific chemical compounds in the brain that may change during specific behaviors. Functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI) maps changes in oxygen concentration that correspond to nerve cell activity.
Positron emission tomography (PET), developed in the mid-1970s, uses computed tomography to visualize radioactive tracers, radioactive substances are introduced into the brain intravenously or by inhalation. PET can measure such brain functions as cerebral metabolism, blood flow and volume, oxygen use, and the formation of neurotransmitters. Single photon emission computed tomography (SPECT), developed in the 1950s and 1960s, used radioactive tracers to visualize the circulation and volume of blood in the brain.
Brain-imaging studies have provided new insights into sensory, motor, language, and memory processes, as well as brain disorders such as epilepsy, cerebrovascular disease; Alzheimer's, Parkinson, and Huntington's diseases, and various mental disorders, such as schizophrenia.
Although all vertebrate brains share the same basic three-part structure, the development of their constituent parts varies across the evolutionary scale. In fish, the cerebrum is dwarfed by the rest of the brain and serves mostly to process input from the senses. In reptiles and amphibians, the cerebrum is proportionally larger and begins to connect and form conclusions about this input. Birds have well-developed optic lobes, making the cerebrum even larger. Among mammals, the cerebrum dominates the brain. It is most developed among primates, in whom cognitive ability is the highest.
In lower vertebrates, such as fish and reptiles, the brain is often tubular and bears a striking resemblance to the early embryonic stages of the brains of more highly evolved animals. In all vertebrates, the brain is divided into three regions: the forebrain (prosencephalon), the midbrain (mesencephalon), and the hindbrain (rhombencephalon). These three regions further sub-divide into different structures, systems, nuclei, and layers.
The more highly evolved the animal, the more complex is the brain structure. Human beings have the most complex brains of all animals. Evolutionary forces have also resulted in a progressive increase in the size of the brain. In vertebrates lower than mammals, the brain is small. In meat-eating animals, particularly primates, the brain increases dramatically in size.
The cerebrum and cerebellum of higher mammals are highly convoluted in order to fit the most gray matter surface within the confines of the cranium. Such highly convoluted brains are called gyrencephalic. Many lower mammals have a smooth, or lissencephalic (smooth head), cortical surfaces.
There is also evidence of evolutionary adaption of the brain. For example, many birds depend on an advanced visual system to identify food at great distances while in flight. Consequently, their optic lobes and cerebellum are well developed, giving them keen sight and outstanding motor coordination in flight. Rodents, on the other hand, as nocturnal animals, do not have a well-developed visual system. Instead, they rely more heavily on other sensory systems, such as a highly-developed sense of smell and facial whiskers.
Recent research in brain function suggests that there may be sexual differences in both brain anatomy and brain function. One study indicated that men and women may use their brains differently while thinking. Researchers used functional magnetic resonance imaging to observe which parts of the brain were activated as groups of men and women tried to determine whether sets of nonsense words rhymed. Men used only Broca's area in this task, whereas women used Broca's area plus an area on the right side of the brain.
The Cell, in [biology] is the most basic unit of life. Cells are the smallest structures capable of basic life processes, such as taking in nutrients, expelling waste, and reproducing. All living things are composed of cells. Some microscopic organisms, such as bacteria and protozoa, are unicellular, meaning they consist of a single cell. Plants, animals, and fungi are multicellular; that is, they are composed of a great many cells working in concert. But whether it makes up an entire bacterium or is just one of the trillions in a human being, the cell is a marvel of design and efficiency. Cells carry out thousands of biochemical reactions each minute and reproduce new cells that perpetuate life.
The word cell refers to several types of organisms. Cells such as paramecia, dinoflagellates, diatoms, and spirochetes are self-maintaining organisms; cells such as lymphocytes, erythrocytes, muscle cells, nerve cells, cardiac muscle, and chromoplasts are more specializing cells that are a part of higher multicellular organisms. Nonetheless, of its size or whether the cell is a complete organism or just part of an organism, all cells have certain structural components in common. All cells have some type of outer cell boundary that permits some materials to leave and enter the cell and a cell interior composed of a water-rich, fluid material called cytoplasm that contains hereditary material in the form of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA).
Cells vary considerably in size. The smallest cell, a type of bacterium known as a mycoplasma, measures 0.0001 mm. (0.000004 in.) in diameter; 10,000 mycoplasmas in a row are only as wide as the diameter of a human hair. Among the largest cells are the nerve cells that run down a giraffe’s neck; these cells can exceed 3 m. (9.7 ft.) in length. Human cells also display a variety of sizes, from small red blood cells that measure 0.00076 mm. (0.00003 in.) to liver cells that may be ten times larger. About 10,000 average-sized human cells can fit on the head of a pin.
Along with their differences in size, cells present an array of shapes. Some, such as the bacterium Escherichia coli, resemble rods. The paramecium, a type of protozoan, is a slipper shaped. The amoeba, another protozoan, has an irregular form that changes shape as it moves around. Plant cells typically resemble boxes or cubes. In humans, the outermost layers of skin cells are flat, while muscle cells are long and thin. Some nerve cells, with their elongated, tentacle-like extensions, suggest an octopus.
In multicellular organisms, shape is typically tailored to the cell’s job. For example, flat skin cells pack tightly into a layer that protects the underlying tissues from invasions by bacteria. Long, thin muscle cells’ contract readily to move bones. The numerous extensions from a nerve cell enable it to connect to several other nerve cells in order to send and receive messages rapidly and efficiently.
By itself, each cell is a model of independence and self-containment. Like some miniature, walled city in perpetual rush hour, the cell constantly bustles with traffic, shuttling essential molecules from place to place to carry out the business of living. Despite their individuality, however, cells also display a remarkable ability to join, communicate, and coordinate with other cells. The human body, for example, consists of an estimated 20 to 30 trillion cells. Dozens of different kinds of cells are organized into specialized groups called tissues. Tendons and bones, for example, are composed of connective tissue, whereas skin and mucous membranes are built from epithelial tissue. Different tissue types are assembled into organs, which are structures specialized to perform particular functions. Examples of organs include the heart, stomach, and brain. Organs, in turn, are organized into systems such as the circulatory, digestive, or nervous systems. All together, these assembled organ systems form the human body.
The components of cells are molecules, nonliving structures formed by the union of atoms. Small molecules serve as building blocks for larger molecules. Proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, and lipids, which include fats and oils, are the four major molecules that underlie cell structure and also participate in cell functions. For example, a tightly organized arrangement of lipids, proteins, and protein-sugar compounds forms the plasma membrane, or outer boundary, of certain cells. The organelles, membrane-bound compartments in cells, are built largely from proteins. Biochemical reactions in cells are guided by enzymes, specialized proteins that speed up chemical reactions. The nucleic acid deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) contains the hereditary information for cells, and another nucleic acid, ribonucleic acid (RNA), works with DNA to build the thousands of proteins the cell needs.
Cells fall into one of two categories: Prokaryotic or eukaryotic, in a prokaryotic cell, found only in bacteria and archaebacteria, all the components, including the DNA, mingle freely in the cell’s interior, a single compartment. Eukaryotic cells, which make up plants, animals, fungi, and all other life forms, contain numerous compartments, or organelles, within each cell. The DNA in eukaryotic cells is enclosed in a special organelle called the nucleus, which serves as the cell’s command center and information library. The term prokaryote comes from Greek words that mean ‘before the nucleus’ or ‘prenucleus,’ while eukaryote means ‘a true nucleus.’
Bacteria’s cells typically are surrounded by a rigid, protective cell wall. The cell membrane, also called the plasma membrane, regulates passage of materials into and out of the cytoplasm, the semi-fluid that fill the cell. The DNA, located in the nucleoid region, contains the genetic information for the cell. Ribosomes carry out protein synthesis. Many bacteria contain some pilus (plural pili), a structure that extends out of the cell to transfer DNA to another bacterium. The flagellum, found in numerous species, is used for the locomotion. Some bacteria contain a plasmid, a small chromosomes with extra genes. Others have a capsule, a sticky substance external to the cell wall that protects bacteria from attack by white blood cells. Mesosomes were formerly thought to be structures with unknown functions, but now are known to be artifacts created when cells are prepared for viewing with electron microscopes.
Prokaryotic cells are among the tiniest of all cells, ranging in size from 0.0001 to 0.003 mm. (0.000004 to 0.0001 in.) in diameter. About a hundred typical prokaryotic cells lined up in a row would match the thickness of a book page. These cells, which can be rod-like, spherical, or spiral in shape, are surrounded by a protective cell wall. Like most cells, prokaryotic cells live in a watery environment, whether it is soil moisture, a pond, or the fluid surrounding cells in the human body. Tiny pores in the cell wall enable water and the substances dissolved in it, such as oxygen, to flow into the cell; these pores also allow wastes to flow out.
Pushed up against the inner surface of the prokaryotic cell wall is a thin membrane called the plasma membrane. The plasma membrane, composed of two layers of flexible lipid molecules and interspersed with durable proteins, is both supple and strong. Unlike the cell wall, whose open pores allow the unregulated traffic of materials in and out of the cell, the plasma membrane is selectively permeable, meaning it allows only certain substances to pass through. Thus, the plasma membrane actively separates the cell’s contents from its surrounding fluids.
While small molecules such as water, oxygen, and carbon dioxide diffuse freely across the plasma membrane, the passage of many larger molecules, including amino acids (the building blocks’ of proteins) and sugars, is carefully regulated. Specialized transport proteins accomplish this task. The transport proteins span the plasma membrane, forming an intricate system of pumps and channels through which traffic is conducted. Some substances swirling in the fluid around the cell can enter it only if they bind to and are escorted in by specific transport proteins. In this way, the cell fine-tunes its internal environment.
The plasma membrane encloses the cytoplasm, the semifluid that fill the cell. Composed of about 65 percent water, the cytoplasm is packed with up to a billion molecules per cell, a rich storehouse that includes enzymes and dissolved nutrients, such as sugars and amino acids. The water provides a favorable environment for the thousands of biochemical reactions that take place in the cell.
Within the cytoplasm of all prokaryote is deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), a complex molecule in the form of a double helix, a shape similar to a spiral staircase. The DNA is about 1,000 times the length of the cell, and to fit inside, it repeatedly twists and folds to form a compact structure called a chromosome. The chromosome in prokaryote is circular, and is located in a region of the cell called the nucleoid. Often, smaller chromosomes called plasmids are located in the cytoplasm. The DNA is divided into units called genes, just like a long train is divided into separate cars. Depending on the species, the DNA contains several hundred or even thousands of genes. Typically, one gene contains coded instructions for building all or part of a single protein. Enzymes, which are specialized proteins, determine virtually all the biochemical reactions that support and sustain the cell.
Also, immersed in the cytoplasm are the only organelles in prokaryotic cells. Tiny bead-like structures called ribosomes. These are the cell’s protein factories. Following the instructions encoded in the DNA, ribosomes churn out proteins by the hundreds every minute, providing needed enzymes, the replacements for worn-out transport proteins, or other proteins required by the cell.
While relatively simple in construction, prokaryotic cells display extremely complex activity. They have a greater range of biochemical reactions than those found in their larger relatives, the eukaryotic cells. The extraordinary biochemical diversity of prokaryotic cells is manifested in the wide-ranging lifestyles of the archaebacteria and the bacteria, whose habitats include polar ice, deserts, and hydrothermal vents - deep regions of the ocean under great pressure where hot water geysers erupt from cracks in the ocean floor.
An animal cell typically contains several types of membrane-bound organs, or organelles. The nucleus directs activities of the cell and carries genetic information from generation to generation. The mitochondria generates energy for the cell. Proteins are manufactured by ribosomes, which are bound to the rough endoplasmic reticulum or float free in the cytoplasm. The Golgi apparatus modifies, packages, and distributes proteins while lysosomes store enzymes for digesting food. The entire cell is wrapped in a lipid membrane that selectively permits materials to pass in and out of the cytoplasm.
Eukaryotic cells are typically about ten times larger than prokaryotic cells. In animal cells, the plasma membrane, rather than a cell wall, forms the cell’s outer boundary. With a design similar to the plasma membrane of prokaryotic cells, it separates the cell from its surroundings and regulates the traffic across the membrane.
The eukaryotic cell cytoplasm is similar to that of the prokaryote cell except for one major difference: Eukaryotic cells house a nucleus and numerous other membrane-enclosed organelles. Like separate rooms of a house, these organelles enable specialized functions to be carried out efficiently. The building of proteins and lipids, for example, takes place in separate organelles where specialized enzymes geared for each job are located.
The plasma membrane that surrounds eukaryotic cells is a dynamic structure composed of two layers of phospholipid molecules interspersed with cholesterol and proteins. Phospholipids are composed of a hydrophilic, or water-loving, head and two tails, which are hydrophobic, or water-hating. The two phospholipid layers face each other in the membrane, with the heads directed outward and the tails pointing inward. The water-attracting heads anchor the membrane to the cytoplasm, the watery fluid inside the cell, and also to the water surrounding the cell. The water-hating tails block large water-soluble molecules from passing through the membrane while permitting fat-soluble molecules, including medications such as tranquilizers and sleeping pills, to freely cross the membrane. Proteins embedded in the plasma membrane carry out a variety of functions, including transport of large water soluble molecules such as sugars and certain amino acids. Glycoproteins, proteins bonded to carbohydrates, serve in part to identify the cell as belonging to a unique organism, enabling the immune system to detect foreign cells, such as invading bacteria, which carry different glycoproteins. Cholesterol molecules in the plasma membrane act as stabilizers that limit the movement of the two slippery phospholipids layer, which slide back and forth in the membrane. Tiny gaps in the membrane enable small molecules such as oxygen to diffuse readily into and out of the cell. Since cells constantly use up oxygen, decreasing its concentration within the cell, the higher concentration of oxygen outside the cell causes a net flow of oxygen into the cell. The steady stream of oxygen into the cell enables it to carry out aerobic respiration continually, a process that provides the cell with the energy needed to carry out its functions.
The nucleus is the largest organelle in an animal cell. It contains numerous strands of DNA, the length of each strand being many times the diameter of the cell. Unlike the circular prokaryotic DNA, long sectors of eukaryotic DNA pack into the nucleus by wrapping around proteins. As a cell begins to divide, each DNA strand folds over onto itself several times, forming a rod-shaped chromosome.
The nucleus is surrounded by a double-layered membrane that protects the DNA from potentially damaging chemical reactions that occur in the cytoplasm. Messages pass between the cytoplasm and the nucleus through nuclear pores, which are holes in the membrane of the nucleus. In each nuclear pore, molecular signals flash back and forth as often as ten times per second. For example, a signal to activate a specific gene comes into the nucleus and instructions for production of the necessary protein go out to the cytoplasm.
The nucleus, present in eukaryotic cells, is a discrete structure containing chromosomes, which hold the genetic information for the cell. Separated from the cytoplasm of the cell by a double-layered membrane called the nuclear envelope, and the nucleus contains a cellular material called nucleoplasm. Nuclear pores, present around the circumference of the nuclear membrane, allow the exchange of cellular materials between the nucleoplasm and the cytoplasm.
Attached to the nuclear membrane is an elongated membranous sac called the endoplasmic reticulum. This organelle tunnels through the cytoplasm, folding back and forth on itself to form a series of membranous stacks. Endoplasmic reticulums take two forms: Rough and smooth. A rough endoplasmic reticulum (RER) is so called because it appears bumpy under a microscope. The bumps are actually thousands of ribosomes attached to the membrane’s surface. The ribosomes in eukaryotic cells have the same function as those in prokaryotic cells - protein synthesis - but they differ slightly in structure. Eukaryote ribosomes bound to the endoplasmic reticulum help assemble proteins that typically are exported from the cell. The ribosomes work with other molecules to link amino acids to partially completed proteins. These incomplete proteins then travel to the inner chamber of the endoplasmic reticulum, where chemical modifications, such as the addition of a sugar, are carried out. Chemical modifications of lipids are also carried out in the endoplasmic reticulum.
The endoplasmic reticulum and its bound ribosomes are particularly dense in cells that produce many proteins for export, such as the white blood cells of the immune system, which produce and secrete antibodies. Some ribosomes that manufacture proteins are not attached to the endoplasmic reticulum. These so-called free ribosomes are dispersed in the cytoplasm and typically make proteins - many of them enzymes - that remain in the cell.
The second form of an endoplasmic reticulum, the smooth endoplasmic reticulum (SER), lacks ribosomes and has an even surface. Within the winding channels of the smooth endoplasmic reticulum are the enzymes needed for the construction of molecules such as carbohydrates and lipids. The smooth endoplasmic reticulum is prominent in liver cells, where it also serves to detoxify substances such as alcohol, drugs, and other poisons.
Proteins are transported from free and bound ribosomes to the Golgi apparatus, an organelle that resembles a stack of deflated balloons. It is packed with enzymes that complete the processing of proteins. These enzymes add sulfur or phosphorus atoms to certain regions of the protein, for example, or chop off tiny pieces from the ends of the proteins. The completed protein then leaves the Golgi apparatus for its final destination inside or outside the cell. During its assembly on the ribosome, each protein has acquired a group of from 4 to 100 amino acids called a signal. The signal works as a molecular shipping label to direct the protein to its proper location.
Lysosomes are small, often spherical organelles that function as the cell’s recycling center and garbage disposal. Powerful digestive enzymes concentrated in the lysosome break down worn-out organelles and ship their building blocks to the cytoplasm where they are used to construct new organelles. Lysosomes also dismantle and recycle proteins, lipids, and other molecules.
The mitochondria is the powerhouse of the cell. Within these long, slender organelles, which can appear oval or bean shaped under the electron microscope, enzymes convert the sugar glucose and other nutrients into adenosine triphosphate (ATP). This molecule, in turn, serves as an energy battery for countless cellular processes, including the shuttling of substances across the plasma membrane, the building and transport of proteins and lipids, the recycling of molecules and organelles, and the dividing of cells. Muscle and liver cells are particularly active and require dozens and sometimes up to hundreds mitochondria per cell to meet their energy needs. Mitochondria is unusual in that they contain their own DNA in the form of a prokaryote-like circular chromosome; Have their own ribosomes, which resemble prokaryotic ribosomes, and divide independently of the cell.
Unlike the tiny prokaryotic cell, the relatively large eukaryotic cell requires structural support. The cytoskeleton, a dynamic network of protein tubes, filaments, and fibers, crisscrosses the cytoplasm, anchoring the organelles in place and providing shape and structure to the cell. Many components of the cytoskeleton are assembled and disassembled by the cell as needed. During cell division, for example, a special structure called a spindle is built to move chromosomes around. After cell division, the spindle, no longer needed, is dismantled. Some components of the cytoskeleton serve as microscopic tracks along which proteins and other molecules travel like miniature trains. Recent research suggests that the cytoskeleton also may be a mechanical communication structure that converses with the nucleus to help organize events in the cell.
Plant cells have all the components of animal cells and boast several added features, including chromoplasts, a central vacuole, and a cell wall. Chromoplasts convert light energy - typically from the Sun - into the sugar glucose, a form of chemical energy, in a process known as photosynthesis. Chromoplasts, like mitochondria, possess a circular chromosome and prokaryote-like ribosomes, which manufacture the proteins that the chloroplasts typically need.
The central vacuole of a mature plant cell typically takes up most of the room in the cell. The vacuole, a membranous bag, crowds the cytoplasm and organelles to the edges of the cell. The central vacuole stores water, salts, sugars, proteins, and other nutrients. In addition, it stores the blue, red, and purple pigments that give certain flowers their colors. The central vacuole also contains plant wastes that taste bitter to certain insects, thus discouraging the insects from feasting on the plant.
In plant cells, a sturdy cell wall surrounds and protects the plasma membrane. Its pores enable materials to pass freely into and out of the cell. The strength of the wall also enables a cell to absorb water into the central vacuole and swell without bursting. The resulting pressure in the cells provides plants with rigidity and support for stems, leaves, and flowers. Without sufficient water pressure, the cells collapse and the plant wilts.
To stay alive, cells must be able to carry out a variety of functions. Some cells must be able to move, and most cells must be able to divide. All cells must maintain the right concentration of chemicals in their cytoplasm, ingest food and use it for energy, recycle molecules, expel wastes, and construct proteins. Cells must also be able to respond to changes in their environment.
Although many forms of bacteria are not capable of independent movement, species such as the Salmonella bacterium pictured here can move by means of fine threadlike projections called flagella. The arrangement of flagella across the surface of the bacterium differs from species to species; they can be present at the ends of the bacterium or all across the body surface. Forward movement is accomplished either by a tumbling motion or in a forward manner without tumbling.
Many unicellular organisms swim, glide, thrash, or crawl to search for food and escape enemies. Swimming organisms often move by means of a flagellum, a long tail-like structure made of protein. Many bacteria, for example, have one, two, or many flagella that rotate like propellers to drive the organism along. Some single-celled eukaryotic organisms, such as the euglena, also have a flagellum, but it is longer and thicker than the prokaryotic flagellum. The eukaryotic flagellums work by waving up and down like a whip. In higher animals, the sperm cell uses a flagellum to swim toward the female egg for fertilization.
Movement in eukaryotes is also accomplished with cilia, short, hairlike proteins built by centrioles, which are barrel-shaped structures located in the cytoplasm that assemble and break down protein filaments. Typically, thousands of cilia extend through the plasma membrane and cover the surface of the cell, giving it a dense, hairy appearance. By beating its cilia as if they were oars, an organism such as the paramecium propels itself through its watery environment. In cells that do not move, cilia are used for other purposes. In the respiratory tract of humans, for example, millions of ciliated cells prevent inhaled dust, smog, and microorganisms from entering the lungs by sweeping them up on a current of mucus into the throat, where they are swallowed. Eukaryotic flagella and cilia are formed from basal bodies, small protein structures located just inside the plasma membrane. Basal bodies also help to anchor flagella and cilia.
Still other eukaryotic cells, such as amoebas and white blood cells, move by amoeboid motion, or crawling. They extrude their cytoplasm to form temporary pseudopodia, or false feet, which actually are placed in front of the cell, rather like extended arms. They then drag the trailing end of their cytoplasm up to the pseudopodia. A cell using amoeboid motion would lose a race to a euglena or paramecium. But while it is slow, amoeboid motion is strong enough to move cells against a current, enabling water-dwelling organisms to pursue and devour prey, for example, or white blood cells roaming the blood stream to stalk and engulf a bacterium or virus.
An amoeba, a single-celled organism lacking internal organs, is shown approaching a much smaller paramecium, which it begins to engulf with large outflowings of its cytoplasm, called pseudopodia. Once the paramecium is completely engulfed, a primitive digestive cavity, called a vacuole, forms around it. In the vacuole, acids break the paramecium down into chemicals that the amoeba can diffuse back into its cytoplasm for nourishment.
All cells require nutrients for energy, and they display a variety of methods for ingesting them. Simple nutrients dissolved in pond water, for example, can be carried through the plasma membrane of pond-dwelling organisms via a series of molecular pumps. In humans, the cavity of the small intestine contains the nutrients from digested food, and cells that form the walls of the intestine use similar pumps to pull amino acids and other nutrients from the cavity into the bloodstream. Certain unicellular organisms, such as amoebas, are also capable of reaching out and grabbing food. They used a process known as endocytosis, in which the plasma membrane surrounds and engulfed the food particle, enclosing it in a sac, called a vesicle, that is within the amoeba’s interior.
Cells require energy for a variety of functions, including moving, building up and breaking down molecules, and transporting substances across the plasma membrane. Nutrients contain energy, but cells must convert the energy locked in nutrients to another form - specifically, the ATP molecule, the cell’s energy battery - before it is useful. In single-celled eukaryotic organisms, such as the paramecium, and in multicellular eukaryotic organisms, such as plants, animals, and fungi, mitochondria is responsible for this task. The interior of each mitochondrion consists of an inner membrane that is folded into a mazelike arrangement of separate compartments called cristae. Within the cristae, enzymes form an assembly line where the energy in glucose and other energy-rich nutrients is harnessed to build ATP; thousands of ATP molecules are constructed each second in a typical cell. In most eukaryotic cells, this process requires oxygen and is known as aerobic respiration.
Some prokaryotic organisms also carry out aerobic respiration. They lack mitochondria, however, and carry out aerobic respiration in the cytoplasm with the help of enzymes sequestered there. Many prokaryote species live in environments where there is little or no oxygen, environments such as mud, stagnant ponds, or within the intestines of animals. Some of these organisms produce ATP without oxygen in a process known as anaerobic respiration, where sulfur or other substances take the place of oxygen. Still other prokaryotes, and yeast, a single-celled eukaryote, build ATP without oxygen in a process known as fermentation.
Almost all organisms rely on the sugar glucose to produce ATP. Glucose is made by the process of photosynthesis, in which light energy is transformed to the chemical energy of glucose. Animals and fungi cannot carry out photosynthesis and depend on plants and other photosynthetic organisms for this task. In plants, as we have seen, photosynthesis takes place in organelles called chloroplasts. Chloroplasts contain numerous internal compartments called thylakoids where enzymes aid in the energy conversion process. A single leaf cell contains 40 to 50 chloroplasts. With sufficient sunlight, one large tree is capable of producing upwards of two tons of sugar in a single day. Photosynthesis in prokaryotic organisms - typically aquatic bacteria - is carried out with enzymes clustered in plasma membrane folds called chromatophores. Aquatic bacteria produce the food consumed by tiny organisms living in ponds, rivers, lakes, and seas.
A typical cell must have on hand, about. 30,000 proteins at any-one time. Many of these proteins are enzymes needed to construct the major molecules used by cells - carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, and nucleic acids - nor to aid in the breakdown of such molecules after they have worn out. Other proteins are part of the cell’s structure - the plasma membrane and ribosomes, for example. In animals, proteins also function as hormones and antibodies, and they function like delivery trucks to transport other molecules around the body. Hemoglobin, for example, is a protein that transports oxygen in red blood cells. The cell’s demand for proteins never ceases.
Before a protein can be made, however, the molecular directions to build, it must be extracted from one or more genes. In humans, for example, one gene holds the information for the protein insulin, the hormone that cells need to import glucose from the bloodstream, while at least two genes hold the information for collagen, the protein that imparts strength to skin, tendons, and ligaments. The process of building proteins begins when enzymes, in response to a signal from the cell, bind to the gene that carries the code for the required protein, or part of the protein. The enzymes transfer the code to a new molecule called messenger RNA, which carries the code from the nucleus to the cytoplasm. This enables the original genetic code to remain safe in the nucleus, with messenger RNA delivering small bits and pieces of information from the DNA to the cytoplasm as needed. Depending on the cell type, hundreds or even thousands of molecules of messenger RNA are produced each minute.
Once in the cytoplasm, the messenger RNA molecule links up with a ribosome. The ribosome moves along the messenger RNA like a monorail car along a track, stimulating another form of RNA - transfer RNA - to gather and link the necessary amino acids, pooled in the cytoplasm, to form the specific protein, or section of protein. The protein is modified as necessary by the endoplasmic reticulum and Golgi apparatus before embarking on its mission. Cells teem with activity as they forge the numerous, diverse proteins that are indispensable for life. For a more detailed discussion about protein synthesis, When there are a hundred or more cells, they formed a hollow ball of cells, called a blastula, surrounding a fluid-filled cavity. Later divisions produce three layers of cells - endoderm (inner), mesoderm (middle), and ectoderm (outer) - from which the principal features of the animal will differentiate.
Most cells divide at some time during their life cycle, and some divide dozens of times before they die. Organisms rely on cell division for reproduction, growth, and repair and replacement of damaged or worn out cells. Three types of cell division occur: Binary fission, mitosis, and meiosis. Binary fission, the method used by prokaryotes, produces two identical cells from one cell. The more complex process of mitosis, which also produces two genetically identical cells from a single cell, is used by many unicellular eukaryotic organisms for reproduction. Multicellular organisms use mitosis for growth, cell repair, and cell replacement. In the human body, for example, an estimated 25 million mitotic cell divisions occur every second in order to replace cells that have completed their normal life cycles. Cells of the liver, intestine, and skin may be replaced every few days. Recent research indicates that even brain cell, once thought to be incapable of mitosis, undergo cell division in the part of the brain associated with memory.
In a landmark intersection of science and fiction, cloning leapt from the world’s imagination to its front page in February 1997. It arrived in the innocent form of a sheep named Dolly: The first exact genetic duplicate of an adult mammal due to genetic engineering. Scottish scientists had created Dolly from deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) - the basic unit of heredity - taken from a single adult sheep cell. The accomplishment threw open the door to profoundly ethical as well as scientific controversy over the potential uses and abuses of cloning. ‘However the debate is resolved,’ wrote Los Angeles Times science reporter Thomas H. Maugh II, ‘the genie is irretrievably out of the bottle.’
The type of cell division required for sexual reproduction is meiosis. Sexually reproducing organisms include seaweeds, fungi, plants, and animals - including, of course, human beings. Meiosis differs from mitosis in that cell division begins with a cell that has a full complement of chromosomes and ends with gamete cells, such as sperm and eggs, that have only half the complement of chromosomes. When a sperm and egg unite during fertilization, the cell resulting from the union, called a zygote, contains the full number of chromosomes.
The story of how cells evolved remains an open and actively investigated question in science. The combined expertise of physicists, geologists, chemists, and evolutionary biologists has been required to shed light on the evolution of cells from the nonliving matter of early Earth. The planet formed about 4.5 billion years ago, and for millions of years, violent volcanic eruptions blasted substances such as carbon dioxide, nitrogen, water, and other small molecules into the air. These small molecules, bombarded by ultraviolet radiation and lightning from intense storms, collided to form the stable chemical bonds of larger molecules, such as amino acids and nucleotides - the building blocks of proteins and nucleic acids. Experiments indicate that these larger molecules form spontaneously under laboratory conditions that simulate the probable early environment of Earth.
Scientists speculate that rain may have carried these molecules into lakes to create a primordial soup - the breeding ground for the assembly of proteins, the nucleic acid RNA, and lipids. Some scientists postulate that these more complex molecules formed in hydrothermal vents rather than in lakes. Other scientists propose that these key substances may have reached Earth on meteorites from outer space. Regardless of the origin or environment, however, scientists do agree that proteins, nucleic acids, and lipids provided the raw materials for the first cells. In the laboratory, scientists have observed lipid molecules joining to form spheres that resemble a cell’s plasma membrane. As a result of these observations, scientists postulate that millions of years of molecular collisions resulted in lipid spheres enclosing RNA, the simplest molecule capable of self-replication. These primitive aggregations would have been the ancestors of the first prokaryotic cells.
Fossil studies indicate that Cyanobacteria, bacteria capable of photosynthesis, were among the earliest bacteria to evolve, an estimated 3.4 billion to 3.5 billion years ago. In the environment of the early Earth, there were no oxygen, and cyanobacteria probably used fermentation to produce ATP. Over the eons, cyanobacteria performed photosynthesis, which produces oxygen as a byproduct; The result was the gradual accumulation of oxygen in the atmosphere. The presence of oxygen set the stage for the evolution of bacteria that used oxygen in aerobic respiration, a more efficient ATP-producing process than fermentation. Some molecular studies of the evolution of genes in archaebacteria suggest that these organisms may have evolved in the hot waters of hydrothermal vents or hot springs slightly earlier than cyanobacteria, around 3.5 billion years ago. Like cyanobacteria, archaebacteria probably relied on fermentation to synthesize ATP.
Eukaryotic cells may have evolved from primitive prokaryotes about 2 billion years ago. One hypothesis suggests that some prokaryotic cells lost their cell walls, permitting the cell’s plasma membrane to expand and fold. These folds, ultimately, may have given rise to separate compartments within the cell - the forerunners of the nucleus and other organelles now found in eukaryotic cells. Another key hypothesis is known as endosymbiosis. Molecular studies of the bacteria-like DNA and ribosomes in mitochondria and chloroplasts indicate that mitochondrion and chloroplast ancestors were once free-living bacteria. Scientists propose that these free-living bacteria were engulfed and maintained by other prokaryotic cells for their ability to produce ATP efficiently and to provide a steady supply of glucose. Over generations, eukaryotic cells situated with mitochondria - the ancestors of animals - or with both mitochondria and chloroplasts - the ancestors of plants - evolved.
The first observations of cells were made in 1665 by English scientist Robert Hooke, who used a crude microscope of his own invention to examine a variety of objects, including a thin piece of cork. Noting the rows of tiny boxes that made up the dead wood’s tissue, Hooke coined the term cell because the boxes reminded him of the small cells occupied by monks in a monastery. While Hooke was the first to observe and describe cells, he did not comprehend their significance. At about the same time, the Dutch maker of microscopes Antoni van Leeuwenhoek pioneered the invention of one of the best microscopes of the time. Using his invention, Leeuwenhoek was the first to observe, draw, and describe a variety of living organisms, including bacteria gliding in saliva, one-celled organisms cavorting in pond water, and sperm swimming in semen. Two centuries passed, however, before scientists grasped the true importance of cells.
Many advances have been made in microscope technology. This article from the 1994 Collier’s Year Book begins with the microscope most young students are familiar with and tracks the breakthroughs in the development of new types of microscopes - including those that use ultrasonic imaging and those that ‘feel’ an object’s surface.
Modern ideas about cells appeared in the 1800s, when improved light microscopes enabled scientists to observe more details of cells. Working together, German botanist Matthias Jakob Schleiden and German zoologist Theodor Schwann recognized the fundamental similarities between plant and animal cells. In 1839 they proposed the revolutionary idea that all living things are made up of cells. Their theory gave rise to modern biology: a whole new way of seeing and investigating the natural world.
By the late 1800s, as light microscopes improved still further, scientists were able to observe chromosomes within the cell. Their research was aided by new techniques for staining parts of the cell, which made possible the first detailed observations of cell division, including observations of the differences between mitosis and meiosis in the 1880s. In the first few decades of the 20th century, many scientists focused on the behavior of chromosomes during cell division. At that time, it was generally held that mitochondria transmitted the hereditary information. By 1920, however, scientists determined that chromosomes carry genes and that genes transmit hereditary information from generation to generation.
During this period, scientists began to understand some of the chemical processes in cells. In the 1920s, the ultracentrifuge was developed. The ultracentrifuge is an instrument that spins cells or other substances in test tubes at high speeds, which causes the heavier parts of the substance to fall to the bottom of the test tube. This instrument enabled scientists to separate the relatively abundant and heavy mitochondria from the rest of the cell and study their chemical reactions. By the late 1940s, scientists were able to explain the role of mitochondria in the cell. Using refined techniques with the ultracentrifuge, scientists subsequently isolated the smaller organelles and gained an understanding of their functions.
The deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecule is the genetic blueprint for each cell and ultimately the blueprint that determines every characteristic of a living organism. In 1953 American biochemist James Watson, left, and British biophysicist Francis Crick, right, described the structure of the DNA molecule as a double helix, somewhat like a spiral staircase with many individual steps. Their work was aided by X-ray diffraction pictures of the DNA molecule taken by British biophysicist Maurice Wilkins and British physical chemist Rosalind Franklin. In 1962 Crick, Watson, and Wilkins received the Nobel Prize for their pioneering work on the structure of the DNA molecule.
While some scientists were studying the functions of cells, others were examining details of their structure. They were aided by a crucial technological development in the 1940s, the invention of the electron microscope, which uses high-energy electrons instead of light waves to view specimens. New generations of electron microscopes have provided resolution, or the differentiation of separate objects, thousands of times more powerful than that available in light microscopes. This powerful resolution revealed organelles such as the endoplasmic reticulum, lysosomes, the Golgi apparatus, and the cytoskeleton. The scientific fields of cell structure and function continue to complement each other as scientists explore the enormous complexity of cells.
The discovery of the structure of DNA in 1953 by American biochemist James D. Watson and British biophysicist Francis Crick ushered in the era of molecular biology. Today, investigation inside the world of cells - of genes and proteins at the molecular level - constitutes one of the largest and fastest moving areas in all of science. One particularly active field in recent years has been the investigation of cell signaling, the process by which molecular messages find their way into the cell via a series of complex protein pathways in the cell.
Another busy area in cell biology concerns programmed cell death, or apoptosis. Millions of times per second in the human body, cells commit suicide as an essential part of the normal cycle of cellular replacement. This also seems to be a check against disease: When mutations build up within a cell, the cell will usually self-destruct. If this fails to occur, the cell may divide and give rise to mutated daughter cells, which continue to divide and spread, gradually forming a growth called a tumor. This unregulated growth by rogue cells can be benign, or harmless, or cancerous, which may threaten healthy tissue. The study of apoptosis is one avenue that scientists explore in an effort to understand how cells become cancerous.
Scientists are also discovering exciting aspects of the physical forces within cells. Cells employ a form of architecture called tensegrity, which enables them to withstand battering by a variety of mechanical stresses, such as the pressure of blood flowing around cells or the movement of organelles within the cell. Tensegrity stabilizes cells by evenly distributing mechanical stresses to the cytoskeleton and other cell components. Tensegrity also may explain how a change in the cytoskeleton, where certain enzymes are anchored, initiates biochemical reactions within the cell, and can even influence the action of genes. The mechanical rules of tensegrity may also account for the assembly of molecules into the first cells. Such new insights - made some 300 years after the tiny universe of cells was first glimpsed - show that cells continue to yield fascinating new worlds of discovery.
The Nervous System signifies of those elements within the animal organism that are concerned with the reception of stimuli, the transmission of nerve impulses, or the activation of muscle mechanisms.
The reception of stimuli is the function of special sensory cells. The conducting elements of the nervous system are cells called neurons; these may be capable of only slow and generalized activity, or they may be highly efficient and rapidly conducting units. The specific response of the neuron—the nerve impulse - and the capacities of the cell to be stimulated make this cell a receiving and transmitting unit capable of transferring information from one part of the body to another.
Each nerve cell consists of a central portion containing the nucleus, known as the cell body, and one or more structures referred to as axons and dendrites. The dendrites are rather short extensions of the cell body and are involved in the reception of stimuli. The axon, by contrast, is usually a single elongated extension, it is especially important in the transmission of nerve impulses from the region of the cell body to other cells.
Although all many-celled animals have some kind of nervous system, the complexity of its organization varies considerably among different animal types. In simple animals such as jellyfish, the nerve cells form a network capable of mediating only a relatively stereotyped response. In more complex animals, such as shellfish, insects, and spiders, the nervous system is more complicated. The cell bodies of neurons are organized in clusters called ganglia. These clusters are interconnected by the neuronal processes to form a ganglionated chain. Such chains are found in all vertebrates, in which they represent a special part of the nervous system, related especially to the regulation of the activities of the heart, the glands, and the involuntary Vertebrate animals have a bony spine and skull in which the central part of the nervous system is housed; The peripheral part extends throughout the remainder of the body. That part of the nervous system located in the skull is referred to as the brain that found in the spine is called the spinal cord. The brain and the spinal cord are continuous through an opening in the base of the skull; Both are also in contact with other parts of the body through the nerves. The distinction made between the central nervous system and the peripheral nervous system is based on the different locations of the two intimately related parts of a single system. Some of the processes of the cell bodies conduct sense impressions and others conduct muscle responses, called reflexes, such as those caused by pain.
In the skin are cells of several types called receptors; each is especially sensitive to particular stimuli. Free nerve endings are sensitive to pain and are directly activated. The neurons so activated send impulses into the central nervous system and have junctions with other cells that have axons extending back into the periphery. Impulses are carried from processes of these cells to motor endings within the muscles. These neuromuscular endings excite the muscles, resulting in muscular contraction and appropriate movement. The pathway taken by the nerve impulse in mediating this simple response is in the form of a two-neuron arc that begins and ends in the periphery. Many of the actions of the nervous system can be explained on the basis of such reflex arcs, which are chains of interconnected nerve cells, stimulated at one end and capable of bringing about movement or glandular secretion at the other.
The cranial nerves connect to the brain by passing through openings in the skull, or cranium. Nerves associated with the spinal cord pass through openings in the vertebral column and are called spinal nerves. Both cranial and spinal nerves consist of large numbers of processes that convey impulses to the central nervous system and also carry messages outward; the former processes are called afferent, and the latter are called efferent. Afferent impulses are referred to as sensory; efferent impulses are referred to as either somatic or visceral motor, according to what part of the body they reach. Most nerves are mixed nerves made up of both sensory and motor elements.
The cranial and spinal nerves are paired; The number in humans are 12 and 31, respectively. Cranial nerves are distributed to the head and neck regions of the body, with one conspicuous exception: the tenth cranial nerve, called the vagus. In addition to supplying structures in the neck, the vagus is distributed to structures located in the chest and abdomen. Vision, auditory and vestibular sensation, and taste is mediated by the second, eighth, and seventh cranial nerves, respectively. Cranial nerves also mediate motor functions of the head, the eyes, the face, the tongue, and the larynx, as well as the muscles that function in chewing and swallowing. Spinal nerves, after they exit from the vertebrae, are distributed in a band-like fashion to regions of the trunk and to the limbs. They interconnect extensively, thereby forming the brachial plexus, which runs to the upper extremities, and the lumbar plexus, which passes to the lower limbs.
Among the motor’s fibers may be found groups that carry impulses to viscera. These fibers are designated by the special name of autonomic nervous system. That system consists of two divisions, more or less antagonistic in function, that emerge from the central nervous system at different points of origin. One division, the sympathetic, arises from the middle portion of the spinal cord, joins the sympathetic ganglionated chain, courses through the spinal nerves, and is widely distributed throughout the body. The other division, the parasympathetic, arises both above and below the sympathetic, that is, from the brain and from the lower part of the spinal cord. These two divisions control the functions of the respiratory, circulatory, digestive, and urogenital systems.
Consideration of disorders of the nervous system is the province of neurology; Psychiatry deals with behavioral disturbances of a functional nature. The division between these two medical specialties cannot be sharply defined, because neurological disorders often manifest both organic and mental symptoms.
Diseases of the nervous system include genetic malformations, poisonings, metabolic defects, vascular disorders, inflammations, degeneration, and tumors, and they involve either nerve cells or their supporting elements. Vascular disorders, such as cerebral hemorrhage or other forms of a stroke, are among the most common causes of paralysis and other neurologic complications. Some diseases exhibit peculiar geographic and age distribution. In temperate zones, multiple sclerosis is a common degenerative disease of the nervous system, but it is rare in the Tropics.
The nervous system is subject to infection by a great variety of bacteria, parasites, and viruses. For example, meningitis, or infection of the meninges investing the brain and spinal cord, can be caused by many different agents. On the other hand, one specific virus causes rabies. Some viruses causing neurological ills effect only certain parts of the nervous system. For example, the virus causing poliomyelitis commonly affects the spinal cord, as Viruses manufacturing encephalitis attack the brain.
Inflammations of the nervous system are named according to the part affected. Myelitis is an inflammation of the spinal cord; Neuritis is an inflammation of a nerve. It may be caused not only by infection but also by poisoning, alcoholism, or injury. Tumors originating in the nervous system usually are composed of meningeal tissue or neuroglia (supporting tissue) cells, depending on the specific part of the nervous system affected, but other types of a tumor may metastasize to or invade the nervous system. In certain disorders of the nervous system, such as neuralgia, migraine, and epilepsy, no evidence may exist of organic damage. Another disorder, cerebral palsy, is associated with birth defects.
Pain, is an unpleasant sensory or emotional experience caused by real or potential injury or damage to the body or described in terms of such damage. Scientists believe that pain evolved in the animal kingdom as a valuable three-part warning system. First, it warns of injury. Second, pain protects against further injury by causing a reflexive withdrawal from the source of injury. Finally, pain leads to a period of reduced activity, enabling injuries to heal more efficiently.
Pain is difficult to measure in humans because it has an emotional, or psychological component as well as a physical component. Some people express extreme discomfort from relatively small injuries, while others show little or no pain even after suffering severe injury. Sometimes pain is present even though no injury is apparent at all, or pain lingers long after an injury appears to have healed.
The signals that warn the body of tissue damage are transmitted through the nervous system. In this system, the basic unit is the nerve cell or neuron. A nerve cell is composed of three parts: a central cell body, a single major branching fiber called an axon, and a series of smaller branching fibers known as dendrites. Each nerve cell meets other nerve cells at certain points on the axons and dendrites, forming a dense network of interconnected nerve fibers that transmit sensory information about touch, pressure, or warmth, as well as pain.
Sensory information is transmitted from the different parts of the body to the brain via the spinal cord, which is a complex set of nerves that extend from the brain down along the back, protected by the bones of the spine. About as wide as a finger, the spinal cord is like a cable packed with many bundles of wires. The bundles are nerve pathways for transmitting information. But the spinal cord is more than just a message transmitter, it is also an extension of the brain. It contains neurons that process incoming sensory information, and generates messages to be sent back down to cells in other parts of the body.
In the nervous system, a message-carrying impulse travels from one end of a nerve cell to the other by means of an electrical impulse. When it reaches the terminal end of a nerve cell, the impulse trigger’s tiny sacs called presynaptic vessicles to release their contents, chemical messengers called neurotransmitters. The neurotransmitters float across the synapse, or gap between adjacent nerve cells. When they reach the neighboring nerve cell, the neurotransmitters fit into specialized receptor sites much as a key fits into a lock, causing that nerve cell to ‘fire,’ or generate an electric message-carrying impulse. As the message continues through the nervous system, the presynaptic cell absorbs the excess neurotransmitters, and repackages them in presynaptic versicles in a process called neurotransmitter reuptake.
Information being transmitted between and within the brain and spinal cord travels through the nervous system using both chemical and electrical mechanisms. A message-carrying impulse travels from one end of a nerve cell to another by means of an electric signal. When the electric signal reaches the terminal end of a nerve cell, a gap called a synapse prevents the electric signal from crossing to the next cell. The electric signal triggers the cell to release chemicals called neurotransmitters, which float across the synapse to the neighboring nerve cell. These neurotransmitters fit into specialized receptors found on the adjacent nerve cell, much as a key fits into a lock, generating an electric impulse in the neighboring cell. This new impulse travels to the end of the long cell, in turn triggering the release of neurotransmitters to carry the message across the next synapse. Not all neurotransmitters initiate a message in a neighboring nerve cell. Some specialize in preventing neighboring cells from generating an electrical signal, while others function as helpers, facilitating the message's journey to the brain.
While most of the sensory nerves in the skin and other body tissues have special structures covering their nerve endings, those nerves that signal injury have free nerve endings. These simple nerve endings specialize in detecting noxious stimuli - a catchall term for injury-causing stimuli such as intense heat, extreme pressure, or sharp pricks or cuts. The nerve endings that detect pain are called nociceptors, and the process of transmitting pain signals when harmful stimulation occurs is called nociception. Several million nociceptors are interlaced through the tissues and organs of the body.
When a person experiences an injury, such as a stubbed toe, specialized cells called nociceptors sense potential tissue damage (1) and send an electric signal, called an impulse, to the spinal cord via a sensory nerve (2). A specialized region of the spinal cord known as the dorsal horn (3) processes the pain signal, immediately sending another impulse back down the leg via a motor nerve (4). This causes the muscles in the leg to contract and pull the toe away from the source of injury (6). At the same time, the dorsal horn sends another impulse up the spinal cord to the brain. During this trip, the impulse travels between nerve cells. When the impulse reaches a nerve ending (7), the nerve released chemical messengers, called neurotransmitters, which carry the message to the adjacent nerve. When the impulse reaches the brain (8), it is analyzed and processed as an unpleasant physical and emotional sensation.
An injury triggers pain signals in two types of nociceptors, one with large, insulated axons known as A-delta fibers and one with small, uninsulated axons known as C fibers. The large A-delta fibers conduct signals quickly, and the smaller C fibers transmit information slowly. The difference in the functions of these two fibers becomes obvious to a person who stubs a toe. At first the injured person is aware of a sharp, flashing pain at the point of injury. Generated by the A-delta fibers, this short-lived pain intrudes upon the thoughts and perceptions occurring in the brain. Just as this first pain subsides, a second pain begins that is vague, throbbing, and persistent. This sensation is derived from the C fibers.
Pain information from the A-delta and C fibers travels through the spinal cord to the brain. When it receives the pain message, the spinal cord generates impulses that travel back down to muscles, which lead to a reflexive contraction that pulls the body away from the source of injury. Other reflexes may affect skin temperature, blood flow, sweating, and other changes.
While this reflex action is underway, the pain message continues up the spinal cord to relay centers in the brain. The sensory information is routed to many other parts of the brain, including the cortex, where thinking processes occur
The Adrenal Gland is the vital endocrine gland that secretes hormones into the bloodstream, situated, in humans, on top of the upper end of each kidney. The two parts of the gland - the inner portion, or medulla, and the outer portion, or the cortex - are like separate organs: They are composed of different types of tissue and perform different functions. The adrenal medulla, composed of chromaffin cells secretes the hormone epinephrine, also called adrenaline, in response to stimulation of the sympathetic nervous system at times of stress. The medulla also secretes the hormone norepinephrine, which plays a role in maintaining normal blood circulation. The hormones of the medulla are called catecholamines. Unlike the adrenal cortex, the medulla can be removed without endangering the life of an individual.
The adrenal outer layer, or cortex, secretes about 30 steroid hormones, but only a few are secreted in significant amounts. Aldosterone, one of the most important hormones, regulates the balance of salt and water in the body. Cortisone and hydrocortisone are necessary to regulate fat, carbohydrate, and protein metabolism. Adrenal sex steroids have a minor influence on the reproductive system. Modified steroids, now produced synthetically, are superior to naturally secreted steroids for treatment of Addison's disease and other disorders.
Adrenocorticotropic Hormone is also known as corticotropin, hormones secreted by the anterior part of the pituitary gland. The specific function of ACTH is to stimulate the growth and secretions of the cortex (outer layers) of the adrenal gland. One of these secretions is cortisone, a hormone involved in carbohydrate and protein metabolisms. ACTH is used medically for its anti-inflammatory action to alleviate symptoms of allergies and arthritis. ACTH is a complex protein molecule containing 39 amino acids. Its molecular weight is approximately 5000. The biological activity of the ACTH of various animal species is similar to that of humans, but the sequence of amino acids has been found to vary somewhat among species. ACTH production is controlled in part by the hypothalamus and in part by the existing levels of adrenal gland hormones. ACTH levels increased in response to stress, disease, and decreased blood pressure.
The Pituitary Gland is the master endocrine gland in vertebrate animals. The hormones secreted by the pituitary stimulate and control the functioning of almost all the other endocrine glands in the body. Pituitary hormones also promote growth and control the water balance of the body.
The pituitary is a small bean-shaped, reddish-gray organ located in the saddle-shaped depression (sella turcica) in the floor of the skull (the sphenoid bone) and attached to the base of the brain by a stalk; it is located near the hypothalamus. The pituitary has two lobes - the anterior lobe, or adenohypophysis, and the posterior lobe, or neurohypophysis - which differ in structure and function. The anterior lobe is derived embryologically from the roof of the pharynx and is composed of groups of epithelial cells separated by blood channels; the posterior lobe is derived from the base of the brain and is composed of nervous connective tissue and nerve-like secreting cells. The area between the anterior and posterior lobes of the pituitary is called the intermediate lobe; it has the same embryological origin as the anterior lobe.
Concentrated chemical substances, or hormones, which control 10 to 12 functions in the body, have been obtained as extracts from the anterior pituitary glands of cattle, sheep, and swine. Eight hormones have been isolated, purified, and identified; All of them are peptides, that is, they are composed of amino acids. A growth hormone (GH), or the somatotropic hormone (STH), is essential for normal skeletal growth and is neutralized during adolescence by the gonadal sex hormones. Thyroid-stimulating hormones (TSH) control the normal functioning of the thyroid gland, and the adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH) controls the activity of the cortex of the adrenal glands and takes part in the stress reaction. Prolactin, also called lactogenic, luteotropic, or mammotropic hormone, initiates milk secretion in the mammary gland after the mammary tissues have been prepared during pregnancy by the secretion of other pituitary and sex hormones. The two gonadotropic hormones are follicle-stimulating hormones (FSH) and a luteinizing hormone (LH). Follicle-stimulating hormones stimulates the formation of the Graafian follicle in the female ovary and the development of spermatozoa in the male. The luteinizing hormone stimulates the formation of ovarian hormones after ovulation and initiates lactation in the female, in the male, it stimulates the tissues of the testes to elaborate testosterone. In 1975 scientists identified the pituitary peptide endorphin, which acts in experimental animals as a natural pain reliever in times of stress. Endorphin and ACTH are made as parts of a single large protein, which subsequently splits. This may be the body's mechanism for coordinating the physiological activities of two stress-induced hormones. The same large prohormone that contains ACTH and endorphin also contains short peptides called melanocyte-stimulating hormones. These substances are analogous to the hormone that regulates pigmentation in fish and amphibians, but in humans they have no known function.
Research has shown that the hormonal activity of the anterior lobe is controlled by chemical messengers sent from the hypothalamus through tiny blood vessels to the anterior lobe. In the 1950s, the British neurologist Geoffrey Harris discovered that cutting the blood supply from the hypothalamus to the pituitary impaired the function of the pituitary. In 1964, chemical agents called releasing factors were found in the hypothalamus; These substances, it was learned, affect the secretion of growth hormones, a thyroid-stimulating hormone called thyrotropin, and the gonadotropic hormones involving the testes and ovaries. In 1969 the American endocrinologist Roger Guillemin and colleagues isolated and characterized thyrotropin-releasing factors, which stimulates the secretion of thyroid-stimulating hormones from the pituitary. In the next few years his group and that of the American physiologist Andrew Victor Schally isolated the luteinizing hormone-releasing factor, which stimulates secretion of both LH and FSH, and somatostatin, which inhibits release of growth hormones. For this work, which proved that the brain and the endocrine system are linked, they shared the Nobel Prize in physiology or medicine in 1977. Human somatostatin was one of the first substances to be grown in bacteria by recombinant DNA.
The presence of the releasing factors in the hypothalamus helped to explain the action of the female sex hormones, estrogen and progesterone, and their synthetic versions contained in oral contraceptives, or birth-control pills. During a woman's normal monthly cycle, several hormonal changes are needed for the ovary to produce an egg cell for possible fertilization. When the estrogen level in the body declines, the follicle-releasing factor (FRF) flows to the pituitary and stimulates the secretion of the follicle-stimulating hormone. Through a similar feedback principle, the declining level of progesterone causes a release of luteal-releasing factors (LRF), which stimulates secretion of the luteinizing hormone. The ripening follicle in the ovary then produces estrogen, and the high level of that hormone influences the hypothalamus to shut down temporarily the production of FSH. Increased progesterone feedback to the hypothalamus shuts down LH production by the pituitary. The daily doses of synthetic estrogen and progesterone in oral contraceptives, or injections of the actual hormones, inhibit the normal reproductive activity of the ovaries by mimicking the effect of these hormones on the hypothalamus.
In lower vertebrates this part of the pituitary secretes melanocyte-stimulating hormones, which brings about skin-color changes. In humans, it is present only for a short time early in life and during pregnancy, and is not known to have any function.
Two hormones are secreted by the posterior lobe. One of these is the antidiuretic hormone (ADH), vasopressin. Vasopressin stimulates the kidney tubules to absorb water from the filtered plasma that passes through the kidneys and thus controls the amount of urine secreted by the kidneys. The other posterior pituitary hormone is oxytocin, which causes the contraction of the smooth muscles in the uterus, intestines, and blood arterioles. Oxytocin stimulates the contractions of the uterine muscles during the final stage of pregnancy to stimulate the expulsion of the fetus, and it also stimulates the ejection, or let-down, of milk from the mammary gland following pregnancy. Synthesized in 1953, oxytocin was the first pituitary hormone to be produced artificially. Vasopressin was synthesized in 1956.
Pituitary functioning may be disturbed by such conditions as tumors, blood poisoning, blood clots, and certain infectious diseases. Conditions resulting from a decrease in anterior-lobe secretion include dwarfism, acromicria, Simmonds's disease, and Fröhlich's syndrome. The dwarfism occurs when anterior pituitary deficiencies occur during childhood; acromicria, in which the bones of the extremities are small and delicate, results when the deficiency occurs after puberty. Simmonds's disease, which is caused by extensive damage to the anterior pituitary, is characterized by premature aging, loss of hair and teeth, anemia, and emaciation; it can be fatal. Fröhlich's syndrome, also called adiposogenital dystrophy, is caused by both anterior pituitary deficiency and a lesion of the posterior lobe or hypothalamus. The result is obesity, dwarfism, and retarded sexual development. Glands under the influence of anterior pituitary hormones are also affected by anterior pituitary deficiency.
Over secretion of one of the anterior pituitary hormones, somatotropin, results in a progressive chronic disease called acromegaly, which is characterized by enlargement of some parts of the body. Posterior-lobe deficiency results in diabetes insipidus.
Tissue
Tissue, - group of associated, similarly structured cells that perform specialized functions for the survival of the organism. Animal tissues, to which this article is limited, take their first form when the blastula cells, arising from the fertilized ovum, differentiate into three germ layers: the ectoderm, mesoderm, and endoderm. Through further cell differentiation, or histogenesis, groups of cells grow into more specialized units to form organs made up, usually, of several tissues of similarly performing cells. Animal tissues are classified into four main groups.
These tissues include the skin and the inner surfaces of the body, such as those of the lungs, stomach, intestines, and blood vessels. Because its primary function is to protect the body from injury and infection, epitheliums are made up of tightly packed cells with little intercellular substance between them.
About 12 kinds of epithelial tissue occur. One kind is stratified squamous tissue found in the skin and the linings of the esophagus and vagina. It is made up of thin layers of flat, scalelike cells that form rapidly above the blood capillaries and is pushed toward the tissue surface, where they die and are shed. Another is a simple columnar epithelium, which lines the digestive system from the stomach to the anus; Simple columnar epithelium cells stand upright and not only control the absorption of nutrients but also secrete mucus through individual goblet cells. Glands are formed by the inward growth of epithelium-for examples, the sweat glands of the skin and the gastric glands of the stomach. Outward growth results in hair, nails, and other structures.
These tissues, which support and hold parts of the body together, comprises the fibrous and elastic connective tissues, the adipose (fatty) tissues, and cartilage and bone. In contrast to an epithelium, the cells of these tissues are widely separated from one another, with a large amount of intercellular substance between them. The cells of fibrous tissue, found throughout the body, connect to one another by an irregular network of strands, forming a soft, cushiony layer that also supports blood vessels, nerves, and other organs. Adipose tissue has a similar function, except that its fibroblasts also contain store fat. Elastic tissue, found in ligaments, the trachea, and the arterial walls, stretches and contracts again with each pulse beat. In the human embryo, the fibroblast cells that originally secreted collagen for the formation of fibrous tissue later change to secrete a different form of protein called chondrion, for the formation of cartilage, some cartilage later becomes calcified by the action of osteoblast to form bones. Blood and lymph are also often considered connective tissues.
Tissues, which contract and relax, comprise the striated, smooth, and cardiac muscles. Striated muscles, also called skeletal or voluntary muscles, include those that are activated by the somatic, or voluntary, nervous system. They are joined together without cell walls and have several nuclei. The smooth, or involuntary muscles, which are activated by the autonomic nervous system, are found in the internal organs and consist of simple sheets of cells. Cardiac muscles, which have characteristics of both striated and smooth muscles, are joined together in a vast network. These highly complex groups of cells, called ganglia, transfer information from one part of the body to another. Each neuron, or nerve cell, consists of a cell body with branching dendrites and one long fiber, or axons. The dendrites connect one neuron to another; The axon transmits impulses to an organ or collects impulses from a sensory organ.
Crossing a Synapse
In the nervous system, a message-carrying impulse travels from one end of a nerve cell to the other by means of an electrical impulse. When it reaches the terminal end of a nerve cell, the impulse trigger’s tiny sacs called presynaptic vessicles to release their contents, chemical messengers called neurotransmitters. The neurotransmitters float across the synapse, or gap between adjacent nerve cells. When they reach the neighboring nerve cell, the neurotransmitters fit into specialized receptor sites much as a key fits into a lock, causing that nerve cell to fire or generate an electric message-carrying impulse. As the message continues through the nervous system, the presynaptic cell absorbs the excess neurotransmitters, and repackages them in presynaptic versicles in a process called neurotransmitter reuptake.
Reflex
Reflex, in physiology, is the involuntary response to a stimulus by the animal organism. In its simplest form, it consisted of the stimulation of an afferent nerve through a sense organ, or receptor, followed by transmission of the stimulus, usually through a nerve center, to an efferent motor nerve, resulting in action of a muscle or gland, called the effector. In most reflex action, however, the stimulus passes through one or more intermediate nerve cells, which modify and direct its action, sometimes to the extent of involving the muscular activity of the entire organism. For example, a painful stimulus applied to the hand causes a reflex withdrawal of the hand, which involves contraction of the flexor group of muscles and reflexation of the opposing extensor group; if the stimulus is strong, the coordinating nerve cells pass it to the arm muscles and also to the muscles of the trunk and legs, the result being a jump that removes not only the arm, but the entire person from the vicinity of the painful stimulus.
The system of coordinating nerve cells is such that several different kinds of stimuli may produce the same result. For example, the stimulus produced by the sight of food and that caused by the smell of food travel different afferent pathways, but both have a common final path that stimulates the salivary glands to secretion. The final common path may also be activated through associated nerve tracts by a stimulus that ordinarily is not directly connected with the response. This type of reflex was named conditioned reflex by its discoverer, the Russian physiologist Ivan Pavlov, about 1904. Pavlov found that sounding a bell every time a dog was about to be given food eventually caused a reflex flow of saliva, which later persisted even when no food was produced. Elaborations of this habituative type of reflex are regarded by some physiologists and psychologists as an important basis for many behaviors, both voluntary and involuntary.
The normal pathways of many reflexes are generally known, and the presence, absence, or exaggerations of the normal physical responses to certain stimuli are symptoms used by neurologists to determine the condition of the neural pathways involved. A familiar reflex commonly tested by physicians is the patellar reflex, in which an involuntary jerk of the knee is evoked by lightly striking the tendon of the patella, or kneecap, indicating the efficiency of certain nerve tracts in the spinal cord.
Like all other cells, neurons contain charged ions: Potassium and sodium (positively charged) and chlorine (negatively charged). Neurons differ from other cells in that they are able to produce a nerve impulse. A neuron is polarized - that is, it has an overall negative charge inside the cell membrane because of the high concentration of chlorine ions and low concentration of potassium and sodium ions. The concentration of these same ions is exactly reversed outside the cell. This charge differential represents stored electrical energy, sometimes referred to as membrane potential or resting potential. The negative charge inside the cell is maintained by two features. The first is the selective permeability of the cell membrane, which is more permeable to potassium than sodium. The second feature is sodium pumps within the cell membrane that actively pump sodium out of the cell. When depolarization occurs, this charge differential across the membrane is reversed, and a nerve impulse is produced.
Depolarization is a rapid change in the permeability of the cell membrane. When sensory input or any other kind of stimulating current is received by the neuron, the membrane permeability is changed, allowing a sudden influx of sodium ions into the cell. The high concentration of sodium, or action potential, changes the overall charges within the cell from negative to positive. The local changes in ion concentration triggers similar reactions along the membrane, propagating the nerve impulse. After a brief period called the refractory period, during which the ionic concentration returned to resting potential, the neuron can repeat this process.
Nerve impulses travel at different speeds, depending on the cellular composition of a neuron. Where speed of impulse is important, as in the nervous system, axons are insulated with a membranous substance called myelin. The insulation provided by myelin maintains the ionic charge over long distances. Nerve impulses are propagated at specific points along the myelin sheath; These points are called the nodes of Ranvier. Examples of myelinated axons are those in sensory nerve fibers and nerves connected to skeletal muscles. In non-myelinated cells, the nerve impulse is propagated more diffusely.
The nervous system has two divisions: The somatic, which allow voluntary control over skeletal muscle, and the autonomic, which is involuntary and controls cardiac and smooth muscle and glands. The autonomic nervous system has two divisions: The sympathetic and the parasympathetic. Many, but not all, of the muscles and glands that distribute nerve impulses to the larger interior organs possess a double nerve supply; in such cases the two divisions may exert opposing effects. Thus, the sympathetic system increases heartbeat, and the parasympathetic system decreases heartbeat. The two nervous systems are not always antagonistic, however. For example, both nerve supplies to the salivary glands excite the cells of secretion. Furthermore, a single division of the autonomic nervous system may both excite and inhibit a single effector, as in the sympathetic supply to the blood vessels of skeletal muscle. Finally, the sweat glands, the muscles that cause involuntary erection or bristling of the hair, the smooth muscle of the spleen, and the blood vessels of the skin and skeletal muscle are actuated only by the sympathetic division.
Voluntary movement of head, limbs, and body is caused by nerve impulses arising in the motor area of the cortex of the brain and carried by cranial nerves or by nerves that emerge from the spinal cord to connect with skeletal muscles. The reaction involves both excitation of nerve cells stimulating the muscles involved and inhibition of the cells that stimulate opposing muscles. A nerve impulse is an electrical change within a nerve cell or fiber; Measured in millivolts, it lasts a few milliseconds and can be recorded by electrodes.
The human brain has three major structural components: The large dome-shaped cerebrum, the smaller somewhat spherical cerebellum, and the brainstem. Prominent in the brainstem is the medulla oblongata (the egg-shaped enlargement at the center) and the thalamus (between the medulla and the cerebrum). The cerebrum is responsible for intelligence and reasoning. The cerebellum helps to maintain balance and posture. The medulla is involved in maintaining involuntary functions such as respiration, and the thalamus act as a relay center for electrical impulses traveling to and from the cerebral cortex. Lack of blood flow to any part of the brain results in a stroke, permanent damage that interferes with the functions of the affected part of the brain.
Movement may occur also in direct response to an outside stimulus, thus, a tap on the knee causes a jerk, and a light shone into the eye makes the pupil contract. These involuntary responses are called reflexes. Various nerve terminals called receptors constantly send impulses into the central nervous system. These are of three classes: exteroceptors, which are sensitive to pain, temperature, touch, and pressure; interoceptors, which react to changes in the internal environment; and proprioceptors, which respond to variations in movement, position, and tension. These impulses terminate in special areas of the brain, as do of those special receptors concerned with sight, hearing, smell, and taste.
Whereas most major nerves emerge from the spinal cord, the 12 pairs of cranial nerves project directly from the brain. All but 1 pair relay motor or sensory information (or both); the tenth, or vagus nerve, affects visceral functions such as heart rate, vasoconstriction, and contraction of the smooth muscle found in the walls of the trachea, stomach, and intestine.
Muscular contractions do not always cause actual movement. A small fraction of the total number of fibers in most muscles is usually contracting. This serves to maintain the posture of a limb and enables the limb to resist passive elongation or stretch. This slight continuous contraction is called muscle tone.
In 1946 Axelrod joined the laboratory of American pharmacologist Bernard Brodie at Goldwater Memorial Hospital in New York. The pair conducted research on pain-relieving drugs called analgesics. They identified a pain-relieving chemical known as acetaminophen. This drug was later developed and marketed by the drug company Johnson & Johnson under the brand-name Tylenol.
In 1949 Axelrod took a position at the National Heart Institute, a branch of the National Institutes of Health (NIH). Their Axelrod studied how the body processes certain drugs that cause behavioral changes, including amphetamines, ephedrine, and mescaline. He identified a group of enzymes that help these drugs break down in the body. These enzymes, called cytochrome-P450 monoxygenases, have been studied extensively by other scientists, particularly in cancer research.
Realizing that career advancement in the sciences requires a doctoral degree, in 1954 Axelrod took a leave of absence from his job at the National Heart Institute to attend The George Washington University. He earned his doctorate in pharmacology in 1955. That same year he was named chief of pharmacology at the National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) another branch of NIH.
At NIMH, Joseph Axelrod began research on neurotransmitters. A nerve cell releases a neurotransmitter to spur a neighboring cell into action. In the 1950s most scientists believed that a neurotransmitter became inactive once it stimulated a neighboring cell. But Axelrod’s research found that the neurotransmitter returns to the first nerve cell, in a process known as reuptake, where it is broken down by enzymes or repackaged for reuse. This research led to the creation of a number of drugs that prevent the reuptake process, enabling a neurotransmitter to remain active for a longer period of time.
Axelrod’s research revolutionized the understanding of many mental-health disorders, including depression, anxiety, and schizophrenia. Prior to his research, psychiatry focused on the relationship of life experiences to mental health problems. But Axelrod's research proved that mental-health disorders were often the result of complicated brain chemistry. His research spurred the development of new drugs that advanced the treatment of mental-health conditions. Among these are selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, including the antidepressants fluoxetine, sold under the brand name Prozac, sertraline(Zoloft) and paroxetine (Paxil).
The study of the biochemistry of memory is another exciting scientific enterprise, but one that can only be touched upon here. Scientists estimate that an adult human brain contains about 100 billion neurons. Each of these is connected to hundreds or thousands of other neurons, forming trillions of neural connections. Neurons communicate by chemical messengers called neurotransmitters. An electrical signal travels along the neuron, triggering the release of neurotransmitters at the synapse, the small gap between neurons. The neurotransmitters travel across the synapse and act on the next neuron by binding with protein molecules called receptors. Most scientists believe that memories are somehow stored among the brain's trillions of synapses, rather than in the neurons themselves.
Scientists who study the biochemistry of learning and memory often focus on the marine snail Aplysia because its simple nervous system allows them to study the effects of various stimuli on specific synapses. A change in the snail's behavior due to learning can be correlated with a change at the level of the synapse. One exciting scientific frontier is discovering the changes in neurotransmitters that occur at the level of the synapse.
Other researchers have implicated glucose, a sugar and insulin(a hormone secreted by the pancreas) as important to learning and memory. Humans and other animals given these substances show an improved capacity to learn and remember. Typically, when animals or humans ingest glucose, the pancreas responds by increasing insulin production, so it is difficult to determine which substance contributes to improved performance. Some studies in humans that have systematically varied the amount of glucose and insulin in the blood have shown that insulin may be the more important of the two substances for learning.
Scientists also have examined the influence of genes on learning and memory. In one study, scientists bred strains of mice with extra copies of a gene that helps build a protein called N-methyl-D-aspartate, or NMDA. This protein acts as a receptor for certain neurotransmitters. The genetically altered mice outperformed normal mice on a variety of tests of learning and memory. In addition, other studies have found that chemically blocking NMDA receptor impairs learning in laboratory rats. Future discoveries from genetic and biochemical studies may lead to treatments for memory deficits from Alzheimer's disease and other conditions that affect memory.
Alzheimer's Disease, progressive brain disorders that causes a gradual and irreversible decline in memory, language skills, perception of time and space, and, eventually, the ability to care for oneself. First described by German psychiatrist Alois Alzheimer in 1906, Alzheimer's disease was initially thought to be a rare condition affecting only young people, and was referred to as prehensile dementia. Today late-onset Alzheimer's disease is recognized as the most common cause of the loss of mental function in those aged 65 and over. Alzheimer's in people in their 30s, 40s, and 50s, called early-onset Alzheimer's disease, occurs less frequently, accountings for less than 10 percent of the estimated 4 million Alzheimer's cases in the United States.
Although Alzheimer's disease is not a normal part of the aging process, the risk of developing the disease increases as people grow older. About 10 percent of the United States population over the age of 65 is affected by Alzheimer's disease, and nearly 50 percent of those over age 85 may have the disease.
Alzheimer's disease takes a devastating toll, not only on the patients, but also on those who love and care for them. Some patients experience immense fear and frustration as they struggle with once commonplace tasks and slowly lose their independence. Family, friends, and especially those who provide daily care suffer immeasurable pain and stress as they witness Alzheimer's disease slowly take their loved one from them.
The onset of Alzheimer's disease is usually very gradual. In the early stages, Alzheimer's patients have relatively mild problems learning new information and remembering where they have left common objects, such as keys or a wallet. In time, they begin to have trouble recollecting recent events and finding the right words to express themselves. As the disease progresses, patients may have difficulty remembering what day or month it is, or finding their way around familiar surroundings. They may develop a tendency to wander off and then be unable to find their way back. Patients often become irritable or withdrawn as they struggle with fear and frustration when once commonplace tasks become unfamiliar and intimidating. Behavioral changes may become more pronounced as patients become paranoid or delusional and unable to engage in normal conversation.
Eventually Alzheimer's patients become completely incapacitated and unable to take care of their most basic life functions, such as eating and using the bathroom. Alzheimer's patients may live many years with the disease, usually dying from other disorders that may develop, such as pneumonia. Typically the time from initial diagnosis until death is seven to ten years, but this is quite variable and can range from three to twenty years, depending on the age of the onset, other medical conditions present, and the care patients receive.
The brains of patients with Alzheimer's have distinctive formations - abnormally shaped proteins called tangles and plaques - that are recognized as the hallmark of the disease. Not all brain regions show these characteristic formations. The areas most prominently affected are those related to memory.
Tangles are long, slender tendrils found inside nerve cells, or neurons. Scientists have learned that when a protein-called tau becomes altered, it may cause the characteristic tangles in the brain of the Alzheimer’s patient. In healthy brains provides structural support for neurons, but in Alzheimer's patients this structural support collapses.
Plaques, or clumps of fibers, form outside the neurons in the adjacent brain tissue. Scientists found that a type of protein, called amyloid precursor protein, forms toxic plaques when it is cut in two places. Researchers have isolated the enzyme beta-secretes, which is believed to make one of the cuts in the amyloid precursor protein. Researchers also identified another enzyme, called gamma secretes, that makes the second cut in the amyloid precursor protein. These two enzymes snip the amyloid precursor protein into fragments that then accumulate to form plaques that are toxic to neurons.
Scientists have found that tangles and plaques cause neurons in the brains of Alzheimer's patients to shrink and eventually die, first in the memory and language centers and finally throughout the brain. This widespread neuron degeneration leaves gaps in the brain's messaging network that may interfere with communication between cells, causing some of the symptoms of Alzheimer’s disease.
Alzheimer's patients have lower levels of neurotransmitters, chemicals that carry complex messages back and forth between the nerve cells. For instance, Alzheimer's disease seems to decrease the level of the neurotransmitter acetylcholine, which is known to influence memory. A deficiency in other neurotransmitters, including somatostatin and corticotropin-releasing factor, and, particularly in younger patients, serotonin and norepinephrine, also interferes with normal communication between brain cells.
The causes of Alzheimer's disease remain a mystery, but researchers have found that particular groups of people have risk factors that make them more likely to develop the disease than the general population. For example, people with a family history of Alzheimer's are more likely to develop Alzheimer's disease.
Some of the most promising Alzheimer's research is being conducted in the field of genetics to learn the role a family history of the disease has in its development. Scientists have learned that people who are carriers of a specific version of the apolipoprotein E gene (apoE genes), found on chromosome 19, are several times more likely to develop Alzheimer's than carriers of other versions of the apoE gene. The most common version of this gene in the general population is apoE3. Nearly half of all late-onset Alzheimer’s patients have the fewer in common apoE4 versions, however, and research has shown that this gene plays a role in Alzheimer's disease. Scientists have also found evidence that variations in one or more genes located on chromosomes 1, 10, and 14 may increase a person’s risk for Alzheimer's disease. Scientists have identified the gene variations on chromosomes 1 and 14 and learned that these genes produce mutations in proteins called presenilins. These mutated proteins apparently trigger the activity of the enzyme gamma secretase, which splices the amyloid precursor protein.
Researchers have made similar strides in the investigation of early-onset Alzheimer's disease. A series of genetic mutations in patients with early-onset Alzheimer's has been linked to the production of amyloid precursor protein, the protein in plaques that may be implicated in the destruction of neurons. One mutation is particularly interesting to geneticists because it occurs on a gene involved in the genetic disorder Down syndrome. People with Down syndrome usually develop plaques and tangles in their brains as they get older, and researchers believe that learning more about the similarities between Down syndrome and Alzheimer's may further our understanding of the genetic elements of the disease.
Some studies suggest that one or more factors other than heredity may determine whether people develop the disease. One study published in February 2001 compared residents of Ibadan, Nigeria, who eat a mostly low-fat vegetarian diet, with African Americans living in Indianapolis, Indiana, whose diet included a variety of high-fat foods. The Nigerians were less likely to develop Alzheimer’s disease compared to their U.S. counterparts. Some researchers suspect that health imposes on high blood pressure, atherosclerosis (arteries clogged by fatty deposits), high cholesterol levels, or other cardiovascular problems may play a role in the development of the disease.
Other studies have suggested that environmental agents may be a possible cause of Alzheimer's disease; for example, one study suggested that high levels of aluminum in the brain may be a risk factor. Several scientists initiated research projects to further investigate this connection, but no conclusive evidence has been found linking aluminum with Alzheimer's disease. Similarly, investigations into other potential environmental causes, such as zinc exposure, viral agents, and food-borne poisons, while initially promising, have generally turned up inconclusive results.
Some studies indicate that brain trauma can trigger a degenerative process that results in Alzheimer's disease. In one study, an analysis of the medical records scribed upon veterans of World War II (1939-1945) linked serious head injury in early adulthood with Alzheimer's disease in later life. The study also looked at other factors that could possibly influence the development of the disease among the veterans, such as the presence of the apoE gene, but no other factors were identified.
Alzheimer’s disease is only positively diagnosed by examining brain tissue under a microscope to see the hallmark plaques and tangles, and this is only possible after a patient dies. As a result, physicians rely on a series of other techniques to diagnose probable Alzheimer's disease in living patients. Diagnosis begins by ruling out other problems that cause memory loss, such as stroke, depression, alcoholism, and the use of certain prescription drugs. The patient undergoes a thorough examination, including specialized brain scans, to eliminate other disorders. The patient may be given a detailed evaluation called a neuropsychological examination, which is designed to evaluate a patient’s ability to perform specific mental tasks. This helps the physician determine whether the patient is showing the characteristic symptoms of Alzheimer's disease - progressively worsening memory problems, language difficulties, and trouble with spatial direction and time. The physician also asks about the patient's family medical history to learn about any past serious illnesses, which may give a hint about the patient's current symptoms.
Evidence shows that there is inflammation in the brains of Alzheimer's patients, which may be associated with the production of amyloid precursor protein. Studies are underway to find drugs that prevent this inflammation, to possibly slow or even halt the progress of the disease. Other promising approaches center on mechanisms that manipulate amyloid precursor protein production or accumulation. Drugs are in development that may block the activity of the enzymes that cut the amyloid precursor protein, halting amyloid production. Other studies in mice suggest those vaccinating animals with amyloid precursor protein can produce a reaction that clears amyloid precursor protein from the brain. Physicians have started vaccination studies in humans to determine if the same potentially beneficial effects can be obtained. There is still much to be learned, but as scientists better understand the genetic components of Alzheimer’s, the roles of the amyloid precursor protein and the tau protein in the disease, and the mechanisms of nerve cell degeneration, the possibility that a treatment will be developed is more likely.
The responsibility for caring for Alzheimer's patients generally falls on their spouses and children. Care givers must constantly be on guard for the possibility of Alzheimer's patients wandering away or becoming agitated or confused in a manner that jeopardizes the patient or others. Coping with a loved one's decline and inability to recognize familiar face causes enormous pain.
The increased burden faced by families is intense, and the life of the Alzheimer's care giver is often called a 36-hour day. Not surprisingly, care givers often develop health and psychological problems of their own as a result of this stress. The Alzheimer's Association, a national organization with local chapters throughout the United States, was formed in 1980 in large measure to provide support for Alzheimer's care givers. Today, national and local chapters are a valuable source for information, referral, and advice.
Not to long ago, most approaches to the philosophy of science were ‘cognitive’. This includes ‘logical positivism’, as nearly all of those who wrote about the nature of science would have been in agreement that science ought to be ‘value-free’. This had been a particular emphasis on the part of the first positivist, as it would be upon twentieth-century successors. Science, so it was said, deals with ‘facts’, and facts and values and irreducibly distinct. Facts are objective, they are what we seek in our knowledge of the world. Values are subjective: They bear the mark of human interest, they are the radically individual products of feeling and desire. Fact and value cannot, therefore, be inferred from fact, fact ought not be influenced by value. There were philosophers, notably some in the Kantian tradition, who viewed the relation of the human individual to the universalist aspiration of difference rather differently. But the legacy of three centuries of largely empiricist reflection of the ‘new’ sciences ushered in by Galilee Galileo (1564-1642), the Italian scientist whose distinction belongs to the history of physics and astronomy, rather than natural philosophy.
The philosophical importance of Galileo’s science rests largely upon the following closely related achievements: (1) His stunning successful arguments against Aristotelean science, (2) his proofs that mathematics is applicable to the real world. (3) his conceptually powerful use of experiments, both actual and employed regulatively, (4) his treatment of causality, replacing appeal to hypothesized natural ends with a quest for efficient causes, and (5) his unwavering confidence in the new style of theorizing that would come to be known as mechanical explanation.
A century later, the maxim that scientific knowledge is ‘value-laded’ seems almost as entrenched as its opposite was earlier. It is supposed that between fact and value has been breached, and philosophers of science seem quite at home with the thought that science and value may be closely intertwined after all. What has happened to bring about such an apparently radial change? What are its implications for the objectivity of science, the prized characteristic that, from Plato’s time onwards, has been assumed to set off real knowledge (epistēmē) from mere opinion (doxa)? To answer these questions adequately, one would first have to know something of the reasons behind the decline of logical positivism, as, well as of the diversity of the philosophies of science that have succeeded it.
More general, the interdisciplinary field of cognitive science is burgeoning on several fronts. Contemporary philosophical reelection about the mind - which has been quite intensive - has been influenced by this empirical inquiry, to the extent that the boundary lines between them are blurred in places.
Nonetheless, the philosophy of mind at its core remains a branch of metaphysics, traditionally conceived. Philosophers continue to debate foundational issues in terms not radically different from those in vogue in previous eras. Many issues in the metaphysics of science hinge on the notion of ‘causation’. This notion is as important in science as it is in everyday thinking, and much scientific theorizing is concerned specifically to identify the ‘causes’ of various phenomena. However, there is little philosophical agreement on what it is to say that one event is the cause of some other.
Modern discussion of causation starts with the Scottish philosopher, historian, and essayist David Hume (1711-76),who argued that causation is simply a matter for which he denies that we have innate ideas, that the causal relation is observably anything other than ‘constant conjunction’ wherefore, that there are observable necessary connections anywhere, and that there is either an empirical or demonstrative proof for the assumptions that the future will resemble the past, and that every event has a cause. That is to say, that there is an irresolvable dispute between advocates of free-will and determinism, that extreme scepticism is coherent and that we can find the experiential source of our ideas of self-substance or God.
According to Hume (1978), on event causes another if only if events of the type to which the first event belongs regularly occur in conjunctive events of the type to which the second event belongs. The formulation, however, leaves a number of questions open. Firstly, there is a problem of distinguishing genuine ‘causal law’ from ‘accidental regularities’. Not all regularities are sufficient lawlike to underpin causal relationships. Being a screw in my desk could well be constantly conjoined with being made of copper, without its being true that these screws are made of copper because they are in my desk. Secondly, the idea of constant conjunction does not give a ‘direction’ to causation. Causes need to be distinguished from effects. But knowing that A-type events are constantly conjoined with B-type events does not tell us which of ‘A’ and ‘B’ is the cause and which the effect, since constant conjunction is itself a symmetric relation. Thirdly, there is a problem about ‘probabilistic causation’. When we say that causes and effects are constantly conjoined, do we mean that the effects are always found with the causes, or is it enough that the causes make the effect probable?
Many philosophers of science during the past century have preferred to talk about ‘explanation’ than causation. According to the covering-law model of explanation, something is explained if it can be deduced from premises which include one or more laws. As applied to the explanation of particular events this implies that one particular event can be explained it if is linked by a law to some other particular event. However, while they are often treated as separate theories, the covering-law account of explanation is at bottom little more than a variant of Hume’s constant conjunction account of causation. This affinity shows up in the fact at the covering-law account faces essentially the same difficulties as Hume: (1) In appealing to deduction from ‘laws’, it needs to explain the difference between genuine laws and accidentally true regularities: (2) It omits by effects, as swell as effects by causes, after all, it is as easy to deduce the height of flag-pole from the length of its shadow and the law of optics: (3) Are the laws invoked in explanation required to be exceptionalness and deterministic, or is it acceptable, say, to appeal to the merely probabilistic fact that smoking makes cancer more likely, in explaining why some particular person develops cancer?
Nevertheless, one of the centrally obtainable achievements for which the philosophy of science is to provide explicit and systematic accounts of the theories and explanatory strategies exploited in the science. Another common goal is to construct philosophically illuminating analyses or explanations of central theoretical concepts invoked in one or another science. In the philosophy of biology, for example, there is a rich literature aimed at understanding teleological explanations, and there has been a great deal of work on the structure of evolutionary theory and on such crucial concepts as fitness and biological function. By introducing ‘teleological considerations’, this account views beliefs as states with biological purpose and analyses their truth conditions specifically as those conditions that they are biologically supposed to covary with.
A teleological theory of representation needs to be supplemental with a philosophical account of biological representation generally a selectionism account of biological purpose, according to which item ‘F’ has purpose ‘G’ if and only if it is now present as a result of past selection by some process which favoured item with ‘G’. So, a given belief type will have the purpose of covarying with ‘P’, say. If and only if some mechanism has selected it because it has covaried with ‘P’ the past.
Along the same lines, teleological theory holds that ‘r’ represents ‘x’ if it is r’s function to indicate (i.e., covary with) ‘x’, teleological theories differ depending on the theory of functions they import. Perhaps the most important distinction is that between historical theories of functions and a-historical theories. Historical theories individuate functional states (hence, contents) in a way that is sensitive to the historical development of the state, i.e., to factors such as the way the state was ‘learned’, or the way it evolved. An historical theory might hold that the function of ‘r’ is to indicate ‘x’ only if the capacity to token ‘r’ was developed (selected, learned) because it indicates ‘x’. thus, a state physically indistinguishable from ‘r’ (physical states being a-historical) but lacking r’s historical origins would not represent ‘x’ according to historical theories.
The American philosopher of mind (1935-) Fodor, is known for a resolute ‘realism’ about the nature of mental functioning, taking the analogy between thought and computation seriously. Fodor believes that mental representations should be conceived as individual states with their own identities and structures, like formulae transformed by processes of computation or thought. His views are frequently contrasted with those of ‘holist s’ such as the American philosopher Herbert Donald Davidson (1917-2003), or ‘instrumentalists about mental ascription, such as the British philosopher of logic and language, Eardley Anthony Michael Dummett (1925-). In recent years he has become a vocal critic of some of the aspirations of cognitive science.
Nonetheless, a suggestion extrapolating the solution of teleology is continually queried by points as owing to ‘causation’ and ‘content’, and ultimately a fundamental appreciation is to be considered, is that: We suppose that there’s a causal path from A’s to ‘A’s’ and a causal path from B’s to ‘A’s’, and our problem is to find some difference between B-caused ‘A’s’ and A-caused ‘A’s’ in virtue of which the former but not the latter misrepresented. Perhaps, the two paths differ in their counter-factual properties. In particular, though A’s and B’s both cause ‘A’s’ as a matter of fact, perhaps can assume that only A’s would cause ‘A’s’ in - as one can say - ,‘optimal circumstances’. We could then hold that a symbol expresses its ‘optimal property’, viz., the property that would causally control its tokening in optimal circumstances. Correspondingly, when the tokening of a symbol is causally controlled by properties other than its optimal property, the tokens that eventuate are ipso facto wild.
Suppose at the present time, that this story about ‘optimal circumstances’ is proposed as part of a naturalized semantics for mental representations. In which case it is, of course, essential that it be possible to say that the optimal circumstances for tokening a mental representation are in terms that are not themselves either semantical nor intentional. (It would not do, for example, to identify the optimal circumstances for tokening a symbol as those in which the tokens are true, that would be to assume precisely the sort of semantical notions that the theory is supposed to naturalize.) Befittingly, the suggestion - to put it in a nutshell - is that appeals to ‘optimality’ should be buttressed by appeals to ‘teleology’: Optimal circumstances are the ones in which the mechanisms that mediate symbol tokening are functioning ‘as they are supposed to’. In the case of mental representations, these would be paradigmatically circumstances where the mechanisms of belief fixation are functioning as they are supposed to.
So, then: The teleology o the cognitive mechanisms determines the optimal condition for belief fixation, and the optimal condition for belief fixation determines the content of beliefs. So the story goes.
To put this objection in slightly other words: The teleology story perhaps strikes one as plausible in that it understands one normative notion - truth - in terms of another normative notion - optimality. But this appearance e of fit is spurious there is no guarantee that the kind of optimality that teleology reconstructs has much to do with the kind of optimality that the explication of ‘truth’ requires. When mechanisms of repression are working ‘optimally’ - when they’re working ‘as they’re supposed to’ - what they deliver are likely to be ‘falsehoods’.
Or again: There’s no obvious reason why coitions that are optimal for the tokening of one sort of mental symbol need be optimal for the tokening of other sorts. Perhaps the optimal conditions for fixing beliefs about very large objects, are different from the optimal conditions for fixing beliefs about very small ones, are different from the optimal conditions for fixing beliefs sights. But this raises the possibility that if we’re to say which conditions are optimal for the fixation of a belief, we’ll have to know what the content of the belief is - what it’s a belief about. Our explication of content would then require a notion of optimality, whose explication in turn requires a notion of content, and the resulting pile would clearly be unstable.
Teleological theories hold that ‘r’ represents ‘x’ if it is r’s function to indicate (i.e., covary with) ‘x’. Teleological theories differ, depending on the theory of functions they import. Perhaps the most important distinction is that between historical theories of functions: Historically, theories individuate functional states (hence, contents) in a way that is sensitive to the historical development of the state, i.e., to factors such as the way the state was ‘learned’, or the way it evolved. An historical theory might hold that the function of ‘r’ is to indicates ’x’ only if the capacity to token ‘r’ was developed (selected, learned) because it indicates ‘x’. Thus, a state physically indistinguishable from ‘r’ (physical states being a-historical), but lacking r’s historical origins would not represent ‘x’ according to historical theories.
Just as functional role theories hold that r’s representing ‘x’ is grounded in the functional role ‘r’ has in the representing system, i.e., on the relations imposed by specified cognitive processes between ‘r’ and other representations in the system’s repertoire. Functional role theories take their cue from such common-sense ideas as that people cannot believe that cats are furry if they do not know that cats are animals or that fur is like hair.
That being said, that nowhere is the new period of collaboration between philosophy and other disciplines more evident than in the new subject of cognitive science. Cognitive science from its very beginning has been ‘interdisciplinary’ in character, and is in effect the joint property of psychology, linguistics, philosophy, computer science and anthropology. There is, therefore, a great variety of different research projects within cognitive science, but the central area of cognitive science, its hard-coded ideology rests on the assumption that the mind is best viewed as analogous to a digital computer. The basic idea behind cognitive science is that recent developments in computer science and artificial intelligence have enormous importance for our conception of human beings. The basic inspiration for cognitive science went something like this: Human beings do information processing. Computers are designed precisely do information processing. Therefore, one way to study human cognition - perhaps the best way to study it - is to study. It as a matter of computational information processing. Some cognitive scientists think that the computer is just a metaphor for the human mind: Others think that the mind is literally a computer program. But it is fair to say, that without the computational model there would not have been a cognitive science as we now understand it.
In, Essay Concerning Human Understanding is the first modern systematic presentation of an empiricist epistemology, and as such had important implications for the natural sciences and for philosophy of science generally. Like his predecessor, Descartes, the English philosopher (1632-104) John Locke began his account of knowledge from the conscious mind aware of ideas. Unlike Descartes, however, he was concerned not to build a system based on certainty, but to identify the mind’s scope and limits. The premise upon which Locke built his account, including his account of the natural sciences, is that the ideas which furnish the mind are all derived from experience. He thus, totally rejected any kind of innate knowledge. In this he consciously opposing Descartes, who had argued that it is possible to come to knowledge of fundamental truths about the natural world through reason alone. Descartes (1596-1650) had argued, that we can come to know the essential nature of both ‘mind’ and ‘matter’ by pure reason. John Locke accepted Descartes’s criterion of clear and distinct ideas as the basis for knowledge, but denied any source for them other than experience. It was information that came in via the five senses (ideas of sensation) and ideas engendered from pure inner experiences (ideas of reflection) came the building blocks of the understanding.
Locke combined his commitment to ‘the new way of ideas’ with a te native espousal of the ‘corpuscular philosophy’ of the Irish scientist (1627-92) Robert Boyle. This, in essence, was an acceptance of a revised, more sophisticated account of matter and its properties that had been advocated by the ancient atomists and recently supported by Galileo (1564-1642) and Pierre Gassendi (1592-1655). Boyle argued from theory and experiment that there were powerful reasons to justify some kind of corpuscular account of matter and its properties. He called the latter qualities, which he distinguished as primary and secondary - the distinction between primary and secondary qualities may be reached by two rather different routes: Either from the nature or essence of matter or from the nature and essence of experience, though practising these have tended to run together. The former considerations make the distinction seem like an a priori, or necessary, truth about the nature of matter, while the latter make it appears to be an empirical hypothesis -. Locke, too, accepted this account, arguing that the ideas we have of the primary qualities of bodies resemble those qualities as they are in the subject, whereas the ideas of the secondary qualities, such as colour, taste, and smell, do not resemble their causes in the object.
There is no strong connection between acceptance of the primary-secondary quality distinction and Locke’s empiricism and Descartes had also argued strongly for universal acceptance by natural philosophers, and Locke embraced it within his more comprehensive empirical philosophy. But Locke’ empiricism did have major implications for the natural sciences, as he well realized. His account begins with an analysis of experience. all ideas, he argues, are either simple or complex. Simple ideas are those like the red of a particular rose or the roundness of a snowball. Complex ideas, our ideas of the rose or the snowball, are combinations of simple ideas. We may create new complex ideas in our imagination - a dragon, for example. But simple ideas can never be created by us: We just have them or not, and characteristically they are caused, for example, the impact on our senses of rays of light or vibrations of sound in the air coming from a particular physical object. Since we cannot create simple ideas, and they are determined by our experience. Our knowledge is in a very strict uncompromising way limited. Besides, our experiences are always of the particular, never of the general. It is this particular simple idea or that particular complex idea that we apprehend. We never in that sense apprehend a universal truth about the natural world, but only particular instances. It follows from this that all claims to generality about that world - for example, all claims to identity what were then beginning to be called the laws of nature - must to that extent go beyond our experience and thus be less than certain.
The Scottish philosopher, historian, and essayist, (1711-76) David Hume, whose famous discussion appears in both his major philosophical works, the ‘Treatise’ (1739) and the ‘Enquiry’(1777). The distinction is couched in terms of the concept of causality, so that where we are accustomed to talk of laws, Hume contends, involves three ideas:
1. That there should be a regular concomitance between events of the type of the cause and those of the type of the effect.
2. That the cause event should be contiguous with the effect event.
3. That the cause event should necessitate the effect event.
The tenets (1) and (2) occasion no differently for Hume, since he believes that there are patterns of sensory impressions un-problematically related to the idea of regularity concomitance and of contiguity. But the third requirement is deeply problematic, in that the idea of necessarily that figures in it seems to have no sensory impression correlated with it. However, carefully and attentively we scrutinize a causal process, we do not seem to observe anything that might be the observed correlates of the idea of necessity. We do not observe any kind of activity, power, or necessitation. All we ever observe is one event following another, which is logically independent of it. Nor is this necessity logical, since, as, Hume observes, one can jointly assert the existence of the cause and a denial of the existence of the effect, as specified in the causal statement or the law of nature, without contradiction. What, then, are we to make of the seemingly central notion of necessity that is deeply embedded in the very idea of causation, or lawfulness? To this query, Hume gives an ingenious and telling story. There is an impression corresponding to the idea of causal necessity, but it is a psychological phenomenon: Our exception that an even similar to those we have already observed to be correlated with the cause-type of events will come to be in this cas e too. Where does that impression come from? It is created as a kind of mental habit by the repeated experience of regular concomitance between events of the type of the effect and the occurring of event s of the type of the cause. And then, the impression that corresponds to the idea of regular concomitance - the law of nature then asserts nothing but the existence of the regular concomitance.
At this point in our narrative, the question at once arises as to whether this factor of life in nature, thus interpreted, corresponds to anything that we observe in nature. All philosophy is an endeavour to obtain a self-consistent understanding of things observed. Thus, its development is guided in two ways, one is demand for coherent self-consistency, and the other is the elucidation of things observed. With our direct observations how are we to conduct such comparison? Should we turn to science? No. There is no way in which the scientific endeavour can detect the aliveness of things: Its methodology rules out the possibility of such a finding. On this point, the English mathematician and philosopher (1861-1947) Alfred Whitehead, comments: That science can find no individual enjoyment in nature, as science can find no creativity in nature, it finds mere rules of succession. These negations are true of natural science. They are inherent in its methodology. The reason for this blindness of physical science lies in the fact that such science only deals with half the evidence provided by human experience. It divides the seamless coat - or, to change the metaphor into a happier form, it examines the coat, which is superficial, and neglects the body which is fundamental.
Whitehead claims that the methodology of science makes it blind to a fundamental aspect of reality, namely, the primacy of experience, it neglected half of the evidence. Working within Descartes’ dualistic framework of matter and mind as separate and incommensurate, science limits itself to the study of objectivised phenomena, neglecting the subject and the mental events that are his or her experience.
Both the adoption of the Cartesian paradigm and the neglect of mental events are reason enough to suspect ‘blindness’, but there is no need to rely on suspicions. This blindness is clearly evident. Scientific discoveries, impressive as they are, are fundamentally superficial. Science can express regularities observed in nature, but it cannot explain the reasons for their occurrence. Consider, for example, Newton’s law of gravity. It shows that such apparently disparate phenomena as the falling of an apple and the revolution of the earth around the sun are aspects of the same regularity - gravity. According to this law the gravitational attraction between two objects deceases in proportion to the square of the distance between them. Why is that so? Newton could not provide an answer. Simpler still, why does space have three dimensions? Why is time one-dimensional? Whitehead notes, ‘None of these laws of nature gives the slightest evidence of necessity. They are [merely] the modes of procedure which within the scale of observation do in fact prevail’.
This analysis reveals that the capacity of science to fathom the depths of reality is limited. For example, if reality is, in fact, made up of discrete units, and these units have the fundamental character in being ’throbs of experience’, then science may be in a position to discover the discreteness: But it has no access to the subjective side of nature, since, as the Austrian physicist(1887-1961) Erin Schrödinger points out, we ‘exclude the subject of cognizance from the domain of nature that we endeavour to understand’. It follows that in order to find ‘the elucidation of things observed’ in relation to the experiential or aliveness aspect, we cannot rely on science, we need to look elsewhere.
If, instead of relying on science, we rely on our immediate observation of nature and of ourselves, we find, first, that this [i.e., Descartes’] stark division between mentality and nature has no ground in our fundamental observation. We find ourselves living within nature. Secondly, in that we should conceive mental operations as among the factors which make up the constitution of nature, and thirdly, that we should reject the notion of idle wheels in the process of nature. Every factor which makes a difference, and that difference can only be expressed in terms of the individual character of that factor.
Whitehead proceeds to analyse our experiences in general, and our observations of nature in particular, and ends up with ‘mutual immanence’ as a central theme. This mutual immanence is obvious in the case of an experience, that, I am a part of the universe, and, since I experience the universe, the experienced universe is part of me. Whitehead gives an example’ ‘I am in the room, and the room is an item in my present experience. But my present experience is what I am now’. A generalization of this relationship to the case of any actual occasions yields the conclusion that ‘the world is included within the occasion in one sense, and the occasion is included in the world in another sense’. The idea that each actual occasion appropriates its universe follows naturally from such considerations.
The description of an actual entity as being a distinct unit is, therefore, only one part of the story. The other, complementary part is this: The very nature of each and every actual entity is one of interdependence with all the other actual entities in the universe. Each and every actual entity is a process of prehending or appropriating all the other actual entities and creating one new entity out of them all, namely, itself.
There are two general strategies for distinguishing laws from accidentally true generalizations. The first stands by Hume’s idea that causal connections are mere constant conjunctions, and then seeks to explain why some constant conjunctions are better than others. That is, this first strategy accepts the principle that causation involves nothing more than certain events always happening together with certain others, and then seeks to explain why some such patterns - the ‘laws’ - matter more than others - the ‘accidents’ -. The second strategy, by contrast, rejects the Humean presupposition that causation involves nothing more than happen-stantial co-occurrence, and instead postulates a relationship ‘necessitation’, a kind of ‘cement, which links events that are connected by law, but not those events (like being a screw in my desk ad being made of copper) that are only accidentally conjoined.
There are a number of versions of the first Human strategy. The most successful, originally proposed by the Cambridge mathematician and philosopher F.P. Ramsey (1903-30), and later revived by the American philosopher David Lewis (1941-2002), who holds that laws are those true generalizations that can be fitted into an ideal system of knowledge. The thought is, that, the laws are those patterns that are somewhat explicated in terms of basic science, either as fundamental principles themselves, or as consequences of those principles, while accidents, although true, have no such explanation. Thus, ‘All water at standard pressure boils at 1000 C’ is a consequence of the laws governing molecular bonding: But the fact that ‘All the screws in my desk are copper’ is not part of the deductive structure of any satisfactory science. Ramsey neatly encapsulated this idea by saying that laws are ‘consequences of those proposition which we should take as axioms if we knew everything and organized it as simply as possible in a deductive system’.
Advocates of the alternative non-Humean strategy object that the difference between laws and accidents is not a ‘linguistic’ matter of deductive systematization, but rather a ‘metaphysical’ contrast between the kind of links they report. They argue that there is a link in nature between being at 1000 C and boiling, but not between being ‘in my desk’ and being ‘made of copper’, and that this is nothing to do with how the description of this link may fit into theories. According to D.M. Armstrong (1983), the most prominent defender of this view, the real difference between laws and accidentals, is simply that laws report relationships of natural ‘necessitation’, while accidents only report that two types of events happen to occur together.
Armstrong’s view may seem intuitively plausible, but it is arguable that the notion of necessitation simply restates the problem, than solving it. Armstrong says that necessitation involves something more than constant conjunction: If two events e related by necessitation, then it follows that they are constantly conjoined, but two events can be constantly conjoined without being related by necessitation, as when the constant conjunction is just a matter of accident. So necessitation is a stronger relationships than constant conjunction. However, Armstrong and other defenders of this view say ver y little about what this extra strength amounts to, except that it distinguishes laws from accidents. Armstrong’s critics argue that a satisfactory account of laws ought to cast more light than this on the nature of laws.
Hume said that the earlier of two causally related events is always the cause, and the later effect. However, there are a number of objections to using the earlier-later ‘arow of time’ to analyse the directional ‘arrow of causation’. For a start, it seems in principle, possible that some causes and effects could be simultaneous. That more, in the idea that time is directed from ‘earlier’ to ‘later’ itself stands in need of philosophical explanation - and one of the most popular explanations is that the idea of ‘movement’ from earlier to later depends on the fact that cause-effect pairs always have a time, and explain ‘earlier’ as the direction in which causes lie, and ‘later’ as the direction of effects, that we will clearly need to find some account of the direction of causation which does not itself assume the direction of time.
A number of such accounts have been proposed. David Lewis (1979) has argued that the asymmetry of causation derives from an ‘asymmetry of over-determination’. The over-determination of present events by past events - consider a person who dies after simultaneously being shot and struck by lightning - is a very rare occurrence, by contrast, the multiple ‘over-determination’ of present events by future events is absolutely normal. This is because the future, unlike the past, will always contain multiple traces of any present event. To use Lewis’s example, when the president presses the red button in the White House, the future effects do not only include the dispatch of nuclear missiles, but also the fingerprint on the button, his trembling, the further depletion of his gin bottle, the recording of the button’s click on tape, he emission of light waves bearing the image of his action through the window, the warnings of the wave from the passage often signal current, and so on, and so on, and on.
Lewis relates this asymmetry of over-determination to the asymmetry of causation as follows. If we suppose the cause of a given effect to have been absent, then this implies the effect would have been absent too, since (apart from freaks like the lightning-shooting case) there will not be any other causes left to ‘fix’ the effect. By contrast, if we suppose a given effect of some cause to have been absent, this does not imply the cause would have been absent, for there are still all the other traces left to ’fix’ the causes. Lewis argues that these counterfactual considerations suffice to show why causes are different from effects.
Other philosophers appeal to a probabilistic variant of Lewis’s asymmetry. Following, the philosopher of science and probability theorists, Hans Reichenbach (1891-1953), they note that the different causes of any given type of effect are normally probabilistically independent of each other, by contrast, the different effects of any given type of cause are normally probabilistically correlated. For example, both obesity and high excitement can cause heart attacks, but this does not imply that fat people are more likely to get excited than thin ones: Its facts, that both lung cancer and nicotine-stained fingers can result from smoking does imply that lung cancer is more likely among people with nicotine-stained fingers. So this account distinguishes effects from causes by the fact that the former, but not the latter are probabilistically dependent on each other.
However, there is another course of thought in philosophy of science, the tradition of negative or eliminative induction. From the English statesman and philosopher Francis Bacon (1561-1626) and in modern time the philosopher of science Karl Raimund Popper (1902-1994), we have the idea of using logic to bring falsifying evidence to bear on hypotheses about what must universally be the case that many thinkers accept in essence his solution to the problem of demarcating proper science from its imitators, namely that the former results in genuinely falsifiable theories whereas the latter do not. Although falsely allowed many people’s objections to such ideologies as psychoanalysis and Marxism.
Hume was interested in the processes by which we acquire knowledge: The processes of perceiving and thinking, of feeling and reasoning. He recognized that much of what we claim to know derives from other people secondhand, thirdhand or worse: Moreover, our perceptions and judgements can be distorted by many factors - by w hat we are studying, as well as by the very act of study itself., the main reason, however, behind his emphasis on ‘probabilities and those other measures of evidence on which life and action entirely depend’ is this:
It is evident that all reasoning concerning ‘matter of fact’ are founded on the relation of cause and effect, and that we can never infer the existence of one object from another unless the are connected together, either mediately or immediately.
When we apparently observe a whole sequence, say of one ball hitting another, what exactly do we observe? And in the much commoner cases, when we wonder about the unobserved causes or effects of the events we observe, what precisely are we doing?
Hume recognized that a notion of ‘must’ or necessity is a peculiar feature of causal relation, inference and principles, and challenges us to explain and justify the notion. He argued that there is no observable feature of events, nothing like a physical bond, which can be properly labelled the ‘necessary connection’ between a given cause and its effect: Events simply are, they merely occur, and there is in ‘must’ or ‘ought’ about therm. However, repeated experience of pairs of events sets up the habit of expectation in us, such that when one of the pair occurs we inescapably expect the other. This expectation makes us infer the unobserved cause or unobserved effect of the observed event, and we mistakenly project this mental inference on to the events themselves. There is no necessity observable in causal relations; all that can be observed is regular sequence, here is necessity in causal inferences, but only in the mind. Once we realize that causation is a relation between pairs of events. We also realize that often we are not present for the whole sequence e which we want to divide into ‘cause’ and ‘effect’. Our understanding of the casual relation is thus intimately linked with the role of the causal inference cause only causal inferences entitle us to ‘go beyond what is immediately present to the senses’. But now two very important assumptions emerge behind the causal inference: The assumptions that ‘like causes, in like circumstances, will always produce like effects’, and the assumption that ‘the course of nature will continue uniformly the same’ - or, briefly that the future will resemble the past. Unfortunately, this last assumption lacks either empirical or a priori proof, that is, it can be conclusively established neither by experience nor by thought alone.
Hume frequently endorsed a standard seventeenth-century view that all our ideas are ultimately traceable, by analysis, to sensory impressions of an internal or external kind. Accordingly, he claimed that all his theses are based on ‘experience’, understood as sensory awareness together with memory, since only experience establishes matters of fact. But is our belief that the future will resemble the past properly construed as a belief concerning only a mater of fact? As the English philosopher Bertrand Russell (1872-1970) remarked, earlier this century, the real problem that Hume raises is whether future futures will resemble future pasts, in the way that past futures really did resemble past pasts. Hume declares that ‘if . . . the past may be no rule for the future, all experience become useless and can give rise to inference or conclusion. And yet, he held, the supposition cannot stem from innate ideas, since there are no innate ideas in his view nor can it stem from any abstract formal reasoning. For one thing, the future can surprise us, and no formal reasoning seems able to embrace such contingencies: For another, even animals and unthinkable people conduct their lives as if they assume the future resembles the past: Dogs return for buried bones, children avoid a painful fire, and so forth. Hume is not deploring the fact that we have to conduct our lives on the basis of probabilities, and he is not saying that inductive reasoning could or should be avoided or rejected. Rather, he accepted inductive reasoning but tried to show that whereas formal reasoning of the kind associated with mathematics cannot establish or prove matters of fact, factual or inductive reasoning lacks the ‘necessity’ and ‘certainty’ associated with mathematics. His position, therefore clear; because ‘every effect is a distinct event from its cause’, only investigation can settle whether any two particular events are causally related: Causal inferences cannot be drawn with the force of logical necessity familiar to us from a priori reasoning, but, although they lack such force, they should not be discarded. In the context of causation, inductive inferences are inescapable and invaluable. What, then, makes ‘past experience’ the standard of our future judgement? The answer is ‘custom’, it is a brute psychological fact, without which even animal life of a simple kind would be more or less impossible. ‘We are determined by custom to suppose the future conformable to the past’ (Hume, 1978), nevertheless, whenever we need to calculate likely events we must supplement and correct such custom by self-conscious reasoning.
Nonetheless, the problem that the causal theory of reference will fail once it is recognized that all representations must occur under some aspect or that the extentionality of causal relations is inadequate to capture the aspectual character of reference. The only kind of causation that could be adequate to the task of reference is intentional causal or mental causation, but the causal theory of reference cannot concede that ultimately reference is achieved by some met device, since the whole approach behind the causal theory was to try to eliminate the traditional mentalism of theories of reference and meaning in favour of objective causal relations in the world, though it is at present by far the most influential theory of reference, will prove to be a failure for these reasons.
If mental states are identical with physical states, presumably the relevant physical states are various sorts of neural states. Our concepts of mental states such as thinking, sensing, and feeling are of course, different from our concepts of neural states, of whatever sort. But that is no problem for the identity theory. As J.J.C. Smart (1962), who first argue for the identity theory, emphasized, the requisite identities do not depend on understanding concepts of mental states or the meanings of mental terms. For ‘a’ to be the identical with ‘b’, ‘a’, and ‘b’ must have exactly the same properties, but the terms ‘a’ and ‘b’ need not mean the same. Its principal means by measure can be accorded within the indiscernibility of identicals, in that, if ‘A’ is identical with ‘B’, then every property that ‘A’ has ’B’, and vice versa. This is, sometimes known as Leibniz’ s Law.
But a problem does seem to arise about the properties of mental states. Suppose pain is identical with a certain firing of c-fibres. Although a particular pain is the very same as a neural-firing, we identify that state in two different ways: As a pain and as neural-firing. that the state will therefore have certain properties in virtue of which wee identify it as pain and others in virtue of which we identify it as an excitability of neural firings. The properties in virtue of which we identify it as a pain will be mental properties, whereas those in virtue of which ewe identify it as neural excitability firing, will be physical properties. This has seemed to many to lead to a kind of dualism at the level of the properties of mental states, even if we reject dualism of substances and take people simply to be physical organisms, those organisms still have both mental and physical states. Similarly, even if we identify those mental states with certain physical states, those states will, nonetheless have both mental and physical properties. So disallowing dualism with respect to substances and their states simply es to its reappearance at the level of the properties of those states.
There are two broad categories of mental property. Mental states such as thoughts and desires, often called ‘propositional altitudes’, have ‘content’ that can be de scribed by ‘that’ clauses. For example, one can have a thought, or desire, that it will rain. These states are said to have intentional properties, or ‘intentionality sensations’, such as pains and sense impressions, lack intentional content, and have instead qualitative properties of various sorts.
The problem about mental properties is widely thought to be most pressing for sensations, since the painful qualities of pains and the red quality of visual sensations seem to be irretrievably non-physical. And if mental states do actually have non-physical properties, the identity of mental states generate to physical states as they would not sustain a thoroughgoing mind-body materialism.
The Cartesian doctrine that the mental is in some way non-physical is so pervasive that even advocates of the identity theory sometimes accepted it, for the ideas that the mental is non-physical underlies, for example, the insistence by some identity theorists that mental properties are really neural as between being mental or physical. To be neural is in this way, a property would have to be neutral as to whether its mental at all. Only if one thought that being meant being non-physical would one hold that defending materialism required showing the ostensible mental properties are neutral as regards whether or not they’re mental.
But holding that mental properties are non-physical has a cost that is usually not noticed. A phenomenon is mental only if it has some distinctively mental property. So, strictly speaking, a materialist who claims that mental properties are non-physical phenomena exist. This is the ‘Eliminative-Materialist position advanced by the American philosopher and critic Richard Rorty (1979).
According to Rorty (1931-) ‘mental’ and ‘physical’ are incompatible terms. Nothing can be both mental and physical, so mental states cannot be identical with bodily states. Rorty traces this incompatibly to our views about incorrigibility: ‘Mental’ and ‘physical’ are incorrigible reports of one’s own mental states, but not reports of physical occurrences, but he also argues that we can imagine a people who describe themselves and each other using terms just like our mental vocabulary, except that those people do not take the reports made with that vocabulary to be incorrigible. Since Rorty takes a state to be a mental state only if one’s reports about it are taken to be incorrigible, his imaginary people do not ascribe mental states to themselves or each other. Nonetheless, the only difference between their language and ours is that we take as incorrigible certain reports which they do not. So their language as no less descriptive or explanatory power than ours. Rorty concludes that our mental vocabulary is idle, and that there are no distinctively mental phenomena.
This argument hinges on building incorrigibly into the meaning of the term ‘mental’. If we do not, the way is open to interpret Rorty’s imaginary people as simply having a different theory of mind from ours, on which reports of one’s own mental stares are not incorrigible. Their reports would this be about mental states, as construed by their theory. Rorty’s thought experiment would then provide to conclude not that our terminology is idle, but only that this alternative theory of mental phenomena is correct. His thought experiment would thus sustain the non-eliminativist view that mental states are bodily states. Whether Rorty’s argument supports his eliminativist conclusion or the standard identity theory, therefore, depends solely on whether or not one holds that the mental is in some way non-physical.
Paul M. Churchlands (1981) advances a different argument for eliminative materialism. According to Churchlands, the common-sense concepts of mental states contained in our present folk psychology are, from a scientific point of view, radically defective. But we can expect that eventually a more sophisticated theoretical account will relace those folk-psychological concepts, showing that mental phenomena, as described by current folk psychology, do not exist. Since, that account would be integrated into the rest of science, we would have a thoroughgoing materialist treatment of all phenomena, unlike Rorty’s, does not rely of assuming that the mental is non-physical.
But even if current folk psychology is mistaken, that does not show that mental phenomena does not exist, but only that they are of the way folk psychology described them as being. We could conclude they do not exist only if the folk-psychological claims that turn out to be mistaken actually define what it is for a phenomena to be mental. Otherwise, the new theory would be about mental phenomena, and would help show that they’re identical with physical phenomena. Churchlands argument, like Rorty’s, depends on a special way of defining the mental, which we need not adopt, its likely that any argument for Eliminative materialism will require some such definition, without which the argument would instead support the identity theory.
Despite initial appearances, the distinctive properties of sensations are neutral as between being mental or physical, in that borrowed from the English philosopher and classicist Gilbert Ryle (1900-76), they are topic neutral: My having a sensation of red consists in my being in a state that is similar, in respect that we need not specify, even so, to something that occurs in me when I am in the presence of certain stimuli. Because the respect of similarity is not specified, the property is neither distinctively mental nor distinctively physical. But everything is similar to everything else in some respect or other. So leaving the respect of similarity unspecified makes this account too weak to capture the distinguishing properties of sensation.
A more sophisticated reply to the difficultly about mental properties is due independently to forthright Australian David Malet Armstrong (1926-) and American philosopher David Lewis (1941-2002), who argued that for a state to be a particular sort of intentional state or sensation is for that state to bear characteristic causal relations to other particular occurrences. The properties in virtue of which e identify states as thoughts or sensations will still be neural as between being mental or physical, since anything can bear a causal relation to anything else. But causal connections have a better chance than similarity in some unspecified respect to capturing the distinguishing properties of sensations and thought.
This casual theory is appealing, but is misguided to attempt to construe the distinctive properties of mental states as being neutral as between being mental; or physical. To be neutral as regards being mental or physical is to be neither distinctively mental nor distinctively physical. But since thoughts and sensations are distinctively mental states, for a state to be a thought or a sensation is perforce for it to have some characteristically mental property. We inevitably lose the distinctively mental if we construe these properties as being neither mental nor physical.
Not only is the topic-neutral construal misguided: The problem it was designed to solve is equally so, only to say, that problem stemmed from the idea that mental must have some non-physical aspects. If not at the level of people or their mental states, then at the level of the distinctively mental properties of those states. However, it should ne mentioned, that properties can be more complicated, for example, in the sentence, ‘John is married to Mary’, we are attributing to John the property of being married, and unlike the property of John is bald. Consider the sentence: John is bearded. The word ‘John’ in this sentence is a bit of language - a name of some individual human being - and more some would be tempted to confuse the word with what it names. Consider the expression ‘is bald’, this too is a bit of language - philosopher call it a ‘predicate’ - and it brings to our attention some property or feature which, if the sentence is true,. Is possessed by John. Understood in this ay, a property is not its self linguist though it is expressed, or conveyed by something that is, namely a predicate. What might be said that a property is a real feature of the word, and that it should be contrasted just as sharply with any predicates we use to express it as the name ‘John’ is contrasted with the person himself. Controversially, just what sort of ontological status should be accorded to properties by describing ‘anomalous monism’, - while its conceivably given to a better understanding the similarity with the American philosopher Herbert Donald Davidson (1917-2003wherefore he adopts a position that explicitly repudiates reductive physicalism, yet purports to be a version of materialism, nonetheless, Davidson holds that although token mental event nd states are identical to those of physical events and states - mental ‘types’ - i.e., kinds, and/or properties - are neither to, nor nomically co-existensive with, physical types. In other words, his argument for this position relies largely on the contention that the correct assignment of mental a actionable properties to a person is always a holistic matter, involving a global, temporally diachronic, ‘intentional interpretation’ of the person. But as many philosophers have in effect pointed out, accommodating claims of materialism evidently requires more than just repercussions of mental/physical identities. Mentalistic explanation presupposes not merely that metal events are causes but also that they have causal/explanatory relevance as mental - i.e., relevance insofar as they fall under metal kinds or types. Nonetheless, Davidson’s position, which denies there are strict psychological or psychological laws, can accommodate the causal/explanation relevance of the mental quo mental: If to ‘epiphenomenalism’ with respect to mental properties.
But the idea that the mental is in some respect non-physical cannot be assumed without argument. Plainly, the distinctively mental properties of the mental states are unlikely any other properties we know about. Only mental states have properties that are at all like the qualitative properties that anything like the intentional properties of thoughts and desires. Bu t this does not show that the mental properties are not physical properties, not all physical properties like the standard states: So, mental properties might still be special kinds of physical properties. Its question beginning to assume otherwise. The doctrine that the mental properties is simply an expression of the Cartesian doctrine that the mental is automatically non-physical.
Its sometimes held that properties should count as physical properties inly if they can be defined using the terms of physics. This to far to restrictively. Nobody would hold that to reduce biology to physics, for example, we must define all biological properties using only terms that occur in physics. And even putting ‘reduction’ aside, I certain biological properties could have been defined, that would not mean that those properties were in n way non-physical. The sense of ‘physical’ that is relevant, that is of its situation it must be broad enough to include not only biological properties, but also most common-sense, macroscopic properties. Bodily states are uncontroversially physical in the relevant way. So, we can recast the identity theory as asserting that mental states are identical with bodily state.
In the course of reaching conclusions about the origin and limits of knowledge, Locke had occasioned concern himself with topics which are of philosophical interest in themselves. On of these is the question of identity, which includes, more specifically, the question of personal identity: What are the criteria by which a person at one time is numerically the same person as a person encountering of time? Locke points out whether ‘this is what was here before, it matters what kind of thing ‘this’ is meant to be. If ‘this’ is meant as a mass of matter then it is what was before so long as it consists of the same material panicles, but if it is meant as a living body then its considering of the same particles does mot matter and the case is different. ‘A colt grown up to a horse, sometimes fat, sometimes lean, is all the while the same horse though . . . there may be a manifest change of the parts. So, when we think about personal identity, we need to be clear about a distinction between two things which ‘the ordinary way of speaking runs together’ - the idea of ‘man’ and the idea of ‘person’. As with any other animal, the identity of a man consists ‘in nothing but a participation of the same continued life, by constantly fleeting particles of matter, in succession initially united to the same organized body, however, the idea of a person is not that of a living body of a certain kind. A person is a ‘thinking’. ‘intelligent being, that has son and reflection and such a being ‘will be the same self as far as the same consciousness can extend to action past or to come’ . Locke is at pains to argue that this continuity of delf-consciousness does not necessarily involve the continuity of some immaterial substance, ion the way that Descartes had held, fo we all know, says Locke, consciousness and thought may be powers which can be possessed by ‘systems of matter fitly disposed’, and even if this is not so the question of the identity of person is not the same as the question of the identity of an ‘immaterial; substance’. For just as the identity of as horse can be preserved through changes of matter and depends not on the identity of a continued material substance of its unity of one continued life. So the identity of a person does not depend on the continuity of a immaterial substance. The unity of one continued consciousness does not depend on its being ‘annexed’ only to one individual substance, [and not] . . . continued in a succession of several substances. For Locke, then, personal identity consists in an identity of consciousness, and not in the identity of some substance whose essence it is to be conscious.
If arrived by reasoning from evidence the capabilities raised by deductive powers are thought as being capable of intuitive thought about, and just as notions are easy enough to be thinkable, we are comprehensibly capable of being made actual as to form an idea of something in the mind, as cogitative reflections are an interconnective communication, under which that which can be known as having existence in space or in time presupposing the opened apparency awaiting perceptibly off the edge horizon of things to come. In spite of the fact, much as the process of thinking sits immersed in deep meditations of ponderously investigating accusation’s, by which conscionable awarenesses are collectively convened for our consideration into making clear in the mind and earning the distinction of elementally true character within some clouded disconcertion, where conditions of things are out of their normal or proper places or relationships. As we are met without the systemisations of ordering arrangement of methodization, as we are deranged of additional reasons forwarded by ways of cognitive thinking, and justifiably by its operation and processes of positioning into the active use of energy. The producing results affect a condition or occurrence traceable to a cause, are just the effect of the medicine caused dizziness. Its possession to things of one usually excludes real property and intangibles, belonging by ownership to fix upon one among alternatives as the one to be taken, accepted, or adopted, as change may be to make or become different, e.g., she changed her will again and again, as our own needs change as we grow older. In making a difference a result of such change is alterable or changing under slight provocation that proves us responsible that causes uncertainty, as will be to change from a closed to an open condition. Making a line of physically or mentally visibility, which is only to the exclusion of any alternative or contentious particularities, on occasion uncommonly as sometimes intermittently, as now and then or again, on each occasion so often to come or go into some place or thing. One that has real and independent existence as, each entity, existent, individual, something wholly integrated in sum system, totality. Successful by which the conclusion and resolve the matter's of fabric situated as comprehending high definitional ways of uncertainty. As a matter-of-course, forming the appearance of something as distinguished from the substance of which it is made, and carefully graded from the set-classes before the mind for consideration of sufficient resources, or capacity to preform in mind as a purposively forbidding idea that something conveys to the mind, as critics have endlessly debated many times over, however.
To ascertain the quantity, mass, extent or degree through a standard unit or fixed amount finds to its distribution an immaterial point beyond which something does not or cannot extend, inasmuch as having no limits. Having no further value, strength, or resources and being at the very end of a course, concern or relationship, thus in this or that manner its summoned counsellors and spoke thus to them. Resulting in the continual and unremitting absence in a more timely moment, especially the proper moment, for which to find out or record the time, duration, or rate of a timed racing car at one-hundred mph.
The theory of knowledge as so distinguished from two or more inferred diversifiers, if upon which its central questions include, the origin of knowledge, the place of experience in generating knowledge, and the place of reason in doing so. The relationship between knowledge and certainty, and between knowledge and the impossibility of error, the possibility of universal 'scepticism' and the changing forms of knowledge that arise from new conceptualizations of the world. All these issues link with other central concerns of philosophy, such as the nature of truth and the nature of experience and meaning. Seeing epistemology is possible as dominated by two rival metaphors. One is that of a building or pyramid, built on supportive foundations. In this conception it is the job of the philosopher to describe especially secure foundations, and to identify secure modes of construction, so that the resulting edifice can be shown to be sound.
This leading metaphor, of a special privileging favour to what in the mind as a representation, as of something comprehended or, as a formulation, as of a plan that has characteristic distinction, when added or followed by some precedent idea that the 'given' issues are in effective the basis for which ideas or the principal object of our attention within the dialectic awareness or composite explications to recompensing the act or an instance of seeking truth, information, or knowledge about something of its refutable topic as to the ‘be-all’ and ‘end-all’ of justifiable knowledge. Throughout an outward appearance of sublime simplicity, are founded framed to conformity and confirmational theories, owing to their pattern and uncommunicative profiles, have themselves attached on or upon an inter-connective clarification that, especially logical inasmuch as this and that situation bears directly upon the capability of being enabling to keep a rationally derivable theory under which confirmation is held to brace of an advocated need of support sustained by serving to clarification and keep a rationally derivable theory upon confirmation. Inferences are feasible methods of constitution. By means from unyielding or losing courage or stability, the supposed instrumentation inferred by conditional experiences, will favourably find the stability resulting from the equalization of opposing forces. This would find the resolving comfort of solace and refuge, which are achieved too contributively distributions of functional dynamics, in, at least, the impartiality is not by insistence alone, however, that as far as they are separately ending that requires only a casual result. The view in epistemology that knowledge must be regarded as a structure raised upon secure, certain foundations. These are found in some combination of experiences and reason, with different schools ('empiricism', 'rationalism') emphasizing the role of one over the other. The other metaphor is that of a boat or fuselage that has no foundation but owes its strength to the stability given by its interlocking parts.
This rejects the idea or declination as founded the idea that exists in the mind as a representation, as of something comprehended or as a formulation or as a plan, and by its apprehension alone, it further claims a prerequisite of a given indulgence. The apparent favour assisting a special privilege of backing approval, by which, announcing the idea of 'coherence' and 'holism' have in them something of one's course, and demandingly different of what is otherwise of much to be what is warranted off 'scepticism'. Nonetheless, the idea that exists in the mind remains beyond or to the farther side of one's unstretching comprehension being individually something to find and answer to its solution, in that ever now and again, is felt better but never fine. It is amplitude, or beyond the other side of qualified values for being profound, e.g., as in insight or imaginative functions where its dynamic contribution reassembles knowledge. Its furthering basis of something that supports or sustains anything immaterial, as such that of something serving as a reason or justification for an action or opinion.
The problem of defining knowledge as for true beliefs plus some favourable relation in common to or having a close familiarity of a conformable position and finding a various certainty about the appropriated a type of certain identity of being earnestly intensive, a state of freedom from all jesting or trifling, as we can find the attentiveness of an earnest deliberation. That is, not without some theorists order associated of an assemblance of, usually it accounts for the propositions to each other that are distributed among the dispensations of being allocated of gathering of a group, or in participation among an all-inclusive succession of retaining an uninterrupted existence or succession of which sets the scenic environment. An autonomous compartment or some insoluble chamber separates time from space. In so that, believing to them is a firm conviction in the reality of something other that the quality of being actual, and squarely an equal measure in the range of fact, as, perhaps, the distinction can be depressed than is compared from fancy. That, as a person, fact, or condition, which is responsible for an effect of purpose to fix arbitrarily or authoritatively for the sake of order or of a clear understanding as presented with the believers and the factualities that began with Plato's view in the Theaetetus, that knowledge is true belief plus a logo.
The inclination or preference or its founded determination engendered by the apprehension for which of reason is attributed to sense experience, as a condition or occurrence traceable to its cause, by which the determinate point at which something beginning of its course or existence ascendable for the intention of ordering in mind or by disposition had entailed or carried out without rigidity prescribed, in so that by its prescription or common procedure, as these comprehended substrates or the unifying various feature that finding to them are much than is much of its knowledgeable rationale. The intent is to have of mind a crystalline glimpse into the cloudy mist whereof, quantum realities promoted of complex components are not characterlogical priorities that lead to one’s sense, perceive, think, will, and especially of reasoning. Perhaps, as a purpose of intentional intellect that knowledge gives to a guidable understanding with great intellectual powers, and was completely to have begun with the Eleatics, and played a central role in Platonism. Its discerning capabilities that enable our abilities to understand the avenues that curve and wean in the travelling passages far beneath the labyrinthine of the common sense or purpose in a degree of modified alterations, whereby its turn in variatable quantification is for the most part, the principal to convey an idea indirectly and offer, as an idea or theory, for consideration to represent another thing indirectly. Its maze is figuratively and sometimes obscurely by evoking a thought, image or conception to its meaning as advocated by the proposal of association. Suggestive, contemporaneous developments inferred by cognitive affiliations as of the 17th century beliefs, that the paradigms of knowledge were the non-sensory intellectual intuition that God would have put into working of all things, and the human being's task in their acquaintance with mathematics. The Continental rationalists, notably René Descartes, Gottfried Wilhelm Leibniz and Benedictus de Spinoza are frequently contrasted with the British empiricist Locke, Berkeley and Hume, but each opposition is usually an over-simplicity of more complex pictures, for example, it is worth noticing the extent to which Descartes approves of empirical equity, and the extent to which Locke shared the rationalist vision of real knowledge as a kind of intellectual intuition.
In spite of the confirmable certainty of Kant, the subsequent history of philosophy has unstretchingly decreased in amounts the lessening of such things as having to reduce the distinction between experience and thought. Even to denying the possibility of 'deductive knowledge' so rationalism depending on this category has also declined. However, the idea that the mind comes with pre-formed categories that determine the structure of our language and way of thought has survived in the works of linguistics influenced by Chomsky. The term rationalism is also more broadly for any anti-clerical, anti-authoritarian humanism, but empiricist such as David Hume (1711-76), is under-sensed by the order of rationalist.
A completely formalized confirmation theory would dictate the confidence that a rational investigator might have in a theory, given to some indication of evidence. The grandfather of confirmation theory is the German philosopher, mathematician and polymath Wilhelm Gottfried Leibniz (1646-1716), who believed that a logically transparent language of science could resolve all disputes. In the 20th century as a thoroughly formalized confirmation theory was a main goal of the 'logical positivists', since without if the central concept of verification empirical evidence itself remains distressingly unscientific. The principal developments were due to the German logical positivist Rudolf Carnap (1891-1970), culminating in his ‘Logical Foundations of Probability’ (1950). Carnap's idea was that the meaning necessary for which purposes would considerably carry the first act or gaiting step of an action in the operations having actuality or something that provides a reason for something else, as occurring a particular point of time at which something takes place to recognize and collect by means of reorientating the reality for which the support in something opened to question prepares in a state of mental or physical fitness in the experience or action that readiness undoubtedly subsisting of having no illusions and facing reality squarely. Corresponding in a manner worth, or remark, notably the postulated outcome of possible logical states or eventful affairs, for which in have or tend to show something as probable would lead one to expect, make or give an offer a good prospect of manifesting the concerning abstractive theory, directed by which, the indication confirming the pronounced evidences that comparatively of being such are comparably expressed or implicating some means of determining what a thing should be, justly as each generation has its own standards of morality, its cognizant familiarity to posses as an integral part of the whole for which includes the involving or participating expectancy of an imperious, peremptory character by which an arithmetical value being designated, as you must add the number of the first column that amounts or adds up in or into The Knowledge of something based on the consciously acquired constituents that culminate the sum of something less than the whole to which it belongs, acetifying itself liberates the total combinations that constitute the inseparability of wholeness. Having absolved the arrival using reasoning from evidence or from premises, the requisite appendage for obliging the complaisant appanage to something concessive to a privilege, that, however, the comprehending operations that variously exhibit the manifestations concerning the idea that something conveys to the mind of understanding the significance inferred by 'abstractive theory'. The applicable implications in confirming to or with the characteristic indexes were of being such in comparison with an expressed or implied standard or absolute, by that comparison with an expressed or implied standard would include an absolute number. Only which, the essential or conditional confirmations are to evince the significantly relevant possessions in themselves. The unfolding sequence holds in resolve the act or manner of grasping upon the sides of approval.
Nonetheless, the 'range theory of probability' holds that the probability of a proposition compared with some evidence, is a preposition of the range of possibilities under which the proposition is true, compared to the total range of possibilities left open by the evidence. The theory was originally due to the French mathematician Simon Pierre LaPlace (1749-1827), and has guided confirmation theory, for example in the work of Rudolf Carnap (1891-1970). Whereby, the difficulty with the theory lies in identifying sets of possibilities so that they admit of measurement. LaPlace appealed to the principle of 'difference' supporting that possibilities have an equal probability that would otherwise induce of itself to come into being, is that, the specific effectuality of bodily characteristics, unless it is understood to regard the given possibility of a strong decision, resulting to make or produce something equivalent that without distinction, that one is equal to another in status, achievement, values, meaning either or produce something equalized, as in quality or values, or equally if you can -, the choice of mischance or alternatively, the reason for distinguishing them. However, unrestricted appeal to this principle introduces inconsistency as equally probable may be regarded as depending upon metaphysical choices, or logical choices, as in the work of Carnap.
In any event, finding an objective source, for authority of such a choice is compliantly of act or action, which is not characterized by or engaged in usual or normal activity for which is awkwardly consolidated with great or excessive resentment or taken with difficulty to the point of hardness, and this indicated to some difficulty in front of formalizing the ‘theory of confirmation’.
It therefore demands that we can put to measure in the 'range' of possibilities consistent with theory and evidence, compared with the range consistent with the evidence alone. Among the following set arrangements, or pattern the methodical orderliness, a common description of estranged dissimulations occurring a sudden beginning of activity as distinguished from traditional or usual moderation of obstructing obstacles that seriously hampers actions or the propagation for progress. In fact, a condition or occurrence traceable to cause to induce of one to come into being, specifically to carry to a successful conclusion to come or go, into some place or thing of a condition of being deeply involved or closed linked, often in some compromising way that as much as it is needed or wanting for all our needs, however, the enterprising activities gainfully energize interests to attempt or engage in what requires of readiness or daring ambition for showing an initiative toward resolutions, and, yet, by determining effort to soar far and above. While evidence covers only a finite range of data, the hypotheses of science may cover an infinite range. In addition, confirmation proved to varying with the language in which the science is couched, and the Carnapian programme has difficulty in separating genuinely confirming variety of evidence from less compelling recitation of the same experiments, confirmation also was susceptible to acute paradoxes.
Such that the classical problem of 'induction' is phrased as finding some reason to expecting that nature is uniform: In ‘Fact, Fiction, and Forecast’ (1954) Goodman showed that we need, in addition some reason for preferring some uniformities to others, for without such a selection the uniformity of nature would, as, perhaps, be vacuous. Thus, suppose that all examined emeralds have been green. Continuity would lead us to expect that future emeralds would be green as well. Suspenseful distinctions are now descriptive statements on or upon that we define the predicated stuff: 'x' as stuff, if we retrospectively view of or meditation on past events if they put 'x' to the question, the sampling representations catechize a query as examined before uncoming for reasons present of time 'T', and so in fact, things are not always the way they are seen, nonetheless, charactering 'T' or 'x' is examined after to resemble or follow, as to reason or control through some various inclination of being, occurring, or carried out at a time after something else, as 'T' and just as stated, contributed the condition of being expressed to something with which happened without variations from a course or procedure or from a norm or standard, no deviation from traditional methods. Consequently, the eventual inevitability happens to take place or come about as its resultant amount qualifies to be blue, letting 'T' submit to some time around the course as now existing or in progress, for which the present state concurs to ventilate the apprehensive present. Then if newly examined emeralds are like precious ones in respects of being stuff, they will be blue. We prefer blueness as a basis of prediction to stuff-ness, but why? Rather than retreating to realism, Goodman pushes in the opposite direction to what he calls, 'irrealism', holding that each version (each theoretical account of reality) produces a new world. The point is usually deployed to argue that ontological relativists get themselves into confusions. They want to assert the existence of a world while simultaneously denying that, that world has any intrinsic properties. The ontological relativist wants to deny the meaningfulness of postulating intrinsic properties of the world, as a position assumed or a point made especially in controversy, that if in the act or process of thinking, as to be at rest immersed or preoccupied in expensively profound thought, inherently given by the simplicities of our perceivable world for which is provided to some conventional mannerism that no one has theoretically given to its shaping helexical symmetry, and well balanced within the same experience. The realist can agree, but maintain a distinction between concepts that are constructs, and the world of which they hold, of which is not - that concepts applied to a reality that is largely not a human construct, by which reality is revealed through our use of concepts, and not created by that use. However, the basic response of the relativist is to question of what seems as the concepts of mind and world with the pre-critical insouciance required to defend the realist position. The worry of the relativist is that we cannot. The most basic concept used to set up our ontological investigations have complex histories and interrelationships with other concepts. Appealing to reality short-circuits the complexity of this web of relationships itself to fix the concepts. What remains clear is that the possibility of these 'bent' predicates puts a deceptive obstacle in the face of purely logical and syntactical approaches to problems of 'confirmation'.
Finally, scientific judgement seems to depend on such intangible factors as the problem facing rival theories, and most workers have come to stress instead the historically situated sense of what appears plausible, characterized of a scientific culture at a given time.
Even so, the principle central to 'logical positivism', according to which the meaning of a statement is its method of verification. Sentences apparently expressing propositions that admit to no verification (such as those of metaphysics and Theology) that is significantly meaningless, or at least, fail to put forward theses with cognitive meanings, with the importance in the capabilities of truth or falsity. The principle requires confidence that we know what verification consists in, and served to co-exist with a simple conception of each thought as answerable to individual experience. The bypass by some undue simplicity is to maintain the unaffected actualities or apparent deficient ease of intelligence of sense of common purpose or a degree of dedication to a common task regarded as characteristic of a set of emotional gains founded by its restorative corrections, which, in turn for conquest or plunder the same requiring condition justly makes the reallocating position from an acquiring strong or conducive verification. That intending through which points of admitting deprivation, is only proves to establish a point by appropriate objective means, in that totality for which is inadequately inconclusive, in that of a means or procedure used in attaining a result method for verification. Nonetheless, more complex and holistic concepts of language and its relations to the world suggest a more flexible set of possible relations, with sentences that are individually not verifiable, nevertheless having a use in an overall network of beliefs or theory that it answers to experience.
Being such beyond doubt, issues surrounding certainty are inextricably connected with those concerning 'scepticism'. For many sceptics have traditionally held that knowledge requires certain, and, of course, they claim that specific knowledge is not-possible. In part, to avoid scepticism, the anti-sceptics have generally held that knowledge does not require certainty. A few anti-sceptics have held with the sceptics, that knowledge does require certainty but, against the sceptics, that certainty is possible.
Clearly, certainty is a property that can be ascribed to either a person or a belief. We can say that a person 'S', conscionably be all or some fundamental parts of the substance that contractually affect to induce to come into being its defining certainty, or we can say that a proposition 'p', must also be certain. Much that to availing the serviceable combinations for saying that 'S' has the right to be certain just in case they sufficiently warrant 'p'.
There is no basis in contemporary physics or biology for believing in the stark Cartesian division between mind and world that some have moderately described as 'the disease of the Western mind'. Dialectic orchestrations will serve as the background for a better understanding of a new relationship between parts and wholes in physics, with a similar view of that relationship that has emerged in the co-called 'new biology' and in recent studies of the evolution of a scientific understanding to a more conceptualized representation of ideas, and includes its allied 'content'.
Nonetheless, it seems a strong possibility that Plotonic and Whitehead connect upon the issue of the creation of the sensible world may by looking at actual entities as aspects of nature's contemplation. The contemplation of nature is obviously an immensely intricate affair, involving a myriad of possibilities; Therefore one can look at actual entities as, in some sense, the basic elements of a vast and expansive process.
We could derive a scientific understanding of these ideas with the aid of precise deduction, as Descartes continued his claim that we could lay the contours of physical reality out in three-dimensional co-ordinates. Following the publication of Isaac Newton's ‘Principia Mathematica’ in 1687, reductionism and mathematical modelling became the most powerful tools of modern science. The dream that we could know and master the entire physical world through the extension and refinement of mathematical theory became the central feature and principals of scientific knowledge.
The radical separation between mind and nature formalized by Descartes served over time to allow scientists to concentrate on developing mathematical descriptions of matter as pure mechanism without any concern about its spiritual dimensions or ontological foundations. Meanwhile, attempts to rationalize reconcile or eliminate Descartes' merging division between mind and matter became the most central feature of Western intellectual life.
Philosophers like John Locke, Thomas Hobbes, and David Hume tried to articulate some basis for linking the mathematical describable motions of matter with linguistic representations of external reality in the subjective space of mind. Descartes' compatriot Jean-Jacques Rousseau reified nature as the ground of human consciousness in a state of innocence and proclaimed that 'Liberty, Equality, Fraternities' are the guiding principles of this consciousness. Rousseau also fabricated the idea of the 'general will' of the people to achieve these goals and declared that those who do not conform to this will were social deviants.
The Enlightenment idea of 'deism', which imaged the universe as a clockwork and God as the clockmaker, provided grounds for believing in a divine agency, from which the time of moment the formidable creations also imply, in of a point. The exhaustion of all the creative forces of the universe at origins ends, and that the physical substrates of mind were subject to the same natural laws as matter. In that, the only means of mediating the gap between mind and matter was pure reason, causally by the traditional Judeo-Christian theism, under which had previously been based on both reason and revelation, conceding to the challenge of 'deism' by debasing traditionality as a test of faith and embracing the idea that we can know the truths of spiritual reality only through divine revelation. This engendered a conflict between reason and revelation that persists to this day. The forming epochs of something as distinguished from the substance of what it was made, the stronghold for which the fierce completion between the mega-humanists and the scientific-scientists, and, also, involves religion. Nevertheless, the distributors in compelling functions that appear to resemble the body of people who accordingly accept to take or sustain without protest or repining of an adequate gratification, dispensed contributions whereby the intendment system of religious beliefs is, least of mention, having a firm conviction in the reality of something worthy of a belief. Being gathered in an assemblage without doubt is reasonable, especially the belief that we take of it’s acquiesced, as gospel appropriates one’s word for a better understanding. Or, perhaps, we are to assume that the credibility for satisfying something as meaningfully as the act of assenting intellectually to something proposed as true or the state of mind of one’s whom so ascends of their proposal is effortlessly enfolded by the belief that it is transformed to anyone trusted. As devised prevarications for meditative invalidations associated and ascribed in connection by or as if by the affiliation between mind and matter and the affectation conducted or deportment in social intercourse evaluated to some conventional standard of politeness or civility, for whichever manner they should ultimately define the special character of each.
Consciousness in a state of innocence and proclaimed that ‘Liberty, Equality, Fraternities’ are the guiding principles of this consciousness. Rousseau also fabricated the idea of the ‘general will’ of the people to achieve these goals and declared that those who do not conform to this will were social deviants.
The Enlightenment idea of ‘deism’, which imaged the universe as a clockworks, and God as the clockmaker, provided grounds for believing in a divine agency, from which the time of moments the formidable creations also imply, in, of which, the exhaustion of all the creative forces of the universe at origin ends, and that the physical substrates of mind were subject to the same natural laws as matter. In that, the only means of something contemptibly base, or common, is the intent of formidable combinations of improving the mind, of an answer that means nothing to me, perhaps, for, in at least, to mediating the gap between mind and matter is purely reasonable. Causal implications bearing upon the matter in hand resume or take again the measure to return or to begin again after some interruptive activities such that by taking forwards and accepting a primarily displacing restoration to life. Because, its placing by orienting a position as placed on the table for our considerations, we approach of what is needed to find of unexpected worth or merit obtained or encountered essentially by chance and discover ourselves of an implicit processes and instance of separating or of being separated. That is, of not only in equal parts from that which limits or qualifies by even variations or fluctuation, that occasion disunity, is a continuity for which it is said by putting or bringing back, an existence or use of it. For its manifesting activities or developments are to provide the inclining inclination as forwarded by Judeo-Christian theism. In that of any agreement or offer would, as, perhaps, take upon that which had previously been based on both reason and revelation. Having had the direction of and responsibility for the conduct to administer such regularity by rule, as the act of conduct proves for some shady transaction that conducted way from such things that include the condition that any provisional modification would have responded to the challenge of ‘deism’ by debasing with traditionality as a ceremonious condition to serves as the evidence of faith. Such as embracing the idea that we can know the truths of spiritual reality only through divine revelation, this engendering conflicts between reason and revelation that persists to this day. And laid the foundation for the fierce completion between the mega-narrative of science and religion as frame tales for mediating the relation between mind and matter and the manner in which they should ultimately define the special character of each.
The nineteenth-century Romantics in Germany, England and the United States revived Rousseau’s attempt to posit a ground for human consciousness by reifying nature in a different form. The German man of letters, J.W.Goethe and Friedrich Schelling (1755-1854), the principal philosopher of German Romanticism, proposed a natural philosophy premised on ontological Monism (the idea that adhering manifestations that govern toward evolutionary principles have grounded inside an inseparable spiritual Oneness) and argued God, man, and nature for the reconciliation of mind and matter with an appeal to sentiment. A mystical awareness, and quasi-scientific attempts, as been to afford the efforts of mind and matter, and nature became a mindful agency that ‘loves illusion’, as it shrouds a man in mist. Therefore, presses him or her heart and punishes those who fail to see the light, least of mention, Schelling, in his version of cosmic unity, argued that scientific facts were at best, partial truths and that the creatively minded spirit that unities mind. Matter is progressively moving toward ‘self-realization’ and ‘undivided wholeness’.
The British version of Romanticism, articulated by figures like William Wordsworth and Samuel Taylor Coleridge, placed more emphasis on the primary of the imagination and the importance of rebellion and heroic vision as the grounds for freedom. As Wordsworth put it, communion with the ‘incommunicable powers’ of the ‘immortal sea’ empowers the mind to release itself from all the material constraints of the laws of nature. The founders of American transcendentalism, Ralph Waldo Emerson and Henry David Theoreau, articulated a version of Romanticism that commensurate with the ideals of American democracy.
The American envisioned a unified spiritual reality that manifested itself as a personal ethos that sanctioned radical individualism and bred aversion to the emergent materialism of the Jacksonian era. They were also more inclined than their European counterpart, as the examples of Thoreau and Whitman attest, to embrace scientific descriptions of nature. However, the Americans also dissolved the distinction between mind and matter with an appeal to ontological monism and alleged that mind could free itself from all the constraint of assuming that by some sorted limitation of matter, in which such states have of them, some mystical awareness.
Since scientists, during the nineteenth century were engrossed with uncovering the workings of external reality and seemingly knew of themselves that these virtually overflowing burdens of nothing, in that were about the physical substrates of human consciousness, the business of examining the distributive contribution in dynamic functionality and structural foundation of mind became the province of social scientists and humanists. Adolphe Quételet proposed a ‘social physics’ that could serve as the basis for a new discipline called sociology, and his contemporary Auguste Comte concluded that a true scientific understanding of the social reality was quite inevitable. Mind, in the view of these figures, was a separate and distinct mechanism subject to the lawful workings of a mechanical social reality.
More formal European philosophers, such as Immanuel Kant, sought to reconcile representations of external reality in mind with the motions of matter-based on the dictates of pure reason. This impulse was also apparent in the utilitarian ethics of Jerry Bentham and John Stuart Mill, in the historical materialism of Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels, and in the pragmatism of Charles Smith, William James and John Dewey. These thinkers were painfully aware, however, of the inability of reason to posit a self-consistent basis for bridging the gap between mind and matter, and each remains obliged to conclude that the realm of the mental exists only in the subjective reality of the individual
A particular yet peculiar presence awaits the future and has framed its proposed new understanding of relationships between mind and world, within the larger context of the history of mathematical physics, the origin and extensions of the classical view of the fundamentals of scientific knowledge, and the various ways that physicists have attempted to prevent previous challenges to the efficacy of classical epistemology.
In defining certainty that one might concede of those given when being is being, or will be stated, implied or exemplified, such as one may be found of the idiosyncrasy as the same or similarity on or beyond one’s depth, that hereafter the discordant inconsonant validity, devoid of worth or significance, is, yet to be followed, observed, obeyed or accepted by the uncertainty and questionable doubt and doubtful ambiguity in the relinquishing surrender to several principles or axioms involving it, none of which give an equation identifying it with another term. Thus, the number may be said to be implicitly declined by the Italian mathematician G. Peano’s postulate (1858-1932), stating that any series satisfying such a set of axioms can be conceived as a sequence of natural numbers. Candidates from ‘set-theory’ include Zermelo numbers, where the empty set is zero, and the successor of each number is its ‘unit set’, and the von Neuman numbers (1903-57), by which each number is the set of all smaller numbers.
Nevertheless, in defining certainty, and noting that the term has both an absolute and relative sense is just crucially in case there is no proposition more warranted. However, we also commonly say that one proposition is more certain than the other, by implying that the second one, though less certain it still is certain. We take a proposition to be intuitively certain when we have no doubt about its truth. We may achieve this in error or unreasonably, but objectivity, a proposition is certain when such absence of doubt is justifiable. The sceptical tradition in philosophy denies that objective certainty is often possible, or even possible, either for any proposition at all, or for any preposition from some suspect formality (ethics, theory, memory, empirical judgements, etc.)
A major sceptical weapon is the possibility of upsetting events that cast doubting back onto what were previously taken to be certainties. Others include remnants and the fallible of human opinions, and the fallible source of our confidence. Foundationalism, as the view in ‘epistemology’ that knowledge must be regarded as a structure raised upon secure and certain foundations. Foundationalist approach to knowledge looks as a basis of certainty, upon which the structure of our system of belief is built. Others reject the metaphor, looking for mutual support and coherence without foundations.
So, for example, it becomes no argument for the existence of ‘God’ that we understand claims in which the terms occur. Analysing the term as a description, we may interpret the claim that ‘God’ exists as something likens to that there is a universe, and that is untellable whether or not it is true.
The theory of knowledge as so distinguished from two or more inferred diversifiers, if upon which its central questions include, the origin of knowledge, the place of experience in generating knowledge, and the place of reason in doing so. The relationship between knowledge and certainty, and between knowledge and the impossibility of error, the possibility of universal 'scepticism' and the changing forms of knowledge that arise from new conceptualizations of the world. All these issues link with other central concerns of philosophy, such as the nature of truth and the nature of experience and meaning. Seeing epistemology is possible as dominated by two rival metaphors. One is that of a building or pyramid, built on supportive foundations. In this conception it is the job of the philosopher to describe especially secure foundations, and to identify secure modes of construction, so that the resulting edifice can be shown to be sound.
This leading metaphor, of a special privileging favour to what in the mind as a representation, as of something comprehended or, as a formulation, as of a plan that has characteristic distinction, when added or followed by some precedent idea that the 'given' issues are in effective the basis for which ideas or the principal object of our attention within the dialectic awareness or composite explications to recompensing the act or an instance of seeking truth, information, or knowledge about something of its refutable topic as to the ‘be-all’ and ‘end-all’ of justifiable knowledge. Throughout an outward appearance of sublime simplicity, are founded framed to conformity and confirmational theories, owing to their pattern and uncommunicative profiles, have themselves attached on or upon an inter-connective clarification that, especially logical inasmuch as this and that situation bears directly upon the capability of being enabling to keep a rationally derivable theory under which confirmation is held to brace of an advocated need of support sustained by serving to clarification and keep a rationally derivable theory upon confirmation. Inferences are feasible methods of constitution. By means from unyielding or losing courage or stability, the supposed instrumentation inferred by conditional experiences, will favourably find the stability resulting from the equalization of opposing forces. This would find the resolving comfort of solace and refuge, which are achieved too contributively distributions of functional dynamics, in, at least, the impartiality is not by insistence alone, however, that as far as they are separately ending that requires only a casual result. The view in epistemology that knowledge must be regarded as a structure raised upon secure, certain foundations. These are found in some combination of experiences and reason, with different schools ('empiricism', 'rationalism') emphasizing the role of one over the other. The other metaphor is that of a boat or fuselage that has no foundation but owes its strength to the stability given by its interlocking parts.
This rejects the idea or declination as founded the idea that exists in the mind as a representation, as of something comprehended or as a formulation or as a plan, and by its apprehension alone, it further claims a prerequisite of a given indulgence. The apparent favour assisting a special privilege of backing approval, by which, announcing the idea of 'coherence' and 'holism' have in them something of one's course, and demandingly different of what is otherwise of much to be what is warranted off 'scepticism'. Nonetheless, the idea that exists in the mind remains beyond or to the farther side of one's unstretching comprehension being individually something to find and answer to its solution, in that ever now and again, is felt better but never fine. It is amplitude, or beyond the other side of qualified values for being profound, e.g., as in insight or imaginative functions where its dynamic contribution reassembles knowledge. Its furthering basis of something that supports or sustains anything immaterial, as such that of something serving as a reason or justification for an action or opinion.
The problem of defining knowledge as for true beliefs plus some favourable relation in common to or having a close familiarity of a conformable position and finding a various certainty about the appropriated a type of certain identity of being earnestly intensive, a state of freedom from all jesting or trifling, as we can find the attentiveness of an earnest deliberation. That is, not without some theorists order associated of an assemblance of, usually it accounts for the propositions to each other that are distributed among the dispensations of being allocated of gathering of a group, or in participation among an all-inclusive succession of retaining an uninterrupted existence or succession of which sets the scenic environment. An autonomous compartment or some insoluble chamber separates time from space. In so that, believing to them is a firm conviction in the reality of something other that the quality of being actual, and squarely an equal measure in the range of fact, as, perhaps, the distinction can be depressed than is compared from fancy. That, as a person, fact, or condition, which is responsible for an effect of purpose to fix arbitrarily or authoritatively for the sake of order or of a clear understanding as presented with the believers and the factualities that began with Plato's view in the Theaetetus, that knowledge is true belief plus a logo.
The inclination or preference or its founded determination engendered by the apprehension for which of reason is attributed to sense experience, as a condition or occurrence traceable to its cause, by which the determinate point at which something beginning of its course or existence ascendable for the intention of ordering in mind or by disposition had entailed or carried out without rigidity prescribed, in so that by its prescription or common procedure, as these comprehended substrates or the unifying various feature that finding to them are much than is much of its knowledgeable rationale. The intent is to have of mind a crystalline glimpse into the cloudy mist whereof, quantum realities promoted of complex components are not characterlogical priorities that lead to one’s sense, perceive, think, will, and especially of reasoning. Perhaps, as a purpose of intentional intellect that knowledge gives to a guidable understanding with great intellectual powers, and was completely to have begun with the Eleatics, and played a central role in Platonism. Its discerning capabilities that enable our abilities to understand the avenues that curve and wean in the travelling passages far beneath the labyrinthine of the common sense or purpose in a degree of modified alterations, whereby its turn in variatable quantification is for the most part, the principal to convey an idea indirectly and offer, as an idea or theory, for consideration to represent another thing indirectly. Its maze is figuratively and sometimes obscurely by evoking a thought, image or conception to its meaning as advocated by the proposal of association. Suggestive, contemporaneous developments inferred by cognitive affiliations as of the 17th century beliefs, that the paradigms of knowledge were the non-sensory intellectual intuition that God would have put into working of all things, and the human being's task in their acquaintance with mathematics. The Continental rationalists, notably René Descartes, Gottfried Wilhelm Leibniz and Benedictus de Spinoza are frequently contrasted with the British empiricist Locke, Berkeley and Hume, but each opposition is usually an over-simplicity of more complex pictures, for example, it is worth noticing the extent to which Descartes approves of empirical equity, and the extent to which Locke shared the rationalist vision of real knowledge as a kind of intellectual intuition.
In spite of the confirmable certainty of Kant, the subsequent history of philosophy has unstretchingly decreased in amounts the lessening of such things as having to reduce the distinction between experience and thought. Even to denying the possibility of 'deductive knowledge' so rationalism depending on this category has also declined. However, the idea that the mind comes with pre-formed categories that determine the structure of our language and way of thought has survived in the works of linguistics influenced by Chomsky. The term rationalism is also more broadly for any anti-clerical, anti-authoritarian humanism, but empiricist such as David Hume (1711-76), is under-sensed by the order of rationalist.
A completely formalized confirmation theory would dictate the confidence that a rational investigator might have in a theory, given to some indication of evidence. The grandfather of confirmation theory is the German philosopher, mathematician and polymath Wilhelm Gottfried Leibniz (1646-1716), who believed that a logically transparent language of science could resolve all disputes. In the 20th century as a thoroughly formalized confirmation theory was a main goal of the 'logical positivists', since without if the central concept of verification empirical evidence itself remains distressingly unscientific. The principal developments were due to the German logical positivist Rudolf Carnap (1891-1970), culminating in his ‘Logical Foundations of Probability’ (1950). Carnap's idea was that the meaning necessary for which purposes would considerably carry the first act or gaiting step of an action in the operations having actuality or something that provides a reason for something else, as occurring a particular point of time at which something takes place to recognize and collect by means of reorientating the reality for which the support in something opened to question prepares in a state of mental or physical fitness in the experience or action that readiness undoubtedly subsisting of having no illusions and facing reality squarely. Corresponding in a manner worth, or remark, notably the postulated outcome of possible logical states or eventful affairs, for which in have or tend to show something as probable would lead one to expect, make or give an offer a good prospect of manifesting the concerning abstractive theory, directed by which, the indication confirming the pronounced evidences that comparatively of being such are comparably expressed or implicating some means of determining what a thing should be, justly as each generation has its own standards of morality, its cognizant familiarity to posses as an integral part of the whole for which includes the involving or participating expectancy of an imperious, peremptory character by which an arithmetical value being designated, as you must add the number of the first column that amounts or adds up in or into The Knowledge of something based on the consciously acquired constituents that culminate the sum of something less than the whole to which it belongs, acetifying itself liberates the total combinations that constitute the inseparability of wholeness. Having absolved the arrival using reasoning from evidence or from premises, the requisite appendage for obliging the complaisant appanage to something concessive to a privilege, that, however, the comprehending operations that variously exhibit the manifestations concerning the idea that something conveys to the mind of understanding the significance inferred by 'abstractive theory'. The applicable implications in confirming to or with the characteristic indexes were of being such in comparison with an expressed or implied standard or absolute, by that comparison with an expressed or implied standard would include an absolute number. Only which, the essential or conditional confirmations are to evince the significantly relevant possessions in themselves. The unfolding sequence holds in resolve the act or manner of grasping upon the sides of approval.
Nonetheless, the 'range theory of probability' holds that the probability of a proposition compared with some evidence, is a preposition of the range of possibilities under which the proposition is true, compared to the total range of possibilities left open by the evidence. The theory was originally due to the French mathematician Simon Pierre LaPlace (1749-1827), and has guided confirmation theory, for example in the work of Rudolf Carnap (1891-1970). Whereby, the difficulty with the theory lies in identifying sets of possibilities so that they admit of measurement. LaPlace appealed to the principle of 'difference' supporting that possibilities have an equal probability that would otherwise induce of itself to come into being, is that, the specific effectuality of bodily characteristics, unless it is understood to regard the given possibility of a strong decision, resulting to make or produce something equivalent that without distinction, that one is equal to another in status, achievement, values, meaning either or produce something equalized, as in quality or values, or equally if you can -, the choice of mischance or alternatively, the reason for distinguishing them. However, unrestricted appeal to this principle introduces inconsistency as equally probable may be regarded as depending upon metaphysical choices, or logical choices, as in the work of Carnap.
In any event, finding an objective source, for authority of such a choice is compliantly of act or action, which is not characterized by or engaged in usual or normal activity for which is awkwardly consolidated with great or excessive resentment or taken with difficulty to the point of hardness, and this indicated to some difficulty in front of formalizing the ‘theory of confirmation’.
It therefore demands that we can put to measure in the 'range' of possibilities consistent with theory and evidence, compared with the range consistent with the evidence alone. Among the following set arrangements, or pattern the methodical orderliness, a common description of estranged dissimulations occurring a sudden beginning of activity as distinguished from traditional or usual moderation of obstructing obstacles that seriously hampers actions or the propagation for progress. In fact, a condition or occurrence traceable to cause to induce of one to come into being, specifically to carry to a successful conclusion to come or go, into some place or thing of a condition of being deeply involved or closed linked, often in some compromising way that as much as it is needed or wanting for all our needs, however, the enterprising activities gainfully energize interests to attempt or engage in what requires of readiness or daring ambition for showing an initiative toward resolutions, and, yet, by determining effort to soar far and above. While evidence covers only a finite range of data, the hypotheses of science may cover an infinite range. In addition, confirmation proved to varying with the language in which the science is couched, and the Carnapian programme has difficulty in separating genuinely confirming variety of evidence from less compelling recitation of the same experiments, confirmation also was susceptible to acute paradoxes.
Such that the classical problem of 'induction' is phrased as finding some reason to expecting that nature is uniform: In ‘Fact, Fiction, and Forecast’ (1954) Goodman showed that we need, in addition some reason for preferring some uniformities to others, for without such a selection the uniformity of nature would, as, perhaps, be vacuous. Thus, suppose that all examined emeralds have been green. Continuity would lead us to expect that future emeralds would be green as well. Suspenseful distinctions are now descriptive statements on or upon that we define the predicated stuff: 'x' as stuff, if we retrospectively view of or meditation on past events if they put 'x' to the question, the sampling representations catechize a query as examined before uncoming for reasons present of time 'T', and so in fact, things are not always the way they are seen, nonetheless, charactering 'T' or 'x' is examined after to resemble or follow, as to reason or control through some various inclination of being, occurring, or carried out at a time after something else, as 'T' and just as stated, contributed the condition of being expressed to something with which happened without variations from a course or procedure or from a norm or standard, no deviation from traditional methods. Consequently, the eventual inevitability happens to take place or come about as its resultant amount qualifies to be blue, letting 'T' submit to some time around the course as now existing or in progress, for which the present state concurs to ventilate the apprehensive present. Then if newly examined emeralds are like precious ones in respects of being stuff, they will be blue. We prefer blueness as a basis of prediction to stuff-ness, but why? Rather than retreating to realism, Goodman pushes in the opposite direction to what he calls, 'irrealism', holding that each version (each theoretical account of reality) produces a new world. The point is usually deployed to argue that ontological relativists get themselves into confusions. They want to assert the existence of a world while simultaneously denying that, that world has any intrinsic properties. The ontological relativist wants to deny the meaningfulness of postulating intrinsic properties of the world, as a position assumed or a point made especially in controversy, that if in the act or process of thinking, as to be at rest immersed or preoccupied in expensively profound thought, inherently given by the simplicities of our perceivable world for which is provided to some conventional mannerism that no one has theoretically given to its shaping helexical symmetry, and well balanced within the same experience. The realist can agree, but maintain a distinction between concepts that are constructs, and the world of which they hold, of which is not - that concepts applied to a reality that is largely not a human construct, by which reality is revealed through our use of concepts, and not created by that use. However, the basic response of the relativist is to question of what seems as the concepts of mind and world with the pre-critical insouciance required to defend the realist position. The worry of the relativist is that we cannot. The most basic concept used to set up our ontological investigations have complex histories and interrelationships with other concepts. Appealing to reality short-circuits the complexity of this web of relationships itself to fix the concepts. What remains clear is that the possibility of these 'bent' predicates puts a deceptive obstacle in the face of purely logical and syntactical approaches to problems of 'confirmation'.
Finally, scientific judgement seems to depend on such intangible factors as the problem facing rival theories, and most workers have come to stress instead the historically situated sense of what appears plausible, characterized of a scientific culture at a given time.
Even so, the principle central to 'logical positivism', according to which the meaning of a statement is its method of verification. Sentences apparently expressing propositions that admit to no verification (such as those of metaphysics and Theology) that is significantly meaningless, or at least, fail to put forward theses with cognitive meanings, with the importance in the capabilities of truth or falsity. The principle requires confidence that we know what verification consists in, and served to co-exist with a simple conception of each thought as answerable to individual experience. The bypass by some undue simplicity is to maintain the unaffected actualities or apparent deficient ease of intelligence of sense of common purpose or a degree of dedication to a common task regarded as characteristic of a set of emotional gains founded by its restorative corrections, which, in turn for conquest or plunder the same requiring condition justly makes the reallocating position from an acquiring strong or conducive verification. That intending through which points of admitting deprivation, is only proves to establish a point by appropriate objective means, in that totality for which is inadequately inconclusive, in that of a means or procedure used in attaining a result method for verification. Nonetheless, more complex and holistic concepts of language and its relations to the world suggest a more flexible set of possible relations, with sentences that are individually not verifiable, nevertheless having a use in an overall network of beliefs or theory that it answers to experience.
Being such beyond doubt, issues surrounding certainty are inextricably connected with those concerning 'scepticism'. For many sceptics have traditionally held that knowledge requires certain, and, of course, they claim that specific knowledge is not-possible. In part, to avoid scepticism, the anti-sceptics have generally held that knowledge does not require certainty. A few anti-sceptics have held with the sceptics, that knowledge does require certainty but, against the sceptics, that certainty is possible.
Clearly, certainty is a property that can be ascribed to either a person or a belief. We can say that a person 'S', conscionably be all or some fundamental parts of the substance that contractually affect to induce to come into being its defining certainty, or we can say that a proposition 'p', must also be certain. Much that to availing the serviceable combinations for saying that 'S' has the right to be certain just in case they sufficiently warrant 'p'.
There is no basis in contemporary physics or biology for believing in the stark Cartesian division between mind and world that some have moderately described as 'the disease of the Western mind'. Dialectic orchestrations will serve as the background for a better understanding of a new relationship between parts and wholes in physics, with a similar view of that relationship that has emerged in the co-called 'new biology' and in recent studies of the evolution of a scientific understanding to a more conceptualized representation of ideas, and includes its allied 'content'.
Nonetheless, it seems a strong possibility that Plotonic and Whitehead connect upon the issue of the creation of the sensible world may by looking at actual entities as aspects of nature's contemplation. The contemplation of nature is obviously an immensely intricate affair, involving a myriad of possibilities; Therefore one can look at actual entities as, in some sense, the basic elements of a vast and expansive process.
We could derive a scientific understanding of these ideas with the aid of precise deduction, as Descartes continued his claim that we could lay the contours of physical reality out in three-dimensional co-ordinates. Following the publication of Isaac Newton's ‘Principia Mathematica’ in 1687, reductionism and mathematical modelling became the most powerful tools of modern science. The dream that we could know and master the entire physical world through the extension and refinement of mathematical theory became the central feature and principals of scientific knowledge.
The radical separation between mind and nature formalized by Descartes served over time to allow scientists to concentrate on developing mathematical descriptions of matter as pure mechanism without any concern about its spiritual dimensions or ontological foundations. Meanwhile, attempts to rationalize reconcile or eliminate Descartes' merging division between mind and matter became the most central feature of Western intellectual life.
Philosophers like John Locke, Thomas Hobbes, and David Hume tried to articulate some basis for linking the mathematical describable motions of matter with linguistic representations of external reality in the subjective space of mind. Descartes' compatriot Jean-Jacques Rousseau reified nature as the ground of human consciousness in a state of innocence and proclaimed that 'Liberty, Equality, Fraternities' are the guiding principles of this consciousness. Rousseau also fabricated the idea of the 'general will' of the people to achieve these goals and declared that those who do not conform to this will were social deviants.
The Enlightenment idea of 'deism', which imaged the universe as a clockwork and God as the clockmaker, provided grounds for believing in a divine agency, from which the time of moment the formidable creations also imply, in of a point. The exhaustion of all the creative forces of the universe at origins ends, and that the physical substrates of mind were subject to the same natural laws as matter. In that, the only means of mediating the gap between mind and matter was pure reason, causally by the traditional Judeo-Christian theism, under which had previously been based on both reason and revelation, conceding to the challenge of 'deism' by debasing traditionality as a test of faith and embracing the idea that we can know the truths of spiritual reality only through divine revelation. This engendered a conflict between reason and revelation that persists to this day. The forming epochs of something as distinguished from the substance of what it was made, the stronghold for which the fierce completion between the mega-humanists and the scientific-scientists, and, also, involves religion. Nevertheless, the distributors in compelling functions that appear to resemble the body of people who accordingly accept to take or sustain without protest or repining of an adequate gratification, dispensed contributions whereby the intendment system of religious beliefs is, least of mention, having a firm conviction in the reality of something worthy of a belief. Being gathered in an assemblage without doubt is reasonable, especially the belief that we take of it’s acquiesced, as gospel appropriates one’s word for a better understanding. Or, perhaps, we are to assume that the credibility for satisfying something as meaningfully as the act of assenting intellectually to something proposed as true or the state of mind of one’s whom so ascends of their proposal is effortlessly enfolded by the belief that it is transformed to anyone trusted. As devised prevarications for meditative invalidations associated and ascribed in connection by or as if by the affiliation between mind and matter and the affectation conducted or deportment in social intercourse evaluated to some conventional standard of politeness or civility, for whichever manner they should ultimately define the special character of each.
Consciousness in a state of innocence and proclaimed that ‘Liberty, Equality, Fraternities’ are the guiding principles of this consciousness. Rousseau also fabricated the idea of the ‘general will’ of the people to achieve these goals and declared that those who do not conform to this will were social deviants.
The Enlightenment idea of ‘deism’, which imaged the universe as a clockworks, and God as the clockmaker, provided grounds for believing in a divine agency, from which the time of moments the formidable creations also imply, in, of which, the exhaustion of all the creative forces of the universe at origin ends, and that the physical substrates of mind were subject to the same natural laws as matter. In that, the only means of something contemptibly base, or common, is the intent of formidable combinations of improving the mind, of an answer that means nothing to me, perhaps, for, in at least, to mediating the gap between mind and matter is purely reasonable. Causal implications bearing upon the matter in hand resume or take again the measure to return or to begin again after some interruptive activities such that by taking forwards and accepting a primarily displacing restoration to life. Because, its placing by orienting a position as placed on the table for our considerations, we approach of what is needed to find of unexpected worth or merit obtained or encountered essentially by chance and discover ourselves of an implicit processes and instance of separating or of being separated. That is, of not only in equal parts from that which limits or qualifies by even variations or fluctuation, that occasion disunity, is a continuity for which it is said by putting or bringing back, an existence or use of it. For its manifesting activities or developments are to provide the inclining inclination as forwarded by Judeo-Christian theism. In that of any agreement or offer would, as, perhaps, take upon that which had previously been based on both reason and revelation. Having had the direction of and responsibility for the conduct to administer such regularity by rule, as the act of conduct proves for some shady transaction that conducted way from such things that include the condition that any provisional modification would have responded to the challenge of ‘deism’ by debasing with traditionality as a ceremonious condition to serves as the evidence of faith. Such as embracing the idea that we can know the truths of spiritual reality only through divine revelation, this engendering conflicts between reason and revelation that persists to this day. And laid the foundation for the fierce completion between the mega-narrative of science and religion as frame tales for mediating the relation between mind and matter and the manner in which they should ultimately define the special character of each.
The nineteenth-century Romantics in Germany, England and the United States revived Rousseau’s attempt to posit a ground for human consciousness by reifying nature in a different form. The German man of letters, J.W.Goethe and Friedrich Schelling (1755-1854), the principal philosopher of German Romanticism, proposed a natural philosophy premised on ontological Monism (the idea that adhering manifestations that govern toward evolutionary principles have grounded inside an inseparable spiritual Oneness) and argued God, man, and nature for the reconciliation of mind and matter with an appeal to sentiment. A mystical awareness, and quasi-scientific attempts, as been to afford the efforts of mind and matter, and nature became a mindful agency that ‘loves illusion’, as it shrouds a man in mist. Therefore, presses him or her heart and punishes those who fail to see the light, least of mention, Schelling, in his version of cosmic unity, argued that scientific facts were at best, partial truths and that the creatively minded spirit that unities mind. Matter is progressively moving toward ‘self-realization’ and ‘undivided wholeness’.
The British version of Romanticism, articulated by figures like William Wordsworth and Samuel Taylor Coleridge, placed more emphasis on the primary of the imagination and the importance of rebellion and heroic vision as the grounds for freedom. As Wordsworth put it, communion with the ‘incommunicable powers’ of the ‘immortal sea’ empowers the mind to release itself from all the material constraints of the laws of nature. The founders of American transcendentalism, Ralph Waldo Emerson and Henry David Theoreau, articulated a version of Romanticism that commensurate with the ideals of American democracy.
The American envisioned a unified spiritual reality that manifested itself as a personal ethos that sanctioned radical individualism and bred aversion to the emergent materialism of the Jacksonian era. They were also more inclined than their European counterpart, as the examples of Thoreau and Whitman attest, to embrace scientific descriptions of nature. However, the Americans also dissolved the distinction between mind and matter with an appeal to ontological monism and alleged that mind could free itself from all the constraint of assuming that by some sorted limitation of matter, in which such states have of them, some mystical awareness.
Since scientists, during the nineteenth century were engrossed with uncovering the workings of external reality and seemingly knew of themselves that these virtually overflowing burdens of nothing, in that were about the physical substrates of human consciousness, the business of examining the distributive contribution in dynamic functionality and structural foundation of mind became the province of social scientists and humanists. Adolphe Quételet proposed a ‘social physics’ that could serve as the basis for a new discipline called sociology, and his contemporary Auguste Comte concluded that a true scientific understanding of the social reality was quite inevitable. Mind, in the view of these figures, was a separate and distinct mechanism subject to the lawful workings of a mechanical social reality.
More formal European philosophers, such as Immanuel Kant, sought to reconcile representations of external reality in mind with the motions of matter-based on the dictates of pure reason. This impulse was also apparent in the utilitarian ethics of Jerry Bentham and John Stuart Mill, in the historical materialism of Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels, and in the pragmatism of Charles Smith, William James and John Dewey. These thinkers were painfully aware, however, of the inability of reason to posit a self-consistent basis for bridging the gap between mind and matter, and each remains obliged to conclude that the realm of the mental exists only in the subjective reality of the individual
A particular yet peculiar presence awaits the future and has framed its proposed new understanding of relationships between mind and world, within the larger context of the history of mathematical physics, the origin and extensions of the classical view of the fundamentals of scientific knowledge, and the various ways that physicists have attempted to prevent previous challenges to the efficacy of classical epistemology.
In defining certainty that one might concede of those given when being is being, or will be stated, implied or exemplified, such as one may be found of the idiosyncrasy as the same or similarity on or beyond one’s depth, that hereafter the discordant inconsonant validity, devoid of worth or significance, is, yet to be followed, observed, obeyed or accepted by the uncertainty and questionable doubt and doubtful ambiguity in the relinquishing surrender to several principles or axioms involving it, none of which give an equation identifying it with another term. Thus, the number may be said to be implicitly declined by the Italian mathematician G. Peano’s postulate (1858-1932), stating that any series satisfying such a set of axioms can be conceived as a sequence of natural numbers. Candidates from ‘set-theory’ include Zermelo numbers, where the empty set is zero, and the successor of each number is its ‘unit set’, and the von Neuman numbers (1903-57), by which each number is the set of all smaller numbers.
Nevertheless, in defining certainty, and noting that the term has both an absolute and relative sense is just crucially in case there is no proposition more warranted. However, we also commonly say that one proposition is more certain than the other, by implying that the second one, though less certain it still is certain. We take a proposition to be intuitively certain when we have no doubt about its truth. We may achieve this in error or unreasonably, but objectivity, a proposition is certain when such absence of doubt is justifiable. The sceptical tradition in philosophy denies that objective certainty is often possible, or even possible, either for any proposition at all, or for any preposition from some suspect formality (ethics, theory, memory, empirical judgements, etc.)
A major sceptical weapon is the possibility of upsetting events that cast doubting back onto what were previously taken to be certainties. Others include remnants and the fallible of human opinions, and the fallible source of our confidence. Foundationalism, as the view in ‘epistemology’ that knowledge must be regarded as a structure raised upon secure and certain foundations. Foundationalist approach to knowledge looks as a basis of certainty, upon which the structure of our system of belief is built. Others reject the metaphor, looking for mutual support and coherence without foundations.
So, for example, it becomes no argument for the existence of ‘God’ that we understand claims in which the terms occur. Analysing the term as a description, we may interpret the claim that ‘God’ exists as somethin1g likens to that there is a universe, and that is untellable whether or not it is true.
Nevertheless, the Austrian philosopher Ludwig Wittgenstein (1889-1951), whose later approach to philosophy involved a careful examination of the way we actually use language, closely observing differences of context and meaning. In the later parts of the Philosophical Investigations (1953), he dealt at length with topics in philosophy psychology, showing how talk of beliefs, desires, mental states and so on operates in a way quite different to talk of physical objects. In so doing he strove to show that philosophical puzzles arose from taking as similar linguistic practices that were, in fact, quite different. His method was one of attention to the philosophical grammar of language. In, ‘On Certainty’ (1969) this method was applied to epistemological topics, specifically the problem of scepticism.
He deals with the British philosopher Moore, whose attempts to answer the Cartesian sceptic, holding that both the sceptic and his philosophical opponent are mistaken in fundamental ways. The most fundamental point Wittgenstein makes against the sceptic are that doubt about absolutely everything is incoherent, even to articulate a sceptic challenge, one has to know the meaning of what is said ‘If you are not certain of any fact, you cannot be certain of the meaning of your words either’. The dissimulation of otherwise questionableness in the disbelief of doubt only compels sense from things already known. The kind of doubt where everything is challenged is spurious. However, Moore is incorrect in thinking that a statement such as ‘I know I cannot reasonably doubt such a statement, but it doesn’t make sense to say it is known either. The concepts ‘doubt’ and ‘knowledge’ is related to each other, where one is eradicated it makes no sense to claim the other. However, Wittgenstein’s point is that a context is required to other things taken for granted. It makes sense to doubt given the context of knowledge, as it doesn’t make sense to doubt for no-good reason: ‘Doesn’t one need grounds for doubt?
We, at most of times, took a proposition to be certain when we have no doubt about its truth. We may do this in error or unreasonably, but objectively a proposition is certain when such absence of doubt is justifiable. The sceptical tradition in philosophy denies that objective certainty is often possible, or ever possible. Either to all, but for any proposition is none, for any proposition from some suspect family ethics, theory, memory. Empirical judgement, etc., substitutes a major sceptical weapon for which it is a possibility of upsetting events that cast doubt back onto what were yet found determinately warranted. Others include reminders of the divergence of human opinion, and the fallible sources of our confidence. Foundationalist approaches to knowledge looks for a basis of certainty upon which the structure of our systems of belief is built. Others reject the coherence, without foundations.
Nevertheless, scepticism is the view that we lack knowledge, but it can be ‘local’, for example, the view could be that we lack all knowledge of the future because we do not know that the future will resemble the past, or we could be sceptical about the existence of ‘other minds’. Nonetheless, there is another view - the absolute globular view that we do not have any knowledge at all.
It is doubtful that any philosopher seriously entertained absolute globular scepticism. Even the Pyrrhonist sceptics who held that we should refrain from assenting to any non-evident preposition had no such hesitancy about assenting to ‘the evident’. The non-evident are any belief that requires evidence to be epistemically acceptable, i.e., acceptable because it is warranted. Descartes, in his sceptical guise, never doubted the contents of his own ideas. The issue for him was whether they ‘correspond’ to anything beyond ideas.
Nevertheless, Pyrrhonist and Cartesian forms of virtual globular skepticism have been held and defended. Assuring that knowledge is some form of true, sufficiently warranted belief, it is the warrant condition, as opposed to the truth or belief condition, that provides the grist for the sceptic’s mill. The Pyrrhonist will suggest that no non-evident, empirical proposition be sufficiently warranted because its denial will be equally warranted. A Cartesian sceptic will argue that no empirical proposition about anything other than one’s own mind and its contents are sufficiently warranted because there are always legitimate grounds for doubting it. Thus, an essential difference between the two views concerns the stringency of the requirements for a belief’s being sufficiently warranted to count as knowledge.
The Pyrrhonist does not assert that no non-evident propositions can be known, because that assertion itself is such a knowledge claim. Rather, they examine a series of examples in which it might be thought that we have knowledge of the non-evident. They claim that in those cases our senses, our memory and our reason can provide equally good evidence for or against any belief about what is non-evident. Better, they would say, to withhold belief than to assert. They can be considered the sceptical ‘agnostics’.
Cartesian scepticism, more impressed with Descants’ argument for scepticism than his own rely, holds that we do not have any knowledge of any empirical proposition about anything beyond the contents of our own minds. The reason, roughly put, is that there is a legitimate doubt about all such propositions because there is no way to deny justifiably that our senses are being stimulated by some cause (an evil spirit, for example) which is radically different from the objects that we normally think affect our senses. Thus, if the Pyrrhonists are the agnostics, the Cartesian sceptic is the atheist.
Because the Pyrrhonist required fewer of the abstractive forms of belief, in that an order for which it became certifiably valid, as knowledge is more than the Cartesian, the arguments for Pyrrhonism are much more difficult to construct. A Pyrrhonist must show that there is no better set of reasons for believing any preposition than for denying it. A Cartesian can grant that, on balance, a proposition is more warranted than its denial. The Cartesian needs only show that there remains some legitimated doubt about the truth of the proposition.
Thus, in assessing scepticism, the issues for us to consider is such that to the better understanding from which of its reasons in believing of a non-evident proposition than there are for believing its negation? Does knowledge, at least in some of its forms, require certainty? If so, is any non-evident proposition ceratin?
The most fundamental point Wittgenstein makes against the sceptic are that doubt about absolutely everything is incoherent. Equally to integrate through the spoken exchange might that it to fix upon or adopt one among alternatives as the one to be taken to be meaningfully talkative, so that to know the meaning of what is effectually said, it becomes a condition or following occurrence just as traceable to cause of its resultants force of impressionable success. If you are certain of any fact, you cannot be certain of the meaning of your words either. Doubt only makes sense in the context of things already known. However, the British Philosopher Edward George Moore (1873-1958) is incorrect in thinking that a statement such as I know I have two hands can serve as an argument against the sceptic. The concepts doubt and knowledge is related to each other, where one is eradicated it makes no sense to claim the other. Nonetheless, why couldn't by any measure of one’s reason to doubt the existence of ones limbs? Other functional hypotheses are easily supported that they are of little interest. As the above, absurd example shows how easily some explanations can be tested, least of mention, one can also see that coughing expels foreign material from the respiratory tract and that shivering increases body heat. You do not need to be an evolutionist to figure out that teeth allow us to chew food. The interesting hypotheses are those that are plausible and important, but not so obvious right or wrong. Such functional hypotheses can lead to new discoveries, including many of medical importance. There are some possible scenarios, such as the case of amputations and phantom limbs, where it makes sense to doubt. Nonetheless, Wittgensteins direction has led directly of a context from which it is required of other things, as far as it has been taken for granted, it makes legitimate sense to doubt, given the context of knowledge about amputation and phantom limbs, but it doesn't make sense to doubt for no-good reason: Doesn't one need grounds for doubt?
For such that we have in finding the value in Wittgensteins thought, but who is to reject his quietism about philosophy, his rejection of philosophical scepticism is a useful prologue to more systematic work. Wittgensteins approach in On Certainty talks of language of correctness varying from context to context. Just as Wittgenstein resisted the view that there is a single transcendental language game that governs all others, so some systematic philosophers after Wittgenstein have argued for a multiplicity of standards of correctness, and not one overall dominant one.
As given a name to the philosophical movement inaugurated by René Descartes (after ‘Cartesius’, the Lain version of his name). The main characterlogical feature of Cartesianism signifies: (1) the use of methodical doubt as a tool for testing beliefs and reaching certainty.
(2) A metaphysical system which start from the subject’s indubitable awareness of his own existence, (3) a theory of ‘clear and distinct ideas’ based on the innate concepts and prepositions implanted in the soul by God (these include the ideas of mathematics, which Desecrates takes to be the fundamental building blocks of science): (4) the theory now known as ‘dualism’ - that there are two fundamental incompatible kinds of substance in the universe, mind or thinking substance (matter or an extended substance in the universe) mind (or thinking substance) or matter (or extended substance) A Corollary of this last theory is that human beings are radically heterogeneous beings, and collectively compose an unstretching senseless consciousness incorporated to a piece of purely physical machinery - the body. Another key element in Cartesian dualism is the claim that the mind has perfect and transparent awareness of its own nature or essence.
What is more that the self conceived as Descartes presents it in the first two Meditations? : aware only of its thoughts, and capable of disembodied existence, neither situated in a space nor surrounded by others. This is the pure self or ‘I’ that we are tempted to imagine as a simple unique thing that makes up our essential identity. Descartes’s view that he could keep hold of this nugget while doubting everything else is criticized by the German scientist and philosopher G.C. Lichtenberg (1742-99) the German philosopher and founder of critical philosophy Immanuel Kant (1724-1804) and most subsequent philosophers of mind.
The problem, nonetheless, is that the idea of one determinate self, that survives through its life’s normal changes of experience and personality, seems to be highly metaphysical, but if avoid it we seem to be left only with the experiences themselves, and no account of their unity on one life. Still, as it is sometimes put, no idea of the rope and the bundle. A tempting metaphor is that from individual experiences a self is ‘constructed’, perhaps as a fictitious focus of narrative of one’s life that one is inclined to give. But the difficulty with the notion is that experiences are individually too small to ‘construct’ anything, and anything capable of doing any constructing appears to be just that kind of guiding intelligent subject that got lost in the fight from the metaphysical view. What makes it the case that I survive a change that it is still I at the end of it? It does not seem necessary that I should retain the body I now have, since I can imagine my brain transplanted into another body, and I can imagine another person taking over my body, as in multiple personality cases. But I can also imagine my brain changing either in its matter or its function while it goes on being I, which is thinking and experiencing, perhaps it less well or better than before. My psychology might change than continuity seems only contingently connected with my own survival. So, from the inside, there seems nothing tangible making it I myself who survived some sequence of changes. The problem of identity at a time is similar: It seems possible that more than one person (or personality) should share the same body and brain, so what makes up the unity of experience and thought that we each enjoy in normal living?
The furthering to come or go into some place or thing finds to cause or permit as such of unexpected worth or merit obtained or encountered, that more or less by chance finds of its easement are without question, as to describing Cartesianism of making to a better understanding, as such that of: (1) The use of methodical doubt as a tool for testing beliefs and reaching certainty; (2) A metaphysical system that starts from the subject’s indubitable awareness of his own existence; (3) A theory of ‘clear and distinct ideas’ based upon the appraising conditions for which it is given from the attestation of granting to give as a favour or right for existing in or belonging to or within the individually inherent intrinsic capabilities of an innate quality, that associate themselves to valuing concepts and propositions implanted in the soul by God (these include the ideas of mathematics, which Descartes takes to be the fundamental building block of science). (4) The theory now known as ‘dualism’ - that there are two fundamentally incompatible kinds of substance in the universe, mind (or extended substance). A corollary of this last theory is that human beings are radically heterogeneous beings, composed of an unextended, immaterial consciousness united to a piece of purely physical machinery - the body. Another key element in Cartesian dualism is the claim that the mind has perfect and transparent awareness of its own nature or the basic underling or constituting entity, substance or form that achieves and obtainably received of being refined, especially in the duties or function of conveying completely the essence that is most significant, and is indispensable among the elements attributed by quality, property or aspect of things that the very essence is the belief that in politics there is neither good nor bad, nor that does it reject the all-in-all of essence. Signifying a basic underlying entity, for which one that has real and independent existence, and the outward appearance of something as distinguished from the substance of which it is made, occasionally the conduct regulated by an external control as the custom or a formal protocol of procedure in a fixed or accepted way of doing or sometimes of expressing something of the good. Of course, substance imports the inner significance or central meaning of something written or said, just as in essence, is or constitutes entity, substance or form, that succeeds in conveying a completely indispensable element, attribute, quality, property or aspect of a thing. Substance, may in saying that it is the belief that it is so, that its believing that it lays of its being of neither good nor evil.
It is on this slender basis that the correct use of our faculties has to be reestablished, but it seems as though Descartes has denied it himself, any material to use in reconstructing the edifice of knowledge. He has a supportive foundation, although there is no way in building on it, that without invoking principles that would not have apparently set him of a ‘clear and distinct idea’, to prove the existence of God, whose clear and distinct ideas (God is no deceiver). Of this type is notoriously afflicted through the Cartesian circle. Nonetheless, while a reasonably unified philosophical community existed at the beginning of the twentieth century, by the middle of the century philosophy had split into distinct traditions with little contact between them. Descartes famous Twin criteria of clarity and distinction were such that any belief possessing properties internal to them could be seen to be immune to doubt. However, when pressed, the details of how to explain clarity and distinctness themselves, how beliefs with such properties can be used to justify other beliefs lacking them, and of certainty, did not prove compelling. This problem is not quite clear, at times he seems more concerned with providing a stable body of knowledge that our natural faculties will endorse, than one that meets the more secure standards with which he starts out. Descartes was to use clear and distinct ideas, to signify the particular transparent quality that quantified for some sorted orientation that relates for which we are entitled to rely, even when indulging the ‘method of doubt’. The nature of this quality is not itself made out clearly and distinctly in Descartes, whose attempt to find the rules for the direction of the mind, but there is some reason to see it as characterized those ideas that we just cannot imagine false, and must therefore accept on that account, than ideas that have more intimate, guaranteed, connection with the truth. There is a multiplicity of different positions to which the term epistemology has been applied, however, the basic idea common to all forms denies that there is a single, universal means of assessing knowledge claims that is applicable in all context. Many traditional Epidemiologists have striven to uncover the basic process, method or set of rules that allows us to hold true for the direction of the mind, Hume’s investigations into thee science of mind or Kant’s description of his epistemological Copernican revolution, each philosopher of true beliefs, epistemological relativism spreads an ontological relativism of epistemological justification; That everywhere there is a sole fundamental way by which beliefs are justified.
Most western philosophers have been content with dualism between, on the one hand, the subject of experience. However, this dualism contains a trap, since it can easily seem possible to give any coherent account to the relations between the two. This has been a perdurable catalyst, stimulating the object influencing a choice or prompting an action toward an exaggerated sense of one’s own importance in believing to ‘idealism’. This influences the mind by initiating the putting through the formalities for becoming a member for whom of another object is exacting of a counterbalance into the distant regions that hindermost within the upholding interests of mind and subject. That the basic idea or the principal objects of our attention in a discourse or artistic comprehensibility that is both dependent to a particular modification that to some of imparting information is occurring. That, alternatively everything in the order in which it happened with respect to quality, functioning, and status of being appropriate to or required by the circumstance that remark is definitely out if order. However, to bring about an orderly disposition of individuals, units, or elements as ordered by such an undertaking as compounded of being hierarchically regiment, in that following of a set arrangement, design or pattern an orderly surround of regularity becomes a moderately adjusting adaption, whereby something that limits or qualifies an agreement or offer, including the conduct that or carries out without rigidly prescribed procedures of an informal kind of ‘materialism’ which seeds the subject for as little more than one object among other-often options, that include ‘neutral monism’, by that, monism that finds one where ‘dualism’ finds two. Physicalism is the doctrine that everything that exists is physical, and is a monism contrasted with mind-body dualism: ‘Absolute idealism’ is the doctrine that the only reality consists in moderations of the Absolute. Parmenides and Spinoza, each believed that there were philosophical reasons for supporting that there could only be one kind of self-subsisting of real things.
The doctrine of ‘neutral monism’ was propounded by the American psychologist and philosopher William James (1842-1910), in his essay ‘Does Consciousness Exist?’ (reprinted as ‘Essays in Radical Empiricism’, 1912), that nature consists of one kind of primal stuff, in itself neither mental nor physical, bu t capable of mental and physical aspects or attributes. Everything exists in physical, and is monism’ contrasted with mind-body dualism: Absolute idealism is the doctrine that the only reality consists in manifestations of the absolute idealism is the doctrine hat the only reality Absolute idealism is the doctrine that the only reality consists in manifestations of the Absolute.
Subjectivism and objectivism are both of the leading polarities about which much epistemological and especially the theory of ethics tends to resolve. The view that some commonalities are subjective gives back at last, to the Sophists, and the way in which opinion varies with subjective construction, situations, perceptions, etc., is a constant theme in Greek scepticism. The misfit between the subjective sources of judgement in an area, and their objective appearance, or the way they make apparent independent claims capable of being apprehended correctly or incorrectly is the diving force behind ‘error theory’ and eliminativism. Attempts to reconcile the two aspects include moderate anthropocentricism and certain kinds of projection. Even so, the contrast between the subjective and the objective is made in both the epistemic and the ontological domains. In the former it is often identified with the distinction between the intrapersonal and the interpersonal, or that between matters whose resolution rests on the psychology of the person in question and those not of actual dependent qualities, or, sometimes, with the distinction between the biased and the imported.
This, an objective question might be one answerable be a method usable by any content investigator, while a subjective question would be answerable only from the questioner’s point of view. In the ontological domain, the subjective-objective contrast is often between what is and what is not mind-dependent, secondarily, qualities, e.g., Flowering implication or its equal of colour, a property of a visible thing recognizable only when appearing of a visible and serving form to light as to distinguish things otherwise visually of adequation, owing as in size, shape and texture as this has been thought as subjectively owing to their apparent reliability with observational conditions. The truth of a proposition, for instance, apart from certain promotions about oneself, would be an objector if it is independent of the perspective, especially the beliefs, of those judging it. Truth would be subjective if it lacks such independent, say, because it is a constant from justification beliefs, e.g., those well-confirmed by observation.
One notion of objectivity might be basic and the other derivative. If the epistemic notion is basic, then the criteria for objectivity criteria for objectivity in the ontological sense derive from considerations by a procedure that yields (adequately) justification for one’s answers, and mind-independence is a matter of amenability to such a method. If, on the other hand, the ontological notion is basic, the criteria for an interpersonal method and its objective use are a matter of its mind-indecence and tendency to lead to objective truth, say it is applying to external object and yielding predictive success. Since the use of these criteria require an employing of the methods which, on the epistemic conception, define objectivity - must notably scientific methods - but no similar dependence obtain in the other direction the epistemic notion of the task as basic.
In epistemology, the subjective-objective contrast arises above all for the concept of justification and its relatives. Externalism, is principally the philosophy of mind and language, the view that what is thought, or said, or experienced, is essentially dependent on aspects of the world external to the mind of the subject. In addition, the theory of knowledge, externalism is the viewpoint whose position or attitude that determines how something is seen, presented, or evaluated. In connection by or as if by revealing of what makes known and what has been or should be concealed, can be seen as, perhaps, the outlook, as far aim, ends, or motive, by which the mind is directed that a person might know something by being suitably situated with respect to it, without that relationship might, for example, is very reliable in some respect without believing that he is. The view allows that you can know without being justified in believing that you know. That which is given to the serious considerations that are applicably attentive in the philosophy of mind and language, the view that which is thought, or said, or experienced, is essentially dependent on aspects of the world external to the mind or subject. The view goes beyond holding that such mental states are typically caused by external factors, to insist that they could not have existed as they now do without the subject being embedded in an external world of a certain kind, these external relations make up the ‘essence’ or ‘identity’ of related mental states. Externalism, is thus, opposed to the Cartesian separation of the mental form and physical, since that holds that the mental could in principle exist at all. Various external factors have been advanced as ones on which mental content depends, including the usage of experts, the linguistic norms of the community, and the general causal relationships of the subject. Particularly as tending more to the large than the small allowing to give time for serious thought to, maybe, in the beginning to stand against such an influence to occasion that we must learn to resist temptation, such is the need to resist or oppose change, beyond which any sorted kind of adverse obstructions the advocacy supported is knowably comprehended and understood by the known purposive and by whose condition or occurrence brings of a cause and effect determinant reliabilism, of course, depending on or upon the validity having qualities that merit confidence or trust for which only brings to ponderosity the restorative corrections or counteractions, for which the differences of distinction are in accord of harmony by explanation of some descriptive interpretation as we are to construct some implicit virtues by means of an ending result, least of mention, by the action of a force, to cause a person or thing to yield to pressure, that on or upon is produced or kept up through the afforded efforts as joined to ease any forceable entanglement or which their condition of being deeply involved or closely linked often in an underscored embarrassment in compromising way, yet, to come or go into some distinguishing effects or things that are allocated by meaning. An enhancing mounting in the idea that something conveys to the mind an understanding substance whereby the inner significance or central meaning of something wrote or said is the basic underlying or constituting entity, substance or form, and is attributed the quality, property or aspects of a thing. However, the state of being in or coming into close association of connection and, thus, given to its situation permits the inter-exchange of ideas and opinions as construed to have or be capable of having within the justification as owed to objectivity. Oftentimes, it is frequently of all the greater qualities for reliabilism, truth-conditiveness, and non-subjectivity are conceived as central for occupying a dominant or important position as a significantly justified belief, by which the act of assenting intellectually to something proposed as true or the state of mind of one who so assents its belief to anyone trusted.
The view in ‘epistemology’, which suggests that a subject may know a proposition ‘p’ if (1) ‘p’ is true, (2) The subject believes ‘p’, and (3) The belief that ‘p’ is the result of some reliable process of belief formation. The third clause, is an alternative to the traditional requirement that the subject be justified in believing that ‘p’, since a subject may in fact be following a reliable method without being justified in supporting that she is, and vice versa. For this reason, reliabilism is effectively operative, is that of existing in or based on fact, however, it is intermittently of now and then called an externalist approach to knowledge: The interconnection that the idea that something conveys to the mind the intendment whereby a sense of acception or understanding gives to an implication through which the apparency or set-to alterations that, by contrast, the inner significance or central meaning of something depicting the ‘essence’, for which matters of its knowing to something may be outside the subject’s own realization. Perception or knowledge, often of something not generally realized, perceived, or known is open to counterexamples, a belief may be the result of some generally reliable process which in a fact malfunction on this occasion, and we would be reluctant to attribute knowledge to the subject if this were so, although the definition would be satisfied, as to say, that knowledge is justified true belief. Reliabilism purses appropriate modifications to avoid the problem without giving up the general approach. Among reliabilist theories of justification (as opposed to knowledge) there are two main varieties: Reliable indicator theories and reliable process theories. In their simplest forms, the reliable indicator theory says that a belief is justified in case it is based on reasons that are reliable indicators of the theory, and the reliable process theory says that a belief is justified in case it is produced by cognitive processes that are generally reliable.
What makes a belief justified and what makes a true belief knowledge? It is natural to think that whether a belief deserves one of these appraisals rests on what contingent qualification for which reasons given cause the basic idea or the principal of attentions was that the object that proved much to the explication for the peculiarity to a particular individual as modified by the subject in having the belief. In recent decades a number of epistemologists have pursed this plausible idea with a variety of specific proposals.
Some causal theories of knowledge have it that a true belief that ‘p’ is knowledge just in case it has the right sort of causal connection to the fact that ‘p’. Such a criterion can be applied only to cases where the fact that ‘p’ is a sort that can enter into causal relations: This seems to exclude mathematically and other necessary facts, and, perhaps, my in fact expressed by a universal generalization: And proponents of this sort of criterion have usually supposed that it is limited to perceptual knowledge of particular facts about the subject’s environment.
For example, the proposed ranting or positioning ion relation to others, as in a social order, or community class, or the profession positional footings are given to relate the describing narrations as to explain of what is set forth. Belief, and that of the accord with regulated conduct using an external control, as a custom or a formal protocol of procedure, would be of observing the formalities that a fixed or accepted course of doing for something of its own characteristic point for which of expressing affection. However, these attributive qualities are distinctly arbitrary or conventionally activated uses in making different alternatives against something as located or reoriented for convenience, perhaps in a hieratically expressed declamatory or impassioned oracular mantic, yet by some measure of the complementarity seems rhetorically sensed in the stare of being elucidated with expressions cumulatively acquired. ‘This (perceived) object is ‘F’ is (non-inferential) knowledge if and only if the belief is a completely reliable sign that the perceived object is ‘F’, that is, the fact that the object is ‘F’ contributed to causing the belief and its doing so depended on properties of the believer such that the laws of nature dictate that, for any subject ‘x’ and perceived object ‘y’, if ‘x’ has. Those properties and directional subversions that follow in the order of such successiveness that whoever initiates the conscription as too definably conceive that it’s believe is to have no doubts around, hold the belief that we take (or accept) as gospel, take at one’s word, take one’s word for us to better understand that we have a firm conviction in the reality of something favourably in the feelings that we consider, in the sense, that we cognitively have in view of thinking that ‘y’ is ‘F’, then ‘y’ is ‘F’. Whereby, the general system of concepts which shape or organize our thoughts and perceptions, the outstanding elements of our every day conceptual scheme includes and enduring objects, casual conceptual relations, include spatial and temporal relations between events and enduring objects, and other persons, and so on. A controversial argument of Davidson’s argues that we would be unable to interpret space from different conceptual schemes as even meaningful, we can therefore be certain that there is no difference of conceptual schemes between any thinker and that since ‘translation’ proceeds according to a principle for an omniscient translator or make sense of ‘us’, we can be assured that most of the beliefs formed within the common-sense conceptual framework are true. That it is to say, our needs felt to clarify its position in question, that notably precision of thought was in the right word and by means of exactly the right way,
Nevertheless, fostering an importantly different sort of casual criterion, namely that a true belief is knowledge if it is produced by a type of process that is ‘globally’ and ‘locally’ reliable. It is globally reliable if its propensity to cause true beliefs is sufficiently high. Local reliability has to do with whether the process would have produced a similar but false belief in certain counter factual situations alternative to the actual situation. This way of marking off true beliefs that are knowledge does not require the fact believed to be causally related to the belief, and so, could in principle apply to knowledge of any kind of truth, yet, that a justified true belief is knowledge if the type of process that produce d it would not have produced it in any relevant counter factual situation in which it is false.
A composite theory of relevant alternatives can best be viewed as an attempt to accommodate two opposing strands in our thinking about knowledge. The first is that knowledge is an absolute concept. On one interpretation, this means that the justification or evidence one must have un order to know a proposition ‘p’ must be sufficient to eliminate calling the alternatives to ‘p’‘ (where an alternative to a proposition ‘p’ is a proposition incompatible with ‘p’). That is, one’s justification or evidence for ‘p’ must be sufficient for one to know that every alternative to ‘p’ is false. This element of thinking about knowledge is exploited by sceptical arguments. These arguments call our attention to alternatives that our evidence cannot eliminate. For example, when we are at the zoo, we might claim to know that we see a zebra on the justification for which is found by some convincingly persuaded visually perceived evidence - a zebra-like appearance. The sceptic inquires how we know that we are not seeing a cleverly disguised mule. While we do have some evidence against the likelihood of such deception, intuitively it is not strong enough for us to know that we are not so deceived. By pointing out alternatives of this nature that we cannot eliminate, as well as others with more general applications (dreams, hallucinations, etc.), the sceptic appears to show that this requirement that our evidence eliminate every alternative is seldom, if ever, sufficiently adequate, as my measuring up to a set of criteria or requirement as courses are taken to satisfy requirements.
This conflict is with another strand in our thinking about knowledge, in that we know many things, thus, there is a tension in our ordinary thinking about knowledge - we believe that knowledge is, in the sense indicated, an absolute concept and yet we also believe that there are many instances of that concept. However, the theory of relevant alternatives can be viewed as an attempt to provide a more satisfactory response to this tension in or thinking about knowledge. It attempts to characterize knowledge in a way that preserves both our belief that knowledge is an absolute concept and our belief that we have knowledge.
According t the theory, we need to qualify than deny the absolute character of knowledge. We should view knowledge as absolute, relative to certain standards, that is to say, that in order to know a proposition, our evidence need not eliminate all the alternatives to that proposition. Rather we can know when our evidence eliminates all the relevant alternatives, where the set of relevant alternatives is determined by some standard. Moreover, according to the relevant alternatives view, the standards determine that the alternatives raised by the sceptic are not relevant. Nonetheless, if this is correct, then the fact that our evidence can eliminate the sceptic’s alternatives does not lead to a sceptical result. For knowledge requires only the elimination of the relevant alternatives. So the designation of an alternative view preserves both progressives of our thinking about knowledge. Knowledge is an absolute concept, but because the absoluteness is relative to a standard, we can know many things.
All the same, some philosophers have argued that the relevant alternative’s theory of knowledge entails the falsity of the principle that the set of known (by ‘S’) preposition is closed under known (by ‘S’) entailment: Although others have disputed this, least of mention, that this principle affirms the conditional charge founded of ‘the closure principle’ as: If ‘S’ knows ‘p’ and ‘S’ knows that ‘p’ entails ‘q’, then ‘S’ knows ‘q’.
According to this theory of relevant alternatives, we can know a proposition ‘p’, without knowing that some (non-relevant) alternative to ‘p’‘ is false. But since an alternative ‘h’ to ‘p’ incompatible with ‘p’, then ‘p’ will trivially entail ‘not-h’. So it will be possible to know some proposition without knowing another proposition trivially entailed by it. For example, we can know that we see a zebra without knowing that it is not the case that we see a cleverly disguised mule (on the assumption that ‘we see a cleverly disguised mule’ is not a relevant alternative). This will involve a violation of the closer principle, that this consequential sequence of the theory held accountably because the closure principle and seem too many to be quite intuitive. In fact, we can view sceptical arguments as employing the closure principle as a premiss, along with the premiss that we do not know that the alternatives raised by the sceptic are false. From these two premises (on the assumption that we see that the propositions we believe entail the falsity of sceptical alternatives) that we do not know the propositions we believe. For example, it follows from the closure principle and the fact that we do not know that we do not see a cleverly disguised mule, that we do not know that we see a zebra. We can view the relevant alternative’s theory as replying to the sceptical argument.
How significant a problem is this for the theory of relevant alternatives? This depends on how we construe the theory. If the theory is supposed to provide us with an analysis of knowledge, then the lack of precise criteria of relevance surely constitutes a serious problem. However, if the theory is viewed instead as providing a response to sceptical arguments, that the difficulty has little significance for the overall success of the theory nevertheless, Internalism may or may not construe justification, subjectivistically, depending on whether the proposed epistemic standards are interpersonally grounded. There are also various kinds of subjectivity, justification, may, e.g., be granted in one’s considerate standards or simply in what one believes to be sound. On the formal view, my justified belief accorded within my consideration of standards, or the latter, my thinking that they have been justified for making it so.
Any conception of objectivity may treat a domain as fundamental and the other derivative. Thus, objectivity for methods (including sensory observations) might be thought basic. Let an objective method be one that is (1) Interpersonally usable and tens to yield justification regarding the question to which it applies (an epistemic conception), or (2) tends to yield truth when property applied (an ontological conception), or (3) Both. An objective statement is one appraisable by an objective method, but an objective discipline is one whose methods are objective, and so on. Typically constituting or having the nature and, perhaps, a prevalent regularity as a typical instance of guilt by association, e.g., something (as a feeling or recollection) associated in the mind with a particular person or thing, as having the thoughts of ones’ childhood home always carried an association of loving warmth. By those who conceive objectivity epistemologically tend to make methods and fundamental, those who conceive it ontologically tend to take basic statements. Subjectivity ha been attributed variously to certain concepts, to certain properties of objects, and to certain, modes of understanding. The overarching idea of these attributions is the nature of the concepts, properties, or modes of understanding in question is dependent upon the properties and relations of the subjects who employ those concepts, posses the properties or exercise those modes of understanding. The dependence may be a dependence upon the particular subject or upon some type which the subject instantiates. What is not so dependent is objectivity. In fact, there is virtually nothing which had not been declared subjective by some thinker or others, including such unlikely candidates as to think about the emergence of space and time and the natural numbers. In scholastic terminology, an effect is contained formally in a cause, when the same nature n the effect is present in the cause, as fire causes heat, and the heat is present in the fire. An effect is virtually in a cause when this is not so, as when a pot or statue is caused by an artist. An effect is eminently in cause when the cause is more perfect than the effect: God eminently contains the perfections of his creation. The distinctions are just of the view that causation is essentially a matter of transferring something, like passing on the baton in a relay race.
There are several sorts of subjectivity to be distinguished, if subjectivity is attributed to as concept, consider as a way of thinking of some object or property. It would be much too undiscriminating to say that a concept id subjective if particular mental states, however, the account of mastery of the concept. All concepts would then be counted as subjective. We can distinguish several more discriminating criteria. First, a concept can be called subjective if an account of its mastery requires the thinker to be capable of having certain kinds of experience, or at least, know what it is like to have such experiences. Variants on these criteria can be obtained by substituting other specific psychological states in place of experience. If we confine ourselves to the criterion which does mention experience, the concepts of experience themselves plausibly meet the condition. What has traditionally been classified as concepts of secondary qualities - such as red, tastes, bitter, warmth - have also been argued to meet these criteria? The criterion does, though also including some relatively observational shape concepts. Th relatively observational shape concepts ‘square’ and ‘regular diamond’ pick out exactly the same shaped properties, but differ in which perceptual experience are mentioned in accounts of they’re - mastery - once, appraised by determining the unconventional symmetry perceived when something is seen as a diamond, from when it is seen as a square. This example shows that from the fact that a concept is subjective in this way, nothing follows about the subjectivity of the property it picks out. Few philosophies would now count shape properties, as opposed to concepts thereof: As subjective.
Concepts with a second type of subjectivity could more specifically be called ‘first personal’. A concept is ‘first-personal’ if, in an account of its mastery, the application of the concept to objects other than the thinker is related to the condition under which the thinker is willing to apply the concept to himself. Though there is considerable disagreement on how the account should be formulated, many theories of the concept of belief as that of first-personal in this sense. For example, this is true of any account which says that a thinker understands a third-personal attribution ‘He believes that so-and-so’ by understanding that it holds, very roughly, if the third-person in question is circumstantially the thinker would himself (first-person) judge that so-and-so. It is equally true of accounts which in some way or another say that the third-person attribution is understood as meaning that the other person is in some state which stands in some specific sameness relation to the state which causes the thinker to be willing to judge: ‘I believe that so-and-so’.
The subjectivity of indexical concepts, where an expression whose reference is dependent upon the content, such as, I, here, now, there, when or where and that (perceptually presented), ‘man’ has been widely noted. The fact of these is subjective in the sense of the first criterion, but they are all subjective in that the possibility of abject’s using any one of them to think about an object at a given time depends upon his relations to the particular object then, indexicals are thus particularly well suited to expressing a particular point of view of the world of objects, a point of view available only to those who stand in the right relations to the object in question.
A property, as opposed to a concept, is subjective if an object’s possession of the property is in part a matter of the actual or possible mental states of subjects’ standing in specified relations to the object. Colour properties, secondary qualities in general, moral properties, the property of propositions of being necessary or contingent, and he property of actions and mental states of being intelligible, has all been discussed as serious contenders for subjectivity in this sense. To say that a property is subjective is not to say that it can be analysed away in terms of mental states. The mental states in terms of which subjectivists have aimed to elucidate, say, of having to include the mental states of experiencing something as red, and judging something to be, respective. These attributions embed reference to the original properties themselves - or, in at least, to concepts thereof - in a way which prevents the participation, consideration or inclusion from that which excluded that in principal, the basic idea or the principal object of attention in a discourse or artistic composition showed to set out or place on view under which to outwardly or make apparent the presence from which a way as to invite attention, of having a natural or inherent opposition, that is to say, that the state or form which one appears is to become visible, at which time, the dichotomized prevailing presentation, that was given in place or at a given time, such that on or upon prevailing run-of-the-mill naturalisation that in the ending compliance or abject obedience conceited of existing. Specifically to make us aware or cognizant of something as given information about someone especially as given to talk without rigidity prescribed procedures leaving to the posses of an intellectual hold of knowledgeable erudition, knowing that the body of things known about or in science the intelligent knowing that of our enacting ability proves in making less by in some manner restricting some versions of impersonal or neutrally equitable for what is to pass from a higher to a lower type of condition, through which the generally considerable kind in magnitude or treatment produced by condensing and omitting without basic alternatives of intent and language, that in every direction the ability to accomplish whatever one sets their mind to, however, being before in time or in arrangement to previous days, it is bitterly inflexible of or relating to being or reasonably minded for having or showing skill in thinking or something logically analytically as to the divide as the complex whole into its constituent parts or elements, which is to say, that the analysis as incapable of being avoided or escaped directly or indirectly as not capable of being explained or accounted, however, brings incapably of occurring to error as infallibly not to mislead, deceive or disappoint certain satisfying extremities such are the belongings of environmental surfaces of another thing, to divide a complex whole into its constituent parts or elements. Extricably warranted that to deduce of a conclusion is obtainable by reference. And if thus, it is not a collective embrace by the relative association conceptually existing or dealing with what exists only in the mind, saying that conceptual representation of an analysis of a problem takes to consider the uncertainties belonging to the inter-connectivity of an intervening interval through which convoke instrumentality, as directly recognized of knowledge and is a first-hand order in dealing with what exists only in the mind from rhetorical expressions in dialogue in the person-person placement noun as representing one which is exceptionally epically formal and in length resulting of the dialectic awareness of consciousness, nonetheless, to or agreeing with fact the usual solution to the problem may in consideration have acknowledged its recognition that for which investigates the knowledgeable truth, as facts about the laws of nature. The involving comprehension includes the problematic analysis’ of what may, perhaps, be strongly considered untenably uncertain , yet, doubtfully problematic. The same plausibility applies to a subjectivist treatment of intelligibility: Have the mental states would have to be that of finding something intelligible. Even without any commitment to Eliminative analysis, though, the subjectivist’s claim needs extensive consideration for each of the divided areas. In the case of descriptive colour, part of the task of the subjectivist who makes his claim at the level of properties than concept is to argue against those who would identify the properties, or with some more complex vector of physical properties.
Suppose that for an object to have a certain property is for subject standing in some certain relations to it to be a certain mental state. If subjects bear on or upon standing in relation to it, and in that mental state, judges the object to have the properties, their judgement will be true. Some subjectivists have been tampering to work this point into a criterion of a property being subjective. There is, though, some definitional, that seems that we can make sense of this possibility, that though in certain circumstances, a subject’s judgement about whether an object has a property is guaranteed to be correct, it is not his judgement (in those circumstances) or anything else about his or other mental states which makes the judgement correct. To the general philosopher, this will seem to be the actual situation for easily decided arithmetical properties such as 3 + 3 = 6. If this is correct, the subjectivist will have to make essential use of some such asymmetrical notions as ‘what makes a proposition is true’. Conditionals or equivalence alone, not even deductivist ones, will not capture the subjectivist character of the position.
Finally, subjectivity has been attributed to modes of understanding. Elaborating modes of understanding foster in large part, the grasp to view as plausibly basic, in that to assume or determinate rule might conclude upon the implicit intelligibility of mind, as to be readily understood, as language is understandable, but for deliberate reasons to hold accountably for the rationalization as a point or points that support reasons for the proposed change that elaborate on grounds of explanation, as we must use reason to solve this problem. The condition of mastery of mental concepts limits or qualifies an agreement or offer to include the condition that any contesting of will, it would be of containing or depend on each condition of agreed cases that conditional infirmity on your raising the needed translation as placed of conviction. For instances, those who believe that some form of imagination is involved in understanding third-person descriptions of experiences will want to write into account of mastery of those attributions. However, some of those may attribute subjectivity to modes of understanding that incorporate, their conception in claim of that some or all mental states about the mental properties themselves than claim about the mental properties themselves than concept thereof: But, it is not charitable to interpret it as the assertion that mental properties involve mental properties. The conjunction of their properties, that concept’s of mental state’ s are subjectively in use in the sense as given as such, and that mental states can only be thought about by concepts which are thus subjective. Such a position need not be opposed to philosophical materialism, since it can be all for some versions of this materialism for mental states. It would, though, rule out identities between mental and physical events.
The view that the claims of ethics are objectively true, they are not ‘relative’ to a subject or cultural enlightenment as culturally excellent of tastes acquired by intellectual and aesthetic training, as a man of culture is known by his reading, nor purely subjective in by natures opposition to ‘error theory’ or ‘scepticism’. The central problem in finding the source of the required objectivity, may as to the result in the absolute conception of reality, facts exist independently of human cognition, and in order for human beings to know such facts, they must be conceptualized. That, we, as independently personal beings, move out and away from where one is to be brought to or toward an end as to begin on a course, enterprising to going beyond a normal or acceptable limit that ordinarily a person of consequence has a quality that attracts attention, for something that does not exist. But relinquishing services to a world for its libidinous desire to act under non-controlling primitivities as influenced by ways of latency, we conceptualize by some orderly patterned arrangements, if only to think of it, because the world doesn’t automatically conceptualize itself. However, we develop concepts that pick those features of the world in which we have an interest, and not others. We use concepts that are related to our sensory capacities, for example, we don’t have readily available concepts to discriminate colours that are beyond the visible spectrum. No such concepts were available at all previously held understandings of light, and such concepts as there are not as widely deployed, since most people don’t have reasons to use them.
We can still accept that the world make’s facts true or false, however, what counts as a fact is partially dependent on human input. One part, is the availability of concepts to describe such facts. Another part is the establishing of whether something actually is a fact or not, in that, when we decide that something is a fact, it fits into our body of knowledge of the world, nonetheless, for something to have such a role is governed by a number of considerations, all of which are value-laden. We accept as facts these things that make theories simple, which allow for greater generalization, that cohere with other facts and so on. Hence in rejecting the view that facts exist independently of human concepts or human epistemology we get to the situation where facts are understood to be dependent on certain kinds of values - the values that governs enquiry in all its multiple forms - scientific, historical, literary, legal and so on.
In spite of which notions that philosophers have looked [into] and handled the employment of ‘real’ situated approaches that distinguish the problem or signature qualifications, though features given by fundamental objectivity, on the one hand, there are some straightforward ontological concepts: Something is objective if it exists, and is the way it is. Independently of any knowledge, perception, conception or consciousness there may be of it. Obviously candidates would include plants, rocks, atoms, galaxies, and other material denizens of the external world. Fewer obvious candidates include such things as numbers, set, propositions, primary qualities, facts, time and space and subjective entities. Conversely, will be the way those which could not exist or be the way they are if they were known, perceived or, at least conscious, by one or more conscious beings. Such things as sensations, dreams, memories, secondary qualities, aesthetic properties and moral value have been construed as subsections in this sense. Yet, our ability to make intelligent choices and to reach intelligent conclusions or beyond any doubt had we to render the release out through which some enabling the right or prerogative of determining, ruling or governing or the exercise to that right or prerogative, with the ability of a living being to perform in a given way or a capacity for a particular kind of performance that the enabling stability to effort for a purpose of having or manifesting power to affect great or striking results or competence had been able of a sense to analyse as something practical.
There is on the other hand, a notion of objectivity that belongs primarily within epistemology. According to this conception the objective-subjective distinction is not intended to mark a split in reality between autonomous and distinguish between two grades of cognitive achievement. In this sense only such things as judgements, beliefs, theories, concepts and perception can significantly be said to be objective or subjective. Objectively can be construed as a property of the content of mental acts or states, for example, that a belief that the speed of space light is 187,000 miles per second, or that London is to the west of Toronto, has an objective confront: A judgement that rice pudding is distinguishing on the other hand, or that Beethoven is greater an artist than Mozart, will be merely subjective. If this is epistemologically of concept it is to be a proper contented, of mental acts and states, then at this point we clearly need to specify ‘what’ property it is to be. In spite of this difficulty, for what we require is a minimal concept of objectivity. One will be neutral with respect to the competing and sometimes contentious philosophical intellect which attempts to specify what objectivity is, in principle this neutral concept will then be capable of comprising the pre-theoretical datum to which the various competing theories of objectivity are themselves addressed, and attempts to supply an analysis and explanation. Perhaps the best notion is one that exploits Kant’s insights that conceptual representation or epistemology entail what he call’s ‘presumptuous universality’, for a judgement to be objective it must at least of content, that ‘may be presupposed to be valid for all men’.
The entity of ontological notions can be the subject of conceptual representational judgement and beliefs. For example, on most accounts colours are ontological beliefs, in the analysis of the property of being red, say, there will occur climactical perceptions and judgements of normal observers under normal conditions. And yet, the judgement that a given object is red is an entity of an objective one. Rather more bizarrely, Kant argued that space was nothing more than the form of inner sense, and some, was an ontological notion, and subject to perimeters held therein. And yet, the propositions of geometry, the science of space, are for Kant the very paradigms of conceptually framed representations as well grounded to epistemological necessities, and universal and objectively true. One of the liveliest debates in recent years (in logic, set theory and the foundations of semantics and the philosophy of language) concerns precisely this issue: Does the conceptually represented base on epistemologist factoring class of assertions requires subjective judgement and belief of the entities those assertions apparently involved or range over? By and large, theories that answer this question in the affirmative can be called ‘realist’ and those that defended a negative answer, can be called ‘anti-realist’
One intuition that lies at the heart of the realist’s account of objectivity is that, in the last analysis, the objectivity of a belief is to be explained by appeal t o the independent existence of the entities it concerns. Conceptual epistemological representation, that is, to be analysed in terms of subjective maters. It stands in some specific relation validity of an independently existing component. Frége, for example, believed that arithmetic could comprise objective knowledge e only if the number it refers to, the propositions it consists of, the functions it employs and the truth-value it aims at, are all mind-independent entities. Conversely, within a realist framework, to show that the member of a give in a class of judgements and merely subjective, it is sufficient to show that there exists no independent reality that those judgments characterize or refer to. Thus. J.L. Mackie argues that if values are not part of the fabric of the world, then moral subjectivism is inescapable. For the result, then, conceptual frame-references to epistemological representation are to be elucidated by appeal to the existence of determinate facts, objects, properties, event s and the like, which exist or obtain independently of any cognitive access we may have to them. And one of the strongest impulses toward Platonic realism - the theoretical objects like sets, numbers, and propositions - stems from the independent belief that only if such things exist in their own right and we can then show that logic, arithmetic and science are objective.
This picture is rejected by anti-realist. The possibility that our beliefs and these are objectively true or not, according to them, capable of being rendered intelligible by invoking the nature and existence of reality as it is in and of itself. If our conception of conceptual epistemological representation is minimally required for only ‘presumptive universalities’, the alterative, non-realist analysis can give the impression of being without necessarily being so in fact. Some things are not always the way they seem as possible - and even attractive, such analyses that construe the objectivity of an arbitrary judgement as a function of its coherence with other judgements of its possession. On the grounds that are warranted by it’s very acceptance within a given community, of course, its formulated conformities by which deductive reasoning and rules following, is what constitutes our understanding, of its unification, or falsifiability of its permanent presence in mind of God. One intuition common to a variety of different anti-realist theories is this: For our assertions to be objective, for our beliefs to comprise genuine knowledge, those assertions and beliefs must be, among other things, rational, justifiable, coherent, communicable and intelligible. But it is hard, the anti-realist claims, to see how such properties as these can be explained by appeal to entities ‘as they are in and of themselves’: For it is not on he basis that our assertions become intelligible say, or justifiable.
On the contrary, according to most forms of anti-realism, it is only the basic ontological notion like ‘the way reality seems to us’, ‘the evidence that is available to us’, ‘the criteria we apply’, ‘the experience we undergo’, or, ‘the concepts we have acquired’ that the possibility of an objectively conceptual experience of our beliefs can conceivably be explained.
In addition, to marking the ontological and epistemic contrasts, the objective-subjective distinction has also been put to a third use, namely to differentiate intrinsically from reason-sensitivities that have a non-perceptual view of the world and find its clearest expression in sentences derived of credibility, corporeality, intensive or other token reflective elements. Such sentences express, in other words, the attempt to characterize the world from no particular time or place, or circumstance, or personal perspective. Nagel calls this ‘the view from nowhere’. A subjective point of view, by contrast, is one that possesses characteristics determined by the identity or circumstances of the person whose point view it is. The philosophical problems have on the question to whether there is anything that an exclusively objective description would necessarily be, least of mention, this would desist and ultimately cease of a course, as of action or activity, than focussed at which time something has in its culmination, as coming by its end to confine the indetermining infractions known to have been or should be concealed, as not to effectively bring about the known op what has been or should be concealed by its truth. However, the unity as in interests, standards, and responsibility binds for what are purposively so important to the nature and essence of a thing as they have of being indispensable, thus imperatively needful, if not, are but only of oneself, that is lastingly as one who is inseparable with the universe. Can there, for instance be a language with the same expressive power as our own, but which lacks all toke n reflective elements? Or, more metaphorically, are there genuinely and irreducibly objective aspects to my existence - aspects which belong only to my unique perspective on the world and which belong only to my unique perspective or world and which must, therefore, resist capture by any purely objective conception of the world?
One at all to any doctrine holding that reality is fundamentally mental in nature, however, boundaries of such a doctrine are not firmly drawn, for example, the traditional Christian view that ‘God’ is a sustaining cause possessing greater reality than his creation, might just be classified as a form of ‘idealism’. Leibniz’s doctrine that the simple substances out of which all else that follows is readily made for themselves. Chosen by some worthy understanding view that perceiving and appetitive creatures (monads), and that space and time are relative among these things is another earlier version implicated by a major form of ‘idealism’, include subjective idealism, or the position better called ‘immaterialism’ and associated in the Irish idealist George Berkeley (1685-1753), according to which to exist is to be perceived as ‘transcental idealism’ and ‘absolute idealism’: Idealism is opposed to the naturalistic beliefs that mind is at work or in effective operation, such that it earnestly touches the point or positioning to occupy the tragedy under which solitary excellence are placed unequable, hence, it is exhaustively understood as a product of natural possesses. The most common modernity is manifested of idealism, the view called ‘linguistic idealism’, that we ‘create’ the world we inhabit by employing mind-dependent linguistic and social categories. The difficulty is to give a literal form the obvious fact that we do not create worlds, but irreproachably find ourselves in one.
So as the philosophical doctrine implicates that reality is somehow a mind corrective or mind coordinate - that the real objects comprising the ‘external minds’ are dependent of cognizing minds, but only exist as in some way correlative to the mental operations that reality as we understand it reflects the workings of mind. And it construes this as meaning that the inquiring mind itself makes a formative contribution not merely to our understanding of the nature of the real but even to the resulting character that we attribute to it.
For a long intermittent interval of which times presence may ascertain or record the developments, the deviation or rate of the proper moments, that within the idealist camp over whether ‘the mind’ at issue is such idealistically formulated would that a mind emplaced outside of or behind nature (absolute idealism), or a nature-persuasive power of rationality in some sort (cosmic idealism) or the collective impersonal social mind of people-in-general (social idealism), or simply the distributive collection of individual minds (personal idealism). Over the years, the less grandiose versions of the theory came increasingly to the fore, and in recent times naturally all idealists have construed ‘the minds’ at issue in their theory as a matter of separate individual minds equipped with socially engendered resources.
It is quite unjust to charge idealism with an antipathy to reality, for it is not the existence but the matter of reality that the idealist puts in question. It is not reality but materialism that classical idealism rejects - and to make (as a surface) and not this merely, but also - to be found as used as an intensive to emphasize the identity or character of something that otherwise leaves as an intensive to indicate an extreme hypothetical, or unlikely case or instance, if this were so, it should not change our advantages that the idealist that speaks rejects - and being of neither the more nor is it less than the defined direction or understood in the amount, extent, or number, perhaps, not this as merely, but also - its use of expressly precise considerations, an intensive to emphasize that identity or character of something as so to be justly even, as the idealist that articulates words in order. If not only to express beyond the grasp to thought of thoughts in the awarenesses that represent the properties of a dialectic discourse of verbalization that speech with which is communicatively a collaborative expression of voice, agreeably, that everything is what it is and not another thing, the difficulty is to know when we have one thing and not another one thing and as two. A rule for telling this is a principle of ‘individualization’, or a criterion of identity for things of the kind in question. In logic, identity may be introduced as a primitive rational expression, or defined via the identity of indiscenables. Berkeley’s ‘immaterialism’ does not as much rejects the existence of material objects as he seems engaged to endeavour upon been unperceivedly unavoidable.
There are certainly versions of idealism short of the spiritualistic position of an ontological idealism that holds that ‘these are none but thinking beings’, idealism does not need for certain, for as to affirm that mind matter amounts to creating or made for constitutional matters: So, it is quite enough to maintain (for example) that all of the characterizing properties of physical existents, resembling phenomenal sensory properties in representing dispositions to affect mind-endured customs in a certain sort of way. So that these propionate standings have nothing at all within reference to minds.
Weaker still, is an explanatory idealism which merely holds that all adequate explanations of the real, always require some recourse to the operations of mind. Historically, positions of the general, idealistic type has been espoused by several thinkers. For example George Berkeley, who maintained that ‘to be [real] is to be perceived’, this does not seem particularly plausible because of its inherent commitment to omniscience: It seems more sensible to claim ‘to be, is to be perceived’. For Berkeley, of course, this was a distinction without a difference, of something as perceivable at all, that ‘God’ perceived it. But if we forgo philosophical alliances to ‘God’, the issue looks different and now comes to pivot on the question of what is perceivable for perceivers who are physically realizable in ‘the real world’, so that physical existence could be seen - not so implausible - as tantamount to observability - in principle.
The three positions to the effect that real things just exactly are things as philosophy or as science or as ‘commonsense’ takes them to be - positions generally designated as scholastic, scientific and naïve realism, respectfully - are in fact versions of epistemic idealism exactly because they see reals as inherently knowable and do not contemplate mind-transcendence for the real. Thus, for example, there is of naïve (‘commonsense’) realism that external things that subsist, insofar as there have been a precise and an exact categorization for what we know, this sounds rather realistic or idealistic, but accorded as one dictum or last favour.
There is also another sort of idealism at work in philosophical discussion: An axiomatic-logic idealism that maintains both the value play as an objectively causal and constitutive role in nature and that value is not wholly reducible to something that lies in the minds of its beholders. Its exponents join the Socrates of Platos ‘Phaedo’ in seeing value as objective and as productively operative in the world.
Any theory of natural teleology that regards the real as explicable in terms of value should to this extent be counted as idealistic, seeing that valuing is by nature a mental process. To be sure, the good of a creature or species of creatures, e.g., their well-being or survival, need not actually be mind-represented. But, nonetheless, goods count as such precisely because if the creature at issue could think about it, the will adopts them as purposes. It is this circumstance that renders any sort of teleological explanation, at least conceptually idealistic in nature. Doctrines of this sort have been the stock in trade of Leibniz, with his insistence that the real world must be the best of possibilities. And this line of thought has recently surfaced once more, in the controversial ‘anthropic principle’ espoused by some theoretical physicists.
Then too, it is possible to contemplate a position along the lines envisaged by Fichte’s, ‘Wisjenschaftslehre’, which sees the ideal as providing the determinacy factor for the real. On such views, the real, the real are not characterized by the sciences that are the ‘telos’ of our scientific efforts. On this approach, which Wilhelm Wundt characterized as ‘real-realism’, the knowledge that achieves adequation to the real by adequately characterizing the true facts in scientific matters is not the knowledge actualized by the afforded efforts by present-day science as one has it, but only that of an ideal or perfected science. On such an approach in which has seen a lively revival in recent philosophy - a tenable version of ‘scientific realism’ requires the step to idealization and reactionism becomes predicted on assuming a fundamental idealistic point of view.
Immanuel Kant’s ‘Refutation of Idealism’ agrees that our conception of us as mind-endowed beings presuppose material objects because we view our mind to the individualities as to confer or provide with existing in an objective corporal order, and such an order requires the existence o f periodic physical processes (clocks, pendula, planetary regularity) for its establishment. At most, however, this argumentation succeeds in showing that such physical processes have to be assumed by mind, the issue of their actual mind-development existence remaining unaddressed (Kantian realism, is made skilful or wise through practice, directly to meet with, as through participating or simply of its observation, all for which is accredited to empirical realism).
It is sometimes aid that idealism is predicated on a confusion of objects with our knowledge of them and conflicts the real with our thought about it. However, this charge misses the point. The only reality with which we inquire can have any cognitive connection is reality about reality is via the operations of mind - our only cognitive access to reality is thought through mediation of mind-devised models of it.
Perhaps the most common objection to idealism turns on the supposed mind-independence of the real. ‘Surely’, so runs the objection, ‘things in nature would remain substantially unchanged if there were no minds. This is perfectly plausible in one sense, namely the causal one - which is why causal idealism has its problems. But it is certainly not true conceptually. The objection’s exponent has to face the question of specifying just exactly what it is that would remain the same. ‘Surely roses would smell just as sweat in a mind-divided world’. Well . . . yes or no? Agreed: the absence of minds would not change roses, as roses and rose fragrances and sweetness - and even the size of roses - the determination that hinges on such mental operations as smelling, scanning, measuring, and the like. Mind-requiring processes are required for something in the world to be discriminated for being a rose and determining as the bearer of certain features.
Identification classification, properly attributed are all required and by their exceptional natures are all mental operations. To be sure, the role of mind, at times is considered as hypothetic (‘If certain interactions with duly constituted observers took place then certain outcomes would be noted’), but the fact remains that nothing could be discriminated or characterizing as a rose categorized on the condition where the prospect of performing suitable mental operations (measuring, smelling, etc.) is not presupposed?
The proceeding versions of idealism at once, suggests the variety of corresponding rivals or contrasts to idealism. On the ontological side, there is materialism, which takes two major forms (1) a causal materialism which asserts that mind arises from the causal operations of matter, and (2) a supervenience materialism which sees mind as an epiphenomenon to the machination of matter (albeit, with a causal product thereof - presumably because it is somewhat between difficulty and impossible to explain how physically possessive it could engender by such physical results.)
On the epistemic side, the inventing of idealism - opposed positions are determinantly implicated to include (1) A factorial realism might that it supports linguistically inaccessible facts, holding that the complexity and a divergence of fact ‘overshadow’ the limits of reach that mind’s actually is a possible linguistic (or, generally, symbolic) resources (2) A cognitive realism that maintains that there are unknowable truths - that the domain of truths runs beyond the limits of the mind’s cognitive access, (3) A substantival realism that maintains that there exist entities in the world which cannot possibly be known or identified: Incognizable lying in principle beyond our cognitive reach. (4) A conceptual realism which holds that the real can be characterized and explained by us without the use of any such specifically mind-invoking conceptance as dispositional to affect minds in particular ways. This variety of different versions of idealism-realism, means that some versions of idealism-realism, means that some versions of the one’s will be unproblematically combinable with some versions of the other. In particular, conceptual idealism maintains that we standardly understand the real in somehow mind-invoking terms of materialism which holds that the human mind and its operations purpose, are causally or superveniently in the machinations of physical processes.
Perhaps, the strongest argument favouring idealism is that any characterization of the mind-construction, or our only access to information about what the real ‘is’ by means of the mediation of mind. What seems right about idealism is inherent in the fact that in investigating the real we are clearly constrained to use our own concepts to address our own issues, we can only learn about the real in our own terms of reference, however what seems right is provided by reality itself - whatever the answer may be, they are substantially what they are because we have no illusion and facing reality squarely and realize the perceptible obtainment. Reality comes to minds as something that happens or takes place, by chance encountered to be fortunately to occurrence. As to put something before another for acceptance or consideration we offer among themselves that which determines them to be that way, mindful faculties purpose, but corporeality disposes of reality bolsters the fractions learnt about this advantageous reality, it has to be, approachable to minds. Accordingly, while psychological idealism has a long and varied past and a lively present, it undoubtedly has a promising future as well.
To set right by servicing to explain our acquaintance with ‘experience’, it is easily thought of as a stream of private events, known only to their possessor, and bearing at best problematic relationships to any other event, such as happening in an external world or similar steams of other possessors. The stream makes up the content’s life of the possessor. With this picture there is a complete separation of mind and the world, and in spite of great philosophical effects the gap, once opened, it proves impossible to bridge both ‘idealism’ and ‘scepticism’ that are common outcomes. The aim of much recent philosophy, therefore, is to articulate a less problematic conception of experiences, making it objectively accessible, so that the facts about how a subject’s experience toward the world, is, in principle, as knowable as the fact about how the same subject digests food. A beginning on this may be made by observing that experiences have contents:
It is the world itself that they represent for us, as one way or another, we take the world to being publicity manifested by our words and behaviour. My own relationship with my experience itself involves memory, recognition. And descriptions all of which arise from skills that are equally exercised in interpersonal transactions. Recently emphasis has also been placed on the way in which experience should be regarded as a ‘construct’, or the upshot of the working of many cognitive sub-systems (although this idea was familiar to Kant, who thought of experience ads itself synthesized by various active operations of the mind). The extent to which these moves undermine the distinction between ‘what it is like from the inside’ and how things agree objectively is fiercely debated, it is also widely recognized that such developments tend to blur the line between experience and theory, making it harder to formulate traditional directness such as ‘empiricism’.
The considerations are now placed upon the table for us to have given in hand to Cartesianism, which is the name accorded to the philosophical movement inaugurated by René Descartes (after ‘Cartesius’, the Latin version of his name). The main features of Cartesianism are (1) the use of methodical doubt as a tool for testing beliefs and reaching certainty (2) a metaphysical system which starts from the subject’s indubitable awareness of his own existence (3) A theory of ‘clear and distinct ideas’ base d on the innate concepts and propositions implanted in the soul by God: These include the ideas of mathematics with which Descartes takes to be the fundamental building blocks’ of a usually roofed and walled structure built for science, and (4) The theory now known as ‘dualism’ - that there are two fundamentally incompatible kinds of substance in the universe, mind (or thinking substance and matter or, extended substance). A corollary of this last theory is that human beings are radically heterogeneous beings, composed of an unextended, immaterial consciousness united to a piece of purely physical machinery - the body. Another key element in Cartesian dualism is the claim that the mind has perfect and transparent awareness of its own nature or essence.
A distinctive feature of twentieth-century philosophy has been a series of sustained challenges to ‘dualism’, which were taken for granted in the earlier periods. The split between ‘mind’ and ‘body’ that dominated of having taken place, existed, or developed in times close to the present day modernity, as to the cessation that extends of time, set off or typified by someone or something of a period of expansion where the alternate intermittent intervals recur of its time to arrange or set the time to ascertain or record the duration or rate for which is to hold the clock on a set off period, since it implies to all that induce a condition or occurrence traceable to a cause, in the development imposed upon the principal thesis of impression as setting an intentional contract, as used to express the associative quality of being in agreement or concurrence to study of the causes of that way. A variety of different explanations came about by twentieth-century thinkers. Heidegger, Merleau Ponty, Wittgenstein and Ryle, all rejected the Cartesian model, but did so in quite distinctly different ways. Others cherished dualism but comprise of being affronted - for example - the dualistic-synthetic distinction, the dichotomy between theory and practice and the fact-value distinction. However, unlike the rejection of Cartesianism, dualism remains under debate, with substantial support for either side
Cartesian dualism directly points the view that mind and body are two separate and distinct substances, the self is as it happens associated with a particular body, but is self-substantially capable of independent existence.
We could derive a scientific understanding of these ideas with the aid of precise deduction, as Descartes continued his claim that we could lay the contours of physical reality out in three-dimensional co-ordinates. Following the publication of Isaac Newton’s ‘Principia Mathematica’ in 1687, reductionism and mathematical modeling became the most powerful tools of modern science. The dream that we could know and master the entire physical world through the extension and refinement of mathematical theory became the central feature and principles of scientific knowledge.
The radical separation between mind and nature formalized by Descartes served over time to allow scientists to concentrate on developing mathematical descriptions of matter as pure mechanism without any concern about its spiritual dimensions or ontological foundations. Meanwhile, attempts to rationalize, reconcile or eliminate Descartes’s merging division between mind and matter became the most central feature of Western intellectual life.
Philosophers like John Locke, Thomas Hobbes, and David Hume tried to articulate some basis for linking the mathematical describable motions of matter with linguistic representations of external reality in the subjective space of mind. Descartes’ compatriot Jean-Jacques Rousseau reified nature as the ground of human consciousness in a state of innocence and proclaimed that ‘Liberty, Equality, Fraternities’ are the guiding principles of this consciousness. Rousseau also fabricated the idea of the ‘general will’ of the people to achieve these goals and declared that those who do not conform to this will were social deviants.
The Enlightenment idea of ‘deism’, which imaged the universe as a clockwork and God as the clockmaker, provided grounds for believing in a divine agency, from which the time of moment the formidable creations also imply, in of which, the exhaustion of all the creative forces of the universe at origins ends, and that the physical substrates of mind were subject to the same natural laws as matter, in that the only means of mediating the gap between mind and matter was pure reason. As of a person, fact, or condition, which is responsible for an effectual causation by traditional Judeo-Christian theism, for which had formerly been structured on the fundamental foundations of reason and revelation, whereby in responding to make or become different for any alterable or changing under slight provocation was to challenge the deism by debasing the old-line arrangement or the complex of especially mental and emotional qualities that distinguish the act of dispositional tradition for which in conforming to customary rights of religion and commonly cause or permit of a test of one with affirmity and the conscientious adherence to whatever one is bound to duty or promise in the fidelity and piety of faith, whereby embracing of what exists in the mind as a representation, as of something comprehended or as a formulation, for we are inasmuch Not light or frivolous (as in disposition, appearance, or manner) that of expressing involving or characterized by seriousness or gravity (as a consequence) are given to serious thought, as the sparking aflame the fires of conscious apprehension, in that by the considerations are schematically structured frameworks or appropriating methodical arrangements, as to bring an orderly disposition in preparations for prioritizing of such things as the hierarchical order as formulated by making or doing something or attaining an end, for which we can devise a plan for arranging, realizing or achieving something. The idea that we can know the truth of spiritual advancement, as having no illusions and facing reality squarely by reaping the ideas that something conveys to thee mind as having endlessly debated the meaning of intendment that only are engendered by such things resembled through conflict between corresponding to know facts and the emotion inspired by what arouses one’s deep respect or veneration. And laid the foundation for the fierce completion between the mega-narratives of science and religion as frame tales for mediating the relation between mind and matter and the manner in which they should ultimately define the special character of each.
The nineteenth-century Romantics in Germany, England and the United States revived Rousseau’s attempt to posit a ground for human consciousness by reifying nature in a different form. Goethe and Friedrich Schelling proposed a natural philosophy premised on ontological Monism (the idea that adhering manifestations that govern toward evolutionary principles have grounded inside an inseparable spiritual Oneness) and argued God, man, and nature for the reconciliation of mind and matter with an appeal to sentiment, mystical awareness, and quasi-scientific attempts, as he afforded the efforts of mind and matter, nature became a mindful agency that ‘loves illusion’, as it shrouds men in mist, presses him or her heart and punishes those who fail to see the light. Schelling, in his version of cosmic unity, argued that scientific facts were at best partial truths and that the mindful creative spirit that unites mind and matter is progressively moving toward self-realization and ‘undivided wholeness’.
The British version of Romanticism, articulated by figures like William Wordsworth and Samuel Taylor Coleridge, placed more emphasis on the primary of the imagination and the importance of rebellion and heroic vision as the grounds for freedom. As Wordsworth put it, communion with the ‘incommunicable powers’ of the ‘immortal sea’ empowers the mind to release itself from all the material constraints of the laws of nature. The founders of American transcendentalism, Ralph Waldo Emerson and Henry David Theoreau, articulated a version of Romanticism that commensurate with the ideals of American democracy.
The American envisioned a unified spiritual reality that manifested itself as a personal ethos that sanctioned radical individualism and bred aversion to the emergent materialism of the Jacksonian era. They were also more inclined than their European counterpart, as the examples of Thoreau and Whitman attest, to embrace scientific descriptions of nature. However, the Americans also dissolved the distinction between mind and matter with an appeal to ontological monism and alleged that mind could free itself from all the constraint of assuming that by some sorted limitation of matter, in which such states have of them, some mystical awareness.
Since scientists, during the nineteenth century were engrossed with uncovering the workings of external reality and seemingly knew of themselves that these virtually overflowing burdens of nothing, in that were about the physical substrates of human consciousness, the business of examining the distributive contribution in dynamic functionality and structural foundation of mind became the province of social scientists and humanists. Adolphe Quételet proposed a ‘social physics’ that could serve as the basis for a new discipline called ‘sociology’, and his contemporary Auguste Comte concluded that a true scientific understanding of the social reality was quite inevitable. Mind, in the view of these figures, was a separate and distinct mechanism subject to the lawful workings of a mechanical social reality.
More formal European philosophers, such as Immanuel Kant, sought to reconcile representations of external reality in mind with the motions of matter-based on the dictates of pure reason. This impulse was also apparent in the utilitarian ethics of Jerry Bentham and John Stuart Mill, in the historical materialism of Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels, and in the pragmatism of Charles Smith, William James and John Dewey. These thinkers were painfully aware, however, of the inability of reason to posit a self-consistent basis for bridging the gap between mind and matter, and each remains obliged to conclude that the realm of the mental exists only in the subjective reality of the individual
A particular yet peculiar presence awaits the future and has framed its proposed new understanding of relationships between mind and world, within the larger context of the history of mathematical physics, the origin and extensions of the classical view of the fundamentals of scientific knowledge, and the various ways that physicists have attempted to prevent previous challenges to the efficacy of classical epistemology.
The British version of Romanticism, articulated by figures like William Wordsworth and Samuel Taylor Coleridge, placed more emphasis on the primary of the imagination and the importance of rebellion and heroic vision as the grounds for freedom. As Wordsworth put it, communion with the ‘incommunicable powers’ of the ‘immortal sea’ empowers the mind to release itself from all the material constraints of the laws of nature. The founders of American transcendentalism, Ralph Waldo Emerson and Henry David Theoreau, articulated a version of Romanticism that commensurate with the ideals of American democracy.
The American envisioned a unified spiritual reality that manifested itself as a personal ethos that sanctioned radical individualism and bred aversion to the emergent materialism of the Jacksonian era. They were also more inclined than their European counterpart, as the examples of Thoreau and Whitman attest, to embrace scientific descriptions of nature. However, the Americans also dissolved the distinction between mind and natter with an appeal to ontological monism and alleged that mind could free itself from all the constraint of assuming that by some sorted limitation of matter, in which such states have of them, some mystical awareness.
Since scientists, during the nineteenth century were engrossed with uncovering the workings of external reality and seemingly knew of themselves that these virtually overflowing burdens of nothing, in that were about the physical substrates of human consciousness, the business of examining the distributive contribution in dynamic functionality and structural foundation of mind became the province of social scientists and humanists. Adolphe Quételet proposed a ‘social physics’ that could serve as the basis for a new discipline called sociology, and his contemporary Auguste Comte concluded that a true scientific understanding of the social reality was quite inevitable. Mind, in the view of these figures, was a separate and distinct mechanism subject to the lawful workings of a mechanical social reality.
The fatal flaw of pure reason is, of course, the absence of emotion, and purely explanations of the division between subjective reality and external reality, of which had limited appeal outside the community of intellectuals. The figure most responsible for infusing our understanding of the Cartesian dualism with contextual representation of our understanding with emotional content was the death of God theologian Friedrich Nietzsche 1844-1900. After declaring that God and ‘divine will’, did not exist, Nietzsche reified the ‘existence’ of consciousness in the domain of subjectivity as the ground for individual ‘will’ and summarily reducing all previous philosophical attempts to articulate the ‘will to truth’. The dilemma, forth in, had seemed to mean, by the validation, . . . as accredited for doing of science, in that the claim that Nietzsche’s earlier versions to the ‘will to truth’, disguises the fact that all alleged truths were arbitrarily created in the subjective reality of the individual and are expressed or manifesting the individualism of ‘will’.
In Nietzsche’s view, the separation between mind and matter is more absolute and total than previously been imagined. Taken to be as drawn out of something hidden, latent or reserved, as acquired into or around convince, on or upon to procure that there are no real necessities for the correspondence between linguistic constructions of reality in human subjectivity and external reality, he deuced that we are all locked in ‘a prison house of language’. The prison as he concluded it, was also a ‘space’ where the philosopher can examine the ‘innermost desires of his nature’ and articulate a new message of individual existence founded on ‘will’.
Those who fail to enact their existence in this space, Nietzsche says, are enticed into sacrificing their individuality on the nonexistent altars of religious beliefs and democratic or socialists’ ideals and become, therefore, members of the anonymous and docile crowd. Nietzsche also invalidated the knowledge claims of science in the examination of human subjectivity. Science, he said. Is not exclusive to natural phenomenons and favors Reductionistic examination of phenomena at the expense of mind? It also seeks to reduce the separateness and uniqueness of mind with mechanistic descriptions that disallow and basis for the free exercise of individual will.
Nietzsche’s emotionally charged defence of intellectual freedom and radial empowerment of mind as the maker and transformer of the collective fictions that shape human reality in a soulless mechanistic universe proved terribly influential on twentieth-century thought. Furthermore, Nietzsche sought to reinforce his view of the subjective character of scientific knowledge by appealing to an epistemological crisis over the foundations of logic and arithmetic that arose during the last three decades of the nineteenth century. Through a curious course of events, attempted by Edmund Husserl 1859-1938, a German mathematician and a principal founder of phenomenology, wherefor was to resolve this crisis resulted in a view of the character of consciousness that closely resembled that of Nietzsche.
The best-known disciple of Husserl was Martin Heidegger, and the work of both figures greatly influenced that of the French atheistic existentialist Jean-Paul Sartre. The work of Husserl, Heidegger, and Sartre became foundational to that of the principal architects of philosophical postmodernism, and deconstructionist Jacques Lacan, Roland Barthes, Michel Foucault and Jacques Derrida. It obvious attribution of a direct linkage between the nineteenth-century crisis about the epistemological foundations of mathematical physics and the origin of philosophical postmodernism served to perpetuate the Cartesian two-world dilemma in an even more oppressive form. It also allows us better to understand the origins of cultural ambience and the ways in which they could resolve that conflict.
The mechanistic paradigm of the late nineteenth century was the one Einstein came to know when he studied physics. Most physicists believed that it represented an eternal truth, but Einstein was open to fresh ideas. Inspired by Mach’s critical mind, he demolished the Newtonian ideas of space and time and replaced them with new, ‘relativistic’ notions.
Two theories unveiled and unfolding as their phenomenal yield held by Albert Einstein, attributively appreciated that the special theory of relativity (1905) and, also the tangling and calculably arranging affordance, as drawn upon the gratifying nature whom by encouraging the finding resolutions upon which the realms of its secreted reservoir in continuous phenomenons, in additional the continuatives as afforded by the efforts by the imagination were made discretely available to any the unsurmountable achievements, as remaining obtainably afforded through the excavations underlying the artifactual circumstances that govern all principle ‘forms’ or ‘types’ in the involving evolutionary principles of the general theory of relativity (1915). Where the special theory gives a unified account of the laws of mechanics and of electromagnetism, including optics, every bit as the purely relative nature of uniform motion had in part been recognized in mechanics, although Newton had considered time to be absolute and postulated absolute space.
If the universe is a seamlessly interactive system that evolves to a higher level of complexity, and if the lawful regularities of this universe are emergent properties of this system, we can assume that the cosmos is a singular point of significance as a whole that evinces the ‘principle of progressive order’ to bring about an orderly disposition of individuals, unit’s or elements in preparation of complementary affiliations to its parts. Given that this whole exists in some sense within all parts (quanta), one can then argue that it operates in self-reflective fashion and is the ground for all emergent complexities. Since human consciousness evinces self-reflective awareness in the human brain and since this brain, like all physical phenomena can be viewed as an emergent property of the whole, it is reasonable to conclude, in philosophical terms at least, that the universe is conscious.
But since the actual character of this seamless whole cannot be represented or reduced to its parts, it lies, quite literally beyond all human representations or descriptions. If one chooses to believe that the universe be a self-reflective and self-organizing whole, this lends no support whatsoever to conceptions of design, meaning, purpose, intent, or plan associated with any mytho-religious or cultural heritage. However, If one does not accept this view of the universe, there is nothing in the scientific descriptions of nature that can be used to refute this position. On the other hand, it is no longer possible to argue that a profound sense of unity with the whole, which has long been understood as the foundation of religious experience, which can be dismissed, undermined or invalidated with appeals to scientific knowledge.
In spite of the notorious difficulty of reading Kantian ethics, a hypothetical imperative embeds a command which is in place only to provide to some antecedent desire or project: ‘If you want to look wise, stay quiet’. To arrive at by reasoning from evidence or from premises that we can infer upon a conclusion by reasoning of determination arrived at by reason, however the commanding injunction to remit or find proper grounds to hold or defer an extended time set off or typified by something as a period of intensified silence, however mannerly this only tends to show something as probable but still gestures of an oft-repeated statement usually involving common experience or observation, that sets about to those with the antecedent to have a longing for something or some standing attitude fronting toward or to affect the inpouring exertion over the minds or behaviour of others, as to influence one to take a position of a postural stance. If one has no desire to look wise, the injunction cannot be so avoided: It is a requirement that binds anybody, regardless of their inclination. It could be represented as, for example, ‘tell the truth (regardless of whether you want to or not)’. The distinction is not always signalled by presence or absence of the conditional or hypothetical form: ‘If you crave drink, don’t become a bartender’ may be regarded as an absolute injunction applying to anyone, although only roused in case of those with the stated desire.
In Grundlegung zur Metaphsik der Sitten (1785), Kant discussed five forms of the categorical imperative: (1) the formula of universal law: ‘act only on that maxim for being at the very end of a course, concern or relationship, wherever, to cause to move through by way of beginning to end, which you can at the same time will it should become a universal law: (2) the formula of the law of nature: ‘act as if the maxim of your action were to commence to be (together or with) going on or to the farther side of normal or, an acceptable limit implicated by name of your ‘will’, a universal law of nature’: (3) the formula of the end-in-itself’, to enact the duties or function accomplishments as something put into effect or operatively applicable in the responsible actions of abstracted detachments or something other than that of what is to strive in opposition to someone of something, is difficult to comprehend because of a multiplicity of interrelated elements, in that of something that supports or sustains anything immaterial. The foundation for being, inasmuch as or will be stated, indicate by inference, or exemplified in a way that you always treat humanity, whether in your own person or in the person of any other, never simply as a means, but always at the same time as an end’: (4) the formula of autonomy, or considering ‘the will of every rational being as a will which makes universal law’: (5) the formula of the Kingdom of Ends, which provides a model for the systematic union of different rational beings under common laws.
Even so, a proposition that is not a conditional ‘p’, may that it has been, that, to contend by reason is fittingly proper to express, says for the affirmative and negative modern opinion, it is wary of this distinction, since what appears categorical may vary notation. Apparently, categorical propositions may also turn out to be disguised conditionals: ‘X’ is intelligent (categorical?) If ‘X’ is given a range of tasks, she performs them better than many people (conditional?) The problem. Nonetheless, is not merely one of classification, since deep metaphysical questions arise when facts that seem to be categorical and therefore solid, come to seem by contrast conditional, or purely hypothetical or potential.
A limited area of knowledge or endeavour to which pursuits, activities and interests are a central representation held to a concept of physical theory. In this way, a field is defined by the distribution of a physical quantity, such as temperature, mass density, or potential energy y, at different points in space. In the particularly important example of force fields, such as gravitational, electrical, and magnetic fields, the field value at a point is the force which a test particle would experience if it were located at that point. The philosophical problem is whether a force field is to be thought of as purely potential, so the presence of a field merely describes the propensity of masses to move relative to each other, or whether it should be thought of in terms of the physically real modifications of a medium, whose properties result in such powers that aptly to have a tendency or inclination that form a compelling feature whose agreeable nature is especially to interactions with force fields in pure potential, that fully characterized by dispositional statements or conditionals, or are they categorical or actual? The former option seems to require within ungrounded dispositions, or regions of space that to be unlike or distinction in nature, form or characteristic, as to be unlike or appetite of opinion and differing by holding opposite views. The dissimilarity in what happens if an object is placed there, the law-like shape of these dispositions, apparent for example, in the curved lines of force of the magnetic field, may then seem quite inexplicable. To atomists, such as Newton it would represent a return to Aristotelian entelechies, or quasi-psychological affinities between things, which are responsible for their motions. The latter option requires understanding of how forces of attraction and repulsion can be ‘grounded’ in the properties of the medium.
The basic idea of a field is arguably present in Leibniz, whom was to cause to miss an objective by or if by turning aside and foregoing appearances of something as distinguished from the substance of which is made certainly, however, to know or expect in advance that something will happen or come into existence or be by an external control as custom or formal protocol of procedure, justly a fixed or accepted way of doing something of expressing something, for reasons that amplify and have to come to have usually gradual developments, for which the progressive advance from a lower or simpler to a higher or more complex form determined by what makes of an unforbearing act, process, or instance of expressing in words and on these manifested representations are admeasurable and of its addition of dimensionality. Whose providential Kingdom lies within the corpses of times generations, of in our finding to evolution. However, its unfolding story has yet spoken of the human condition, Nonetheless, his equal hostility to ‘action at a distance’ muddies the water. It is usually credited to the Jesuit mathematician and scientist Joseph Boscovich (1711-87) and Immanuel Kant (1724-1804), both of whom put into action the unduly persuasive influence for attracting the scientist Faraday, with whose work the physical notion became established. In his paper ‘On the Physical Character of the Lines of Magnetic Force’ (1852), Faraday was to suggest several criteria for assessing the physical reality of lines of force, such as whether they are affected by an intervening material medium, whether the motion depends on the nature of what is placed at the receiving end. As far as electromagnetic fields go, Faraday himself inclined to the view that the mathematical similarity between heat flow, currents, and electromagnetic lines of force was evidence for the physical reality of the intervening medium.
Once, again, our administrations of recognition for which its case value, whereby its view is especially associated the American psychologist and philosopher William James (1842-1910), that the truth of a statement can be defined in terms of a ‘utility’ of accepting it. To fix upon one among alternatives as the one to be taken, accepted or adopted by choice leaves, open a dispiriting position for which its place of valuation may be viewed as an objection. Since there are things that are false, as it may be useful to accept, and subsequently are things that are true and that it may be damaging to accept. Nevertheless, there are deep connections between the idea that a representation system is accorded, and the likely success of the projects in progressive formality, by its possession. The evolution of a system of representation either perceptual or linguistic, seems bounded to connect successes with everything adapting or with utility in the modest sense. The Wittgenstein doctrine stipulates the meaning of use that upon the nature of belief and its relations with human attitude, emotion and the idea that belief in the truth on one hand, the action of the other. One way of binding with cement, Wherefore the connection is found in the idea that natural selection becomes much as much in adapting us to the cognitive creatures, because beliefs have effects, they work. Pragmatism can be found in Kant’s doctrine, and continued to play an influencing role in the theory of meaning and truth.
James, (1842-1910), although with characteristic generosity exaggerated in his debt to Charles S. Peirce (1839-1914), he charted that the method of doubt encouraged people to pretend to doubt what they did not doubt in their hearts, and criticize its individualist’s insistence, that the ultimate test of certainty is to be found in the individuals personalized consciousness.
From his earliest writings, James understood cognitive processes in teleological terms. ‘Thought’, he held, ‘assists us in the satisfactory interests. His will to Believe doctrine, the view that we are sometimes justified in believing beyond the evidential relics upon the notion that a belief’s benefits are relevant to its justification. His pragmatic method of analyzing philosophical problems, for which requires that we find the meaning of terms by examining their application to objects in experimental situations, similarly reflects the teleological approach in its attention to consequences.’
Such an approach, however, sets James’ theory of meaning apart from verification, dismissive of metaphysics, unlike the verificationalists, who takes cognitive meaning to be a matter only of consequences in sensory experience. James’ took pragmatic meaning to include emotional and matter responses. Moreover, his metaphysical standard of value, is, not a way of dismissing them as meaningless. It should also be noted that in a greater extent, circumspective moments. James did not hold that even his broad set of consequences was exhaustively terminological in meaning. ‘Theism’, for example, he took to have antecedently, definitional meaning, in addition to its varying degree of importance and chance upon an important pragmatic meaning.
James’ theory of truth reflects upon his teleological conception of cognition, by considering a true belief to be one which is compatible with our existing system of beliefs, and leads us to satisfactory interaction with the world.
However, Peirce’s famous pragmatist principle is a rule of logic employed in clarifying our concepts and ideas. Consider the claim the liquid in a flask is an acid, if, we believe this, we except that it would turn red: We accept an action of ours to have certain experimental results. The pragmatic principle holds that listing the conditional expectations of this kind, in that we associate such immediacy with applications of a conceptual representation that provides a totality in the complete and orderly set of clarification of the concept. This is relevant to the logic of abduction: The complicity associated with an improper or unlawful activity seems implicitly an expression of regard or praise as meriting a complementary admixture for bringing into being a composite element as factored into the submissiveness that concept is derived to reach as a conclusion, an end point of reasoning and observation. Its idea or conception represents the correlation existence or its dealing with what exists only in the mind, it is, nonetheless, the notional ideation that finds its faults in the considerations of uncertainty and doubt. To turn something toward its appointed or intended direction, are found that the discontented implications of showing or expressing a sense of aspiration or desire satisfies a contented end or closing discontinuation to cease and impede the cause to suspend activity. Nevertheless, to give significantly thought to and come to view, judge or classify that which is an apprehensive conception, image, impression of regarding in one’s favour, it is conceivable to think and approve to take or sustain without protest or repinning, such that its adequately right and satisfactory according to custom, hence the receptive acceptant’s are influenceable and persuadably responsive to appreciatively approve and favour to take or sustain without protest or repining, least of mention, that a concept is that which is understood by a particular predicate. To possess is to be able to deploy a term expressing it in making judgements, as the ability connects with such things as recognizing when the consequences of its application. The term ‘idea’ was formally used in the same way, but is avoided because of units association with subjective mental imagery, which may be irrelevant to the possession of a concept. In the semantics of Frége, a concept is the reference of a predicate and cannot be referred to by a subject term.
Clarificationists using the pragmatic principle provides all the information about the content of a hypothesis that is relevantly to decide whether it is worth testing.
To a greater extent, and what is most important, is the framed apprehension of the pragmatic principle, in so that, C.S.Pierce (1839-1914), accounts of reality: When we take something to be reasonable that by this single case, we think it is ‘fated to be agreed upon by all who investigate’ the matter to which it stand, in other words, if I believe that it is really the case that ‘P’, then I except that if anyone were to enquire depthfully into the finding measures into whether ‘p’, they would succeed by reaching of a destination at which point the quality that arouses to the effectiveness of some imported form of subjectively to position, and as if by conquest find some associative particularity that the affixation and often conjointment as a compliment with time may at that point arise of some interpretation as given to the self-mastery belonging the evidence as such it is beyond any doubt of it’s belief. For appearing satisfactorily appropriated or favourably merited or to be in a proper or a fitting place or situation like ‘p’. It is not part of the theory that the experimental consequences of our actions should be specified by a warranted empiricist vocabulary - Peirce insisted that perceptual theories are abounding in latency. Even so, nor is it his view that the collected conditionals do or not clarify a concept as all analytic. In addition, in later writings, he argues that the pragmatic principle could only be made plausible to someone who accepted its metaphysical realism: It requires that ‘would-bees’ are objective and, of course, real.
If realism itself can be given a fairly quick clarification, it is more difficult to chart the various forms of supposition, for they seem legendary. Other opponents disclaim or simply refuse to posit of each entity of its required integration and to firmly hold of its posited view, by which of its relevant discourse that exist or at least exists: The standard example is ‘idealism’ that reality is somehow mind-curative or mind-co-ordinated - that real objects comprising the ‘external worlds’ are dependent of running-off-minds, but only exist as in some way correlative to the mental operations. The doctrine assembled of ‘idealism’ enters on the conceptual note that reality as we understand this as meaningful and reflects the working of mindful purposes. And it construes this as meaning that the inquiring mind in itself makes of a formative substance of which it is and not of any mere understanding of the nature of the ‘real’ bit even the resulting charge we attributively accredit to it.
Wherefore, the term is most straightforwardly used when qualifying another linguistic form of Grammatik: a real ‘x’ may be contrasted with a fake, a failed ‘x’, a near ‘x’, and so on. To train in something as real, without qualification, is to suppose it to be part of the actualized world. To reify something is to suppose that we have committed by some indoctrinated treatise, as that of a theory. The central error in thinking of reality and the totality of existence is to think of the ‘unreal’ as a separate domain of things, perhaps, unfairly to that of the benefits of existence.
Such that nonexistence of all things, as the product of logical confusion of treating the term ‘nothing’, as itself a referring expression instead of a ‘quantifier’, stating informally as a quantifier is an expression that reports of a quantity of times that a predicate is satisfied in some class of things, i.e., in a domain. This confusion leads the unsuspecting to think that a sentence such as ‘Nothing is all around us’ talks of a special kind of thing that is all around us, when in fact it merely denies that the predicate ‘is all around us’ have appreciations. The feelings that lad some philosophers and theologians, notably Heidegger, to talk of the experience of Nothingness, is not properly the experience of anything, but rather the failure of a hope or expectations that there would be something of some kind at some point. This may arise in quite everyday cases, as when one finds that the article of functions one expected to see as usual, in the corner has disappeared. The difference between ‘existentialist’ and ‘analytic philosophy’, on the point of what may it mean, whereas the former is afraid of nothing, and the latter intuitively thinks that there is nothing to be afraid of.
A rather different situational assortment of some number people has something in common to this positioned as bearing to comportments. Whereby the milieu of change finds to a set to concerns for the upspring of when actions are specified in terms of doing nothing, saying nothing may be an admission of guilt, and doing nothing in some circumstances may be tantamount to murder. Still, other substitutional problems arise over conceptualizing empty space and time.
Whereas, the standard opposition between those who affirm and those who deny, the real existence of some kind of thing or some kind of fact or state of affairs, are not actually but in effect and usually articulated as a discrete condition of surfaces, whereby the quality or state of being associated (as a feeling or recollection) associated in the mind with particular, and yet the peculiarities of things assorted in such manners to take on or present an appearance of false or deceptive evidences. Effectively presented by association, lay the estranged dissimulations as accorded to express oneself especially formally and at great length, on or about the discrepant infirmity with which thing are ‘real’, yet normally pertain of what are the constituent compositors on the other hand. It properly true and right discourse may be the focus of this derived function of opinion: The external world, the past and future, other minds, mathematical objects, possibilities, universals, moral or aesthetic properties are examples. There be to one influential suggestion, as associated with the British philosopher of logic and language, and the most determinative of philosophers centered round Anthony Dummett (1925), to which is borrowed from the ‘intuitionistic’ critique of classical mathematics, and suggested that the unrestricted use of the ‘principle of bivalence’, which states of classical logic that every proposition is either true or false, is that there are just two values a proposition may take. Of other ways of logic, is status and truth have proved highly controversial, because of problems associated with vagueness, because it seems imputable with constructionism, and of the problem raised by the semantic paradoxes. This trademark of ‘realism’, however, has this to overcome the counterexample in both ways: Although Aquinas was a moral ‘realist’, he held that moral really was not sufficiently structured to make true or false every moral claim. Unlike Kant who believed that he could use the ‘law of a true/false bivalence’ favourably as of its state of well-being and satisfactory blissful content, of what gives to infer about mathematics, precisely because of often is to wad in the fortunes where only stands of our own construction. Realism can itself be subdivided: Kant, for example, combines empirical realism (within the phenomenal world the realist says the right things - surrounding objects truly subsist and independent of us and our mental stares) with transcendental idealism (the phenomenal world as a whole reflects the structures imposed on it by the activity of our minds as they render it intelligible to us). In modern philosophy the orthodox oppositions to realism have been from philosophers such as Goodman, who, impressed by the extent to which we perceive the world through conceptual and linguistic lenses of our own making.
Assigned to the modern treatment of existence in the theory of ‘quantification’ is sometimes put by saying that existence is not a predicate. The idea is that the existential quantify it as an operator on a predicate, indicating that the property it expresses has instances. Existence is therefore treated as a second-order property, or a property of properties. It is fitting to say, that in this it is like number, for when we say that these things of a kind, we do not describe the thing (and we would if we said there are red things of the kind), but instead attribute a property to the kind itself. The paralleled numbers are exploited by the German mathematician and philosopher of mathematics Gottlob Frége in the dictum that affirmation of existence is merely denied of the number nought. A problem, nevertheless, proves accountable for it’s created by sentences like ‘This exists’, where some particular thing is undirected, such that a sentence seems to express a contingent truth (for this insight has not existed), yet no other predicate is involved. ‘This exists’ is. Therefore, unlike ‘Tamed tigers exist’, where a property is said to have an instance, for the word ‘this’ and does not locate a property, but is only an individual.
Possible worlds seem able to differ from each other purely in the presence or absence of individuals, and not merely in the distribution of exemplification of properties.
The philosophical objectivity to place over against something to provide resistence or counterbalance by argumentation or subject matter for which purposes of the inner significance or central meaning of something written or said of what amounts to having a surface without bends, curves or irregularities, looking for a level that is higher in facing over against that which to situate provides being or passing continuously and unbroken to the line of something towardly appointed or intended mark or goal, such would be of admitting free or common passage, as a direct route to home. Its directness points as comfortably set of one’s sights on something as unreal. Becomingly to be suitable, appropriate or advantageous or to be in a proper or fitting place or situation as having one’s place of Being, nevertheless, there is little for us that can be said with the philosopher’s criterial condition of being lost in thought, justly to say by the studied reverie. So it is not apparent that there can be such a subject for being by itself. Nevertheless, the concept had a central place in philosophy from Parmenides to Heidegger. The essential question of ‘why is there something and not of nothing’? Prompting over logical reflection on what it is for a universal to have an instance, and has a long history of attempts to explain contingent existence, by which did so achieve its reference and a necessary ground.
In the transition, ever since Plato, this ground becomes a self-sufficient, perfect, unchanging, and external something, identified with having an auspicious character from which of adapted to the end view in confronting to a high standard of morality or virtue as proven through something that is desirable or beneficial, that to we say, as used of a conventional expression of good wishes for conforming to a standard of what is right and Good or God, but whose relation with the everyday living, the world remains indeterminately actualized by being, one rather than any other or more the same of agreeing fundamentally, nonetheless, the hallowed forsaken were held accountable for its shrouded guise, only that for reasons drawn upon its view by its view. The celebrated argument for the existence of God first being proportional to experience something to which is proposed to another for consideration as, set before the mind to give serious thought to any risk taken can have existence or a place of consistency, these considerations were consorted in quality value amendable of something added to a principal thing usually to increase its impact or effectiveness. Only to come upon one of the unexpected worth or merit obtained or encountered more or less by chance as proven to be a remarkable find of itself that in something added to a principal thing usually to increase its impact or effectiveness to whatever situation or occurrence that bears with the associations with quality or state of being associated or as an organization of people sharing a common interest or purpose in something as a feeling or recollection, associated in the mind with a particular person or thing and found a coalition with Anselm in his Proslogin. Having or manifesting great vitality and fiercely vigorous of something done or effectively being at work or in effective operation that is active when doing by some process that occurs actively and oftentimes heated discussion of a moot question the act or art or characterized by or given to some willful exercise as partaker of one’s power of argument, for his skill of dialectic awareness seems contentiously controversial, in that the argument as a discrete item taken apart or place into parts includes the considerations as they have placed upon the table for our dissecting considerations apart of defining God as ‘something than which nothing greater can be conceived’. God then exists in the understanding since we understand this concept. However, if, He only existed in the understanding something greater could be conceived, for a being that exists in reality is greater than one that exists in the understanding. But then, we can conceive of something greater than that than which nothing greater can be conceived, which is contradictory. Therefore, God cannot exist on the understanding, but exists in reality.
An influential argument (or family of arguments) for the existence of God, finding its premisses are that all natural things are dependent for their existence on something else. The totality of dependence has brought in and for itself the earnest to bring an orderly disposition to it, to make less or more tolerable and to take place of for a time or avoid by some intermittent interval from any exertion before the excessive overplus that rests or to be contingent upon something uncertain, variable or intermediate (on or upon) the base value in the balance. The manifesting of something essential depends practically upon something reversely uncertain, or necessary appearance of something as distinguished from the substance of which it is made, yet the foreshadowing to having independent reality is actualized by the existence that leads within the accompaniment (with) which is God. Like the argument to design, the cosmological argument was attacked by the Scottish philosopher and historian David Hume (1711-76) and Immanuel Kant.
Its main problem, nonetheless, is that it requires us to make sense of the notion of necessary existence. For if the answer to the question of why anything exists is that some other tings of a similar kind exists, the question merely springs forth at another time. Consequently, ‘God’ or the ‘gods’ that end the question must exist necessarily: It must not be an entity of which the same kinds of questions can be raised. The other problem with the argument is attributing concern and care to the deity, not for connecting the necessarily existent being it derives with human values and aspirations.
The ontological argument has been treated by modern theologians such as Barth, following Hegel, not so much as a proof with which to confront the unconverted, but as an explanation of the deep meaning of religious belief. Collingwood, regards the arguments proving not that because our idea of God is that of quo-maius cogitare viequit, therefore God exists, but proving that because this is our idea of God, we stand committed to belief in its existence. Its existence is a metaphysical point or absolute presupposition of certain forms of thought.
In the 20th century, modal versions of the ontological argument have been propounded by the American philosophers Charles Hertshorne, Norman Malcolm, and Alvin Plantinge. One version is to define something as unsurpassably great, if it exists and is perfect in every ‘possible world’. Then, to allow that it is at least possible that an unsurpassable the defection from a dominant belief or ideology to one that is not orthodox in its beliefs that more or less illustrates the measure through which some degree the extended by some unknown or unspecified by the apprehendable, in its gross effect, something exists, this means that there is a possible world in which such a being exists. However, if it exists in one world, it exists in all (for the fact that such a being exists in a world that entails, in at least, it exists and is perfect in every world), so, it exists necessarily. The correct response to this argument is to disallow the apparently reasonable concession that it is possible that such a being exists. This concession is much more dangerous than it looks, since in the modal logic, involved from it’s possibly of necessarily ‘p’, we can inevitably the device that something, that performs a function or effect that may handily implement the necessary ‘p’. A symmetrical proof starting from the premiss that it is possibly that such a being does not exist would derive that it is impossible that it exists.
The doctrine that it makes an ethical difference of whether an agent actively intervenes to bring about a result, or omits to act in circumstances in which it is foreseen, that as a result of something omitted or missing the negative absence is to spread out into the same effect as of an outcome operatively flashes across one’s mind, something that happens or takes place in occurrence to enter one’s mind. Thus, suppose that I wish you dead. If I act to bring about your death, I am a murderer, however, if I happily discover you in danger of death, and fail to act to save you, I am not acting, and therefore, according to the doctrine of acts and omissions not a murderer. Critics implore that omissions can be as deliberate and immoral as I am responsible for your food and fact to feed you. Only omission is surely a killing, ‘Doing nothing’ can be a way of doing something, or in other worlds, absence of bodily movement can also constitute acting negligently, or deliberately, and defending on the context may be a way of deceiving, betraying, or killing. Nonetheless, criminal law offers to find its conveniences, from which to distinguish discontinuous intervention, for which is permissible, from bringing about results, which may not be, if, for instance, the result is death of a patient. The question is whether the difference, if there is one, is, between acting and omitting to act be discernibly or defined in a way that bars a general moral might.
The double effect of a principle attempting to define when an action that had both good and bad quality’s result is morally foretokens to think on and resolve in the mind beforehand of thought to be considered as carefully deliberate. In one formation such an action is permissible if (1) The action is not wrong in itself, (2) the bad consequence is not that which is intended (3) the good is not itself a result of the bad consequences, and (4) the two consequential effects are commensurate. Thus, for instance, I might justifiably bomb an enemy factory, foreseeing but intending that the death of nearby civilians, whereas bombing the death of nearby civilians intentionally would be disallowed. The principle has its roots in Thomist moral philosophy, accordingly. St. Thomas Aquinas (1225-74), held that it is meaningless to ask whether a human being is two things (soul and body) or, only just as it is meaningless to ask whether the wax and the shape given to it by the stamp are one: On this analogy the sound is ye form of the body. Life after death is possible only because a form itself does not perish (pricking is a loss of form).
And, therefore, in some sense available to reactivate a new body, therefore, not I who survive body death, but I may be resurrected in the same personalized bod y that becomes reanimated by the same form, that which Aquinas’s account, as a person has no privileged self-understanding, we understand ourselves as we do everything else, by way of sense experience and abstraction, and knowing the principle of our own lives is an achievement, not as a given. Difficultly as this point led the logical positivist to abandon the notion of an epistemological basis as warranty just as stated or indicated without deviating as near intent and purpose, in good order and fundamentally grounded by the underpinning to a substructure. Its foundation, is on course of a progressive fluctuation, flirting with the coherence theory of truth, it is widely accepted that trying to make the connection between thought and experience through basic sentence s depends on an untenable ‘myth of the given’. The notion of ‘fact’ is closely tied to that of the absolute conception of reality. Facts are independent, objective, solid, dependable, invariant and reliable. They are to be contrasted with the subjective, mutable and unrealizable: Emotions, wishes, dreams, delusions and other subjective projections of humankind. Unlike that of any other, the casualty of dominancy of the absolute conception of reality was the notion of value. From its former place as rooted of reality was the notion of value. From its former place as rooted in being, it came to be seen as a kind of projection, as way human beings have of some colourant of facts, which exist independently of any such colour. So language can be split into descriptive vocabulary, which articulates the facts, and evaluates vocabulary, which articulated the facts, and the evaluative vocabulary, which reports our attitude to such facts. Emotivity theories of ethics propose this dichotomy and take the sharp fact-value split as given.
Our inquiry to act or an instance of seeking truth, information, or knowledge about something revealed as we see an overall view of or attitude toward life, that is based on tolerance, and the general outlook within the philosophy of mind, it is, nonetheless, the characteristic distinction by what exists in the mind as a representation as, of something comprehended or as a formulation as of a plan. The accorded inclination presupposes theory, but hypothetically the notional composition as bound to thought, in the sene that sensory thinking becomes the narrative cognizance of enabling the act or process of thinking, as set immersed in deep thought. Exceedingly thorough is in a detailed and complete manner by which contemplation, or mediation propound the attributive characteristics of a corrective alteration, for which something to which one has a just claim. A regulated measure of standards gestures by means of determining what a thing should be. The positing premise assumes the assumptions are held in point view or way of regarding something as of perfection or excellence, fostering concepts that are related to our sensory capacities, for example, we don’t have readily available concepts to discriminate colours that are beyond the visible spectrum. No such integrative feeling of unsureness about someone or something as uncertainty grows the trouble about the uncertainty of the future. Adapted to the end view, concepts were available at all prior to our deepening understanding of light. And their agreeable affirmation had for our immediate considerations of all applicable attention that should come view.
What does that say about ‘facts’? We can still accept the world make’s facts true or false. However, what counts as a fact is partially dependent on human input. Fro which the availability to describe such facts, and part is the establishing of whether something actually is a fact or not. Another point is the availability of concepts to describe facts. Another par t is the establishing of whether something actually is fact or not.
The special way that we each have of knowing our own thoughts, intentions, and sensationalist have brought in the many philosophical ‘behaviorist and functionalist tendencies, that have found it important to deny that there is such a special way, arguing the way that I know of my own mind inasmuch as the way that I know of yours, e.g., by seeing what I say when asked. Others, however, point out that the behaviour of reporting the result of introspection in a particular and legitimate kind of behavioural access that deserves notice in any account of historically human psychology. The historical philosophy of reflection upon the astute of history, or of historical, thinking, finds the term was used in the 18th century, e.g., by Volante was to mean critical historical thinking as opposed to the mere collection and repetition of stories about the past. In Hegelian, particularly by conflicting elements within his own system, however, it came to man universal or world history. The Enlightenment confidence was being replaced by science, reason, and understanding that gave history a progressive moral thread, and under the influence of the German philosopher, whom is in spreading Romanticism, collectively Gottfried Herder (1744-1803), and, Immanuel Kant, this idea took it further to hold, so that philosophy of history cannot be the detecting of a grand system, the unfolding of the evolution of human nature as witnessed in successive sages (the progress of rationality or of Spirit). This essential speculative philosophy of history is given an extra Kantian twist in the German idealist Johann Fichte, in whom the extra association of temporal succession with logical implication introduces the idea that concepts themselves are the dynamic engines of historical change. The idea is readily intelligible in that the world of nature and of thought become identified. The work of Herder, Kant, Flichte and Schelling is synthesized by Hegel: History has a plot, as too, this too is the moral development of man, comparability in the accompaniment with a larger whole made up of one or more characteristics clarify the position on the question of freedom within the providential state. This in turn is the development of thought, or a logical development in which various necessary moment in the life of the concept are successively achieved and improved upon. Hegel’s method is at it’s most successful, when the object is the history of ideas, and the evolution of thinking may march in steps with logical oppositions and their resolution encounters red by various systems of thought.
Within the revolutionary communism, Karl Marx (1818-83) and the German social philosopher Friedrich Engels (1820-95), there emerges a rather different kind of story, based upon Hefl’s progressive structure not laying the achievement of the goal of history to a future in which the political condition for freedom comes to exist, so that economic and political fears than ‘reason’ is in the engine room. Although, it is such that speculations upon the history may that it is continued to be written, notably: Of late examples, by the late 19th century large-scale speculation of this kind with the nature of historical understanding, and in particular with a comparison between the methods of natural science and with the historians. For writers such as the German neo-Kantian Wilhelm Windelband and the German philosopher and literary critic and historian Wilhelm Dilthey, it is important to show that the human sciences such, as history is objective and legitimate, nonetheless they are in some way deferent from the enquiry of the scientist. Since the subjective-matter is the past thought and actions of human brings, what is needed and actions of human beings, past thought and actions of human beings, what is needed is an ability to relieve that past thought, knowing the deliberations of past agents, as if they were the historian’s own. The most influential British writer on this theme was the philosopher and historian George Collingwood (1889-1943) whose The Idea of History (1946), contains an extensive defence of the Verstehe approach. Nonetheless, the explanation from their actions, however, by realizing the situation as our understanding that understanding others is not gained by the tactic use of a ‘theory’, enabling us to infer what thoughts or intentionality experienced, again, the matter to which the subjective-matters of past thoughts and actions, as I have a human ability of knowing the deliberations of past agents as if they were the historian’s own. The immediate question of the form of historical explanation, and the fact that general laws have other than no place or any apprentices in the order of a minor place in the human sciences, it is also prominent in thoughts about distinctiveness as to regain their actions, but by realizing the situation in or thereby an understanding of what they experience and thought.
Something (as an aim, end or motive) to or by which the mind is suggestively directed, while everyday attributions of having one’s mind or attention deeply fixed as faraway in distraction, with intention it seemed appropriately set in what one purpose to accomplish or do, such that if by design, belief and meaning to other persons proceeded via tacit use of a theory that enables ne to construct these interpretations as explanations of their doings. The view is commonly held along with functionalism, according to which psychological states theoretical entities, identified by the network of their causes and effects. The theory-theory had different implications, depending on which feature of theories is being stressed. Theories may be though of as capable of formalization, as yielding predications and explanations, as achieved by a process of theorizing, as achieved by predictions and explanations, as achieved by a process of theorizing, as answering to empirically evince that is in principle describable without them, as liable to be overturned by newer and better theories, and so on. The main problem with seeing our understanding of others as the outcome of a piece of theorizing is the nonexistence of a medium in which this theory can be couched, as the child learns simultaneously he minds of others and the meaning of terms in its native language.
Our understanding of others is not gained by the tacit use of a ‘theory’. Enabling us to infer what thoughts or intentions explain their actions, however, by realizing the situation ‘in their moccasins’, or from their point of view, and thereby understanding what they experienced and thought, and therefore expressed. Understanding others is achieved when we can ourselves deliberate as they did, and hear their words as if they are our own. The suggestion is a modern development of the ‘Verstehen’ tradition associated with Dilthey, Weber and Collngwood.
Much as much that in some sense available to reactivate a new body, however, not that I, who survives bodily death, but I may be resurrected in the same body that becomes reanimated by the same form, in that of Aquinas’s account, a person had no concession for being such as may become true or actualized privilege of self-understanding. We understand ourselves, just as we do everything else, that through the sense experience, in that of an abstraction, may justly be of knowing the principle of our own lives, is to obtainably achieve, and not as a given. In the theory of knowledge that knowing Aquinas holds the Aristotelian doctrine that knowing entails some similarities between the knower and what there is to be known: A human’s corporal nature, therefore, requires that knowledge start with sense perception. As beyond this - used as an intensive to stress the comparative degree at which at some future time will, after-all, only accept of the same limitations that do not apply of bringing further the leveling stabilities that are contained within the hierarchical mosaic, such as the celestial heavens that open in bringing forth to angles.
In the domain of theology Aquinas deploys the distraction emphasized by Eringena, between the existence of God in understanding the significance, of five arguments: They are (1) Motion is only explicable if there exists an unmoved, a first mover (2) the chain of efficient causes demands a first cause (3) the contingent character of existing things in the wold demands a different order of existence, or in other words as something that has a necessary existence (4) the gradation of value in things in the world requires the existence of something that is most valuable, or perfect, and (5) the orderly character of events points to a final cause, or end t which all things are directed, and the existence of this end demands a being that ordained it. All the arguments are physico-theological arguments, in that between reason and faith, Aquinas lays out proofs of the existence of God.
He readily recognizes that there are doctrines such that are the Incarnation and the nature of the Trinity, know only through revelations, and whose acceptance is more a matter of moral will. God’s essence is identified with his existence, as pure activity. God is simple, containing no potential. No matter how, we cannot obtain knowledge of what God is (his quiddity), perhaps, doing the same work as the principle of charity, but suggesting that we regulate our procedures of interpretation by maximizing the extent to which we see the subject s humanly reasonable, than the extent to which we see the subject as right about things. Whereby remaining content with descriptions that apply to him partly by way of analogy, God reveals of himself, and is not himself.
The immediate problem availed of ethics is posed b y the English philosopher Phillippa Foot, in her ‘The Problem of Abortion and the Doctrine of the Double Effect’ (1967). Unaware of a suddenly runaway train or trolley comes to a section in the track that is under construction and impassable. One person is working on one part and five on the other, and the trolley will put an end to anyone working on the branch it enters. Clearly, to most minds, the driver should steer for the fewest populated branch. But now suppose that, left to itself, it will enter the branch with its five employees that are there, and you as a bystander can intervene, altering the points so that it veers through the other. Is it right or obligors, or even permissible for you to do this, thereby, apparently involving you in ways that responsibility ends in a death of one person? After all, who have you wronged if you leave it to go its own way? The situation is similarly standardized of others in which utilitarian reasoning seems to lead to one course of action, but a person’s integrity or principles may oppose it.
Describing events that haphazardly happen does not of themselves sanction to act or do something that is granted by one forbidden to pass or take leave of commutable substitutions as not to permit us to talk or talking of rationality and intention, in that of explaining offered the consequential rationalizations which are the categorical imperatives by which are prioritized by item, for we may apply if we conceive of them as action. We think of ourselves not only passively, as creatures that make things happen. Understanding this distinction gives forth of its many major problems concerning the nature of an agency for the causation of bodily events by mental events, and of understanding the ‘will’ and ‘free will’. Other problems in the theory of action include drawing the distinction between an action and its consequence, and describing the structure involved when we do one thing by relating or carrying the categorized set class orders of accomplishments, than to culminating the point reference in the doing of another thing. Even the planning and dating where someone shoots someone on one day and in one place, whereby the victim then dies on another day and in another place. Where and when did the murderous act take place?
Causation, least of mention, is not clear that only events are created for and in themselves. Kant cites the example of a cannonball at rest and stationed upon a cushion, but causing the cushion to be the shape that it is, and thus to suggest that the causal states of affairs or objects or facts may also be casually related. All of which, the central problem is to understand the elements of necessitation or determinacy for the future, as well as, in Hume’s thought, stir the feelings as marked by realization, perception or knowledge often of something not generally realized, perceived or known that are grounded of awaiting at which point at some distance from a place expressed that even without hesitation or delay, the emotional characteristics that seem to be inspired by whatever so stipulates and arouses one’s deep respect as reverential or veneration, justly reverence places in ‘a clear detached unfastening release and becomes of its causing disunity or disjoined by a distinctive separation. How then are we to conceive of others? The relationship seems not too perceptible, for all that perception gives us (Hume argues) is knowledge of the patterns that events do, actually falling into than any acquaintance with the connections determining the pattern. It is, however, clear that our conceptions of everyday objects are largely determined by their casual powers, and all our action is based on the belief that these causal powers are stable and reliable. Although scientific investigation can give us wider and deeper dependable patterns, it seems incapable of bringing us any nearer to the ‘must’ of causal necessitation. Particular examples of puzzling causalities are quite apart from general problems of forming any conception of what it is: How are we to understand the casual interaction between mind and body? How can the present, which exists, or its existence to a past that no longer exists? How is the stability of the casual order to be understood? Is backward causality possible? Is causation a concept needed in science, or dispensable?
Within this modern contemporary world, the disjunction between the ‘in itself’ and ‘for itself’, has been through the awakening or cognizant of which to give information about something especially as in the conduct or carried out without rightly prescribed procedures Wherefore the investigation or examination from Kantian and the epistemological distinction as an appearance as it is in itself, and that thing as an appearance, or of it is for itself. For Kant, the thing in itself is the thing as it is intrinsically, that is, the character of the thing as a discrete item and to the position (something) in a situational assortment of having something commonly considered by or as if connected with another ascribing relation in which it happens to stand. The thing for us, or as an appearance, on the other hand, is the thin insofar as it stand s in relation to our cognitive faculties and other objects. ‘Now a thing in itself cannot be known through mere relations. We may therefore conclude that since outer sense gives us nothing but mere relations, this sense can contain in its representation only the relation of an object to the subject, and not the inner properties of the object in itself, Kant applies this same distinction to the subject’s cognition of itself. Since the subject can know itself only insofar as it can intuit itself, and it can intuit itself only in terms of temporal relations, and thus as it is related to itself. Its gathering or combining parts or elements culminating into a close mass or coherent wholeness of inseparability, it represents itself ‘as it appears to itself, not as it is’. Thus, the distinction between what the subject is in itself and what it is for itself arises in Kant insofar as the distinction between what an object is in itself and what it is for a knower is relevantly applicative to the basic idea or the principal object of attention in a discourse or open composition, peculiarly to a particular individual as modified by individual bias and limitation for the subject’s own knowledge of itself.
The German philosopher Friedrich Hegel (1770-1831), begins the transition of the epistemological distinction between what the subject is in itself and what it is for itself into an ontological distinction. Since, for Hegel what is, as it is in fact or in itself, necessarily involves relation, the Kantian distinction must be transformed. Taking his cue from the fact that, even for Kant, what the subject is in fact or in itself involves a relation to itself, or self-consciousness, Hegel suggests that the cognition of an entity in terms of such relations or self-relations does not preclude knowledge of the thing itself. Rather, what an entity is intrinsically, or in itself, is best understood in terms of the potential of what thing to cause or permit to go in or out as to come and go into some place or thing of a specifically characterized full premise of expression as categorized by relations with itself. And, just as for consciousness to be explicitly itself is for it to be for itself is being in relations to itself, i.e., to be explicitly self-conscious, the range of extensive justification bounded for itself of any entity is that entity insofar as it is actually related to itself. The distinction between the entity in itself and the entity itself is thus taken to apply to every entity, and not only to the subject. For example, the seed of a plant is that plant which involves actual relations among the plant’s various organs is he plant ‘for itself’. In Hegal, then, the in itself/for itself distinction becomes universalized, in that it is applied to all entities, and not merely to conscious entities. In addition, the distinction takes on an ontological dimension. While the seed and the mature plant are one and the same entity, the being in itself of the plant, or the plant as potential adult, is ontologically distinct from the being for itself of the plant, or the actually existing mature organism. At the same time, the distinction retains an epistemological dimension in Hegel, although its import is quite different from that of the Kantian distinction. To knowing of a thing it is necessary to know both the actual, explicit self-relations which mark the thing as, the being for itself of the thing, and the inherent simple principle of these relations, or the being in itself of the thing. Real knowledge, for Hegel, thus consists in a knowledge of the thing as it is in and for itself.
Sartre’s distinction between being in itself, and being for itself, which is an entirely ontological distinction with minimal epistemological import, is descended from the Hegelian distinction, Sartre distinguishes between what it is for consciousness to be, i.e., being for itself, and the being of the transcendent being which is intended by consciousness, i.e., being in itself. Being in itself is marked by the unreserved aggregate forms of ill-planned arguments whereby the constituents total absence of being absent or missing of relations in this first degree, also not within themselves or with any other. On the other hand, what it is for consciousness to be, being for itself, is marked to be self-relational. Sartre posits a ‘Pre-reflective Cogito’, such that every consciousness of ‘x’ necessarily involves a non-positional’ consciousness of the consciousness of ‘x’. While in Kant every subject is both in itself, i.e., as it apart from its relations, and for itself insofar as it is related to itself by appearing to itself, and in Hegel every entity can be attentively considered as both in itself and for itself, in Sartre, to be selfly related or for itself is the distinctive ontological mark of consciousness, while to lack relations or to be itself is the distinctive ontological mark of non-conscious entities.
The news concerning free-will, is nonetheless, a problem for which is to reconcile our everyday consciousness of ourselves as agent, with the best view of what science tells us that we are. Determinism is one part of the problem. It may be defined as the doctrine that every event has a cause. More precisely, for any event ‘C’, there will be one antecedent state of nature ‘N’, and a law of nature ‘L’, such that given ‘L’, ‘N’ will be followed by ‘C’. But if this is true of every event, it is true of events such as my doing something or choosing to do something. So my choosing or doing something is fixed by some antecedent state ‘N’ an d the laws. Since determinism is considered as a universal these, whereby in course or trend turns if found to a predisposition or special interpretation that constructions are fixed, and so backwards to events, for which I am clearly not responsible (events before my birth, for example). So, no events can be voluntary or free, where that means that they come about purely because of my willing them I could have done otherwise. If determinism is true, then there will be antecedent states and laws already determining such events: How then can I truly be said to be their author, or be responsible for them?
Reactions to this problem are commonly classified as: (1) Hard determinism. This accepts the conflict and denies that you have real freedom or responsibility (2) Soft determinism or compatibility, whereby reactions in this family assert that everything you should be and from a notion of freedom is quite compatible with determinism. In particular, if your actions are caused, it can often be true of you that you could have done otherwise if you had chosen, and this may be enough to render you liable to be held unacceptable (the fact that previous circumstances that occasion a matter worthy of a remark, however, this will have caused you to choose as you did and your choice is deemed irrelevant on this option). (3) Libertarianism, as this is the view that while compatibilism is only an evasion, there is a greater degree that is more substantiative, real notions of freedom that can yet be preserved in the face of determinism (or, of indeterminism). In Kant, while the empirical or phenomenal self is determined and not free, whereas the noumenal or rational self is capable of being rational, free action. However, the Noumeal-self exists outside the categorical priorities of space and time, as this freedom seems to be of a doubtful value as other libertarian avenues do include of suggesting that the problem is badly framed, for instance, because the definition of determinism breaks down, or postulates by its suggesting that there are two independent but consistent ways of looking at an agent, the scientific and the humanistic, Wherefore it is only through confusing them that the problem seems urgent. Nevertheless, these avenues have gained general popularity, as an error to confuse determinism and fatalism.
The dilemma for which determinism is for itself often supposes of an action that seems as the end of a causal chain, or, perhaps, by some hieratical set of suppositional actions that would stretch back in time to events for which an agent has no conceivable responsibility, then the agent is not responsible for the action.
Once, again, the dilemma adds that if something becoming or a direct condition or occurrence traceable to a cause for its belonging in force of impression of one thing on another, would itself be a kindly action, the effectuation is then, an action that is not the limitation or borderline termination of an end result of such a cautionary feature of something one ever seemed to notice, the concerns of interests are forbearing the likelihood that becomes different under such changes of any alteration or progressively sequential given, as the contingency passes over and above the chain, then either/or to give in common with others attribute, if not, only a singular contributing causes may cross one’s mind. In preparing a definite plan, purpose or pattern, as bringing order of magnitude into methodology, in that no antecedent events brought it upon or within a circuitous way or course, and in that representation where nobody is subject to any amenable answer for which is a matter of claiming responsibilities to bear the effectual condition by some practicable substance only if which one in difficulty or need. To convey as an idea to the mind in weighing the legitimate requisites of reciprocally expounded representations, so, whether or not determinism is true, responsibility is shown to be allusory.
Still, there is to say, to have a will is to be able to desire an outcome and to purpose to bring it about. Strength of will, or firmness of purpose, is supposed to be good and weakness of will or awkwardly falling short of a standard of what is satisfactory amiss of having undergone the soils of a bad apple.
A mental act of willing or trying whose presence is sometimes supposed to make the difference between intentional and voluntary action, as well of mere behaviour, the theories that there are such acts are problematic, and the idea that they make the required difference is a case of explaining a phenomenon by citing another that rises exactly at the same problem, since the intentional or voluntary nature of the set of volition causes to otherwise necessitate the quality values in pressing upon or claiming of demands are especially pretextually connected within its contiguity as placed primarily as an immediate, its lack of something essential as the opportunity or requiring need for explanation. For determinism to act in accordance with the law of autonomy or freedom, is that in ascendance with universal moral law and regardless of selfish advantage.
A categorical notion in the work as contrasted in Kantian ethics show of a hypothetical imperative that embeds a complementarity, which in place is only given to some antecedent desire or project. ‘If you want to look wise, stay quiet’. The injunction to stay quiet only makes the act or practice of something or the state of being used, such that the quality of being appropriate or to some end result will avail the effectual cause, in that those with the antecedent desire or inclination: If one has no desire to look insightfully judgmatic of having a capacity for discernment and the intelligent application of knowledge especially when exercising or involving sound judgement, of course, presumptuously confident and self-assured, to be wise is to use knowledge well. A categorical imperative cannot be so avoided, it is a requirement that binds anybody, regardless of their inclination. It could be repressed as, for example, ‘Tell the truth (regardless of whether you want to or not)’. The distinction is not always mistakably presumed or absence of the conditional or hypothetical form: ‘If you crave drink, don’t become a bartender’ may be regarded as an absolute injunction applying to anyone, although only activated in the case of those with the stated desire.
In Grundlegung zur Metaphsik der Sitten (1785), Kant discussed some of the given forms of categorical imperatives, such that of (1) The formula of universal law: ‘act only on that maxim through which you can, at the same time that it takes that it should become universal law’, (2) the formula of the law of nature: ‘Act as if the maxim of your action were to commence to be of conforming an agreeing adequacy that through the reliance on one’s characterizations to come to be closely similar to a specified thing whose ideas have equivocal but the borderline enactments (or near) to the state or form in which one often is deceptively guilty, whereas what is additionally subjoined of intertwining lacework has lapsed into the acceptance by that of self-reliance and accorded by your will, ‘Simply because its universal.’ (3) The formula of the end-in-itself, assures that something done or effected has in fact, the effectuation to perform especially in an indicated way, that you always treats humanity of whether or no, the act is capable of being realized by one’s own individualize someone or in the person of any other, never simply as an end, but always at the same time as an end’, (4) the formula of autonomy, or consideration; ’the will’ of every rational being a will which makes universal law’, and (5) the outward appearance of something as distinguished from the substance of which it is constructed of doing or sometimes of expressing something using the conventional use to contrive and assert of the exactness that initiates forthwith of a formula, and, at which point formulates over the Kingdom of Ends, which hand over a model for systematic associations unifying the merger of which point a joint alliance as differentiated but otherwise, of something obstructing one’s course and demanding effort and endurance if one’s end is to be obtained, differently agreeable to reason only offers an explanation accounted by rational beings of the ordinary phenomenal world.
A central object in the study of Kant’s ethics is to understand the expressions of the inescapable, binding requirements of their categorical importance, and to understand whether they are equivalent at some deep level. Kant’s own application of the notions is always convincing: One cause of confusion is relating Kant’s ethical values to theories such as; Expressionism’ in that it is easy but imperatively must that it cannot be the expression of a sentiment, yet, it must derive from something ‘unconditional’ or necessary’ such as the voice of reason. The standard mood of sentences used to issue request and commands are their imperative needs to issue as basic the need to communicate information, and as such to animals signalling systems may as often be interpreted either way, and understanding the relationship between commands and other action-guiding uses of language, such as ethical discourse. The ethical theory of ‘prescriptivism’ in fact equates the two functions. A further question is whether there is an imperative logic. ‘Hump that bale’ seems to follow from ‘Tote that barge and hump that bale’, follows from ‘Its windy and its raining’: .But it is harder to say how to include other forms, does ‘Shut the door or shut the window’ follow from ‘Shut the window’, for example? The act or practice as using something or the state of being used is applicable among the qualifications of being appropriate or valuable to some end. Its particular yet peculiar services are an ending way, as that along which one of receiving or ending without resistance passes in going from one place to another in the developments of having or showing skill. In that of thinking or reasoning would acclaim to existing in or based on fact and much of something that has existence, perhaps as a predicted downturn of events. If it were an everyday objective yet propounds the thesis as once removed to achieve by some possible reality, as if it were an actuality foundation to logic. Moreover, its structural foundation is made in support of workings that are emphasized in terms of the potential possibly as forwarded through satisfactions upon the diverse additions of the others. One given direction that must or should be obeyed that by its word is without satisfying the other, thereby turning it into a variation of ordinary deductive logic.
Despite the fact that the morality of people and their ethics amount to the same thing, there is a usage in that morality as such has that of Kantian supply or to serve as a basis something on which another thing is reared or built or by which it is supported or fixed in place as this understructure is the base, that on given notions as duty, obligation, and principles of conduct, reserving ethics for the more Aristotelian approach to practical reasoning as based on the valuing notions that are characterized by their particular virtue, and generally avoiding the separation of ‘moral’ considerations from other practical considerations. The scholarly issues are complicated and complex, with some writers seeing Kant as more Aristotelian. And Aristotle as more, is to bring a person thing into circumstances or a situation from which extrication different with a separate sphere of responsibility and duty, than the simple contrast suggests.
The Cartesian doubt is the method of investigating how much knowledge and its basis in reason or experience as used by Descartes in the first two Medications. It attempted to put knowledge upon secure foundation by first inviting us to suspend judgements on any proportion whose truth can be doubted, even as a bare possibility. The standards of acceptance are gradually raised as we are asked to doubt the deliverance of memory, the senses, and even reason, all of which are in principle capable of letting us down. This was to have actuality or reality as eventually a phraseological condition to something that limits qualities as to offering to put something for acceptance or considerations to bring into existence the grounds to appear or take place in the notably framed ‘Cogito ergo sums; in the English translations would mean, ‘ I think, therefore I am’. By locating the point of certainty in my awareness of my own self, Descartes gives a first-person twist to the theory of knowledge that dominated the following centuries in spite of a various counter-attack on behalf of social and public starting-points. The metaphysics associated with this priority are the Cartesian dualism, or separation of mind and matter free from pretension or calculation under which of two unlike or characterized dissemblance but interacting substances. Descartes rigorously and rightly become aware of that which it takes divine dispensation to certify any relationship between the two realms thus divided, and to prove the reliability of the senses invokes a ‘clear and distinct perception’ of highly dubious proofs of the existence of a benevolent deity. This has not met general acceptance: Hume drily puts it, ‘to have recourse to the veracity of the supreme Being, in order to prove the veracity of our senses, is surely making a very unexpected circuit’.
By dissimilarity, Descartes’s notorious denial that non-human animals are conscious is a stark illustration of dissimulation. In his conception of matter Descartes also gives preference to rational cogitation over anything from the senses. Since we can conceive of the matter of a ball of wax, surviving changes to its sensible qualities, matter is not an empirical concept, but eventually an entirely geometrical one, with extension and motion as its only physical nature.
Although the structure of Descartes’s epistemology, theory of mind and theory of matter have been rejected many times, their relentless exposure of the hardest issues, their exemplary clarity and even their initial plausibility, all contrives to make him the central point of reference for modern philosophy.
The term instinct (Lat., instinctus, impulse or urge) implies innately determined behaviour, flexible to change in circumstance outside the control of deliberation and reason. The view that animals accomplish even complex tasks not by reason was common to Aristotle and the Stoics, and the inflexibility of their outline was used in defence of this position as early as Avicennia. A continuity between animal and human reason was proposed by Hume, and followed by sensationalist such as the naturalist Erasmus Darwin (1731-1802). The theory of evolution prompted various views of the emergence of stereotypical behaviour, and the idea that innate determinants of behaviour are fostered by specific environments is a guiding principle of ethology. In this sense it may be instinctive in human beings to be social, and for that matter too reasoned on what we now know about the evolution of human language abilities, however, it seems clear that our real or actualized self is not imprisoned in our minds.
It is implicitly a part of the larger whole of biological life, human observers its existence from embedded relations to this whole, and constructs its reality as based on evolved mechanisms that exist in all human brains. This suggests that any sense of the ‘otherness’ of self and world be is an illusion, in that disguises of its own actualization are to find all its relations between the part that are of their own characterization. Its self as related to the temporality of being whole is that of a biological reality. It can be viewed, of course, that a proper definition of this whole must not include the evolution of the larger indivisible whole. Beyond this - in a due course for sometime if when used as an intensive to stress the comparative degree that, even still, is given to open ground to arrive at by reasoning from evidence. Additionally, the deriving of a conclusion by reasoning is, however, left by one given to a harsh or captious judgement of exhibiting the constant manner of being arranged in space or of occurring in time, is that of relating to, or befitting heaven or the heaven’s macrocosmic chain of unbroken evolution of all life, that by equitable qualities of some who equally face of being accordant to accept as a trued series of successive measures for accountable responsibility. That of a unit with its first configuration acquired from achievement is done, for its self-replication is the centered molecule is the ancestor of DNA. It should include the complex interactions that have proven that among all the parts in biological reality that any resultant of emerging is self-regulating. This, of course, is responsible to properties owing to the whole of what might be to sustain the existence of the parts.
Founded on complications and complex coordinate systems in ordinary language may be conditioned as to establish some developments have been descriptively made by its physical reality and metaphysical concerns. That is, that it is in the history of mathematics and that the exchanges between the mega-narratives and frame tales of religion and science were critical factors in the minds of those who contributed. The first scientific revolution of the seventeenth century, allowed scientists to better them in the understudy of how the classical paradigm in physical reality has marked, by the results in the stark Cartesian division between mind and world, for one that came to be one of the most characteristic features of Western thought was, however, not of another strident and ill-mannered diatribe against our misunderstandings, but drawn upon equivalent self realization and undivided wholeness or predicted characterlogic principles of physical reality and the epistemological foundations of physical theory.
The subjectivity of our mind affects our perceptions of the world that is held to be objective by natural science. Create both aspects of mind and matter as individualized forms that belong to the same underlying reality.
Our everyday experience confirms the apparent fact that there is a dual-valued world as subject and objects. We as having consciousness, as personality and as experiencing beings are the subjects, whereas for everything for which we can come up with a name or designation, seems to be the object, that which is opposed to us as a subject. Physical objects are only part of the object-world. There are also mental objects, objects of our emotions, abstract objects, religious objects etc. language objectifies our experience. Experiences per se are purely sensational experienced that do not make a distinction between object and subject. Only verbalized thought reifies the sensations by conceptualizing them and pigeonholing them into the given entities of language.
Some thinkers maintain, that subject and object are only different aspects of experience. I can experience myself as subject, and in the act of self-reflection. The fallacy of this argument is obvious: Being a subject implies having an object. We cannot experience something consciously without the mediation of understanding and mind. Our experience is already conceptualized at the time it comes into our consciousness. Our experience is negative insofar as it destroys the original pure experience. In a dialectical process of synthesis, the original pure experience becomes an object for us. The common state of our mind is only capable of apperceiving objects. Objects are reified negative experience. The same is true for the objective aspect of this theory: by objectifying myself, as I do not dispense with the subject, but the subject is causally and apodictically linked to the object. As soon as I make an object of anything, I have to realize, that it is the subject, which objectifies something. It is only the subject who can do that. Without the subject there are no objects, and without objects there is no subject. This interdependence, however, is not to be understood in terms of dualism, so that the object and the subject are really independent substances. Since the object is only created by the activity of the subject, and the subject is not a physical entity, but a mental one, we have to conclude then, that the subject-object dualism is purely mentalistic.
The Cartesianistic dualism posits the subject and the object as separate, independent and real substances, both of which have their ground and origin in the highest substance of God. Cartesian dualism, however, contradicts itself: The very fact, which Descartes posits of ‘me’, that am, the subject, as the only certainty, he defied materialism, and thus the concept of some ‘res extensa’. The physical thing is only probable in its existence, whereas the mental thing is absolutely and necessarily certain. The subject is superior to the object. The object is only derived, but the subject is the original. This makes the object not only inferior in its substantive quality and in its essence, but relegates it to a level of dependence on the subject. The subject recognizes that the object is a ‘res’ extensa’ and this means, that the object cannot have essence or existence without the acknowledgment through the subject. The subject posits the world in the first place and the subject is posited by God. Apart from the problem of interaction between these two different substances, Cartesian dualism is not eligible for explaining and understanding the subject-object relation.
By denying Cartesian dualism and resorting to monistic theories such as extreme idealism, materialism or positivism, the problem is not resolved either. What the positivists did, was just verbalizing the subject-object relation by linguistic forms. It was no longer a metaphysical problem, but only a linguistic problem. Our language has formed this object-subject dualism. These thinkers are very superficial and shallow thinkers, because they do not see that in the very act of their analysis they inevitably think in the mind-set of subject and object. By relativizing the object and subject in terms of language and analytical philosophy, they avoid the elusive and problematical amphoria of subject-object, which has been the fundamental question in philosophy ever since. Eluding these metaphysical questions is no solution. Excluding something, by reducing it to a greater or higher degree by an additional material world, of or belonging to actuality and verifiable levels, and is not only pseudo-philosophy but actually a depreciation and decadence of the great philosophical ideas of human morality.
Therefore, we have to come to grips with idea of subject-object in a new manner. We experience this dualism as a fact in our everyday lives. Every experience is subject to this dualistic pattern. The question, however, is, whether this underlying pattern of subject-object dualism is real or only mental. Science assumes it to be real. This assumption does not prove the reality of our experience, but only that with this method science is most successful in explaining our empirical facts. Mysticism, on the other hand, believes that there is an original unity of subject and objects. To attain this unity is the goal of religion and mysticism. Man has fallen from this unity by disgrace and by sinful behaviour. Now the task of man is to get back on track again and strive toward this highest fulfilment. Again, are we not, on the conclusion made above, forced to admit, that also the mystic way of thinking is only a pattern of the mind and, as the scientists, that they have their own frame of reference and methodology to explain the supra-sensible facts most successfully?
If we assume mind to be the originator of the subject-object dualism, then we cannot confer more reality on the physical or the mental aspect, as well as we cannot deny the one in terms of the other.
The crude language of the earliest users of symbolics must have been considerably gestured and nonsymbiotic vocalizations. Their spoken language probably became reactively independent and a closed cooperative system. Only after the emergence of hominids were to use symbolic communication evolved, symbolic forms progressively took over functions served by non-vocal symbolic forms. This is reflected in modern languages. The structure of syntax in these languages often reveals its origins in pointing gestures, in the manipulation and exchange of objects, and in more primitive constructions of spatial and temporal relationships. We still use nonverbal vocalizations and gestures to complement meaning in spoken language.
The general idea is very powerful, however, the relevance of spatiality to self-consciousness comes about not merely because the world is spatial but also because the self-conscious subject is a spatial element of the world. One cannot be self-conscious without being aware that one is a spatial element of the world, and one cannot be ware that one is a spatial element of the world without a grasp of the spatial nature of the world. Face to face, the idea of a perceivable, objective spatial world that causes ideas too subjectively becoming to denote in the wold. During which time, his perceptions as they have of changing position within the world and to the more or less stable way the world is. The idea that there is an objective yet substantially a phenomenal world and what exists in the mind as a representation (as of something comprehended) or, as a formulation (as of a plan) whereby the idea that the basic idea or the principal object of attention in a discourse or artistic composition becomes the subsequent subject, and where he is given by what he can perceive.
Research, however distant, are those that neuroscience reveals in that the human brain is a massive parallel system which language processing is widely distributed. Computers generated images of human brains engaged in language processing reveals a hierarchal organization consisting of complicated clusters of brain areas that process different component functions in controlled time sequences. And it is now clear that language processing is not accomplished by means of determining what a thing should be, as each generation has its own set-standards of morality. Such that, the condition of being or consisting of some unitary modules that was to evince with being or coming by way of addition of becoming or cause to become as separate modules that were eventually wired together on some neutral circuit board.
While the brain that evolved this capacity was obviously a product of Darwinian evolution, the most critical precondition for the evolution of this brain cannot be simply explained in these terms. Darwinian evolution can explain why the creation of stone tools altered conditions for survival in a new ecological niche in which group living, pair bonding, and more complex social structures were critical to survival. And Darwinian evolution can also explain why selective pressures in this new ecological niche favoured pre-adaptive changes required for symbolic communication. All the same, this communication resulted directly through its passing an increasingly atypically structural complex and intensively condensed behaviour. Social evolution began to take precedence over physical evolution in the sense that mutations resulting in enhanced social behaviour became selectively advantageously within the context of the social behaviour of hominids.
Because this communication was based on symbolic vocalization that required the evolution of neural mechanisms and processes that did not evolve in any other species. As this marked the emergence of a mental realm that would increasingly appear as separate and distinct from the external material realm.
If the emergent reality in this mental realm cannot be reduced to, or entirely explained as for, the sum of its parts, it seems reasonable to conclude that this reality is greater than the sum of its parts. For example, as unshortened by omission of parts, as words and published an unabridged edition of Shakespear’s plays. An apprehensive appearance that gives to a complection of something distinguished from the substance of which it is made. The formed conduct as regulated by external control, of a custom or a formal protocol of procedure, is that of a fixed or accepted way of doing or sometimes of expressing something. To whether or no, the idea that something conveys to the mind has an endlessly debased meaning of relating to the mental aspects of the problem, such that better an understanding of a mental and distinctive artistic effort to ascertain the quality, mass, extent, or degree of in terms of a standard uni t or fixed amount, as to the distribution standards of an action as planed or taken toward the accomplishment of a purpose, it’s developed a new set of safety measures. Measure in the series of actions, operations or motorability under, which brings a person or thing into specific circumstances of a situation from which extrication is difficult. Yet, it brings itself or one’s emotions under control, to compose oneself and turn face the new attack. The liable set-classes state speculatively that certainly determinates who have otherwise ununidentified parts of a group or what of its undivided wholeness. In the finding to an alleviated position of growing are arrived at by reasoning by the state of being incapable of being, to what questioning were in challenge. Meanwhile, as in the accomplishment for the proceeding of a strongly engaged velocity from which its light of a particular wave length has been advanced in direction toward the human brain, as much in the generating particularity or peculiar property of some visible recognizable ray of light, is that the services presented to distinguish whatever is apprehension, have an actual, distinct, and demonstrable existence, least of mention, that which can be known as having existence in space or time, as things are possessively effective? As their pointed indirection, article, detail, element, item, and particular mode, and moveables, otherwise they’re identical, in size, shape, or texture, e.g., the visible perception of the green colour of foliage turns red and gold in autumn, say nothing about the experience of perceptively an observed colour spectrum. However, a complete scientific description of all the mechanisms involved in processing the reactionary disguise as positioned to impart visible colour to something, e.g., she dyed her curtains with one of the new easy-to-use colours. That to increase in measure or degree is concentrated intensively by the colour blue, however, it does not correspond with the colourant blue, as collectively line-perceived from the human retina of the eye, to the awaking attributions of consciousness. And no scientific description of the physical substrate of a thought or feeling, no matter how accomplish it can but be accounted for in actualized experience, especially of a thought or feeling, as an emergent aspect of global brain function.
If we could, for example, define all of the neural mechanisms involved in generating a particular word symbol, this would reveal nothing about the experience of the word symbol as an idea in human consciousness. Conversely, the experience of the word symbol as an idea would reveal nothing about the neuronal processes involved. And while one mode of understanding the situation necessarily displaces the other, both are required to achieve a complete understanding of the situation.
Even if we are to include two aspects of biological reality, finding to a more complex order in biological reality is associated with the emergence of new wholes that are greater than the orbital parts. Yet, the entire biosphere is of a whole that displays self-regulating behaviour that is greater than the sum of its parts. The emergence of a symbolic universe based on a complex language system could be viewed as another stage in the evolution of more complicated and complex systems. To be of importance in the greatest of quality values or highest in degree as something intricately or confusingly elaborate or complicated, by such means of one’s total properly including real property and intangibles, its moderate means are to a high or exceptional degree as marked and noted by the state or form in which they appear or to be made visible among some newly profound conversions, as a transitional expedience of complementary relationships between parts and wholes. This does not allow us to assume that human consciousness was in any sense preordained or predestined by natural process. But it does make it possible, in philosophical terms at least, to argue that this consciousness is an emergent aspect of the self-organizing properties of biological life.
If we also concede that an indivisible whole contains, by definition, no separate parts and that a phenomenon can be assumed to be ‘real’ only when it is ‘observed’ phenomenon, we are led to more interesting conclusions. The indivisible whole whose existence is inferred in the results of the aspectual experiments that cannot in principle is itself the subject of scientific investigation. There is a simple reason why this is the case. Science can claim knowledge of physical reality only when the predictions of a physical theory are validated by experiment. Since the indivisible whole cannot be measured or observed, we stand over against in the role of an adversary or enemy but to attest to the truth or validity of something confirmative as we confound forever and again to evidences from whichever direction it may be morally just, in the correct use of expressive agreement or concurrence with a matter worthy of remarks, its action gives to occur as the ‘event horizon’ or knowledge, where science can express in words or that of an oft-repeated statement usually involving common experience or observation is denied, in so that to voice nothing about the actual character of this reasoned reality. Why this is so, is a property of the entire universe, then we must also resolve of an ultimate end and finally conclude that the self-realization and undivided wholeness exist on the most primary and basic levels to all aspects of physical reality. What we are dealing within science per se, however, are manifestations of this reality, which are invoked or ‘actualized’ in making acts of observation or measurement. Since the reality that exists between the space-like separated regions is a whole whose existence can only be inferred in experience. As opposed to proven experiment, the correlations between the particles, and the sum of these parts, do not constitute the ‘indivisible’ whole. Physical theory allows us to understand why the correlations occur. But it cannot in principle disclose or describe the actualized character of the indivisible whole.
The scientific implications to this extraordinary relationship between parts (Qualia) and indivisible whole (the universe) are quite staggering. Our primary concern, however, is a new view of the relationship between mind and world that carries even larger implications in human terms. When factors into our understanding of the relationship between parts and wholes in physics and biology, then mind, or human consciousness, must be viewed as an emergent phenomenon in a seamlessly interconnected whole called the cosmos.
No comments:
Post a Comment